ol par ων ν 
" 


τῴ» ata ® 


ΧΩ 


᾿ ~~ 
bom ee ay 
ὃ πο φρήν, 

pape rede ψ,» 


rate a mre wee ans 
~* re ah hes oo = 


᾽ r f ὌΝ Ρ - 7 i a τ κα fag 
L > Ἢ igh bel ΄ rer eh g TH get a eh oO 
᾿ ᾿ . "ὦ. * ‘ = 5 - . he ᾽ς 
. , μι " ΜΕΝ = "ὦ a 
ὶ - awd > 
ν ; - rer wate . 
toe ἂν eS Pe ϊ As ts 
‘ ᾿ τὰ ag ν . 
1 
P . ra Valent sy 
Ὧ » fa ᾿ ἀρϑι κα 
» ἃ * ΠῚ . 
ΕἸ =f ~ - ‘ ‘ 
᾿ ᾿ δι a, at 
καὶ ‘ 1d ‘ ν i 
‘ 
Γ ἢ ᾿ 
: . ‘ 
bed * Le ᾿ - ἵ 
{Ὁ Γ ’ 4 Same. | .Ψ i) * - 
ν᾽ pase barat i " ν μα νὴ ws tt ’ ᾿» ayy 4 
᾿ Rate Us, ᾿ ΙΝ μι ' 
- ἡ ~ 5 * ᾿ 
" ‘ y de * 
4 ) 
ἦν ᾿ . 
‘ ‘ τ " 
᾿ ( uy ᾿ 
> 
3 } Ὗ 
= ᾿ ‘ 
ῳ d 
Cr? ᾿ 
N oe 2)? 
ὲ , 
ὦ 4 ΄“. - Ἂν ᾿ 
y oe 
‘ ΜᾺ Ἂ \. Ng es 
- ~ * ' » 
᾿ i, x 
) ; τς . ; er 
" ν᾿ 
᾿ M owt | ; ν ὝΝ é 
ah ὃ ; a tao iM Lee Ἢ “ wars Ἢ - ΄ 
᾿ Ἦν ἦν ἐῶν Ν eT Si ᾿ τῳ Ε 
"ἢ 4 ᾿ Pi j tet vl, 0 
et ss ee es rg en - —- —— 4 é ΠΕΣ vs 2 —~ - = 


Cae 
ae 


| Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2007 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation | 


~ 


GREEK GRAMMAR 
FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS, 


FROM THE GERMAN OF 


PHILIP BUTTMANN. 


SECOND EDITION OF THE TRANSLATION. 


Boston : 


CUMMINGS, HILLIARD, AND COMPANY. 


ANDOVER—FROM THE CODMAN PRESS, 
Flagg & Gould..... Printers. 


1826. 


DISTRICT OF MASSACHUSETTS, to wit : 


District Clerk's Office. 

Be it remembered, that on the first day of May, A. D. 1826, and in the fiftieth year of 
the Independence of the United States of America, Cummings, Hilliard & Com ny, of the 
said district, have deposited in this office the title of a book, the right whereof they claim as 
proprietors, in the words following, to wit :—‘ Greek Grammar, for the use of schools, from 
the German of Philip Buttmann. Second edition of the translation.” In conformity to the 
Act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, “ An Act for the encouragement of Learn- 
ing, by securing the copies of maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such 
copies, during the times therein mentioned:” and also to an Act entitled, “ An Act supple- 
mentary to an Act, entitled, An Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies 
ο μον μῇ charts and books, to the proprietors of such copies during the times therein men- 
tioned ; and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving and etching 


historical and other prints.” Clerk of the District 
JOHN W. DAVIS, of Massachusetts. Ὁ 


EXTRACTS FROM THE PREFACE 


to the first Edition of the Translation. 


_ Tue deficiency of the Greek Grammars in use in this coun- 
try, has been generally felt and loudly complained of. Till a 
comparatively late period, use was made almost exclusively of 

‘the small Latin compend, usually called the Westminster Greek 
Grammar. ‘The Gloucester Greek Grammar was chiefly trans- 
lated from this, and imperfectly supplied its numerous deficien- 
cies. Of late years Valpy’s Greek Grammar has been exten- 
sively used, and with great advantage, being in many respects 
worthy of high commendation. That it is, however, but an in- 
sufficient guide to the student who seeks a thorough acquaint- 
ance with the language, will be generally admitted, and it is al- 
so ‘not wholly free from the imperfections of the former scho- 
lastic compends. 


Under these circumstances, the translator has been led, not 

* less by his own reflection, than by the advice of judicious friends, 
to prepare a translation of the most approved of the Greek 
Grammars in use in Germany. It is well known that the Ger- 
mans have paid a greater attention ‘to philological pursuits than 
any other people of the present day, and that among themselves 
the study of the Greek has been carried much farther than that 

of the Latin. In consequence of the zeal with which every de- 
partment of Greek literature has been pursued in that country, 


Iv PREFACE. 


that of grammar has been enriched with many very valuable 
elementary works. It will be sufficient to quote the names of 
Hermann, Burtmann, Matruiae, and Taiersce. Buttmann 
and Matthiae have particularly distinguished themselves as the 
authors of the Greek Grammars in most extensive use. Con- 
sidered as an historical analysis of the language, the Grammar 
of Professor Thiersch may be thought to deserve the preference. 
It is, however, as its title indicates, a Grammar not so much of 
the classical language as it appears in the mass of the writers, 
as of that earlier form of it which is called the elder, the Ho- 
meric, or epic dialect.* While it needs but a slight inspection , 
of this Grammar, to feel the necessity of studying Homer al- 
‘most as a work of another language, this fact itself equally sug-. 
gests the conclusion, that_a Grammar, particularly founded on 
this more ancient form of the language, is not well adapted to 
be a guide to the classical writers at large. ‘The larger Greek 
Grammar of Matthiae was translated into English by the late 
Mr Blomfield, and is thought to have made a great. accession 
to the stores of grammatical criticism accessible to the English 
student. As a philosophical and practical grammarian, howev- 
er, Professor Buttmann, of the University of Berlin, is allowed 
by his countrymen to hold the firstrank. ‘Three Greek Gram- 
mars, drawn up by him, are now before the public. They are 
his Greek Grammar for Schools, the larger Greek Grammar, 
and the Complete Greek Grammar. ‘The latter work, as the 
title suggests, is intended to contain a complete grammatical in- 
dex of the Greek language, in which all the facts furnished by 
the study of all the authors, should be referred to their systema- 
tic place, so far as they establish principles or exceptions to 
principles. The first volume of this work was published in 


* Griechische Grammatik vorziiglich des Homerischen Dialects, 2d ed. 
1818. ; 


PREFACE. v 


1819, and not till the larger Greek Grammar of the author ΜΑΣ 
attained its eighth edition. 
This larger Grammar is a work of more than 600, for the 
- most part, finely printed pages, and is that by which its learned 
author attained, in the public estimation, the place he is now al- 
lowed to fill as a Greek philologian. That it is not adapted to 
the use of schools, might be anticipated even from its size, and 
is not less apparent from the minuteness of critical detail into 
which it runs. The author was in consequence led to prepare 
an abstract from it for the use of schools, which, under the name 
_ of the School Grammar, has gone through many editions in 
Germany, and is the work which is now presented to the Amer- 
. ican public in a translation. 
Although the superiority of this work;-not only for philoso- 
phical investigation but learned criticism, can scarcely fail to be 
apparent to all who are able to judge of it; the translator is 
not without fear that, at least at first, it may be found somewhat 
in advance of the state of philological studies in this country. 
Though professedly an abstract, for the use of schools, from a 
larger work, itself but an outline, filled up in a third still more 
complete, there is nevertheless reason to fear that some portions 
of this grammar may be thought beyond the requirements of 
some of the American schools. ‘The great improvements, how- 
ever, which have been made in elementary instruction in some 
of these institutions, and the consequent elevation of the stand- 
ard of excellence in this department, authorize the hope that 
this farther contribution to the same end; will not be unaccep- 
table to judicious teachers and diligent learners of the language. 
The translation of the valuable tables of Mr Thiersch, by Pro- 
fessor Patton of Middlebury College,* has already served to 


* Now of Nassau Hall, Princeton, N. J. 


VIO - PREFACE. 


awaken the public to the value of the German works in this de- 

partment of learning, and it is hoped that the Grammar of Butt- 

‘mann will raise them still higher in the estimation of scholars. 
HERE KR KKK HK HEHEHE ἃ 

In making use of this grammar for the purpose of elementary 
instruction, much must be left to the discretion of the judicious 
teacher. While it probably contains nothing, of which use may 
not be made in reading the Greek authors usually studied in 
our schools and colleges, it is not designed of course to be com- 
mitted to memory or studied at first without discrimination. It 
must be remembered that if the grammar be the first book put _ 
into the Jearner’s hands, it should also be the last to leave them, 
and that it must therefore combine elementary principles with Ἵ 
critical detail. . A Greek accidence, which should embrace only 
that which it is absolutely necessary to commit to memory, in 
commencing the study of the language, would probably be found 
useful to beginners; and such a one it was the intention of the 
translator to compile from the grammar.* He has for the pres- 
ent omitted it, from the consideration, that it is nm the power of 
the judicious teacher, to attain nearly the same object, by mark- 
ing the portions of the grammar, which it is necessary to com- 
mit to memory. 

The translator trusts that he shall be thought to have ren- 
dered a service not wholly insignificant to the study of classical 
literature. The increased attention, which has lately been paid 
to this department, leads him to hope his labour will not be unac- 
ceptable. The translation of Mr Thiersch’s tables by Profes- 
sor Patton, will be found a valuable contribution to the- means 
of cultivating this study ; and the English Greek Lexicon, which 


*A work of this kind has since been compiled and given to the public by one of the editors 
of the present edition of this grammar. 


PREFACE. vil 


Ὄν 


is in preparation by Mr Pickering, will remove one of the obsta- 


cles to the pursuit of the Greek in our schools. Itis the design 


of the translator to adapt for use in this country the text-book of 
Mr Jacobs, a work of singular merit and of extensive use 
abroad, and which, as it refers throughout to the Grammar of 
Buttmann, will be particularly useful to those who are well 


_ grounded therein.* 


| EDWARD EVERETT. 
Cambridge, Aug. 1822. 


“ 


* This work has since been published, and is now extensively used in this country. 


PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 


In preparing a new edition of the translation of Buttmann’s 
‘Greek Grammar, the sole object has been to follow the original 
with exactness. Nothing has been added, and nothing omitted, 
except an occasional remark relating to the German idiom and 
not true of the English. The division into sections, though not 
common in our school books, has yet been retained. The pa- 
ges of the former edition are marked in the margin of the pres- 
ent, so that references already made to the Grammar will not 
lose their value. Our opinion of the general merits of the 
Grammar and its adaptation to the purposes of instruction need 
not here be expressed. In what manner we have acquitted ἡ 
ourselves of the task of preparing the new edition the public 


will judge. 
GEORGE BANCROFT. 


GEORGE H. BODE. 
Northampton, May 1, 1826. 


a το 
a =, ee 2 
ae § 1. , 
ΜΈ vy ae , ; vo 
; OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS IN GENERAL. 


ιν 


1. i hs Greek, like all other languages, had various dialects, 


which however may be all reduced to two fundamental dialects, 


the Tonic and Doric, belonging to the two great divisions of the 
Grecian race, which bore these names respectively. 

2. The Dorian tribe was most extensive, but its dialect was 
rough, and upon the whole less cultivated. A branch of this dia- 
lect was the olic, which early attained a considerable degree 


of improvement, particularly in the Holian colonies of Asia Minor 


and in the neighbouring i islands. 

3. The Ionian tribe inhabited in earlier times for the most 
part what was afterwards called Attica; and sent out from this 
quarter its colonies to the coasts of Asia Minor. Inasmuch as these 
colonies attained a high degree of refinement, earlier than their 
mother country, or any other Grecian tribe, the appellations of 
Tonians and Ionic were appropriated to them and their dialect, 
while the original Ionians in Attica were called Attics and Atheni- 
ans. The Ionic dialect, from the multiplication of vowels, is the 
softest. But the Atizc soon surpassed the others in refinement, by 
avoiding, in the ease peculiar to itself, the Doric harshness, and 
the Ionic softness. Although the Attic race, geographically speak- 
ing, was the original, the Ionic dialect of the colonies in Asia 
Minor is considered as the mother of the Attic dialect, because’ it 
attained a high degree of cultivation at a period, when it had least. 
departed from the common source of both, the old tongue of the 
lonian race. ᾿ 

4. As mother, however, of all the dialects, we must assume an 
original ancient Greek language. But of this it is only by means 
of philosophical deduction that we can ascertain or rather conjec- 
ture the forms. Every dialect naturally refained more or less 
from this ancient language, and of consequence each preserved ἡ 

1 : 


ΟῚ 


OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE — $§a- 


in itself, from the same source, much that was gradually lost in 
kindred dialects. Hence may be explained the fact, that the 
grammarians speak of Doric, Holic, and even Attic forms, in the 
old Ionian bard Homer. In general, it has been the practice to 
name that, which was customary or of frequent occurrence in a 
dialect, after that dialect, although it should likewise ,occasionally 
‘be found in some other. In this way we must explain the Dori- 
cisms, so called, in the Attic writers,* and the Atticisms traced in 
ake not in that dialect.t . 

. To this same original language belong, for the mi part, 
the λῶμα forms or poetical licenses, as they are called; for the 
oldest poets formed themselves a language, out of the manifold 
phraseology of their age. Many peculiarities of this phraseology 
became obsolete: but the later poets, having their predecessors 
for guides, were unwilling to lose this richness of language; and 
thus what was originally dialect, and ought to be classed as such, 
got to be, in the end, poetic ἀκέραιος ἢ or as it is commonly 

called, poetic license. 

6. In every cultivated nation, some one of its prevailing dia- 
lects generally becomes the foundation of the common language 
of literature and of good society. This did not take place, at an 
early period, among the Greeks. Cultivation advanced far among 
them, while they were still divided into several states, separated 
from each other by position as well as political relations. The 
language of literature, therefore, as well poetry as prose, till near 
the time of Alexander, depended upon the dialect to which the 
writer had been educated, or which he preferred. Hence arose 
Tonic, Holic, Doric, and Attic writers of poetry and prose ; from 
each of which classes more or less is still extant. 

7. Meantime Athens attained a political elevation so impor- 
tant, that it possessed for some time a sort of general government 
(ἡγεμονία) over Greece, and became, at the same period, the 


* The Doric future in σοῦμαι, ξρῦμαι. 
t Such as the Attic declension in w¢ ; ξὺν for σὺν &c. 


᾿ 


ἫΝ 


xo 
) 
΄ 
᾿. 
͵ 


͵ 
᾿ 


e * ᾽ \ 


$1] | “AND ITS DIALECTS. 3 
centre of literary improvement. Greeks from all the tribes went 
to Athens for their education, and the Attic works became the 
models in every department of literature. The consequence was, 
that when Greece soon after, under ithe Macedonian monarchy, 
assumed a political unity, the Attic dialect, having taken rank of 
the others, became the language of the court and of literature, in 


Q which the prose writers, of all the tribes and of whatever region; 
_ henceforth almost exclusively wrote. The centre of this later 


Greek literature formed itself in Alexandria in Egypt under the 
Ptolemies. - . | : 

8. With the universality of the Attic dialect, as was to be ex- 
pected, began its degeneracy. Writers introduced peculiarities of 
their provincial dialects ; or, in place of anomalies peculiar to the 
Athenians or of phrases that seemed artificial, made use of the 
more regular or natural forms; or instead of a simple phrase, 
which had become more or less obsolete, introduced a more popu- 
lar derivative form.* Against this however the grammarians, often 
pedantically and unreasonably, struggled; and, in their treatises, 


_ placed by the side of these offensive or inelegant modernisms, 
the true forms from the old Attic writers. And hence it became 
‘usual to understand by Attic, only that which was found in the 


ancient classics, and was in the strictest sense peculiar to them; _ 
and to give to the common language of literature, formed in the 
manner indicated, the name of κοινή, ‘ the vulgar, or ἑλληνεκή, 
‘ the Greek, i.e. the vulgar Greek?” Hence also the subsequent 
writers were called οἱ xovvoi or οἱ " EdAnves, in distinction from the 
genuine Attic writers. Their language, however, is not to be 


_ viewed as a separate dialect; for after all this κοινὴ διάλεκτος re-" 
mained essentially Attic, and of course every common Greek 


grammar assumes the Attic dialect as its basis. 


It follows from this, that not every thing which was called At- 
tic is on that account peculiar to this dialect, even in the classic 


age. Moreover there were several Attic forms, which were not 


: ~ ν > ~ 3 - 
* For instance γήχεσϑοαει for νεῖν, to swim, and agoterey for ἀροῦν, 


_ to plough. 


4 OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. [§ 1- 


exclusively used even in Athens, but which were interchanged 
with other universally adopted forms, as gvioin with φελοῖς and 
ξὺν with σύν ; as there were also several lonic forms not wholly 
unknown to the Attics, as the not contracted forms in the place of 
contracted ones. 

9. To the universality however of the Attic dialect an excep- 
tion was made in poetry. In this department the Attics remained 
the models only in one branch, the dramatic. As dramatic poetry 
from its nature, even in tragedy, is necessarily the language of 
actual life, the Attic stage admitted nothing but the Attic dialect, 
which was retained in the sequel on ‘all the other Grecian thea- 
tres. In addition to this, the dramatic poets, particularly in the 
dialogue, especially in that part written in trimeters, with the 
exception of a freer use of the apostrophe and contraction, indul- 
ged themselves in but few of the poetical licenses, as they are 
‘called, and substitutions of other forms. 

10. For the other sorts of poetry, particularly those which 
_ were composed in hexameters, viz. the epic, didactic, and elegiac, 
Homer, and the other elder Ionic bards, who continued to be read’ 
in the schools, remained the models. Among them the old Ionic 
and Homeric language was retained, with most of its peculiarities 
and ancient forms, and became, as had been the case with the At- 
tic dialect in prose, the reigning dialect or universal language in 
this department of poetry in all ages. It is therefore best denom- 
inated the Epic language, as its origin was exclusively in the epic 
poetry. an 

11. The Doric dialect, however, even in later days, was not 
excluded from poetry. On the contrary it sustained itself in 
some of the subordinate branches of the art, particularly the pas- 
toral and humorous. When, however, the language which pre- 
vails in the lyrical portions of the drama—that is, in the choruses 
and passionate speeches—is called Doric, it is to be remembered 
that the Doricism consists in little else than the predominance of 
the long @ particularly in the piace of. 2, which was a feature of 
the ancient language in general, and for its dignity continued in 
use in sublime poetry, while in common life it remained a pecu- 
liarity of the Dorians. 


“PART. 


~ ACCIDENC CE AND ETYMOLOGY. 


CHARACTER AND Ibert: NCIATION. 


§ 2. 

The Greeks borrowed their characters principally from the 
_ Phenicians, as sufficiently appears from the oriental names of the 
They are the following ; 


letters in the Greek alphabet. 


με μι μα Ὁ 9 8 “λφα. Alpha 
B δ b Bia Beta 
ghee & f g Tama Gamma 
stash οἐ ὃ α. Méhia | Delta. 
5H 9. ὁ € "E ψιλὸν Epsilon 
πὴ aM Zeta 
4... »Ὦ » τα Eta 
O 9 th Θῆτα Theta 
ea i ‘Tata lota 
on NE k Kanna Kappa 
orga I “1«μβδὰ Lambda 
ae. a m Mo Mu 
rie era n No Nu 
a. S x πὶ Xi 
ον ΗΝ. ὄ Ὃ μικρόν Omicron 
“Ee πὸ p Tt Pi 
ὁ χά ἀνὰ r ‘Po Rho 
a ae 5 Σῶμα Sigma 
mot ἂν, t Tau Tau 
spe u Ὗ ψιλὸν Upsilon 
P ¢ ph i Phi 
; Ce, ch z Chi 
δὲν Bi, ἐν, ps t Psi 
id ὦ 0 M2 μέγα Omega 


Ὁ 
aes 


6 CHARACTER AND PRONUNCIATION. [ὁ 2, 3. 


~*~ 


1. The twofold mode of writing some letters is indifferently 
used, with the exception of o and ¢: σ᾽ is only used at the begin- 


ning’ and in the middle of a word, and ¢ only at the end.* The 


latter is not to be confounded with ¢. 

2. Of the abovementioned letters, a large number of abbrevia- 
tions and characters have been formed, several of which are less 
compendious than the common letters themselves, for which they 
were designed as substitutes. Their use has accordingly been 
much limited in modern times, and little difficulty will be found 
in reading recent editions of Greek authors, if the isllowing char- 
acters are understood. 


- 


᾿ 8 stands for οὐ ς stands for or 
ot for of dh for καὶ 
& for og 9% ἴοτ ox 


Several of the characters, so called, are mere contractions of 
the common letters, as AA for AA, &c. 

3. The Greeks made use of the letters of their alphabet as 
numerical signs. ΤῸ fill out the numbers the stigma ¢ was intfo- 
duced after ἐν the 4 after π᾿ and the % after w.* All the nume- 
rals moreover have the accent, as a 1, β΄ 2,5 6, ¢ 10, co’ 11, κ' 
20, xs 26, @ 100, σ΄ 200, σλβ' 232, ὅς. "The thousands begin 
with ας but with a ‘mark underneath, a, 8, &c. Bors’ 2232. 


§ 3. 


1. It is impossible to ascertain the ancient pronunciation. Among 
the modes in which Greek is pronounced in modern times, two 
principally may be distinguished, the Erasmian and the Reuchlin- 
ian. ‘The pronunciation adopted in England and partly in Amer- 
ica, resembles the Erasmian most nearly in the consonants, but 
differs from both in the vowels.{ 


* Also by\some modern writers at the end of a syllable, a distinction 
however which leads to great difficulty, if extended beyond the most fa- 
miliar compositions, as those with the enclitics and with πρός. εἰς, ἐς 
and perhaps δὺς. 

t Sis called sti or stigma, G koppa, and ZB sanpi. 

1 We make use in this grammar of the Erasmian, because it incontest- 
ably approaches nearest the ancient. This appears from the manner in 
which Greek names are written by the Latins (as in the names of the let- 
ters above in the alphabet,) and Latin names by the Greeks. There are 


v 


- 


§4.] ἘΠῚ _ DIVISION or THE, LETTERS. . 7 


2.. I before another y and also before z, 7,€, sounds like ng ; ans 
e.g ἐγγύς, eng-gus, like ng in angler’, or in the Latin word angustus ; 
σύγκχρισις, syngcrisis ; _4yzions, Angchises; 2@iyt, Sphingx. τ 

Z does not correspond to the English z, but has the sound of ds. 

ΟΠ in Greek words written in Latin, even before ὁ and ἐς is rep- 
resented by c ; as is also the.Latin ὃ represented i in Greek by x; 
as Kiuwy Cimon; Cicero Ktxéowy, the Romans having always 
_ pronounced their c like k before a vowel. 


§ 4. DIVISION OF THE LETTERS. 
1. The Letters are divided into Consonants and ἢ" owels. 

ἊΨ Among the consonants are first to be distinguished the three 
compound letters, ¢, ἕξ. w, each of which in reality consists of two 
letters, represented however by a Simple sound; ¢ of ὃς, E of ας, 
and y of zs. 

3. The simple letters are divided, _a) ΤΥ ΡΣ τὰ to the organs 
with which they are pronounced, viz. 

By 1, Fs μι, are labials. 

0, τ, 3, », 2 050, linguals. | 
eG. palatics. 
b) The hottie! according to their qualities, are either 
_Semivowets,* which are the following, 4, u, v, @, called also 
- liquids, and the simple sibilant o ; or 


many internal arguments against the Reuchlinian. According to this pro- 


nunciation ἢ is pronounced liks 2, αὐ like @ long, and δέ, 04, UV and ve 
are all pronounced like ¢, and v when.it is second in a diphthong, with 
the exception of ov, is pronounced like f, as αὐτὸς aftos, Ζεύς «εξ. This 
pronunciation grounds itself on the modern Greek pronunciation, though 
it can be proved that the latter has in the lapse of time departed from the 
ancient. It is called, from the multiplication of the iota sounds, dofagis- 
mus, or from the sound of ἢ [i on the continent of Europe} itacism; the 
Erasmian, etacismus. 

5 So called by the ancients, as forming by their humming or sibilant 
sound a transition to the articulate sound of the vowels. 


| 
8 DIPHTHONGS. [ἢ 5. 


Ἢ ᾿ 
. Motes, which ἀγα. - 


aspirates gy, χ 0, 0 
' medials β, 7, 0, 
᾿ soft gly ie ὦ thee 
From: this it. appears, that each organ possesses the three 
mutes, and that the nine letters, arranged thus, 
P, χ: 9, ; 
B, 7, 9; “ ΡΟ 
᾿ Tt, My τ, 
correspond to each other, both in the horizontal and perpendicu- 
lar directions. : 
4. No genuine Greek form terminates in any consonant, except 
0, 7, 0; for those which end in § and w are to be considered as 
terminating in x¢ and ag. °E% and οὐκ form the only exception, 


and these never occur at the end of a clause. 


A 


§ 5. DIPHTHONGS. 


1. The ancient pronunciation of the diphthongs is the least 
known. The manner in which they were pronounced by the 
Romans will appear from the following examples. 

at Φαῖδρος Phedrus Phadrus on the continent of 


: : Europe. 
év Νεῖλος Nilus Nélus 
— Avxéeiov Lyceum Lycaum ——-—— 
οὐ ᾿ Βοιωτία Beeotia Biota ἘΞ ϑοσξες Ν 
ve Αἰλείϑυια I hithyia 
av 7λαῦκος Glaucus . | 
ev Εὖρος Eurus* 
ee  ἠδξον 
ov Μοῦσα Musa. 


It is to be observed, that the Latin usage is not uniform, partic- 
ularly in the case of e¢. This appears from the different modes of 
writing /peyeveva Iphigenia, Myndscu Medea, ᾿Πίρακλειτος Hera- 


*Itisa modern error to write the av and εὖ before a vowel in Latin 
with av, It would be more correct to write Agaue, Euan, from Ayavy, 
Eve. ᾿ ; 


j? 


~ ~ 


-§6.] / _- BREATHINGS. 9 


‘ 


clitus, Πολύκλειτος Polycletus, as also from the examples above 

given of Nilus and Lyceum. A few Greek diphthongal forms in 

ms ove remain unchanged when written in Latin, except that 
t 


probably passed into the 7 according to-Latin “ai as Maia, ἡ 


“Ayaia, Τροία, Maja, Achaja, Troja. 

2. From the above mentioned diphthongs are to be distin- 
guished those which are called improper diphthongs, which are 
formed by iota subscript placed under the following vowels, 3 

μα O, ἢ» ῳ. 
6 sound of these vowels is not affected by the iota subscript, 
which serves only to indicate the derivation of the word. An- 
ciently perhaps it was heard in the pronunciation. The ancients 
moreover wrote the iota in the line, and in capital letters this is 
"still practised, as TH7 SO@DLAL, τῇ σοφία, τῷ “Awd or ἄδῃ. 


ᾧ 6. BREATHINGS. 


1. Every word beginning with a vowel has over that vows! 
one or the other of the two following breathings, viz. 
(’) The spiritus lenis or soft breathing. 
(*) The spiritus asper or aspirate. 
The aspirate is our modern h ; the soft breathing stands where 
in modern languages we simply begin with a vowel,* as 
ἐγὼ ego, Andddwy Apollon, ὦμος omos, ἱστορία historia, ”Oun- 
00g Homeros, ὕδωρ hudor. 
The two sorts of words, for all purposes of grammar and pros- 
ody, are alike considered as beginning with a vowel. 
' 2. In the case of a diphthong in the beginning of a word, the 
breathing is placed over the second vowel of the diphthong, as 
Evginions, οἷος. , This, however, is not the case with the improp- 
er diphthongs, as “_4:dy¢, ἄδης. 


* As the aspirate is represented in modern languages by ἢ; so the soft 
breathing is the oriental Alif, and it has an actual force. Every vowel 
uttered without a consonant, and of course every one which is pronounc- 
ed separately from the preceding letters, must be pronouneed with an au- 
dible, though gentle impulse or breathing. The ancients were led to de- 


note it the rather, as they wrote without a division of words. 
2 ε 


10. PROSODY. Ἐν ἐλ ὁ 


8, The aspirate is always attached to 9 when it begins a word, 
and two @ in the middle of a word are thus written, οὗ. This had 
its foundation in the mode of pronouncing, for it was yeained by 
the Latins, as δήτωρ, Πύῤῥος, rhetor, Pyrrhus, : 

The Aolians in several words made use of the soft breathing 
instead of the aspirate ;. which was also sometimes done in the old 
onic. We accordingly find in Homer ὕμμεν for ὑμῖν, ἠέλιος for 
ἥλιος, &c. The ASolians moreover had in many words a peculiar 
aspiration of their own, denoted by a particular letter ¥, which 
from its form was called digamma‘or double gamma, and was 


pronounced like v or f. It is probable that this sound was origi- 
nally found in the Greek language. 


§ 7. PROSODY. 


1. Prosody, as now understood, includes only the subject of 
quantity, that is, the length or shortness of the syllables*. 

2. Every word and every form hadi for each syllable (with a 
_few exceptions) a fixed quantity, which followed the pronuncia- 
- tion of common life, and which must therefore be fen in or- 
der to pronounce correctly. 

3. Quantity is denoted by two marks, (v) for short, and (-) fr 
long, thus 

@shorte, ἃ long α, ἃ uncertain or doubtful. 


4, Every syllable which cannot be proved to be Jong is to be © 
᾿ considered short. 

5. A syllable is long; first by nature, secondly by position. 

6. I: A syllable is said to be long by nature, when its vowel is 
long, as in Latin amare and docére. In Greek, this is' partly ascer- 
tained in the character itself, as ἢ and ὦ are always long, ¢ and 
Ὁ always short. The three others 


GQ, ἐς Us 


" * The elder Greek grammarians included under the head of m@00@0las 
not only the quantity, but the accents, and breathings. _The subject of 


quantity is here treated not in reference to. poetry, but to pronunciation 
in general. 


i ὃ 7. PROSODY. 11 
are, in Greek, as in Latin all the vowels, both long and short, and 
for this reason are called doubiful (ancipites. \* 

4. Among the sounds naturally long are also to be reckoned 
disne, in which two vowels are united into one sound. 

a) All diphthongs are accordingly long without cupeption,a 

the penult of βασίλειος and ἐπῴδω. 
_b) All contractions for the same reasons are long ; and therefore 
the doubtful vowels when they serve as contractions. Thus ἃ in 
ἄχων for ἀέκων, εἰ in ἱρὸς for ἱερός, and v in the acc. pl. βότρυς 
for βότῥυας. ‘This does not extend however to such contractions 
as are to be regarded in the light of elisions; thus the penult of 
ἀπάγω for ἀπο-ἄγω is short. 

8. All the other cases, in which a, 4, and v are long, are ascer- 
tained by usage alone, and can accordingly be learned, for the most 
part, only by observing the use of them inthe poets. As far as the 
radical syllables are concerned, this must be acquired by every 
person by his own observation, with the exception of a few rules, 
which will presently be given. The quantity of the syllables us- 
ed in the formation and inflection of the words, and the cases in 
which the radical syllable changes its quantity in the inflection 
and formation of words, are taught in their proper pisses in the 
Greek grammar. 


It is moreover to be considered, that in general those cases 
only are noticed where in the inflection or formation of words 
ας 4, and v are long, and syllables of which nothing is said, or 
where the reverse does not result from the general rule, are con- 
sidered as short; as the penult of πράγματος, ἐτυψάμην ; and in 
the formation of words, as ξύλενος, δικαιοσύνη. 


9. Il. Asyllable, even if its vowel be short, is long by posi- 
tion ; that is, when it is followed by two or more consonants or a 


* We are not to suppose from this, that there is in the nature of the 
vowels a, 4, U, in every case something doubtful and wavering between 
long and short, All the single vowels are in certain words positively long, 
in certain others positively short. But only in the ¢ and o sounds did 
the Greek alphabet contain for each case a separate sign or letter. Inthe 
other three we learn their quantity in each separate case, from the usage 
ef the poets, as we learn it in Latin in the case of all the vowels. 


SRE PROSODY. [§ 7. 


double consonant ; ὁ. &. the penultimate of yi ods, neers 
καϑέλκω, βέλεμνον, awoddos, καϑέξω, νομίζω. 

10. A mute before a liquid, however, is in general not consid- 
ered in position; accordingly the penult is short in @rexvog, di- 
δραχμος, γενέϑλη, δύςποτμος, &c. Nevertheless, the poets use 
these syllables as long, and hence it is often said that mutes before 
the liquids make the syllable doubtful.* 

1{. Atrue exception to the rule of mutes and liquids is formed 
by the medials @, y, 6, when they precede 4, u, v, in which case 
they render vowels long by position. ‘Thus in the following words 
the penult is long, πέπλεγμαι, τετράβιυβλος, evoduos; but in the 


following it is short, χαράδρα, Médéayeos, μολοβρος. 
ΩΝ 


5. The following are the most important cases, where the 
doubtful vowels are long in the penult, and which it is ὙΓΡΌΝ 
moment to learn correctly. 


δ φλύαρος! tattle κόβαλος knave 
ἀνιαρὸς. sorrowful ἄκρατος pure 

τιᾶρα turban σίναπι mustard 
ὁπαδὸς companion ἢ σιαγῶν jaw 2 


αὐϑάδης proud 


with words derived from ἃ ἄγω and ἄγνυμε and ending in ᾿αγός, as 
λοχαγός captain, ναυαγός a shipwrecked person. 


c 


ῆ χάμινος stove ὁ στρύβελος fruit oF the pine 

ὃ χαλενὸς rein πέδιλον sandal 

σέλενον parsley ἢ χελιδὼν — swallow 
κύμενον cumin ἔρυϑος labourer 

πυχλάμενον͵ ae ἀκριβής exact ‘ 

ἀξίνη ἀκόνιτον aconite, a poison 

πυτίνη ‘Aas τὸ τάριχος pickled fish 

ὃ κίνδυνος danger . ἡ πάπυρος papyrus, a reed 

0 βόϑυνος ditch λάφυρον spol 

ἐυϑύνη account πίτυρον bran 

πρεσβύτης an old man ἄγκυρα anchor 

τὸ κέλυφος shell or pod - γέφυρα bridge 

ὁ ὅμιλος crowd ὄλυρα: a sort of grain. 


* Great care must be taken in these cases to ascertain whether the 
vowel be not long by nature, for then it must remain long 5 as πένταϑλος, 
which comes from adios, which is contracted from αἕϑλος, and has its 
a long. : ¢ 


ν᾽ 


¢ 


811 PROSODY. ; 13 


Ὁ So vet strong (from ἐ ἰσχύω Iam able.) On the other 
hand Ὡ»; and ὀχυρός firm (fromm é ἔχω I hold) have ἃ short υς like | 
other adjectives i in υρος. : 


τὶ It is safer to pronounce the ‘following with the penult long, 
though they. sometimes are found short : 
μυρίκη tamarisk κορύνη club 
_ πλήμμυρα flood τορύνη trowel. 


The following proper names are long in the penult: Στύμφα- 
λος, Φαρσαάλος, Πρίαπος, "Ἄρατος, Ζημάρατος, ᾿4χάτης, 2Ζυϑρι- 
δάτης, Evgourns, Νιφάτης, Seaver, Ἰάσων, ᾿Ἅμασις, “Σάραπις 
(Serapis.) 

Eve e706, ᾿Ενιπεύς, ΖΣέριφος, Τράνικος, Kéixos, Méhiros, Θσι- 
04S, οὐσιρις, Ayyzions, Aiyiva, Καμάρινα, “Agegodirn, “Auge- 
τρίτη. 

: “Διόνυσος, " Aupoveos, Καμβύσης, ᾿“ρχύτας Kwxvtos, Bn- 
᾿ρυτός, "ABvd0s, Βιϑυνός, Πάχυνον, Κέρκυρα (Corcyra.) 


6. The first syllable of the following words is long : 


| ψιλός bare μικρὸς small 
ο χιλὸός fodder Teun ο΄. honour 
ὃ λιμὸς hunger  vinn . — vtetory 
ἡ δεινὸς skin κλίνη — couch 
heros simple δίνη vortex 
0 ϑυμός mind ὃ χυλός —chyle 
ὃ dumos pole of carriage ὁ τυρὸς - cheese 
ὃ χυμὸς juice ὃ πυρός — wheat* 
0 χρυσός gold | φυλη tribe : 
ξυνὸς common ὕλη wood or matter 
; κυφός bent. λυπὴη grief. 
ψυχή soul 


Of the verbs which terminate in a simple attached to the 
radical syllable it is to be observed in general, that the ἃ is. short, 
as in ἄγω, γράφω. The ¢ andv are long, as in τρίβω, σύρω, we- 
yo, excepting γλύφω I engrave, which has the v short. - 

_ The case of ἄνω, ive, and ὕνω will be separately treated below. 

Of the contracted verbs, the following, whose Jirst syllable is_ 
long, require particular notice : 


HUVEC I move διφάω I dip 
διγέω I shudder ᾿συλάω f plunder 
ova Tam silent τ φυσάω I blow.} 


* On the contrary MUO0S, the genitive of τὸ πῦρ, Sire. - 
᾿ + The learner should be taught to > apply these quantities to ascertain 
the pronunciation of derivatives like ἄτιμος, ἄψυχος, ἔτριβον, διατρί- 


Bw, ἐμβριϑῆς, ἄσυλον. &c. also of the proper names, as Hermotimus, 
- Demonicus, Euphyle, &c. | 


14 3 ACCENTS. ὃ {$8 


͵ 


7. Some words are deserving of notice, which, being derived 
from verbs, instead of the long vowel of the present, take the 
short vowel of the second aorist. ‘Thus some substantives in 7, as 
Tein, διατριβη, ἀναψύχή, παραψῦχή. But ψυχή. is long. 

And some adjectives in 7¢ gen. ἕος. Thus evxgivys, ἀτριβής, 
παλεντρίβης, 


8. The rule, that one vowel is short before another, which 
wants certainty in Latin, is still less certain in Greek ; although a 
_long vowel occurs seldomer before another vowel, than before a 
consonant. The nouns in cog, 4ov, sa, have the ὁ always short, 
with ihese exceptions, where it is commonly long, viz. xaAv nest, 
κονίᾳ dust, ἀνία sorrow. 

The termination of the present tense in vw and /w must be 
learned from observation. It is very often long. 

The penult of the following words deserves notice, as being 
long : 


ὃ λαός people ἡ éhow the olive 
#060) for καίω I burn κλάω for κλαίω I weep 
ὁ ναὸς temple ᾿Ενυώ Bellona. 


Those also in aw» and ‘wy, which take o in the genitive, such 
as the comparatives like PeArimy, and proper names, have their 
penultimate long; as Mayay, “Apvdawy, ᾿Αμφίων, ἡ Ὑπερίων, Ἔ, 
gen. ovog. On the other hand the penult is short in Asvuahiny, 
Φορμίων, gen. ὠνος. Proper names in @o¢, compounded from 
λαύς, are of course long, in the penult, as Νικόλαος. “Auqiaoaos 
is long, but Οἰνόμαος is short. 


9. The accents are of great use in deciding the quantity of 
many words. 


/ 


§ 8. ACCENTS. 


1. Besides the quantity of the syllables, the Greek language 
recognized a tone (τόνος) or what we call the accents; of which, 
however, it is difficult, according to our ideas, to make any use in | 
pronunciation. Inasmuch as the accent is found as often on a short 
syllable as a long one, we cannot express it as we usually express 
accent, without injuring the quantity, as in 7/9yue and Σωκράτης ἷ 


* In English we still pronounce Amphi'on, but use has established 
Hyperion; see Walker’s key, § 29. 


t The modern Greeks, however, even in reading the poets, pronounce 
according to the accents, and their own versification is wholly founded 
upon them. 


§$9,10.] ACCENTS. 15 


So long therefore as it is out of our power to indicate both the 
quantity and the ‘accent in our pronunciation, it is safer to σον, 
the quantity in reading the Greek. 

2. Notwithstanding this, an acquaintance with the accents is 
essential to a thorough knowledge of Greek ; nor are they without 
advantage even for common use. They often indicate, by their 
position, the quantity of a syllable ; many words and forms of dif- 
ferent signification, but otherwise written alike, are distinguished 
by the accents; and even in cases where they are not thus of im- 
mediate use, they serve to fix the laws of their position, by which 
we are to be guided in the cases where they are of use. The 
following are the chief rules relative to the accents. 


§ 9. 


1. Every Greek word, generally speaking, has the accent on one 
of its vowels, and this is properly the acute, ὀξεῖα (προσῳδία accent 
being understood,) that is, the sharp accent, which is written thus ΄. 

2. Of every syllable, which has not this accent, it was held by 
the ancients, that it received the heavy or grave accent; that is 
that, in which the voice descended, βαρεῖα or gravis. The mark 
of this is ὁ which, however, is not in common writing affixed to 
the syllables to which it belongs. 

3. A long vowel, moreover, may receive the circumflex, call- 
ed in Greek περισπωμένη, that is wound about, and written thus ~. 
Such a syllable is to be considered as composed of two short vow- 
els drawn together, of which one has the acute and the other the 
grave accent; thus 00, whence ὦ. When, however, two short 
vowels marked thus 00 pass into one, it is written o). 


δ 10. 


1. The accent, acute, grave, or circumflex, can only be plac- 
ed on one of the three last syllables of the word; the circumflex 
only on one of the two last.* 


© ᾧτινι and the like will appear, under the head of enclitics, to be 
ws apparent exceptions to this rule. 


10 ACCENTS. | O[§ li. 


.. 


2. The character of the last syllable, in respect to the accent,. 
gives a name tothe whole word. According as this syllable has, Ist 
the acute, 2d the circumflex, or 3d the grave, the word is called " 


Oxytone, as F206, ὃς, “τετυφῶς 
Perispomenon) as» . “φιλῶ, vOUS | 
Barytone, as τύπτω, πρᾶγμα, πράγματα. 


Thus barytone verbs are distinguished from the contracts, 
which are perispomena or circumflexed. 

3. Again all barytones, which are dissyllables or polysyllables, 
according as they have the acute, ist upon the penult, 2d the an- 
tepenult, or 3d the circumflex on the penult, are called 

Paroxytona, as τύπτω, τετυμμένος 
Proparoxytona, as τυπτόμενος, ἄνϑρωπος 
_ Properispomena, as πραγμα, φιλοῦσα. 
_ 4, Barytones of one syllable, or words wholly without accent, 
are the following, all beginning with a vowel: 
ov (οὐκ, οὐχ) not, woas, eif, vin, εἰς, ἐς to, ἐξ, (ex) out. 
And these nominatives of the prepositive article, 
ὃ, ἡ, Ol, αἱ. 
When it is said that these words are without accent, it is meant 
that they take none, in their connexion with other words. But 
when at the end of a sentence, or after a word dependent onthem . 


in the _construction, they are sometimes written with the acute ; 
πὼς γὰρ OV ;—DE0S ὡς---ὠκαακὼν ἔξ. , 


§ 11. 


When an oxytone precedes in connexion other words, the 
acute accent is considered as softened into the grave, and the ’ is 
changed into the ὃ which, except in this case, is never written. But 
' at the endof a sentence, or before a period, or colon, the “ΝΣ of 
the acute accent is retained, thus 

᾿Οργὴ δὲ πολλὰ δρᾷν ἀναγκάζει καχα.Σ 

The interrogative τίς, ri, is the only exception to this rule, as 

will appear in its place. | 


a ΣΤῈΣ 

* Care must therefore be had: not to regard words ending in ‘ as bary- 
fones: on the contrary, they are-all oxytones with the acute accent qui- 
escent, on account of the connexion with other words. 


~ 


δ... |. jae ACCENTS. Dae γ᾿ 


κε" § 12. PLACE OF THE ACCENT. 

On what syllable-each word receives the accent, is best to be 
learned from observation and the lexicon. The following rules, 
however, particularly in reference to the choice between the two 
kinds of accent, may be applied with advantage. 

1. The circumflex requires a vowel long in itself; and not 
merely made long by position. Thus κῆδος, φῶς, τεῖχος, οὗτος, 
σμήγμα. Also teuate, ἡμῖν, πῦρ, for in these words the doubt- 
ful ας ἐς v, are long. A short vowel can accordingly receive no 
accent but the acute, as ἕτερος, μένος, ἵνα, πρός, πολύ, πλέγμα. 

This furnishes an instance of the use of the accents in deter- 
mining the quantity of the doubtful vowels; for since a circumflex 
cannot stand over ἃ vowel which is merely long by position, the 
α ἴῃ πρᾶγμα and μᾶλλον is recognized as long in itself. 

2. The acute accent may also stand on a long vowel, as κενώ- 
τέρος, δεύτερος, φεύγω, τιμή, βασιλεύς, φώρ. 

3. The cases in which the last syllable, being naturally long, 
receives the circumflex, can only be learned from the lexicon and 
some rules which are to follow in other parts of the grammar, es- 
pecially the rules of contraction and declination. 

4. If the penult, when long by nature, is accented, it must al- 
ways be with the circumflex, whenever the last syllable is short, 
or long by position only, as ῥῆμα, οἶνος, ψῦχος, βώλαξ (G. axos.) 

This accent shows the learner that the α in wa and αἕ of 
these words is short, and the v in ψῦχος long. 
~ This rule, however, does not apply to the cases where | an 
enclitic forms a part of the word. We accordingly write εἴτε, οὔτε, 
ὥςπερ, ἥτις, τούςδε, Kc. 

The only real exceptions are words formed of εἰ and-vai by 
protracting them, as εἴϑε would that, and vaize yes certainly.* 

5. If the last syllable is long by nature, a circumflex cannot 
stand on the Penalt; for instance ῥήτωρ, οἴνη, ψύχω, Sagat (G. 
ἄκος. ) 3 -- 


* Natyi, which is found in some works otherwise correct, is erroneous. 


3 


‘\ 


18 Ss ACCENTS. | [88 12, 13. 


6. On the antepenult no accent but the acute can’ stand. If 


the last syllable is long, whether by nature or by position, the an- 
tepenult can receive no accent whatever; accordingly we write 
“Σωκράτης, συλλέγω, ἐριβώλαξ. 

7. The terminations αὐ and ot, however, though long in them- 
selves, are regarded as short in reference to the preceding ‘rules. 
Accordingly we find runropa, agai’ &e. προφῆται pura δα of 
προφήτης) and πῶλοι; &e. 


Exceptions to this principle are, (1) The third person of the 
the optative in ov and cel, as φεύγοι, ποιήσαι; (2) The adverb 
οἴκου at home, although οἶκοι houses follows the rule ; (3) The words 
compounded of enclitics, as οὔμον woe is me. 


The in the terminations of the Attic declension, though 
long, also admits an'accent on the antepenult, as πόλεώς, and ave- 
véwv; also the Ionic genitive in éw. 


From the preceding rules, the use of the accenty in ascertain- ᾿ 


ing the quantity of many words is apparent, e. 


1. The circumflex shows the syllable on ak it stands to be | 


long. 


2. By rule 4, the acute in such words as καρκίνος, βάϑρον, ᾿ 


shows that the penult is short. 

3. The accent of such words as πεῖρα, ἄρουρα shows by 4 and 
6 that the last syllable of these words is short. 

4. The acute on the penult of χώρα, “Ἰήδα &c. shows by 4, 5, 


‘that the last syllable of these words is Jong. 


Even in words and forms, from whose own accent no imme- 
diate inference as to their quantity can be drawn, the comparison 
with other words will furnish us often’ with a direction. ‘Thus 
we shall infer that ἄσιτος has its penult long and ϑεόφελος short, 
because σῖτος has the circumflex and φίλος the acute. So of ὥδι- 
κος from δίχη, δίκαι. But the circumflex on monosyllables. wilk 
afford no inference with respect to the lengthened forms, because 
monosyllable nominatives of the third declension are always long 5 
as πῦρ, MUS, πῦύρος, cer 


§ 13.) CHANGE OF THE ACCENT BY INFLDECTION. 


When a word undergees a change by declension, conjugation, 
or in any other way, the accent is variously affected. . 
1. The accent is necessarily affected by such a change, when 
the word is so altered by this change, that the accent cannot re- 
main as it was, withdut a violation of the above rules. FE. g. 


δ μιν, δὰ ee ᾿» 


.8 14.} ? ACCENTS. ~ 19 


The circumflex must pass into the acute, as οἶνος, οἴνου 
(δ 15. 5) Gime, ῥήμωτος (§ 10. 1. 

_ The acute must pass into the circumflex, as φεύγω, imperative 
φεῦγε (δ 12. 4.) | 

Or the acute must pas from the antepenult to the penult, as 
ἄνθρωπος ἀνθοώπου, ἄρουρα ἀρούρας (δ 12. 5, 6.) ᾿ 

2. But even when the accent might have remained as it was, 

. without violating the rules, though not altered indeed in this case, 
yet it is often made to change its place. E. g. 

< It is thrown back, either when any addition is made to the be- 
ginning of the word, as τύπεω---ἔτυπτε, ὅδός---σύνοδος, παιδευτὸς ᾿ 
-οἀπαίδευτος.---οΥ when the cause is removed, which in the radi-- 
cal form fixed it to the penult, as παεδεύω, maideve. 

"It is thrown forward, principally when the word receives. one 
of the terminations which are marked with an accent, either al- 
ways, as τέτυφα---τετυφώς, or in certain cases, as O70, ϑηρός. 

. § 14. ENCLITICS. 

1. There are a number of words, which, considered in them- 
‘selves, have an accent like others, but which—some always, some 
commonly, and some often—connect themselyes so closely by 
sense and pronunciation to the preceding word, as to throw their 
accent upon it. This is called ἔγχλεσες or inclinatio toni, and 

_ the words subject to this inclination are called enclitics.* 
2. The following are enclitics. 

a) The. indefinite pronoun 7is, ti, in all the cases, with the 
forms τοῦ and τῷ belonging to it. ; 

b) The following oblique cases of the personal pronouns, μοῦ 
pol, μέ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ, οὗ, of, &, wiv, viv, and some of those which 
begin with og. | 

c) The present indicative of éué and φημί, with the exception 
of the monosyllabic second person singular. 


Ἷ 


* In opposition to this name, every accented word, and of course an 
enclitic itself, when not thus deprived of its accent, is called orthotone, 
ορϑοτονούμενον. " 


20 τς -KOCENTS.— : [§.14- 


d) The adverbs πώς, 17, moi, πού, 100i, ποϑέν, ποτέ, which 
are distinguished only by their enclitic accent, from the wos ai 
ing interrogatives πῶς, χιότε, &e. 

e) The particles πώ, τέ, τοί, ϑήν, γέ, κέ or κέν, νύ or νύν 
πέρ, ῥά, with the linceasabie particle de. 

3. If the preceding word be a proparoxytone, as ἄγϑρωπος, or 
a properispomenon, as σώμα, the accent of the enclitic is thrown 
“upon the last syllable of such preceding word, but always as an 
acute, whatever be the accent of the enclitic in itself considered. 
Thus ἀνϑρωπὸς ἔστι, σῶμα μου. : 

If the preceding word has no accent, as δέ, it takes that of the 
enclitic, as εἴ τες. 

4, If the preceding word has already an accent on the last 
syllable, or an acute on the penult, this accent serves for the’ en- 
clitic.. Moreover in this case the acute accent on the last syllable, 
instead of being written like the grave, as it would otherwise be . 
according to § 11, is written as the acute, as ἀνήρ rig" καὶ σοι" 
φιλῶ σε" γυναικῶν τινῶν" ἄνδρα té λέγεις τι. ἱ 

5. If, however, the enclitic bé a dissyllable, the accent of the 
preceding paroxytone will not thus suffice for it, and it retains its 
own accent, as λόγος ποτέ, ἐναντίος σφίσεν, which is also done when 
the preceding word undergoes an apostrophe, as πολλοὶ δ᾽ εἰσίν. 

6. If one enclitic follows another, in general, the first, while 
it throws its own accent on the preceding word, takes on itself the 
accent of the second, and the second of the third, and so on; so 
that the last enclitic’alone remains-without accent, as εἴ εἰς τινὰ 
φησὶ μοι παρεῖναι. : 
τ The enclitics remain orthotone, only when some peculiar 

émphasis lies on them; and as this can never be the case with 
many of these particles, they are never found but as enclitics. 

As many of these enclitics are so closely united with the pre- 
ceding word as to constitute but one, and-to have, as such, an as- 
certained sense, it is usual. to write them as one, aS ὥςτε, οὔτε, 
οἷοσφτε or otoste, BSP ὅςτις, ὥντενων. The enclitic de, which 


᾿ 


* Distinguished by its accent from yuy now. 


84 19, 16.] STOPS abiiines: ΟἽ 


must be carefully distinguished from the conjunction δέ ΜΗ occurs 
thug in ὅϑε, τοιόςδε, ὧδε; δόμονδε, &c. 


§ 15. STOPS AND MARKS, - 


“1. The period and comma are used in writing Greek as in Eng- 
lish.—The colon and semicolon are not distinguished from, each 
other, but are both written by a point at the top of the line, as 
οὐχ ἤλϑεν᾽ ἀλλα----. 'The note of interrogation is the semicolon 
(;) of the modern languages. 

ον 2) The comma is not to be confounded with the diastole or hy- ὁ 
podiastole, which serves to indicate more distinctly certain words 
compounded of enclitics, and to discriminate them from words not 
otherwise different; thus 0,z- neuter from  Octes, and τότε and 
_ that, to distinguish them from the particles ὅτε and rote. 

Apostrophe, (’). 

Dizresis (--) placed over a vowel which does not form a 
diphthong with the vowel that precedes it, as ὄϊς a sheep, πραῦς 
mild, pronounced o-is and pra-us. 


ᾧ 16. CHANGE OF LETTERS; CONSONANTS. 


1. In the formation and inflection of words in Greek many 
changes take place, principally for the sake of euphony, which 
often make it hard to trace the root, but which still are common- 
ly made on fixed principles. 
2. Those consonants, which are of the same organ, or of the 
. Same corresponding character in different organs, are prone to 
pass into each other, when a change takes place in the inflection. 
_ 3. This is the foundation of the diversity of the dialects, as the 
following sketch will show. 


Rem. 1. The dialects interchange frequently : 

‘a) The aspirates with each other, as ϑλᾶν, Att. φλᾶν, to crush. 

b) The medials, as γλήχων, Att. θλήχων, pennyroyal ; for yn, 
the old Dor. is da, earth. 


99 CHANGE OF LETTERS. [ὃ 16. 


c) The smooth ; thus the interrogative and kindred forms, ‘in- 
stead of the common 2, as in ποῦ. «πῶς, ποῖος, ὁποῖος, no, &c. have 
with the Ionians always z, a8 χοῦ, κώς, κοῖος, ὁκοῖος, 20. So too 
for πέντε five, the Aolics say méuze. 

_ 4) The laquids ; thus the Dorics for ἦλϑον said ἦνϑον, I came; 
the lonics for πνεύμων said πλεύμων lungs. The lonic μέν him 
is with the Dorics and Attics viv. 

« 6) The letters of the same organ. ‘Thus the Attics preferred 
γναφεύς to κναφεύς a fuller ; and the Lonians occasionally chang- 
ed the aspirate into the corresponding.smooth, as δέκομαν for δέχο- 
μας I take ;' αὖτις for αὖϑες again ; Att. ἀσφάραγος, lon. ἀσπάρα- 
γος, asparagus. 
f) The o with the other linguals, particularly 

with τ. as for ov, Doric τύ, thou ; | 

with », as for the ending μὲν, the Dorics have ES, as τύπτο- 

μὲν, Doric εὐπτομες. 

_ 5) The double letters with the corresponding single ones, par- 
ticularly δ with ¢, as Cové another form of δόρξ aroe ; ; yadda Dor- 
ic for μαάξα dough, &c. Still more commonly for ¢, in the middle 
of a word, the Dorics make use of 60; as συρίσδω for συρίζω, I 
whestle. 


2. We must not, however, think that these or any similar chan- 
ges prevail thr oughout a dialect without exception. The dialects 
have only a tendency toward certain changes, which we must make 
use of to explain the cases, that actually occur. _ Sometimes the 
change takes place only in a single case, as for instance for σύν 
the old form is ξύν, which change of σ and & is found in the be- 
ginning of no other word whatever. ‘'t'wo changes are so frequent 
_ as to deserve specification,’ viz. 


tr and 00 

Οὗ and Go 
of which zz and οὗ are favourite forms of the Attic dialect, and oo 
and go of the Ionic. ‘Thus 


Att. lon. 
ταΐτειν τάσσειν to arrange 
γλῶττα γλώσσα tongue 
πὰ ἄρδην ἄρσην male 
x000N “000% cheek. 


The lonic forms of these words are found, however, occasion- 
ally in Attic writers. : 


\ 


a ‘ §$17, 18.] | ASPIRATES.. : 23 


» 


ϑ τοῦ pe 
Sag? ς. _ § 1D. THE ASPIRATES. 


Any .- 


i 
ΕἸ 
: 


πιὸ Each aspirate may be considered as having. had its origin 
in the kindred smooth mute, combined with the rough, breathing ; 
hence the mode of writing them in Latin ph, th, ch. 

2. When therefore in the composition of words a smooth mute 
comes in contact with the rough breathing, an aspirated letter is 
formed ; thus the words ἐπί, δέχα. αὐτός, after an elision of *their 
last syllables, form in combination with ἡμέρα day, ἐφήμερος, δε- 
χήμερος, αὐϑήμερος.. 

8: The same happens in two words not thus aera thus 
οὐκ becomes οὐχ in οὐχ 66/w¢,—and with the addition ofan apos- 
trophe ἀπὸ, ἀπ᾽, becomes ἀφ᾽, ἃβ ἀφ᾿ ov, and ἀντί, ἀντ᾽, becomes 
avd, as ἀνϑ' ὧν. 


a “Bat the Tonians retain the smooth mute in both cases, as ἐπ᾿ " 
ὅσον, ω for μεϑεστάναε from ἱστάνᾶε. 


fies «2 | prints 8. 18. 

ao ‘Tt was a principle in the Greek language that two successive © 
syllables should not each begin with an aspirate. This rule was 
not without exception; where it operates, however, the first aspi- 
rate is usually changed into the corresponding smooth mute. Thus 
from φελεῖν and χωρεῖν are formed, in the reduplication, πεφίληκα, 
and χεχώρηκα, instead of φεφίληκα and yeywonxe. 


LT} ᾿ 


2. Some few words have, in their radical form, two successive 
aspirates, of which the first agreeably to this rule, passed into the 
corresponding smooth mute. But in those parts of the word, 
where the second aspirate undergoes a change by other laws of 
inflection, the first aspirate returns. E. g. 

From the root OP £@ is the present tense τρέφω I nourish ; 
future ϑρέψω.. Derivatives, τροφή, ϑρεπτήριον, ϑρέμμα. 

From the root OPEX, present τρέχω I run; future middle 
ϑοέξομαι. Derivative τροχός. 

3. Ina few words of this kind, the first aspirate retains its place 
in the leading forms, such as the nominative of a noun and the 
present of a verb, and not in the derivatives.’ E. g. 


ε 


54 ' CHANGE OF LETTERS. Ls 19. 


From the root OPZX, nom. 7 ϑρίξ hair, gen. reizos, dat. pl 
ϑριξίν. Derivative rocyou.. : 

From the root 8.4, pres. Bantw I bury, aorist pass. ἐξάφην. 
Derivative τάφος. 

4. The second of two aspirates is deldors thus ἐδ It is 
regularly done, however, in the imperatives in Oe; as ϑέτι, τύφ- 
Once, for VEO, τὐφϑηϑι.. 

Rem. 1. In some words the Ionics change one of the aspirates 
and the Attics the other; thus 0 χιτῶν, Jon. κύϑῶν, a garment ; 
évrevOev, ἐνταῦϑα, fon. ᾿ἐνθεῦτεν, ἐνθαῦτα. 

Rem. 2, The passive ending ϑὴν, with its derivatives, has the 
effect of changing the preceding aspirate into a smooth mute | 
only i in the verbs ϑύεεν to sacrifice, and ϑεῖναι to place ; ; as ἐτύϑην, 
ἐτέϑην, τεϑείς. In all other verbs, no change is effected in this 
way ; as ἐχύϑην, ὠρϑώϑην from ὀρϑόω, ϑαφϑείς, ἐθϑρέφϑην, é- 
ϑέλχϑην. Morover in most of the remaining cases of derivation. 
and composition the same license prevails, and we say πανταχό- 
ϑεν, Koow dob, μάχεσϑαι, ἀμφιχυϑείς, &e. 

Rem. 3. This rule perhaps extended not only to the aspirated 
letters, but to the rough breathing, which it turned into the smooth 
breathing. Of this , however, there is but one trace remaining, _ 
viz. from the root “EX is formed present ἔχω I have, fut. ἕξω, de- 
rivative ἑχευκός, where the aspirated breathing ischanged into 
‘the smooth breathing in the present, on account of the following 
aspirate 7, but reverts to the rough breathing in ἕξω and ἑκτεκός, 
where & and x take the Pp of χ. 


§ 19. MULTIPLICATION OF CONSONANTS. 


1. The Greeks avoided every roughness arising: from the se- 
quence of consonants not easily pronounced together. 

2. In pursuance of this, three consonants, or one with a double 
consonant, can never (except in the case of composition like δύς- 
φϑαῦτος, ἔκπτωσις, ἐκψύχω.) stand together, unless the first or 
last be a liquid, or a y before the palatics y, *, 7, as πεμιφϑείς, 
σχλήρος, τέγξω. In other cases mh a concurrence is avoided . 
or a letter dropped. } 

3. But a roughness may be produced even by the concurrence 
of two consonants, which is avoided by the application of the fol- 
lowing rules. 


. § 


§ 20.] CONSONANTS. 25 
Rem. 1. Ina few rare cases the pronunciation is relieved, by in- 
troducing a third consonant. As when 6. g. the liquid m or v, by 

wnission of a vowel, comes to stand directly. before λ or o, then the 

niddle mute corresponding to the first of them (, 0) is interposed ; 
thus from ἡμέρα day is formed μεσημβρία south, from μεμέληται 
arose the epic form μέμβλεται, and ἀνὴρ man has i in the genitive 
avdoos. 

~ Rem. 2. A consonant is sometimes, but not often, by transposi- 
tion, placed where it will be more easily pronounced, a8 ἔπραϑον 
from πέρϑώ. and καρδία, opie form sendin heart. 


4 20. 


Πα, When two mutes of a different organ meet, it is the rule that 
before a smooth mute nothing can stand but another smooth, before 
an aspirate nothing but another deperate, before a middle nothing 


but another middle mute ; as ἑπτά, νυχτός, φϑίνω., ἄχθος, βδελυ- 


ρος. 

2. When therefore, in the formation of words, two mutes of an 
unlike character meet, the former commonly assumes the charac- 
ter of the latter. Thus by adding the termination tes, δην, Osis, 
are formed from γράφω I write, γραπτὸς, γράβδην, and from πλέκω 
I twine, πλεχϑείς. 

3. But of two like mutes already combined, one alone cannot 
be changed, but always both together, as from ἑπτά, ὀχτὼ are 
formed ἕβδομος, ὄγδοος, and when of two smooth mutes the se- 


cond, by the addition of the rough breathing, becomes an aspirate, 


the first becomes an aspirate also; thus from ἑπτά and ἡμέρα is 
formed ἑφϑήμερος of seven days ; and from vinta, νύχϑ᾽ ὅλην the 
whole night.* 


4. The preposition ἐκ alone remains unaltered before all con- 


- sonants, as ἐχϑεῖναι, ἐκδοῦναι. 


* The Greeks probably made as much audible difference between x 


and χ, as we hear between τ and #. We are unable in English to make © 


this distinction. On the other hand, most of the continental nations of 
Europe distinguish between x and y, but confound τ and @. 
4 


26 CHANGE OF LETTERS. [$$ 21, 22, 23. 


§ 21... 


1. The doubling of the same consonant is not very common in 
Greek. It takes place most frequently: ig in the liquids, and next 
to them, in τ. 

2. When ¢ stands at the beginning of a word, if a seul vow- 
el is made to precede it in composition or inflection, the @ is usu- 
ally doubled; thus ἔῤῥεπον and ἀῤῥεπής from ῥέπω with ¢ and α, 
περί ὅοος from περί and δέω. This, however, does not hold in 
the case of diphthongs, as εὔρωστος from-ev and ῥώννυμι. 

3. The aspirates are never doubled, but instead-thereof an as- 
pirate must be preceded by the kindred mute; thus Σαπφώ, Βάκ- 
yoo, Πιιϑεύξ. ΄ 


Rem. 1. Those poets who do not use the Attic dialect, double a 
consonant very often for the sake of the metre, as ὅσσον, ὅττε; év- 
vené, for ὅσον, &c. This however is not wholly arbitrary, but 
takes place often in some words, and never in others, as ἔτι; ἕτε- 
ρος, ἅμα, ἄνεμος... 

Rem. 2. The poets also make use of the opposite practice, in © 
employing the single consonant, where the common dialect has 
the double, as “4χιλευς, ᾿Οδυσεύς, for ᾿αἰχιλλεύς, ᾿Οδυσσεύς. 


§ 22. eee 


_ When β, 2, φ, and y, κι 7, come before o, they pass with the 
σ into the kindred double consonant wy or §. ‘Thus, in the future 
ending, which is regularly oe, are made from Aéim-w, Aeiwo, from 
λέγω, λέξω, from γράφω, γράψω, from στείχω, στείξω, &c. And 
in the ending ov and σὸν of the dative plural, we find from ἢ ‘Aga 
Bes,’ Apa, from κόρακες, ries ) 


§ 23. 


1. Before wu, in the middle of a word, the labials are uniformly 
changed into μι; thus in the perfect tense passive, from λείσω, λέ- 
λεύμ-μαν. So too from τρίβω, τρίμμα, from γράφω, γραμμή. 

2. The palatics and linguals are often changed before u,—x 
and y into y, arid 0, @, 7, ¢,into o; thus πλέκω πλέγμα, τεύχω τέ- 
TU [LOl,—o.0W ἄσ-μα, πείϑω πέπεισ-μαι. ψηφίξζω ψήφισο-μα. 


᾿ 


> 


$$ 24, 25.] CONSONANTS—VOWELS. 91 


524. 


' The — ὃ, ὃ, τι €& can only stand before liquids. They 
are dropped before 0, as ἄδω dow, πείϑω πείσω, σώματα σώμασι, 
φράζω φράσις. 

, Before other linguals they are changed ‘into o; thus 70m 70- 
one, πείϑω πειδ-τέον. 


ξ 26. 


_1. The ν remains unaltered, in general, only before 0, 3, and 
τ. Before the labials it is changed into μ. and before the palatics 
into 7, pronounced as ng. Accordingly | in composition σὺν with and 
ἐν in are thus changed ; συμπάσχω, ἐμβαίνω, συμφέρω, ἔμψυχος, 
--ὐἰγκαλῶ, συγγενής, ἐγχειρίζω, ἐγξέω. 3 

An apparent exception is made in the enclitics, which are ποῖ 
considered as forming one word sufficiently to authorize the 

change of the v; thus we write zovye, ὅνπερ. 

2. Before one of the liquids, the » passes over into the same 

- letter, as συλλέγω, ἐλλείπω, ἐμμένω, συῤῥαπτω. 

But the preposition ἔν commonly remains unchanged before ρ, 
as ἐνράπτω. 

_ 3. Before o and ¢, the ν in composition is sometimes retained, 
sometimes changed into o, and sometimes dropped. In inflections 
the ν is commonly dropped before 6, as in the dative plural, δαέ- 
μον-ς δαίμο-σι, μῆντες μη-σίν. 

4. When after the 7, ἃ 0, 3, or τς has been omitted before Ὁ 
(by ὃ 24.) the short vowel is made long, as πάντ-ἐς 14-01, τύψαν- 
τὲς, τὐψᾶσι, for which end « passes into ¢v, and ὁ into ov, as 
σπένδω fat. σπεί-σω, éxovt-s¢ dat. ἑκοῦ-σεν. 

Rem. 1. The exceptions to these rules, as πέφανσαν (2 pers. 

-perf. pass. of φαίνων) are rare, and are learned by observation. 
Rem. 2. Before o and ¢, & is always unchanged, as ἐνσείω. 
uy changes its ν into σ before a single 0, as συσσιτία, but if an- 


-other consonant follow, and also before ¢, the ν is dropped, as ov- 
στημα, συσχιάξζω, ouluyia. 


28. CHANGE OF LETTERS. .  [$26. 


ν᾿ § 26. CHANGE OF VOWELS. 


1. No certain laws regulate the change of the vowels, in the 
formation and inflection of Greek words. It includes under it the — 
lengthening and shortening of sounds; since it rarely happens that 
when ὁ or o for instance, from any cause are lengthened, that 
they pass into ἡ or w,-but generally into éz or ov. 

These changes also, like those of the consonants, can be best 
observed, in the comparison of dialects. 


Rem. 1. The Ionics are prone to lengthen the ¢ and ὁ of the 
other dialects, but principally only, when a semi-vowel follows ; 
as ξεῖνος, εἵνεκα, Uneiv, for ξένος strange, ἕνεκα on account of, ὑ- 
MEQ over ; νοῦσος, οὔνομα, πουλύς, κούρη, for νόσος disease, ὄνο- 
μα name, πολὺς much, κόρη maiden ; or when the « is followed by 
another vowel, as yovo-svog for-e0¢ golden; which licenses are 
particulariy abundant in the poets. But this is not wholly arbi- 
trary, as'there are some words never subjected: to this license, 
such as πόλιες, τόνος, μένος, περί, &e. 

Rem. 2. When ἃ and o are Jengthened by the Ionians, {μ6 γ᾽ 
pass into αὐ and ov, as ἀετός eagle, ast ulways ; lonic, αἰξτός, αἰεί... 
So πόα grass, Ionic ποίη. : 

Rem. 3. In other cases, the reverse is practised by the Ionics, 
Dorics, and poets; and we find μέζων, χρέσσων, χερός, for μείζων 
greater, κρείσσων better, χειρός (genitive from χείρ hand) ; and for 
the accusative in ov¢ the Dorics use og. See below in Declen- 
sion If. 

Rem. 4. In other cases, the Dorics for ὁ and ov make frequent 
use of ὦ, as κῶρος for κύρος or χοῦροξ a young man, Owdog for 
δοῦλος a slave. ; . 

Rem. 5. The ἢ in most cases had its origin in ας which pre- 
vailed in the ancient Greek language, and remained also afterwards 
‘the characteristic sound of the Doric dialect, which commonly 
uses a long ἃ for ἡ. as ἀμέρα for ἡμέρα day, φάμα for-gyun re 
port, oravae for στῆναι to stand. (See § 1. 11.) a 

Rem. 6. The Ionics, on the” other hand, preferred the 7 and 

_ commonly used it instead of the long ας as ἡμέρη, cogin, for —ea ; 

inroos, ϑώρηξ, for ἰατρὸς physician and ϑώραξ breast plate (geni- 
tive ϑωρᾶκος), πρήσσω. πρῆγμα, for πρασσὼώ, πρᾶγμα. 

Rem. 7. It is a peculiarity of the Attic dialect borrowed from 

_ the lonic, when a long stands before 0, to change the α into and 

the o into w; as for λαός people, va0g temple, the Attics read λεώς, 


'ψεώς. Ἧ 
Rem. 8, The Ionic dialect frequently changes the short ἃ into 


! 
i 


poe 


821. ο΄ ΘΟΝΤΒΑΟΤΙΟΝΒ. 29 


é before liquids and before vowels, as τέσσερες for τέσσαρες four ; 
ἔρσην for ἄρσην male ; ὕελος for ὕαλος glass ; μνξα for μνᾶα mi- 
na; and in the verbs in aw. In other cases ἃ is used for «, as 


τράπω for τρέπω I turn; τάμνω for τέμνω I cut ; μέγαϑας for 
μέγεθος greatness. 

Rem. 9. In the compounds of αὐτός self, and the words ϑαῦμα 
wonder, and τραῦμα wound, the lonics change av into wu, as ἐμε- 
ωυτόν, ἑωυτόν, ϑωῦμα, τρωῦμα. 

Rem. 10. Other changes are the following; πρώτος the first, 
Dorie πρᾶτος,-- πάρδαλις the leopard, Doric x0gdaduc,—évo- 
wa name, Aolic ὄνυμα,---ἑστία hearth, lonic ἱστίη. 


§ 27. PURE VOWELS; CONTRACTIONS. 


1. A vowel immediately preceded by another vowel, in the 
‘same word, is called a pure vowel, being pronounced without the 
aid of a consonant; and particularly the terminations in @, o¢, and 
@, are called pure, when another vowel precedes, as in σοφία, 
111.008, φιλέω. ie | 

2. The characteristic difference of the Ionic and Attic dialects 
is, that the former, in most cases, seeks the concurrence of vow- 
els, and the latter avoids them. ' 

3. The common means by which the Attic dialect avoids them 
are the following, viz. : 

ΟΕ Elision, by which one vowel is cast away and the other re- 
tained. | 

Il. Contraction, by which several vowels are drawn into one 
long sound. This takes place principally in the formation and in_ 
flection of words, according to the following principles. 

a) Two vowels form of themselves a diphthong; thus ἐν and 
ov are formed from «i and οἱ" as τείχεϊ τείχει, αἰδόϊ αἰδοῖ. 

The other proper diphthongs have generally a different origin ; 
but the improper diphthongs may all be considered as formed by 
contraction, viz. ¢, 7, 5 from ai, ni, wi’, as γήραϊ γήρᾳ, Θρηΐσσα 
Θρῆσσα, λώϊστος λῷστος.. δ᾽ 

b) Two vowels pass into a kindred long vowel or diphthong ; 
and generally as follows: wae 


90 ᾿ CONTRACTIONS. [ὁ 27. 


ἢ from δα --- τείχεα. τείχη, κέαρ "κῆρ heart. 
— é ἔοι ξὲ ---α ποίξε ποίει; ῥεεϑρον δεῖϑρον stream: 


) αο and “ov — τιράομεν Toomer, τιμάου τιμῶ. 
from 
ow and on — αἰδόα aidw, μισϑόητε μισϑώτεέ. 


00 — πλόὺς πλοῦς, μισϑόομεν μισϑοῦμεν. 
ov from ot — ἐμίσϑοε ἐμίσϑου. 
: £0 —TEl¥EOS τείχους, MOLEOMEY ποιοῦμεν. 


c) The doubiful vowels ἃ, ὁ, v, when they are short, absorb 
the following vowel, and thereby become long, as ἄεϑλος Ionic 
with short «, Attic ἦϑλος combat,—tiuae tiud,—dative  Jpic ἦι, 
—iydveg and -a¢ with v short, contr. ἐχϑῦς, from the sing. ἐχϑύς. 

d) A long sound absorbs ἃ short vowel, without farther change. ᾿ 
This is particularly the case with the following, viz. 

With « both before and after almost every long sound, as gn 
φιλῶ, τιμήεντος τιμῆντος. 

With α and ὁ principally by kindred sounds and by a, as τι- 
paw tou, Ποσειδάων ἸΙοσειδῶν Neptune, λᾶας λᾶς a — μι- 
σϑόουσι μισϑοῦσι, πλόοι πλοῖ. 

4. When a diphthong compounded with t, the improper diph- 
thongs not excepted, is to be contracted with a preceding vowel, 
the two first vowels_undergo a change, according to the preceding 
rules, and the « either becomes subscript, as τὐπτ-ξαι TUNE-N, aél- 
dw ἄδω I sing, ἄοι- δὴ δή song, τεμ-ἀξι and τεμ- ἀῃ----τεμτᾷ, or the 
tis dropped if the contracted sound is not of a nature to admit ὁ 
subscript, as μισϑ-εόειν μισϑ-οῦν, ᾿Οπόεις ᾿Οποῦς. 

Rem. 1. Such are the regular contractions; but several excep- 
tions to these rules occur, as will be seen in their places. . The 
‘Tonics particularly neglect the contraction, and resolve a long 

. sound into its original component parts, as 2 pers. sing. pass. τύπ- 
teat for τύπτῃ; ἀπ even ποιέξαι, ἐπαινέξαι, &c. for ποιέῃ (which 
is commonly still farther contracted into moun), &c. Many of these 
forms are common to both the Ionic and Doric dialects. 

Rem. 2. The tendency of the Ionic dialect to resolve the long 


sounds is the source of the separation of the vowels in the diph- 
thongs, which prevails among the epic poets in certain words, as 


P 4 


* 'This is not to be considered as an elision, but as a true contraction, 
as is seen by the use of the circumflex to compensate for the short vowel 


dropped ; as φύλέω, φιλώ. 
% 


§ 28. iz CONTRACTIONS “HIATUS, CRASIS. 81. 


πάϊς for παῖς ae oiouae for οἴομαι I think, &c. of the protracting 

of a vowel sound, as goog for gus hight, κρήηνον for. nonvoy from 
» &e. and ‘of the Ionic insertion of an €, as né ἴον ἤ or, ἐεί- 

᾿ χοδε for εἴκοσι twenty, ἀδελφεός for ἀδελφός brother. 

᾿ς Rem. 3. The lonics sometimes produce a concurrence of vow- 

els, by thrusting out the consonants which separate them, as τέ- 

oaos for τέρατος. 

Rem. 4. There are nevertheless cases, where the Ionics con- 
tract and the Attics do not; as ἱρός (with « long) Ionic for ἱερός 
- sacred. The fonics and Dorics have also a contraction peculiar 
to themselves of <0 into sv, as πλεῦνες for πλέονες, ποιεύμενος for 
movsomevos, for which the contracted form ποιούμενος is com- 
ΡΟ used. 

Accent of contracted syllables. 

Ren. 5. When of the two syllables to be contracted, neither 

' has the accent, the syllable formed by the contraction generally 


remains also without it, as περίπλοος περίπλους, ἐτίμαον ἐτίμων. 
Rem. 6. If however one of the syllables to be contracted has 


~ an accent, the contracted syllable is accented; if the penult or 


autepenult, it is accented according to the rules in §10 and $12; 
if the last syllable, it is accented with the circumflex in almost 
every case, as νούς νοῦς, ποιέω ποιῶ. 


ὁ 28. HIATUS AND CRASIS. 


1. When one word ends with a vowel and the next begins 
with one, whether aspirated or not, an effect called hiatus is ob- 
served, which was still less agreeable, particularly to the Attics, 
than the concurrence of vowels in the middle of a word. 

. 2. This hiatus was accordingly avoided in poetry, particularly 
in the Attic poetry. Even in’ prose, with the exception of the 
lonic writers, its frequent recurrence was disliked. The principal 
means of avoiding it were, first synaloeephe, or the union of the ° 
two syllables in one; and secondly the addition of a consonant, as 
the ν, called » dd ebb 

3. The synalephe is of two kinds, viz. 

a) Elision, where one yowel is wholly dropped. _ 

_ b) Crasis, where the vowels form a long one. - "This last, par- 
ticularly in prose, has a very limited application. 


Rem. 1. Crasis, over which a comma or smooth breathing (’) _ 
is commonly placed 85 ἃ sign, is oftenest used in the article. cand 


32 = APOSTROPHE. 3 [Ὁ 29. 


in the conjunction καί: It-is governed, for the most part, by the 
rules given above for the regulation of contractions in the mid- 
dle of the words, as. τοὐναντίον for τὸ ἐναντίον, τοὔνομα for τὸ 
ὄνομα; ταμά for τὰ ἐμά, ταὐτὰ for ra αὐτά. So by the lonics 
τὠγαλμα for τὸ ἄγαλμα. In the Attic dialect, however, the α 
commonly absorbs every vowel in the article, as τὸ ἀληϑές be- 
comes τἀληϑές, and τοῦ ἀνδρός becomes τανδρός. 


~ 


Rem. 2. A syllable contracted by crasis, is of necessity long, 


as ταληϑές, τἀλλαϊ for τὰ ἄλλα, and καπί, καἀρετή, for καὶ ἐπί, 
. καὶ ἀρετή. The ὁ subscript is used only when, besides the con- 
traction, the ὁ is still found in the last syllable, as καὶ εἶτα, KOTO. 

Rem. 3. Some of the most common instances of crasis, which 
at the same time most need explanation to the learner, are ἐγῴ- 
pas for ἐγὼ οἶμαν I think ; ἐγῴδα for ἐγὼ οἶδα I know ; ϑοίμάτιον 
for τὸ ἱμάτιον the garment ; οὕνεκα for οὗ ἕνεκα wherefore. 


§ 29, APOSTROPHE. 
{ : 


‘1. By elision in Greek, as in other languages, the short vowel 
at the end of the word, when the next begins with a vowel, is cut 
off.. To denote this a comma (’) is placed over the space thus 
left vacant, as ἐπ᾿ ἐμοῦ for én? ἐμοῦ, and when the vowel of the 
second word has the rough breathing, the smooth mute of the first 
is aspirated (δ 17. 2.) as ἀφ᾽ ov for ἀπὸ οὗ. . 

2. In prose it is only certain words of frequent recurrence, 
which are commonly elided, particularly ἀλλὰ, ἄρα and ἄρα, ave, 
διά, κατά, METH, παρά, ἀπό, ὑπό, ἀμφί, arti, ἐπί, δέ, τέ, γέ; OF 
frequent combinations, as νὴ Ala, νὴ Ai’ by Jove ; παντ᾽ ἄν for 
πᾶντα av, &c. In other cases it is. rare, in most wholly unused, 
particularly in Ionic prose. ‘The poets, on the other hand, avail 


themselves of this license in the case of almost all the short vow- 


els. Only the short v, monosyllables in ας ¢, 0, and the preposi- 
tion περί, are never elided. 


Rem. 1. If the vowel cut off had an accent, this accent in par- 
ticles is lost with the vowel, as aa from ano, ἀλλ᾽ from ἀλλα, οὐδ᾽ 
from οὐδέ. In every other sort of word, the accent passes to the 
preceding syllable, and is always acute, as xan ἔπη from κακὰ 
ENN. Ν 


/ 


! 


* Ζαλλα, as this word is written in most editions, is wrong. 


§ 30.] ΟΡ» ἐφελκυστικόν, ETc. Ὁ 99 


. _ The poets elide, though more rarely, the diphthong as, but 
this is done only in passvve terminations, as βούλεσϑ᾽ ἔφη, ἔρχομ᾽ 
ἔχων... 


ν᾿ Ὁ 
δ π 


> § 80. 
7, . ’ Ν ; 
OF ν épeAxvotixoY, AND OTHER FINAL CONSONANTS. 


1. Certain words and terminations have a twofold form, with 
and without a.consonant at the end, of which the first is commonly 
used before a vowel, the other before a consonant. 

2. This secondary form is especially made by what is called 
the ν ἐφελκυστικόν, which may be assumed or dropped by the 
dative plural in ov, and in the verbs, by all third persons in ¢ and 

εἰ as, for ipetance, πᾶσιν. εἶπεν ἐκεῖνος, ο otherwise πᾶσι and εἶπε, : 
ἔτυψεν ἐμέ, λέγουσιν αὐτό, τίϑησιν ὑπό. In the common dialect, 
this » must always be used before a vowel. . 

3. A similar y is applied to the terminations in ov, expressing 
a place, which are formed from datives plural, as Ολυμπίασι, and 
to the words πέρυσι a year ago, and εἴκοσι twenty, though n not al- 

“ways to this last. ὃ 
Rem. 1. The Ionics omit this ν even before a vowel; on the 
other hand, the poets use it before a consonant to effect a position 
ἴον the preceding vowel. This is also sometimes done in Attic 
prose, and at the end of a sentence it is rarely omitted. 
4, Of a similar character with this ν is the ¢ in οὕτω οὕτως 
thus; and also, though chiefly by the Ionics, in μέχρυ μέχρις, 
ἄχρι ἄχρις, ἀτρέμα ἀτρέμας. | 
5. The particle ov not becomes ovx before a vowel, and con- 
_ sequently passes into οὐχ before an aspirate. (§ 17. 3.) 
Rem. 2. The reverse holds with this x in οὐκ from what was — 
observed of the v; for as no Greek word by itself can terminate 


in καὶ (δ 4. 4.) this «is dropped at every pause, even when the 
next sentence begins with a vowel; as Οὔ adh ὅταν---- Χεπορῖι. 


Ἔν" vi. 2. 


: ᾿ | 
94. ᾿ - PARTS OF SPEECH.—Nouns. — [§$31,32. 


- 


7 
‘ 
ἔραν ti 


§ 31. THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 


1. Strictly speaking there are but three principal parts of ἡ 
speech. For all that belongs to the name and designation of ob- 
jects is included in the noun; the word, by which any thing is’ ex- 
pressed relative to objects, is the verb; and the other parts of 
speech, by which the objects thus named and distinguished are 
farther qualified and connected, are included under, the. ἜΣ of 
isn - 

. It is usual, however, to make some chief subdivisions of the 
1 main parts of speech; and there are usually counted eight 
parts of speech i in most languages ; thus (1) The noun, which re- 
mains divided into substantive and adjective, is further distinguished 
from, (2) The pronoun which includes the article, and (3) The 
participle, which in the syntax is considered a part of the verb. 
(4) The verb remains undivided, but the particles are divided | 
into (5) adverb, (6) preposition, (7) conjunction, (8) interjection, 
of which the last is ofien reckoned by the Greek grammarians as 
an adverb, Wea 


THE NOUN AND ITS DECLENSION. 
§ 32.. GENDER. 


1. The gender of the noun is either masculine, feminine, or ῦ 
neuter, and appears in part by the termination, as will be remark- 
ed in each declension. To indicate the gender, use is made of 
the article 6 for the masculine, 1) for the feminine, and τό for 
the neuter. : | 

2. The names of persons, as man, woman, god, goddess, &c. 
follow always the natural gender, be the termination what it will : 
as ἢ ϑυγάτηρ daughter, ἢ νυὸς daughter in law. From this is except- 
ed the diminutive ov, which is always neuter, as τὸ γύναιον, from 
γυνή wife, TO μειράκεον from μεῖραξ a youth. 


Rem. 1. Hence every personal denomination, which is common _ 
to the natural genders, is of common gender in grammar ; thus we 


§33.] ὀῸὀ᾽ ΔΘΕΝΡΕΒ.--“ῬΕΟΓΕΝΒΙΟΝ. 35 


é 


have ὁ ἄνθρωπος a man, and also 7 ἄνϑρωπος a woman. So too 
ὃ and ἢ) ϑεὸς god and goddess; 6 and 4 τροφὸς guardian and 
nurse; ὁ and ἡ φύλαξ a male or female watcher. Of several of 
these words, however, there are separate feminine forms, as 7 ϑεά 
the goddess, which with the Attics supersede the’ use of the common 
forms. 

Rem. 2. Several of the names of animals are in like manner 
common, as ὁ and ἡ βοῦς the ox or cow; ὁ and 7% ἵππος the horse 
‘or mare. In most of these, however, one gender is used for both 
sexes, and this is called, by the Latin grammarians, when it is 
masculine or feminine, genus epicenum; as ὁ λύκος wolf, and 7 
ἀλώπηξ fox, whether masculine or feminine. But even in sub- 
stantives, which are of the common gender, one or the other gen- 
der usually predominates, to denote the species; thus ὁ ἵππος is 
used in general of the horse kind, and of any individual of the kind 
whose sex is not specified. In ἄρκτος bear and χάμηλος camel, in 
general, and in ἔλαφος stag and. κύων dog, often, the feminine 
gender prevails. The feminine ἢ ἵππος has the additional and 
peculiar signification of cavalry. 

3. The names of trees, ἃ5. ἢ φηγὸς the beech, ἢ πίτυς the pine, 
and the names of cities and countries, as ἡ Κόρινϑος, ἡ Aiyuntos, 


"καὶ «ακεδαίμων, are, with a few exceptions, feminine. 


§ 33. DECLENSION. © 


1. The Greek nouns have the five first cases of the Latin, 
without the ablative, of which the place is supplied Μααν by the 
genitive and partly by the dative. 

2. The Greek language i in nouns and in verbs has a ‘dual num- 
ber, used of two persons. It is not however always used; by 
some writers not at all; and most frequently by the Attics. 

3. The dual has never more than two endings, one for the no- 
minative, accusative, and vocative ; the other for the genitive and 
dative. 

4. The division into three declensions is most convenient, cor- 
responding to the three first declensions of the Latin, and with 
terminations as exhibited in the following table. 


Ἃ 


ἢ 


96᾽ DECLENSION. [§ 33. 
Sing. I. Deel. - Il. Decl. ΠῚ. Decl. — 
‘Nom. | η,) ἃ | ης, ἂς | og neut:ov Ἷ — 
wey.) ee ἢ 
Gen. ηξφ-ἃἂς ov οὐ ος (we) 

; Dat. ——& ῳ oh & 3 
Acc. nv—av ov « or v, neut. like 
Voc. η---τὰ é πϑαί. ον] -- . [the nom. > 
Dual. 

N. A.V. ᾶ we ei. é. 
G. Ὁ. αὐν οὖν οιν 
Plur. 
Nom. αὖ οἱ neut. α ἐς neut. δ 
Gen. ὧν ων ων 
Dat. αις ous σιν ΟΥ δὲ 
Acc. ac ove neute ας neut. ἃ 
Voc. αὐ ot neut.a| eco neut. @ 


N. B. The Attic second declension, so called, is omitted in the 


above table, for the sake of simplic 


in its place ; see ᾧ 37. 


ity ; it will be given hereafter 


5. When the terminations as here given are pure, and contrac- 
tion ensues, the contracted declension takes place, as will be seen 
below, in each of the three declensions. 


~“ 


Remarks on the Table. 


- 


i. The genitive plural, in all three declensions, ends in wv. 

2. The dative singular, in all three declensions, ends in ¢; 
Which, however, in the two first is concealed under the form of 
the zota subscript. — | 

3. The dative plural, properly, in all three declensions, ends 
in δέν or Ge; for ag and og are only abbreviations of the more 
ancient form @esovy and ovovr, or aese and ovoe. ) 

4. The vocative is generally the same as the nominative; and 
even where it has a separate form, the nominative is often used 
for the vocative, particularly by the Attic writers. 

5. The neuters, as also in the Latin language, have three cas- 
es alike, viz. the nominative, accusative, and vecative ; and in the 
plural of neuters all these cases end in α. : 

6. The three declensions resemble the three first in Latin ; 
but it is to be remarked that out of o¢ in the nominative the Lat- 


͵ 


Ὁ Κ΄ 


§ 34.) FIRST DECLENSION. ΑΙ 
ins ns a ων, out of o¢ in the genitive they make is; out of ov 
um ; and that, in general, μ in Greek becomes n in Latin. 

. In regard to accent, it is a general rule; that the endings of 
Peat and dative, if long and accented, must have the οὖγ- 
ex ; the nominative, accusative, and vocative, the acute. It 

is, however, to’be observed, that the last syllable, in the nomina- 
tive and vocative singular of the third declension, is not properly 


» 


considered as the termination, as will be seen in its place. 


§ 34. FIRST DECLENSION. 
/ 
1. All words in ας and ng are masculine, and all in ἃ and i are 
feminine. 


2. Words in α have their genitive in as, and retain the α 


‘through all the terminations of the singular, if it is preceded by 
' another vowel, (a pure ὃ 27.1), as σοφία, or by g, as ἡμέρα. 


The «@ is also retained by the contracted nouns, as μνᾶ (see be- 


low in Rem.1I); by cada, gen. -ὥς, the warcry; and by some 


proper names, as 4700, “Avdgoude, Didounha, Γέλα. 
3. All other nouns in α have the genitive in 4¢, and the da- 


“tive in 7, but in the accusative and vocative they resume the α, 


In the dual and’ plural, all the four endings, the nominative, da- 
tive, accusative, and vocative, retain the a. The rest may be 
learned from the following table, where the changes of the ac- 
cent, according to the general rules, are observed. 


EXAMPLES, 


Sing. 7, honor. | ἢ, wisdom. 7, muse. | 0, citizen. | 0, youth. 
Nom. τιμή σοφία Movow | πολίτης | νεανίας 
Gen τιμῆς σοφίας Moons πολίτου =| νεανίου 
Dat τιμῇ σοφίᾳ Movon | πολίτῃ νεανίᾳ 
Acc. τιμὴν σοφίαν Μοῦσαν | πολίτην , νεανίαν 
Voc. τιμὴ σοφία Μοῦσα | πολῖτα νεανία 
Dual. 
NLA. V. | comer σοφία Ποῦσα | πολίτα νεανία 
G. Ὁ. τιμὰϊν | σοφίαιν Ῥουσαιν} πολίταιν |} νεανίαιν 


-“»Ὡ 


38 FIRST DECLENSION. [§ 34. 
Plur. 
Nom. [τιμαί σοφίαν “Μοῦσαν πολῖται .1 νεανίαν" 
Gen τιμῶν 1] σοφιων" Movowy πολύτῶν γεανων 
Dat. τιμαῖς σοφίαις ῆουσαις | πολίταις | νξανίαις 
Acc. τιμάς σοφίας Movous πολίτας νεανίας. 
Voc. | τιμαί σοφίαν “ούσαι πολῖταν 1 “νεανίαν 
ng. | ἡ; justice. | 9, opinion. | ἡ, trident. 7, knife. | 0, Atrides. 
| δίκη γνωμή: τρίαινα μαχαιρα ᾿4τρείδης 
δίκης γνώμης τριαίνης μαχαΐρας ᾿“τρείδου 
δίκη youn τριαίνῃ μαχαίρᾳ ᾿Ατρείδῃ 
δίχην γνώμην τρίαιναν μαχαιραν ᾿Ζτρείδην 
δίχη γνωμή τρίαινα μαχαιρα ᾿“τρείδη ' 
Dual. 
N. [δίκα γνώμα tovaive | μαχαίῤα ᾿“τρεΐδα 
α. δίκαυν γνωμαῦν ἵ τριαίναιν | μαχαίραιν | Ζτρείδαιν 
Plur. 
N. | δίκαι γνώμαν. | τρίαιναν | μάχαιραν | Argsidae 
G. δικὼν γνωμῶν ἰτρίαίνων | μαχαιρῶν Arosa 
D. 1 δίκαις γνώμαις τριαίναις | μαχαίραις ‘Me ϑειδαὶς 
A. δίκας | γνώμας | τριαίνας | μαχαίρας ᾿Δερείδας 
γ. δίκαι \yvomuae ἱτρίαιναι " ᾿“ερεῖδαι 


ιμαχαιραν 


Of the vocative of masculines. 


4. Of the nouns in 7¢, those which end in τῆς, several com- 


pounded verbals which are formed merely by adding ¢ to the 
consonant of the verb, as γεωμέτρης, μυροπώλης, παιδοτρίβης, 
&c. and national names, as Πέρσης, Σχύϑης, have « in the voca- 
tive. The others, which, however, are by far the smallest num- 
ber, have ἡ. particularly the patronymics in δῆς, as 4roeidne in 
the table. 


Remarks on the foregoing examples. 


I. Contraction. 'The contracts of this declension contract the 
nominative into one of the usual terminations, and then proceed 
regularly; except that the contracts in « preserve this vowel 


ᾧ 54. FIRST DECLENSION. 39 


nged throughout, as being originally pure, and’those in ἄς 

ys have the Doric genitive in long α (Rem. IV. 3.) They 
nay all be known by the circumflexed termination, as λέοντέα, 
contr. Asovt7, genitive λεοντῆς, &c- plural nom. λεονταῖ, accus. 
λεοντᾶς, lion-skin ; ᾿Βρμέας, contr. Eouns, gen. Louov, Mercu- 
ry; μνάα. contr. μνᾶ, gen. μνᾶς, mina ; βορέας, Attic βορύας, 
gen. βοῤῥα," &c. 80 ἰοο ᾿4ϑηνα, AInvas, Minerva ,and yn, γῆς, 
earth. — 

Ii. Quantity. 1. The nominative « which has ἧς in the geni- 
tive, is always short. - 

2. The nominative « which has ας in the genitive, is in gen- 
eral Jong, though in many words short. | . 

- 3. The vocative in α of masculines in ἧς is short, of those in ας 
long. The dual termination in « is always long. 

4. The termination ας. throughout the first declension, is long; 
and the accusative plural is in this distinguished from the third de- 
clension, where it is short. a Ξ 

5. The accusative singular in av follows the quantity of the 
nominative. 

Ill. Accent. 1. It is characteristic of the first declension that 
the genitive plural always has the accent on: the last syllable, 
wherever it may be in the other parts of the word, as Movoe | 
Μουσῶν, ἄκανθα ἀκανϑών. --- Exceptions to this rule are the 
following, viz. 

a) Feminines of adjectives and barytone participles in o¢, as 

ξένος, Sevn—gen. pl. ξένων" attvoc, atria—gen. pl. αἰτίων" 

- tuntomevos, —y,—gen. pl. τυπτομένων. ao. 

b) The three substantiyes χρήστης usurer, οἱ ἐτησίαι trade 

winds, ἀφύη a sort of fish. 

2. With this exception, the accent of the substantives, as far 
as the general rules admit, remains on the syllable, where it is 
found in the nominative, as nom. pl. σοφίαι, voc. sing. πολίτα, 
with the exception of the vocative δέσποτα from δεσπότης master. 
The feminines of the adjectives in oc, on the contrary, cast the ac- 
cent, whenever the termination admits, upon the syllable where 
their masculines have it, as ἄξιος, f. ἀξία, pl. ἄξιοι, ἄξιαι. 

8. It has already been remarked, that the endings of the geni- 
tives and datives, in general, if accented at all, are circumflexed ; 
as those of teu in the table. See ὃ 33 Rem. 7. : 


* The doubling of the @ in this word is merely an accidental pecu- 


liarity. 


͵ 


20 | FIRST DECLENSION. ᾿ & 84. 


IV. Dialect. 1. The Dorics, in all the terminations, use a 
long « for ἢ, as τεμά, ἃς, ἃ, av. The Ionics commonly use 7) for — 
Jong a, as σοφίη, Sy ἢ, ν᾿ μάχαιρα, HS, Ns ev’. ὁ νεηνίης, &e. 

_ This however is never done in the accusative plural. 

_2. The oldest form of the genitive singular of the masculines 
is a0, and of the genitive plural of all endings ἄων. Hence in 
Epic poets, “τρείδαο, rynawy, &c. 

3. The Doriés contracted these genitives into long ας as τοῦ- 
᾿“Ζερείδα, τἂν τιμᾶν. This Doric genitive, in some few words, : 
particularly proper names, remained i in common use, as ᾿Αννίβας, 
tov ἀννίβα. Hannibal. 

‘4. The fonics, on the other hand, converted the ao into ¢@, in 
. which however the ὦ has no effect in bringing the accent for- 

ward, as πολίτεω. So too from awy the Ionics made ἕων, as 
Movoéwv. 
5. On the ancient form “of the dative plural, as τεἐμαῖσι, Mov- 
᾿ σαύσέν, see above in §33 Rem. 3. The lonic dialect has! pans 
nov, and 7¢. ν 


Words for practice. 


ἀγορὰ market. ϑάλασσα sea 
*Ayyions (v long) Anchises ϑύρα (ushort) door 
ἀδολέσχης prater Κεκροπίδης (v short) Cecropides 
᾿“ϑηνὰ Minerva κεφαλή. head 
Aiveias JEneas κλέπτης thief 
ana Oa thorn κύρη girl 
ἅμιλλα combat κριτής judge 
ἄρουρα Jield ATLOTNS maker 
ἀσχολία business , λαύρα lane 
γαλὴ weasel λύπη (vlong) — grief 
γῆ earth μαϑητής | disciple 
᾿γλώσσα ἡ tongue μέλισσα bee 
δόξα opinion μέριμνα > care 
ἐχιδνα viper Mideg (eshort) Midas 
Sawn girdle μοῖρα share 


“ἡμέρα day vixen (με long) victory 


§ 35.] | SECOND DECEENSION. 4] 
Ἵ bride σφαῖρα sphere 
anger. σφῦρα hammer 
οὰς, .α. fowler σχολή _ leisure 
Persian σωτηρία ~ salvation 
side ταμίας steward 
᾿ πύχτης pugilist πεχνίτης. artist 
- πύλη (vshort) gate ὕλη (u long) wood 
ῥίζα τοοί φιλία Friendship 
σκιὰ shadow χαρά joy 
Σκύϑης Scythian. χλαῖνα. outer garment 
στέγη , roof χώρα country 
στοά porch ψυχή soul. 
§ 35.. SECOND DECLENSION. 


γζ 


1. All words in ον are of the neuter gender, and most of those 
in o¢ are masculine. 
2. ‘There are, however, several feminines in 0¢, not duly those 
alluded to ‘above in § 32, the names of persons, animals, trees, and 
cities ; but many others, such as 7) ὁδός road, ἡ βίβλος book, ἡ νῆ- 


σὸς island, τ νόσος disease, with many names of stones and plants, 


particularly also several, which are in reality adjectives with a 


_ feminine substantive omitted, as τ] διάλεκτος dialect (φωνή under- 
᾿ stood); 17 διάμετρος the diameter (γραμμή understood) ; 7 ἄτομος 


atom (οὐσία understood); τη) ἄνυδρος desert (χώρα understood) ; 


Sing. 
Nom. 
Gen. 


᾿ , Dat. 


Acc. 
Voc. © 


ες 0, speech. 


λόγος 
λόγου 
λόγῳ 
λόγον 
λόγε 


~ and others of this description. 


EXAMPLES. 

ἡ, beech. ὃ, people. ὁ, man. 10, fig. 
φηγός δῆμος ἄνϑρωπος σῦκον 
φηγου δημου ἀνθρώπου | συκου 
φηγῷ δήμῳ ἀνθρώπῳ συχῳ 

φηγόν δῆμον ἄνθρωπον | οὗκον 
φηγέ δῆμε ἄνϑρωπε | σῦκον 


* The common mode of writing this ward σφύρα is incorrect, as the 


termination i is short. 


See Aristoph. Pac. 566. 


6 


ve 


Cratin. ap. Hephest. p. 6. 


42 


SECOND DECLENSION.——CONTRACTS. 


[§§ 35, 36. 
. Dual ; ἢ on 
N. A.V. λόγω φήγω Riou av ooze oun 
GD. ἰλόγουν οἱ φηγοῖν | δήμοιν | ἀνθρώποιν | σύκοιν 
Plural. 
Nom. [λόγον | gnyoi δῆμοι | ardoumos | ovxe 
Gen. λόγων | φηγῶν δήμων ἀνθρώπων σύκων 
᾿ ‘Dat. λόγοις φηγοῖς δήμοις ἀνθρώποις σύκοις 
Acc. λόγους | pyyous | δήμους ἀνθρώπους. σῦχα 
Voc. λόγον 1 φηγοὲ δήμου ἄνθρωπον | σῦκα 
| Remarks. 


1. The Attics sometimes make the vocative . like the nomina- 
tive; ϑεὸς God is always the same in the vocative as the nomina- 


tive. 


[But an exception is found Matt. 27: 46.] 


2. By the Epic writers the genitive in ov is changed into ovo, 
The Dorics make ὦ in the genitive, and in 
the accusative plural ὡς, and rarely os. 


as λόγοιο, φηγοῖο. 


» 


ἄγγελος 
ἀετὸς 
ἄϑλος 
ἄϑλον 
ἢ ἄμπελος 
ἄργυρος 
ἀργύριον 
ἔργον 
εὖρος. 
ζέφυρος 
ἡ ἤπειρος 
ἱμάτιον 
ἴον 
καρκίνος 
; μῆλον 


ᾧ 86: 


Words for practice. 
messenger — ἀόριον 
eagle νότος 
combat ξύλον 
prize οἶκος 
vine παιδίον 
silver 60dor 
silver σίδηρος 
work ἢ σμάραγδος 
east wind σπασμός. 
west wind στρατὸς 
continent φάρμακον 
outer garment φορτίον 
υἱοί οί χαλκὸς 
crab χρυσὸς 
apple χουσίον 


part 
south wind 
wood 
house 
child 
rose 

ron 
emerald 
spasm 
army 
medicine 


* ‘burden 


copper 
gold 


gold. 


CONTRACTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 


Several words in 00¢ and oov, <0¢ and δον, commonly undergo 
contraction, according to the general rules given above, except 
that ἃ of the neuter absorbs in contraction the preceding é¢ or 0, 


and becomes long, as ὀστέα ὀστᾶ, ἁπλόα ania. 


ἐ 
~ 


᾿ § 37] ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 43 


1 eae 


ga δ 
2 _ EXAMPLES. 
“Sing. 0, voyage. Plure Sing. τὸ, bone, ἴων. 


ΝΝ πλόος πλοῦς πλόον πλοῖ |loorgoy ὀστοῦν ὀστέα ὀστᾶ 
6, ᾿πλόου πλοῦ ᾿πλόων πλῶν |losréov ὀστοῦ \oorewy ὀστῶν 
D.'zhow πλῷ 'πλόοις πλοῖς loorém ὀστῷ ὀστέοις ἀστοῖς 
Ἅ. πλόον πλοῦν ἱπλόους πλοῦς ὀστέον ὀστοῦν ὁστέα ὀστᾶ 
V.inioe πλοῦ ᾿πλόον πλοῖ ᾿Ιὀστέον ὀστοῦν ὀστέα ὀστᾶ 


ὀστέω 00TH 
OOTEOLY GOTOLY 


Dual. N. A. πλόω πλῶ 
3 G.D. πλόοιν πλοῖν 


Remark, There are not many substantives of this kind; ὁ ψόος 
understanding, and 0 600¢ stream, may be taken as examples. 


§ 37. SECOND DECLENSION OF THE ATTICS. 


Το the second declension is referred, under the name of the 
Aitic, the declension of several words of the masculine and femi- 
nine gender in ws, and of the neuter in wy. It has in all the cases 
an ὦ, instead of the usual vowels and diphthongs, and an iota sub- 
script where οὐ or is found in the regular second declension. 


The vocative is always like the nominative. 


EXAMPLES. 
Ἁ 
“8. 0,temple. τὸ hall. Dual Plural. 
: ͵ . ’ Ud ΄ 
N. {νεὼς | ἀνώγεων || vew [ἀνώγεω || νέῳ | ἀνώγεω 
’ ~ 3 ᾿ Sn > ’ 
G. | vew avayem || νέων | avoyenr|| νέων | ἀνωγξων 
~ ~ > ’ 
D. νεῷ avayen - | vems | ανωγεῳς 
J ee ,“ a? oe 
A. | νεὼν ανωγέων νέως | avwyen 
V. | vewg | ἀνωγεων ven | ἀνώγεω 
j 


Remarks. : 


1. The expression Attic second declension is by no means to be 
understood, as if the Attics were accustomed to inflect all nouns 
in o¢ in this way. It is, on the contrary, an ancient and peculiar 
déclension of a very limited number of words, of some of which 
moreover there exist forms in the common second declension, as 
0 λαός people, ναὸς temple, also λεώς, νεώς. So 6 λαγώς hare, 


᾿.44 ω THIRD DECLENSION. _ [Ὁ 38. 


Tonic λαγωὸς Ὁ and λαγός. Other examples are ὁ κάλως cable, and 
ὃ πάτρως, μήτρως, paternal and maternal uncle. Of those words 
of which two forms are actually current, that which falls’ under 
this declension is commonly peculiar to the Attic dialect. 

2. This declension has a peculiar accusative in ὦ, particularly 
used in the proper names Kos, Kews, Téws,” Ade, and in ἡ ἕως - 
the dawn (accus. τὴν ἕω), which is the Attic form for ἠώς of the 
lonics. 

3. The accent of the genitive vew is contrary to the rule laid 
down ὃ 33 Rem. 7. With respect to the other anomalies in the 
accent of this declension, see above under ὃ 12. 7. 


~~ 


THIRD DECLENSION. 


§ 38. GENDER. 


1. In consequence of the diversity of endings in this declen- 
‘sion, the determination of the gender by the termination admits of 
no general rule, and resort must be had to observation of the indi- 
vidual cases. A few rules however with respect to some termi- 
nations are given below. . 

2. In general, the ¢ is found at the end chiefly of masculines and 
feminines, and the short vowel, at the end of neuters. No neutérs 
end in € or wy, 


Remark. “The following is an enumeration of those endings, 
whose gender is fixed. In giving the exceptions, no notice is tak- 
en of personal appellations, such as ἢ μήτηρ mother, ἡ δάμαρ 
spouse, whose gender is apparent. Where however U (univer- 
sally) is placed, there no personal appellation of another reaner 
exists. 


Masculines. 

1. All in eve, 45 ὁ dgevs mule, ἀμφορεύς amphora. U. 

2. All substantives which have ντὸς in the genitive ; as ὁ τέ. 
yw -οντὸς tendon, ὁ ὁδούς -οντος tooth, ὁ ἱμάς -ἄντος thong. The © 
only exceptions to this are some names of cities. 

,3. Those which end in 7@, as 0 ξωστήρ girdle; except ἢ γα- 
στήρ belly, xno fate. By the poets also 7 ἀήρ air, mist, which is 
usually masculine ; and the neuter contracts, of which hereafter. 


Ἢ - 
‘ 


᾿ δὲ 38, 39.] GENDER.—INFLECTION. 45 
Γ᾿ “ὩΣ “ : 2 
ie. “Feminines. 


a All in @,-as ἠχώ echo. U. 

9. Those in as, gen. ados, as ἡ λαμπᾶς torch; with the ex- 
ception of some adjectives of the common gender. 
3. Those in ες, as ἡ, πόλις cily, ἡ, χάρες grace. Excepting ὁ ὄφις 
. serpent, ὁ ἔχις. adder, ὃ κόρις bug, ὃ μάρις a certain measure, ὁ xis 
ἃ wood worm 0 hig lion, 0 δελφίς dolphin, ὁ, ἢ doves bird, 7, ὁ 
τίγρες tiger, ἡ. ὁ Dis bank, shore. 

4, Nouns of quality in τῆς (the Latin tas); as ἡ μεκρότης 
 parvitas. U. 


N euters. 


1. All i in @, 7, 4, Vv, as τὸ σῶμα body, κάρη head, μέλι honey, 
ἄστυ city. U. : 

2. All which teriainaité with short syllables in = and 0, as 
τὸ τεῖχος wall, τὸ ἦτορ breast, and the neuter adjectives in ἐς, ev, 
“Ὅν. 

use Those in ag, as τὸ ἧπαρ the liver, τὸ véxtag, with contracts 
in ξὰρ -70, as τὸ ἔαρ 70 spring, τὸ κέαρ κῆρ the heart, τὸ στέαρ 
στῆρ tallow. Excepting only ὁ. wae the starling. 

4. Those in (Qs which are not personal appellations ; as τὸ ὕ- 
ace: water, τὸ τέχμωρ mark. Excepting ὁ ἰχὼρ lymph, and 0 ἀχὼρ 
a blister. . 

5. Those in ας -ατος and -aoe, as τὸ τέρας τατος miracle, τὸ 
δέπας -αος cup ; excepting 0 hag -ἄος a stone, and ὁ or τὸ KPAS 
κρατός head. 

There are no other neuters of this declension, excepting τὸ 
πῦρ fire, τὸ φῶς light, τὸ οὖς ear, τὸ σταίς dough. 


: Nouns in ας, therefore, are generally masculine when they — 
make the genitive in avro¢, feminine when they make it in ados, 
and neuter when they make it in aro¢ and aoc. 


§ 99. INFLECTION OF THE THIRD DRCLENSION. 


In the declension of every noun, a distinction must be made 
between the root, and the changeable termination of the case. 
In the first and second declensious, the nominative has such a 
termination of case ; in the third declension, however, such ter- 
mination is attached only to the oblique cases—thus : 

Dec. Il. doy τος, oy του, oy τῷ 
— Ill. &yo, Ono τὸς, yo τί. 


40 | | THIRD DECLENSION. [$$ 39, 40. 


Still in the third declension, the nominative is rarely so unchang- 
ed, as in 879. In most cases. its last syllable is modified either by 
addition, as gen. uv τος, from the root wv, where the nominative 
is uvs,—or by dropping a letter, as gen. σώματος, from the root ᾿ 
σωματ, nom. owuc,—or by substitution, as gen. εἰκόνος, from the 
root εἶκον; nom, é/xwv. 

Ramarx. In order to decline correctly a noun in the third 
declension, it is absolutely necessary to know beforehand the 
nominative -and one of the remaining cases. If, however, one 
only is known, the rules are much more simple for finding the 
nominative from the genitive, than for finding the genitive from 
the nominative; because in general the radical form is found 
uncorrupted in ‘the genitive, but not in the nominative. It is 
also accordingly necessary in the lexicon to take note as well of 
the genitive, as of the nominative. But as in reading, some 
oblique case is more likely to occur than the nominative, and it 
is accordingly requisite, in order to ascertain the meaning of the 
word, to discover the nominative from said oblique st] the rules 
| which follow may be applied for this purpose. 


§ 40. 


1. The most common changes, which the root of the word 
suffers in the nominative, are the following, viz. 

a) The assumption of ¢, as 0 μῦς, μύ-ος mouse ;* ὁ ΕΝ ἀλοός, 
salt. 

Ὁ) That instead of ¢ hia o of dhe root, ἢ and ὦ are found in 
the nominative, in masculines and feminines, as ἢ εἰκών, ἘΆΝ 
image ; ἀληϑής, ἀληϑέ.ος, true. 

2. With respect to the more exact application of these princi- 
ples, two principal cases must again be distinguished, viz. (1) That 
of a consonant before the inflectional termination ; (2) That of a. 

\vowel before the inflectional termination. 


* The sharner § is to understand in these and following examples, that 
from the radical form sv, which is detected in the genitive μῦος, the 
nominative μῦς is derived. : 


δ πε} | INFLECTION. 47 


a : §4i. 
ἀξ Ι When a consonant precedes the inflectional termination, and 
the nominative takes the ¢, it is understood in the first place, that 
: this ¢ with y, ~, 7, and with β, 7, g, passes into § and w, as noone 
κόραχ-ος, ὄνυξ ὄνυχ-ος, WY ὠπ-ός, χάλυψ χαλυβ-ος. 

2. These nominatives in § and w never change the « and o of 
the root, as φλέψ φλεβός, φλόξ φλογὸς, aidiow αἰϑίοπος, except- 
ing only ἡ ἀλώπηξ, ἀλώπεκος, the for. 

3. If however the consonant immediately preceding the inflec- 
tional termination is a 0, τ, or &, it is dropped before the ¢ assum- 
ed by the nominative, as λαμπὰς λαμπάδος, “ὡρίς Awgidos, κη- 
hig κηλῖδος, ὄρνις ὄρνιϑος, κόρὺς κόρύϑος, 4 Πάρνης Πάρνη- 
Gos, τέρας τέρατος, χάρις χαρῖτος. 

_4. In like manner vy and vz are dropped before this assumed 
ον but in this case the short vowel, always with vz and commonly 
with v, is lengthened in the manner given above (ὃ 25. 4.) as yi- 
γᾶς γίγαντος, χαρίεις χαρίεντος, ὁδούς ὀδόντος, --δελφίς (long v) 
δελφῖνος, Φοόρκῦς Φορκῦνος,---μέλας μελᾶνος, κτείς κτενὸς." 

5. When ¢ is not assumed in the nominative, v and @ are the 
only consonants, which can remain at the end of the nominative, 
as 970 ϑηρ-ος, αἰὼν αἰών-ος. It would be necessary to drop all 
_ the others; though this, however, actually occurs only with τα 
as σώμα σώματος, Ξενοφῶν Ξενοφώντ-ος. 

In either case, ¢ and ὁ of the masculine and feminine are al- 
ways changed into ἡ and w, as λεμήν λιμέντος, ῥήτωρ δήτορ-ος, 
γέρων γέροντ-ος. 

6. Some neuters, which make arog in the genitive, take @ in- 
stead of ¢ in the nominative, as ἧπαρ ἥπατος. 


* sig is the only additional like example. See below in § 70. 
+ Because all the other letters take the ¢ (§ or w) in the nominative ; 
ff and 6 do not at all occur before the inflectional termination of this de- 


elension, and of 4 the only example is ac, aos. 


48 : THIRD DECLENSION. i [$39 


7. According to the premises, the usual cases, in which a con- 
Υ . 
sonant precedes the inflectional termination, are as follows, viz. 
γος, κος, χος E (φλόξ τς 
Bosy πος, pos way ἅς 


“ dos, roc, ϑὸς fromanom.in ¢ (isis, 
λαμπαδὸς &c. 


The genitive in from a nom. in } 


66 ςς 


but especially 


α σώμα τατος 
arog mom a nom. in ) ας τέρας -ατος 
ao (ἧπαρ -ατοςὴ ; 


Bee . §y (Πᾶν, Πανός) 
The genitive in νος from a nom. in δ᾽ (δίς, δινος) 


- but especially _ 
*¢ evog and ovog from a nom. in yy and wy 
᾿ (λιμήν λιμένος, εἰκών εἰκόνος) 


ςς 


ας, εἰς, GUS, US 

(pas φάντος, ϑείς ϑέντος 

δοὺς δόντος. pus φύντος) 
ὧν (γέρων, ovros) 
ρος from ἃ nom. in @ (ϑήρ 97009) 

but especially 
€00¢ and ορος from a nom. in 7@ and we 
(aidno αἰϑέρος, ῥήτωρ δήτορος) 
΄ τς and from two neuters in 0g, viz. 
ἄορ sword and ἦτορ breast. 


The genitive in yro¢ froma nom. in 


[1 {ς (ς 


ςς 


8. The following cases require particular attention, viz, 0, ἡ 
che ἁλός salt, sea; τὸ μέλε pehorog honey ; τὸ κάρη κάρητος head ; 
ἢ νυξ νυχτὸς night ; 0 ἄναξ ἄνακτος king ; ἡ δάμαρ δάμαρτος 
spouse ; ὁ ποῦς ποδὸς foot ; with a few others which will be given 
below. 


Remarks. 


I. The quantity of the penult of the genitive in ας 4, v, is only 
fixed, like that of the nominative of other nouns, by authority. In’ 
general it is short; those cases therefore only will be noted where 
it is long. 


~ 


S$ Al, 42.| . INFLECTION. “49 


1. All substantives which make the genitive in ανος, wog, and 
uvos, have the penult. long ; as Πάν Πανός, παιὰν παίανος, δίς 
δινός, δελῳίς δελφῖνος, μόσυν μόσυνος. 

2 In like manner the penults of several in ἐς -ἰδὸς are long ; 
and as these are all oxytones in the nominative, the long syllable 
in the genitive is circumflexed, by which mark they are known; 
as σφραγίς σφραγῖδος, κνημίς ᾿χνημῖδος. 

3. Of others not included under the preceding heads, the fol- 
lowing are to be noted as having the penult of the genitive long : 


ὃ, ἡ ὄρνις, Boo bird ὁ Φοίνιξ, κος Phenician, palm-tree, 
ἡ ἄγλις, Fos garlic ὁ δίψ, πε — rush __[red-colour 
0 τέττιξ, γος  ὀἰοοιιοί ὁ tw, πος (an insect) 
ἢ μάστιξ, γος scourge 0 ϑωραξ, κος breast plate 
αὶ πέρδιξ, x0S ~— partridge 6 ἱέραξ, κος = hawk 
ἢ βέμβιξ, κος top ὁ ota&, κος ~~ helm 
ἢ σπάδιξ, κος palm branch ὁ κόρδαξ, κος a dance 
ὃ σύρφαξ, κος Πιμὰ κήρυξ, κος διεταϊὰ 
φέναξ, κος deceiver ὁ κηῦξ, κος (ἃ marine bird) 
Φαίαξ, κος Pheacian ὁ βόμβυξ, κος silkworm 
τβλάξ, κος stupid ὦ κόκκυξ, γος cuckoo - 
αἱ bak, γος grape ὁ γύψ, 10g ~—- vulture 
Kao” Carian ὁ ψάρ starling. 


» IT. All -monosyllable nominatives, with the exception of the , 
pronoun τίς, are long; therefore πῦρ, πυρός. -' 

Π|. When the termination év¢ -evro¢g is preceded by 7 or 0, ἃ 

_ €ontraction commonly ensues ; thus tiers τεμήξντος contracted 
‘into τιμῆς τιμῆντος, μελιτόξις μελιτόεντος contracted into μελιτοῦς 
τοῦντος. Other enh tale are the names of cities in οὖς OvrTOS, 
88 ᾿᾽Οποῦς., &c. 


ᾧ 42. VOWEL BEFORE THE ENDING. 


_ 1. Those nouns of this declension which have a vowel before 
‘the inflectional ending, (or ος pure in the genitive ὃ 27.'1), take 
“almost universally a ¢ in the nominative; a few neuters only in ὁ 
and v, and a few feminines in ὦ, are excepted. 

+ 2. Moreover as neuters. only (§ 38 Rem.) have nominative 
‘endings short in ¢ and 0, hence’in masculines and feminines the ¢ 
οἵ the other cases becomes or év, and the ὁ becomes ὦ or ov, 
‘in the nominative. 


7 


δ0. THIRD DECLENSION.—EXAMPLES. 


Ba 


Thus in particular are derived the following, viz. 
The gen. in aos from the neuters in ας, (σέλας σέλαος).. ; 


* .“ . og and vos from the nom. in vs, ὁ) and us, υ, 
on (nig κιός, δάκρυ -vos). 


the nom. in ovg (βοῦς Bods). 
the feminines in ὦ and ὡς, 
(nye -ος, αἰδώς -ὁος). 


the nom. in 4¢ and ἐς, 
(ἀληϑής neut. ἀληϑές 6: <o¢). 
the nom. in ευς, (ἡππεύς ἱππέως). 


In this place is especially to be noted γραῦς γρᾶός an old wo- 
man. For, ναῦς see ὃ 56. 4. 4 

4. Besides these, the genitives ἑος and ἕως are , formed by 2 
change of vowel, 6. g. 

a) From the numerous neuters in o¢, as τεῖχος, τείχεος. 

b) From most nominatives in ἐς and “ and some in vg-and v, 
as πθλὲς πόλεως, ἄστυ ἄστεος. : 


ςς (ς 66 00¢ from 


BRA REO (se) from 


Remarx. The vowels a, ἐς v, before the termination of the 
genitive (with the single exception of yeaos) are short. The 
monosyllable nominatives are here also long, as mos μὖος. 


ᾧ 48. 


The following examples will serve, i in essential points, for all 
the varieties in this declension. 


Sing. O,animal. ὃ, age. — 6,y,divinity. 6, lion. _ 0, giant. 
Nom. | #70 αἰὼν δαίμων λέων | γίγας. 
Gen. | ϑηρός αἰῶνος | δαίμονος λέοντος γίγαντος 
_Dat. | ϑηρὶ αἰῶνι δαίμονι λέοντε | γίγαντε — 
Acc. | ϑῆρα αἰῶνα δαίμονα λέοντα γίγαντα 
Voc. | O70 αἰὼν δαῖμον λέον γίγαν. 
Dual. | : 
N.A.V.| ϑῆρε αἰῶνε | δαίμονε | λέοντε | yiyovte 
α. Ὁ. | ϑηροῖν | αἰώνοιν | δαεμόνοιν | λεόντοιν | γιγάντουν 
Plural. . : ὧν Ἷ 
Nom. [-ϑῆρες αἰῶνες | δαίμονες | λέοντες | γίγαντες, 
Gen Onowy αἰώνων δαιμόνων | λεόντων γιγάντων. 
Dat. | ϑηρσί(ν) | αἰῶσι (vr); δαίμοσι (ν) | λέουσι(ν) γίγασι (ν 
Ace. | ϑῆρας αἰῶνας δαίμονας | λέοντας γίγαντας, 
Voc. | noes αἰῶνες | δαίμονες λέοντες γίγαντες. ’ 


᾿ 4487 


~ 


INFLECTION, 51 

᾿ Sing. dy raven. ὁ, ἧς child. 0,jackall. 0, woodworm. τὸ, thing. 

Nom. κόραξ . παῖς - | Fag κίς " | πρᾶγμα 

Gen. | κόρακος | καιδός wos | κιὸς | πράγματος" 

Dat. . κόρακι, παιδὶ doi’ nul πράγματι 

Ace. κόρακα | παῖδα daa “iv πρᾶγμα 

Voc. ποτ παῖ Fas | nic “ | πρᾶγμα 

Dual. 

NAY. κύρακε παῖδε θῶε κίε πράγματε 
6. Ὁ. κοράκοιν | παιδοῖν | ϑωοῖν | κιοῖν | πραγμάτοιν 
Plur. 

Nom. [κόρακες | παῖδες ass |uleg | πραγματὰ 

Gen. [κοράκων | παίδων ϑώων κιῶν πραγμάτων 

Dat. | κόραξι (ν) παισί (ν) | ϑωσί (ν) xual (v); moaypaoe (ν) 

Acc. κόρακας παῖδας ϑώας κίας πράγματα 

Voc. | κόρακες | παῖδες Owes κίες πράγματα 
Remarks. 


- 
> 


_ 1. These examples will sufficiently illustrate the declension ; for 
as soon as the nominative and genitive are ascertained by means 
of the foregoing rules and of the lexicon, the learner’s reflection 
will easily suggest, that all nouns which end in = and w are de- 
clined like xoge,—all which have the genitive in dos, Moc, and 
τος, like | παῖς παιδός;---ποιμήν ποιμένος like δαίμων. δαίμονος, 
ὁδούς ὀδόντος and ϑείς ϑέντος like λέων λέοντος, and ἧπαρ ἥπα- 
τος like πράγμα -ατος. It is only necessary to make some par- 
ticular observations with regard to the accusative and vocative sin- 
gular, and the dative plural, which will -be presently done.. 


2. Quantity. The +, «, and ας, in the terminations of the cases, 
are always short. Compare Remark II. 4, on Dec. I. For the 
quantity of the penult of the genitive, see the preceding sections. 


3. Accent. The following are the principal. rules relative to 
the accent. 

a) In dissyllable and longer words, the accent remains on the 
same syllable as in the nominative, so long as its nature: admits ; 
see above in κόραξ and aia. 

b) Monosyllables throw the accent, in the genitive and dative 
~ of each number, upon the termination ‘of the case. On the termi- 
nation ων it becomes a circumflex. See above ϑή0 and xis. 


4 


ἢ 
΄ 


52 THIRD DEC.—ACCUS. SING.—VOCATIVE. [δὴ 44, 45. 


c) On the contrary, the nominative), accusative, ‘and vocative 
never have the accent on the termination of the case.* 

Exc. From the second of these rules are principally excepted 
the participles, as ϑείς ϑέντος, ὧν ὄντος, &c. —the plural of {π6΄ 
adjectives nag πᾶν, (παντός, παντί,) pl. G. πάντων, Ὦ. πᾶσεν,---΄ 
and the genitive plural of some few others, as wg and παῖς aboue: 


΄ 


Ἶ § 44. OF THE ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR. 


1. The principal termination of the accusative in this declen- 
sion is a, but in some words in ἐς, vg, avs, and ov, there is also an 
accusative in v, formed, as in the other declensions, by changing 
the ¢ of the nominative into v, and retaining the same quantity. 
This is the only form of the accusative for those nouns which have 
a vowel before the termination of the case ; as βοῦς G. βούς--- βοῦν" 
δρῦς δρυός---δρῦν, and also éyOdy, πόλιν, γραῦν, &e. 

2..Those on the other hand which have a consonant in the 

genitive, where the last syllable of the nominative is accented, 
make the accusative in «, as ἐλπίς -ἰδος----ἐλπίδα' ποῦς ποδὸς --- 
πύδα. But if the last syllable be unaccented, they commonly take 
an ν in the accusative, though sometimes an a@, as ἔρίές -W0s—éouv 
and ἐρεδα᾽ κόρυς -υϑος---κόρυν and χύρυϑα᾽ εὔελπες ἐἰδος--εὔελ- 
πὲν and εὐέλπεδα᾽ πολύπους -οδος---πολύπουν and πολύποδα. 


§ 45. ΟΕ THE VOCATIVE. 


1. It is very common in this declension, for a noun to have a 
vocative of its own, but yet generally, especially in the Attic — 
writers, to make the vocative like the nominative. 'The follow- 
ing are accordingly the rules, by which nouns in this declension 
may form their vocative; but it must be left to observation in 
particular cases, whether they do actually so form them, or make 
the vocative like the nominative. . 

2. The terminations ες, ἐς, and vs, with the words παῖς, γραῦς, 


* Care must be taken not to confound the termination of the word, as 
σωτ-ήρ, w wth the termination of the case, as σωτῆρ-α. ; 


- 


(3) 


ᾧ 46.] DATIVE PLURAL. 53 


and βοῦς, drop the ¢ in the vocative, and those in εὐς assume the 
circumflex ; as βασιλεύς, voc. ὦ Paodev,—and so Πάρι, Amoi, 
Tov, ἡδύ, ἄς. and παῖ, youu, βοῦ. 

3. The same holds. of those in ας and εἰς, which drop ν before 
their ¢. They commonly, however, resume this y in the voca- 
tive, as tadas, τάλανυς, ὦ τάλαν: dias -αντος, ὦ “αν: yagl- 
εἰς -EVTOS, ὦ χαρίεν. 

4. Nouns, which in the termination of the nominative have 
ἢ or w, only shorten this in the vocative ; but this in general only — 
when the other cases also have ¢ and 0; see above δαίμων and 
λέων. 80 too μήτηρ -ἔρος, ὦ μῆτερ᾽' ῥήτωρ τορος, ὦ ὁῥῆτορ' 
“Σωκράτης -£06, ὦ “Σώκρατες. 
__ 5. Feminines in ὦ and ὡς form the vocative in 07, as ΣΈΡΗΡΗ 
ὦ Σαπφοῖ ᾿Πώς, ὦ ᾿Μοῖ. 
Rem. 1. The three following throw the accent back, viz. πά- 
τερ, ἄνερ, Oaeg, from πατὴρ, ἀνήρ, duno brother-in-law, Ὁ. ἕρος. 
᾿ Rem. 2. The words, which retain the long vowel in the other 
cases, remain also unaltered in the vocative, as ὦ Πλάτων G. 
νωνος, ὦ Ξενοφῶν G.-ovros, ὦ ἰητήρ α.-ῆρος, ὦ Κράτης G. τῆτος. 
There are three only of this kind, which shorten the vowel in the 
vocative, ᾿““πόλλων -wvos, ὦ ” Arodov’ Ποσειδὼν -avos, ὦ Τ|6ό- 


σειδον, Neptune; and σωτὴρ «ἦρος, ὦ σῶτερ. Here also it is to 
be observed, that the accent is thrown back. 


§ 46. OF THE DATIVE PLURAL. 


1. When the termination σὲν and ἐν of the dative plural is 
preceded by a consonant, the general rules again operate, as in 
_the ¢ of the nominative (δ 41); see above in χύραξ, παῖς, αἰών. 
as also in “4oaw,” 4ραβος--- Apawi ἧπαρ ἥπατος --- ἥπασιν, 


2. When in these instances the vowel of the nominative is al- 
tered in the oblique cases, it remains altered in the dative plural; 
as δαίμων -ονος---δαίμοσιν᾽ ποῦς ποδός---ποσίν᾽ ἀλώπηξ -exos 
“ς---αλωπεξεν. But when v7 is omitted, the lengthening of the vow- 
el mentioned above (ὃ 25. 4.) takes: place; see above λέων, γίγας, 
“and so too ddovs -ὀντος---οδοῦσι" τυπεὶς -ἔντος---τυπεῖσιν, If, 


ἢ 


% 


δ4. THIRD DEC.——SYNCOPE ‘OF SOME NOUNS ΙΝ 70. 1 47. 


however, ν alone has been omitted, the short vowel remains, as 
ATES κτενός---κτεσίν. 


Rem. 1. Also the adjectives (not participles) in evg -evrog have 
only an ¢, as φωνήεις -Evros—parneow. 


3. When the termination ovy, σὸς is immediately preceded by a . 


vowel—of course when there is an ὃς pure in the genitive—this 
vowel also remains unaltered, as in the other oblique cases; as 
ἀληϑῆς -ἐος---αληϑέσε' τεῖχος -E0S—telysou δρῦς δρυῦός----δρυσίν. 
Only when the nominative singular of such words has-a diphthong, 
. the dative plural also assumes it, as βασιλεὺς -ἑως----βασιλεῦσε' 
γραῦς γραός.--γραυσί: βοῦς βοός--- βουσίν. 

_ Rem. 2. In the ancient and Epic dialect, instead of ov and ov, 
in all words, ἐσὲ and ἐσών, or eoou and ἑσσέν, are used; which ter- 
mination, as it begins with a vowel, is appended precisely. like 


the terminations of the other cases, as avaxt-£01, x000%-E0L, τὸν 
EOOLY. 


§ 47. SYNCOPE OF SOME NOUNS IN 7@. 


1. Some nouns in 70, G. e90¢, drop the ¢ in the genitive and 
dative singular, and also in the dative plural, where they take an 
after the 0, as πατήρ Sather, 

Gen. (πατέρος) πατρύς, Dat. (πατέρι) πατρί 
A. πατέρα, V. πάτερ. 
Pl. πατέρες, G. πατέρων, D. πατράσι, A. πατέρας. 


ες 2. The same is the case, with some anomaly of the accent, in 


4 


the following ; μήτηρ (μητέρος) μητρός; mother ; ἡ γαστήρ (γα- 


στέρος) γαστρός, belly, stomach ; ϑυγάτηρ (ϑυγατέρος) ϑυγατρός, 
daughter ; Anyunrno (4ημητέρος) Δήμητρος, Ceres; which last 
makes in the accusative Anunrea. For ἀνήρ, see the anomalous 
Nouns, ὃ 56. 4. 


4 


Remark. The poets sometimes neglect this syncope, aia say γέ ἑ 


instance πατέῤος. and sometimes they adopt it where in general 
it is not found, as πατρῶν, ϑύγατρες. 


δῷ 48, 49. | CONTRACTED DECLENSION. | 55 


Py. CONTRACTED DECLENSION. 


᾿ of the nouns that have o¢ pure in the rouitine, there are 
very few which are not, in the common language, more or less 
contracted ; although it is by no means always ἫΝ where by 
the general rules it might be. : 
9 In some respects, moreover, the mode of contraction varies ' 
_ from that prescribed by the general rules, and one species of this 
_ variety is expressed in the following canon, viz. 
The contracted accusative plural of the third declension 1. as formed 
like the contracted nominative plural. - 
Pi Remark. Thus, for instance, ἀληϑέες and βόες are regularly | 


contracted, ἀληϑεῖς, βοῦς, and, contrary to the general rules, the 
contraction of the accusative ἀληϑέας, βόας, is exactly the same. 


§ 49. 
- Words in ἧς and ἐς, G. e0¢, which are almost exclusively 
adjectives, neuters in o¢ and ¢0¢, and the feminines in ὦ and we, 


G. οος, are contracted in all cases, where two vowels meet. 
-» 


ἜΧΑΜΡΙΕΒ. 
Sing. ἢ, galley. 40, wall. = * iy echo. 
Nom. τριήρης τεῖχος ἠχώ 


Gen. τριήρεος τριήρους τείχεος τείχους ἤχοος ἠχοὺς 
Dat. τριήρεϊ τριήρει τείχει τείχει ἡχοὶ ἡχοῖ 


Acc.. τριήρεα τριήρη | τεῖχος YOO. ἠχώ 
Voc. | τρίηρες τεῖχος ἤχοϊ 
Dual. i 


N.A.V.| τριήρεε τριήρη , Peas τείχη | ἤχω 
G. D. | τρρηρέοιν τριηροῖν | τευχέοιν τδέχοιν 2d deci. 


Nom. rQUngeEs τριήρεις τείχεα τείχη | ἡχοὶ 
Gen. τριηρέων τρίηρων͵ τειχέων τεύχον | 2d deci. 
Dat. | τριήρεσι (v) τείχεσι, (ν) 
Ἄδα." τριήρεας τριήρεις τείχεα τείχη 
Voc. τριήρεες τριήρεις | τείχεα relyn 


δ᾽ THIRD DECLENSION. [ὁ 50. 
é 


Remarks. 


1, The uncontracted forms of the feminine in ὦ and ὡς are not 
used even by the lonics. ‘These words moreover are commonly 
used only in the singular. The dual and plural when used are 

formed according to the second déclension. 
3 2. The neuter adjectives in ἐς are declined like the neuters in 
ος ; accordingly in the plural we have ra ἀληϑέα, ἀληϑῆή. 
3. The dual in 7 formed from ξὲ departs from the general rule 

in 9 27. 3. 

; One masculine in ὡς, G. wog, viz. ἥρως the hero, admits a 

contraction, of which however no use is made in prose, except in 
ἥρωα ἥρω,---ἤρωας NOWS. 


§ 50. 


i. All other words admit the contraction only in the nomina- 
tive, accusative, vocative plural, and partly also in the dative sin- 
gular, particularly those in vs, G. νος, 85 ὁ ἐχϑύς fish. 

Sing. N. ἐχϑύς, 6. ἰχϑύος, D. ἰχϑύϊ, A. ἐχϑύν. 

Plur. Ν. ἰχϑύες contr. ἐχϑῦς, G. ἐχϑύων, D. ἰχϑύσε (ν), 

ΠΑ. ἐχϑύας contr. ἰχϑῦς. ' 
τς 9. In the same manner are formed those in vs, if, according to 
the Ionic and Doric mode, they have τος in the genitive ; as in 
Herodotus, πόλος G. 20Avoc,—pl. πόλιες and πόλιας, contr. πόλις, 
—and these have also in the dative singular πόλοε contr. 710A. 
3. Another example is βοῦς ox, cow. 
Sing. Ν. βοῦς, G. Boos, Ὁ. βοΐ, A. βοῦν, V. Bow. 
Plur. N. βόες contr. βοῦς, G. βοῶν, D. βουσί (v), A. βόας. 
contr. βοῦς. 
Also γραῦς an old woman. : 
Sing: N. γραῦς, α. γραός, D. youl, A. γραῦν, V. youu. 
Plur. N. γρᾶες contr. γραῦς, G. γραῶν, D. yeavoi (rv), 
A. (yoaas) contr. γραῦς. 
In this last word is to be remarked the uncommon contraction of 
γρᾶες into youve. . , 

Rem. 1. It is worthy of note that, by this contraction, the plural - 
number is again made similar to the nominative singular; and ey- 
en where the quantity is different, the accent sometimes remains 


ἐγ same ; as nom. sing. ὁ βότρυς the cluster of grapes, acc. pl. τοὺς 
ὀτρῦς. 


es se τὶ coNtekovely Βέσιξαοῖον. : y a7 


~ 


; Rem. 2. "The word ὄϊς sheep follows the example of πόλες 
ἡδοναί, accordingly makes Gen. dio¢, and Nom. and Acc. pl. 

ores with the ὁ long. Commonly, however, even the nominative 
τς δὰ is contracted, as 7 oes, and then the word is thus declined : 


ΩΝ Sing. eed PL: 
eee Nom. οἷς Οοἶες, οἷς 
‘ ᾿ Ὁ, 
yds Gen. “0109 - 
Dat. οἱ 
Acc. οἷν οἷας, οἷς. 


Hence we can say ἡ. ai, and rac, οἷς. - aj/ tite 


δ. dee ᾿ς 


i. Most nouns ἴῃ ἐξ and ¢, and some few in ὃς and v, retain in 
common language the yowel of the nominative only in the accu- 
sative and vocative singular; in all other cases they change it in- 
to. In these words, also, the dative <i’ is éhanged into «, and 
ἣ the plural seg and ἑὰς into «cc, and the neuter ea into 7, but no 
farther contraction takes place. . 

2. The substantives in ἐς and v¢ have besides what is called 
the Aitic genitive, by which, instead of o¢ in the genitive singular 
they make ὡς, and in the dual, instead of ov they make ov, but 
accent all three genitives as if the last syllable were short. 

3. The néuters in v and ὁ have the common genitive, as ἄστυ, 
ἄστεος, ἀστέων" πέπερι, πεπέρεος. 


EXAMPLES. 


5. Hy ctty.* ὦ, ell. τὸς city. Plur. 

N.| πόλις | πῆχυς | ἄστυ || πόλεις πήχεις | ἄστη 
G. | πόλεως | πήχεως | ἄστεος || πόλεων πήχεων | ἀστέων 
D. j πόλεε | πήχεε | ἄστει | πόλεσι(ν) πηχεέσι (vr) ἄστεσε(ν) 
A. | πόλεν .) πῆχυν | ἄστυ πόλεις πηχεὶς ἄστη 

V. | mode πῆχυ | ἄστυ πόλεις πήχεις ἄστη “" 


Dual. N. A. | πόλεε | mance: _| ἄστεε 
. G. Ὁ. | πολέων | πηχέων | aoréow 


* In general πόλες signifies city politically, and ἄστυ geographically. 
ὃ 


58 . τς THIRD DECLENSION. ᾿ 18 pas 53 


Rem- Adjectives ἢ in vs, u, have the common genitive, and al- 
so do not contract the neuters plural, as δὺς neut. nov, gen. ἡδέ- 
oc, Plur. ἡδεῖς neut. ἡδέα. . 


§ 52. 


1. Nouns in εὐς have also the Attic genitive, but only the sin- | 
gular in ὡς, and without any peculiarity of accent. In these too 
the contraction extends only to the dative singular and nominative 
and accusative plural, in which last case, however, the éa¢ is more 
common. 


EXAMPLE. 
Sing. 0, king. Dual Plural 
Nom. βασιλεύς βασιελέε βασιλεῖς 
Gen. | βασιλέως | βασιλέοιν βασιλέων 
Dat. | βασιλεῖ. } βασιλεῦσε (v) 
Ace. [βασιλέα βασιλέας and βασιλεῖς 
Voc. | βασιλεῦ βασιλεῖς 


Rew. The length of :the « in the accusative singular and plu- 
ral is an Attic peculiarity. The earlier Attic writers contract the 
nominative plural into 7, as “βασιλῆς. The lonians make uni- 
formly βασιλῆος, fern -N@, -nas, &c. 

BR ΕΒ ΙΝ 

1. There are some peculiarities in the contraction of the third 
declension adopted by the Attic writers, when another vowel pre- 
cedes and follows δ. In that case the termination ¢a is contracted, 
not into 7, but into ας, as ὑγεής healthy, Acc. sing. and Neut. pl. 
ὑγιέα contr. ὑγιὰ χρέος debt, Pl. χρέεα χρέα. 

Rem. 1. Even some in évg drop the « in this manner before 
ας ας, and ὡς, as χοεύς (a certain measure), G. yous (for χρέως), 
Acc. pl. yous. 

2. In proper names in χλέης contr. χλῆς, a double contraction 
arises, which, however, is confined in general to the dative. 


N. Tleounhens contr. Περικλῆς 
G. Περικλέεξος contr. Περικλεοῦς aoe 
D. Περικλέεῖ _ Περικλέεν Περικλεῖ 
A. Περικλέεα 7 Tlegunhee Ἢ 


V. Τ]Ιερίκλεες contr. Tlegizhers 


: § 54, 55.] CONTRACTED DECLENSION. _ 59 


lees § 54. 

1. Of the neuters in ag these two, viz. κέρας horn and τέρας 
miracle, make arog in the genitive, but drop the τ in the [onic di- 
alect, as κέρατος, κέραος" τέρατος, τέραος. And the three follow- 
ing, viz. γῆρας old age, γέρας honour, and κρέας flesh, always have 
αος only. 

9. Hence arises the following contraction. 


EXAMPLE. 


Pas Dual Plural 


Ν. Α. Υ. κέρας κέραξ κέρα 
α. κέραος κέρως κέραοιν κερῷν 
D. κέραϊ κέρᾳ 


κέραα κέρα, 
κεράων κερῶν 
κέρασε (ν) 


, 3. The other neuters in αὐ, aoc, as δέπας cup, σέλας glitter, 
have only the forms in « and @, as τὰ déna, τῷ σέλᾳ. 


Rem. The lonians often change the « into ες in the inflection, 
as HEQEDS, τὰ κέρεα, Kc. 


ᾧ 55. 


The comparatives in ων, neut. ov, gen. ονος, drop the ν in the 
accusative singular and the nominative, accusative, and vocative plu- 
val, and contract the two vowels. It is here, however, to be re- 
marked, that without this contraction the y is never dropped, even 
in the Ionic dialect. 


EXAMPLE. | . 
Sing. Plur. 
Nom. μείζων greater μείζονες contr. μείζους 
Gen. μείζονος μειζόνων 
Dat. μείζονι μείζοσι (vy) 
Acc. μείζονα contr. μείζω μείζονας contr. μείζους 
Voc. μεῖζον μείζονες contr. μείζους 


Neuter pl. τὰ μείζονα contr. μείζω. 

The dual remains unaltered. 

Rem. Of the same character, though more violent, is the con- 
traction familiar to the Attics of the accusative of the two names 
* Andhhwv τωνος, and ΤΙοσειδών -ωνος Neptune, viz. , 

Ace. ᾿4πόλλωνα. Andiio Ποσειδῶνα, Ποσειδῶ. 


- 
͵ 


60 THIRD DECLENSION.—EXAMPLES. Ὁ  [ᾧ δῦ, 


Examples for practice on all the rules of the third declension. 


Such letters preceding the termination of the case, as cannot 
be ascertained by the foregoing’ rules, are given in parentheses. 


I. Examples of such as have consonants before the termina 
tion of the cuse. — 


ὁ ἀγκών. elbow oe ἡ Flhag (δ). Greece 

ἢ ἀηδὼν () nightingale ὁ Ediny a Greek 

ὁ ἀήρ (εν air ἡ ἐλπίς (δ) hope 
ὁ αἰϑήρ (e) sky ἡ ἕρίς (0) strife 

ἡ αἴξ (7) goat ὁ Seoamwr(ovr) servant 

7 ἀκτίς (iv) ray ὁ Bis (w) heap 

ὁ ἀνδριὰς (vr) statue ὁ ἱέραξ (ax) hawk 

ὁ ἄξων (0) axle ὃ ἱμάς (ν) thong 

ἡ αὖλαξ (x) furrow τ΄ ἢ narnhew (φ) stair 

ἡ βήξ (χ) cough τς ἢ κηλίς (1 — spot 

ὁ γέρων (ovr) old man ὁ “how branch 

ὃ γρύψ (x) ~— griffin ἢ κνημίς (0) splint 
ὁ yoy (vn) vulture ἢ κόρυς (ϑῚ » helmet 
᾿ ἢ δαΐίς (τ) meal ὁ χκτείς (εν) — comb 

ἢ δᾷς (0) torch ἢ κύλιξ (x) cup 

ὁ δελφίς (tv) dolphin τὸ κῦμα wave 

ὁ δράκων (ovr) serpent ~ ἢ λαΐϊλαψ x) — storm 

0 Auxwy * Lacedemonian 7% σάρξ (x) Slesh 

ὁ λάρυγξ (y) throat ἢ σειρὴν siren 

ὁ λιμὴν (ε) port - ᾿ς χρῷ στύμα mouth 

ἡ duyé (x) lynx | 4 Στυξ (7) the Styx 

0 μαστιξ (ty) — scourge ἡ SpiyE(y) Sphinx 

Opn, month . ἢ Τίρυνς (8) (name of a city) 

ὃ μόσυν (3) (wooden tower) ὁ φϑείρ louse 

τὸ νέχταρ nectar ἢ φλέψ (2) vein 

ὁ ὄνυξ (y) nail, talon 7 φλόξ (y) flame 

ὁ ὄρτυξ (vy) φιιαῖϊ 0 goo thief 

τὸ οὖϑαρ (τ) udder τὸ φῶς (τ) light 


ὃ παιὰν (ἃ)  pacan ὁ χάλυψ (3) εἰεοὶ 


§ ὅ6.7 IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 61 


΄ 


ὁ πένης (1) _ poor man ἢ ὶ χελιδών (0) swallow 
ὁ πίναξ (x) ~ tablet ὦ χήν goose 
ὁ ποιμήν (e) shepherd ἡ χϑών earth 
ἡ πτέρυξ (y) wing ο΄ ἢ yoo (0) snow ; 
ἡ πεὺξ (χ) fold. ἡ χλαμὺς (ὁ) military robe - 
ὁ δίς (Ww) nose ὁ ψάρ (a) starling 
ἢ «Σαλαμίς (iv) Salamis ἢ ὧψ visage. any 


Ii.” Examples of such as have a vow® before-the termination of 


" the case, and are more or less contracted. 


τὸ ἄνϑος . flower — ὁ ὀρεύς mule 
0 βότρυς _ grape τὸ ὅρος “mountain 
τὸ γένος race ἡ ὄψεις sight, vision 
ἡ γένυς jaw bone - ἢ πειϑὼ persuasion 
τὸ σχέπας cover τ ὁ πέλεκυς ax (see δ 51. 9.) 
ἡ δοὺς () oak τὸ πέπερι pepper 

- 6 ἱππεύς | horseman ἢ πίτυς - pine 
τὸ χόμμε gum ἡ ποίησις poetry 
ἢ Ant Latona ἢ πρᾶξις action 
ὦ μάντιες _prophet 6ὃδο.εῳο © στάχυς ear. 
0 mus (Ὁ) mouse ἢ φύσις = nature. 


§ 56. IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 


1. irregularity in the declension of nouns, as in the conjugation 
of verbs, has its origin for the most part in the existence of a 
twofold form of the same word. It is frequently the case that the 
Greek language, particularly i in the ancient and poetical dialect, 
has words of several terminations and forms of inflection, while 
the signification remains the same; as “ημήτηρ and 4ήμητρα 

Ceres ; δάκρυον and δάκρυ tear. This latter form is older. 

! 2. Occasionally, moreover, one form remained in use in one 
case and one in another; and thus a word became a true anoma- - 
lon ; ‘see below Ζεύς, γυνή, ὕδωρ. &c. But often both forms con- 


- 


62 IRREGULAR DECLENSION. [ὃ 56. 


tinued in use in the ‘same case, as υἱὸς son, G. υἱοῦ and vieog, and 
such an instance is called by the grammarians an abundans. 

3. When both forms suppose one nominative, from which they — 
variously descend, the word is called a Heteroclite, as when Οἰδί- 
ποὺς makes in the G. Οἰδίποδος and Οἰδίπου. When however 
one of the forms SUDHONGE a different obsolete nominative, it is 
called a Metaplasm, as ὄνειρον dream, Gen. ὀγείρον and ὀνείρατος, 
from the obsolete ὀνείρας. 

A, The following words, of which some are Heteroclites and 
some Metaplasms, are worthy of particular note for the irregulari- 
ty their declensions. 

. Avno man belongs to the class of words like ἜΝ (δ 47), 
but : admits the syncope in all increasing cases, with an insertion 
of ὃ (δ 19 Rem. 1), as ἀνδρός, ἀνδρί, ἄνδρα, ὦ ἄνερ. Pl. ἄνδρες, 
ἀνδρῶν, ἀνδράσιν, ἄνδρας. The poets, not Attic, make use of the 
i form of the. genitive ἀνέρος, &e. 

. Αὐύων dog, κυνός, κυνί, κύνα, οὐ κύον. Pl. κύνες, stinate, κυ- 
oi, κύνας. 

3. Πυύξ, 7, a place in Athens, in the old writers πυκνός, πυκνί, 
πύκνα, afterwards also πνυκός, &c. 

4, Xsio, 11, hand, χειρός, in the.G. D. dual χεροῖν, and the D. 
pl. yse0i.—By the poets also χερός, χερί. 

5. Θοίξ hair has τριχός, &c. D. pl. Gout, according to § 18.3. 

6. Οὖς, τό, ear, G. wroc, &c. G. pl. ὥτων, D. pl. wor. 

if Toha, τό, milk, G. γάλακτος, D. γάλακτι. 

8, YOwe, τό, water, and oxwe, τό, filth, have G. ὕδατος, σκα- 
τὸς, &c. D. pl. ὕδασι, ὅτε. 

9. Τόνυ, τό, knee, and δόρυ, τό, spear, have G. γόνατος, δόρα-᾽ 

τος, &c. D. pl. γόνασι, &c.—There is also an ancient genitive 
and dative, δορός, δορί, from ddgv.—lon. γούνατος, δούρατος, &c. 
Epic γουνός, doveos, Pl. τὰ γοῦνα, δοῦρα, &c. 

10. Θέμις, n, justice, «Themis, G. in the ancient and epic form 
Θέμεστος, &c. afterwards also Θέμιτος and Θέμιδος. Ionic Θέμιος. 

11. Μάρτυς witness, μάρτυρος, ἕο. A. μάρτυρα and μάρτυν, 
D. pl. μάρτυσιν. 


§ 56.] IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 63 


12. Naws, "i ship, Tonic νηῦς, is thus declined by the Attics, 
G. νεώς (for ναὸς § 26 Rem.7.) D. νηΐ, A. ναῦν, N. pl. νῆες, Ὁ. 
᾿ ψεῶν, D. ναυσίν, A. ναῦς. (See βοὺς ὃ 50. 3.) The Ionians have’ 
sometimes νηὸς &c. sometimes νεὸς &c. and in the A. νῆα and νέα. 

413; Kizis, 7, key, G. κλειδὸς, has in the accusative κλεῖδα, but 
more commonly κλεῖν, and in the plural κλεῖδες, κλεῖδας, contr. 
κλεῖς. 

14. Ζεὺς Jupiter, G. “Διός, Ὁ. Ai, A. Ala, V. Zev, by the 
poets also Ζηνός. Ζηνὶ, Ζῆνα, from the obsolete nominatives Zi 
and Ζῆν. . 3 

16. Γυνή woman, γυναικός, γυναικί, γυναῖκα, ὦ γύναι. Pl. 
γυναῖκες, γυναικών, γυναιξί, from the obsolete Tvvaié. 


Remarks. 


1. To the Heteroclites are also to be added those in ¢, 
which are declined according to the first and third declensions ; 
especially proper names like Θαλῆς, which makes commonly G. 
Θαλοῦ. (or by the Ionics with a change of the accent, Bahew, 
D. Θαλῇ, Acc. Θαλῆν.---Βαΐ also Θάλητος &c. This holds of oth- 
ers in the accusative alone. All compound proper names, which 
have é0¢ in’ ‘the genitive, make the accusative in ἢ and yy, as 
“Σωκράτης, G. (εος) ovg, Acc. «Σωκράτη and Σωκράτην. In like 
manner *“ Aons Mars, Ὁ. “Ageos which is never contracted, D. 
” Aoei, "Ἄρει, Acc. “4on and “Aonv. On the other hand many 
words in 7¢, which belong to the first declension, are formed: by 
the Tonics in the accusative singular and plural like the third, as 
τὸν δεσπότεα, PI. τοὺς δεσπότεας, from δεσπότης -ov, and Mi- 
“τιάδεα from “ιλτιάδης -ov.* 

2. Another sort of Heteroclites are those in ἐς, which in their 
inflection sometimes do, and sometimes do not, assume a conso- 
nant; as ἢ j μῆνις anger, G. μήνιος and μήνιδος" ὁ, ἡ doves bird, 
generally oovides Ke. but also Pl. doves, ὄρνεων. 


* All names formed like patronymics, as Midreadns, Ευριπίδης. 
&c, and most others not compounded like ὡΣΣωχράτης Ke. viz. Aioyivns, 
Ξέρξης, Ii VYNS, &c. are declined in the Greek throughout according to 
the first declension, with the exception of the jonicism mentioned in the 
text. The Latins, on the contrary, form them according to the third de- 
_ Clension, as Miltiadis, Xerzis, &c. 


θ4 . IRREGULAR DECLENSION. [ὁ 56. 


3. The nominative endings i in ὡς and wy also exhibit a vari- 
ety of changes, viz. 

a) Nom. weand 0s, as 7) ἅλως threshing floor, G. w, N. pl. ἅλοι. 

b) “ wg, G. ὦ and wos, as Wives. 

c) “ we, G. wro¢g, which also sometimes drop the τ The 
word ὁ ἵδρως sweat, ἵδοωτε, ἵδρωτα, has also another form with 
the Attics, viz. τῷ ‘doo, τὸν iow, which may be regarded asa 
contraction like κέρατι, κέρᾳ, but which also corresponds with the 
forms of the second declension Attic. The word ὁ γέλως. τῶτος 
᾿ laughter has in the accusative γέλωτα and γέλων. So also 0 yous 
LOMTOS skin makes the dative yew, but only in the proverbial. 
phrase ἐν χρῷ closely. .The lonians make χρὼς χρούς, &e. 

d) Nom. ὡς and wy. In these words, the double form occurs 
even in the Spe ete, as ὁ τυφὼς -w, and τυφῶν -wvog, whirl- 
wind. -. 

4. The word υἱός is regularly declined according to the se- 
cond declension, but receives also the following forms of the third 
declension, particularly in the Attic writers, viz. G. υἱέος, Ὁ. 
υἱεῖ, Acc. υἱέα. Dual vise, υἱέοιν. Pl. υἱεῖς, υἱέων, υἱέσεν," views 
and υἱεῖς. 

5. Of δένδρον tree and χοίνον lily, there are datives plural dév- 
000, κρίνεσι, and also other cases, which suppose a nominative 
singular in o¢ of the third declension. 

6. It is also an instance of Metaplasm, when sometimes from 
masculines i in ος of the second declension plurals in @ are formed, 
as τὰ δεσμα, ζυγα, σταϑμα, οἵτα, from ὁ δεσμός fetter, ζυγὸς yoke, 
σταϑμὸς balance, σῖτος food. 

7. Some words of more recent or foreign origin have a very 
simple declension, as Ding, G. Diin, Ὁ. Diy, A. Φιλῆν. ἝΝ 
cous, 6. ᾿]ησοῦ, D. Ajoou, A. ᾿]ησοῦν. ‘ 


‘ 


8. An anomaly of a very curious kind iets | in the epic dialect, 
in the very common final syllable gev and gz, which is used in- 
stead of the dative or genitive singular or plural, being appended 
to words in the following manner, viz. στρατὸς army, στρατῦφι 
κεφαλὴ head, κεφαλῆφιε βία violence, βίηφεν' στῆϑος -εὸς breast. 
στήϑεσφιν. ; 


§ 57, 58.] DEFECTIVES AND INDECLINABLES. = G5 


Ἁ 


_ $57. DEFECTIVES AND INDECLINABLES. 


_ 1. Defective nouns are chiefly such as, in their nature, cannot 
well occur in more than one number, saxiiguiashy the following 
plurals ; τὰ ἔγκατα entrails, οἱ ἐτησίαι trade winds, and the names 
of festivals, as τὰ Ζιονύσια the feast of Bacchus. 

2. Certain words are defective, which only occur in particular 
connexions ; such are the following, viz. 

The neuters ὄναρ vision, and ὕπαρ real Spperamee, only used 
as nominative and accusative. 

ΤῸ ὄφελος and τὸ ἦδος, advantage, only used as nominative, as 
τὶ ἂν ἡμῖν ὄφελος εἴης ; of what advantage wouldst thou be to us ἢ 

Main, instead of μασχάλης shoulder, in the phrase ὑπὸ μάλης 
under the arm. 

3. Lastly there are nouns defective in particular cases; such 
in prose are the following, viz. 

— G. τοῦ ἀρνός of the lamb, D. ἀρνί, A. ἄρνα, Pl. ἄρνες, D. 
aevact, all which are cases of an obsolete nominative 4PPHN, 
Gen. 4PPENOS, and by syncope αρνός. The want of a nom- 
- inative is supplied by ὁ auvoc. 
πρέσβυς an old man has in this signification only Acc. πρέσβυν, 
 V.agéofv. In the signification of ambassador it has only οἱ πρέ- 
σβεις &c. Ὁ πρέσβεσι. The cases here wanting are borrowed 
from πρεσβύτης an old man, and πρεσβευτής an ambassador. 

4. Indeclinables are for the most part only some foreign names, 
as τὸ πάσχα Easter, and among them the names of the letters of 
the alphabet, as ἄλφα, uv, &c. Of pure Greek words, most of the 
cardinal numbers are also indeclinable. (ὃ 70.) ; 


§ 58. ADJECTIVES. 


1. There are in Greek, as in Latin, adjectives both of two and 
of three endings; in the former, the masculine and feminine gen-— 
der have a common form. 

2. The feminine of adjectives of three endings always follows 


the first declension of nouns. 
9 


Γι : ADJECTIVES. ES 59. 


. 


3. The neuter has in the nominative; and of course in all the 
wike cases (see §33. Rem. 5), always one form ; which, however, in 
the remaining cases is uniformly declined like the masculine. 


- Remarx. It is therefore only necessary, in order to decline the 
adjective correctly, to know all the parts of the ‘nominative, and 
the genitive of the masculine. 


Ἃ 


§ 59, ADJECTIVES IN 06. 


1. Most numerous are the adjectives in 0g, which correspond. 
to the Latin in us, and-haye, like those, either three endings, viz. 
masc. 0, fem. 7 or @, neut. ov,—or two endings, viz. com. 0°, 
neut. ov. ; 1 lage 


Nore. For the few with the neuter in 0, see the pronoun § 74. 


2. The greater part are of three endings, and these, when a 
vowel or @ precedes, have in the fem. a, G. ag, otherwise always 
η, E.g. φίλος, φίλη, φίλον, dear, friend; λυρυκός, ἧ; Ov’ δεινός, 
n, Ov, dreadful. But also, φίλιος, φιλία, φίλιον, friendly; ἐλεύϑε- 
ρος, ἕρα, ἐρον, free; πυρῤῥός, a, ov, red lake fire; and other examples 
are ἀριστερός left, δεξιός right, δῆλος plain, ἐρυϑρὸς red, ϑαυμά.- 
ox0g wonderful, ϑεῖος divine, κοῦφος light, λεῖος smooth, λευκὸς 
white, μόνος alone, σοφός wise, σκληρός hard. 

Rem. 1. But those in οος have ἡ, as ὄγδοος the eighth, ὄγδοη, 
ϑοῦς, swift, ϑοή. But if @ precede, these also have a, as σϑρόος 
Frequent, ἀϑοόα. The feminine in @ is long. With respect to the 
accent see above ὃ 34 Rem. ΠῚ, 

3. Of two endings are such as these, viz.o and ἡ βάρβαρος 
not Greek, ἥσυχος calm, τυϑασσὸς tame, and in the Attics many 
others also, which are commonly of three endings. ; 

4. Im an especial manner belong to the adjectives of two end- 
ings all compounds, which, without any particular derivational 
ending, terminate in 0¢; as 0,7 φιλότεκνος fond of children, Bagv- 
roves barytone, πολυφάγος voracious, εὔφωνος harmonious, ἄλογος 
irrational, ἀργός for ἄεργος idle, ἀπόκληρος disinherited, διάλευκος 
whitish, although the simple is Asuxos, ἡ; ov. 


§ 60.] ADJECTIVES.—CONTRACTS. τ᾿ 67 


- 
A 


Also adjectives formed in this manner from compound yerbs, 
as “ee ὑπήκοος, from διαφέρω, ὑπακούω, &c. 

. All adjectives derived from other words, by the manifest 
we of the derivational endings χοὸς, λος, νος, ρος, τος, £0¢,—as 
μαντεκὸς from μάντις, δειλὸς and δεινός from AEIQ, φανερὸς 
from gaivw, πλεκτός from πλέκω, χρύσεος from yovoos,—are, at 
least in prose, of three endings. 

On the other hand, among the adjectives in μος, 209, ἑέος, aos, 
are several of common gender. ᾿ 

Rem. 2. When an adjective has one of these terminations, and 
is also compounded, a conflict of the different analogies ensues, 
with respect to which the following is to be observed. 

_ a) The compounds in xo¢ have not their immediate origin ina 
composition, but are only derived from compound werds ;_ they 
have therefore, always three endings, as ἐπεδεικτικός, ής ὄν, from 
ἐπιδείχνυμει, εὐδαιμονεκοὸς, ἡ, Ov, from εὐδαίμων. 

b) Other verbals, when they are first compounded as adjec- 
tives, follow the fourth rule above; as πνευστός, ή, ov, from πνξω; 
ϑεόπνευστος, ov, inspired ; παιδευτός, ή, ὄν, from παιδεύω, ἀπαί- 


δευτος, ov, untaught. When, however, they are derived from 
eevee verbs, the usage varies between the two formations. 


ᾧ 60. CONTRACTS IN ους. 
ἐ 

a) Those of common gender, which are formed by composi- 
tion from contracts of the second declension, like νοῦς, πλοῦς, as 
εὔνοος, εὔνοον, favourably disposed, contr. εὔνους, εὔνουν, G. εὔνου, 
&c. The neuter plural in ow remains unaltered in this form, as 
ta ἄνοα from ἄνους senseless. 

b) The numerical ideas ἁπλόος, διπλόος, ἡ, ov, &c. simple, 
twofold, &c. which have the peculiarity, that they uniformly con- 
tract 07 and oa into ἢ anda. E. g. 

Sing. διπλόος, demon, διπλόον. Plur. διπλόοι, διπλόαι, διπλόα 
contr. διπλοῦς, διπλῆ, διπλοῦν. contr. διπλοῖ, διπλαῖ, διπλὰ." 


* 1. Some adjectives in oo¢ are contracted, viz. 


* With these numerical adjectives must not be confounded the com- 
pounds of πλοῦς navigation, as 0, ἡ ἅπλους unnavigable, εὔπλους, ἄς. 
neut. Our, neut. pl. oa. » 


68 .. : ADJECTIVES. [ὁ 61, 62... 


2. Some adjectives also in ¢0¢, expressing a substance or mate- 

nial, are contracted, with a transposition of the accent; e. g. 
χρύσεος, χρυσέα, χρύσεον 
‘contr. χρυσοῦς, χρυσῆ, χρυσοῦν, G. ov, ἧς, οὔ, &c. 

When another vowel or ἡ precedes, the feminine is contracted 
not into %, but into a, as ἐρέεος woollen, contr. ἐρεοῦς, ἐρεᾶ, ἐρεοῦν" 
ἀργύρεος silver, contr. ἀργυροῦς, ἀργυρᾶ, ἀργυροῦν. 

The neuter plural has always ἃ, as τὰ χρύσεα contr. χρυσᾶ, 
like ὀστέα ὀστᾶ. See above § 36. 


§ 61. ADJECTIVES IN ὡς, 


Adjectives itt ὡς, resembling the second Attic declension, are 
in general of common gender, as 0 and 7; ἵλεως, το ἵλεων, gracious. 
So too ἀξιόχρεως worthy, and εὔγεως fruitful. 

Rem. 1. Some of these form the neuter also in ὦ, as ἀγήρως 
not growing old, neut. ἀγήρων and ἀγήρω.---ἜἘὸν the αὐιιπααπίο, 
which make in ‘the gen. ὦ and ὠτος, see below 463 Rem. 2. 


Rem. 2, Of three endings there is only one simple, Viz. πλέως 
full, πλέα, πλέων, neut. pl. πλέα. For σῶς see belew in § 64. 3. 


§ 62. 


‘The remaining forms of adjectives of three endings are the 
following, ‘viz. 
1. ug, eva, v.— γλυκύς, γλυκεῖα, γλυκύ, sweet, 
(G. εος) G. mas¢. and neut. γλυκέος. - 
Examples, βαρύς heavy, βραδύς slow, βραχύς short, evevs οὐρα, 
ἡδὺς sweet, ὀξὺς sharp, ὠκὺς swift, 
2. εἰς, ἑσσα, ἕν.---χαρίεις, χαρίεσσα, χαρίεν, charming, 
(6. evroc) ἄἄ. χαρίεντος. 
Examples, αἱματόεις bloody, vAners woody, εὐρώεις rusty. 
3. aS, aver, av.—pehac, μέλαινα, μέλαν, black, 
(G. avos) G. μέλανος. 
The only other is τάλας wretched. 


$63) : ADJECTIVES. | oe a. 


, Se) A ° 


4. The following separate examples, viz. 
_ τέρην, τέρεενα, τέρεν, G. Evoc, tender. 
ἑκών, ἑκοῦσα, ἑκόν, G. ὄντος, willing: 
- Comp. ἀέκων commonly . ἄκων. ἄκουσα; ἄκον, unwilling. 
: πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν, G. παντός, ah the whole. 
_ Comp. σύμπας, ἅπας. ᾿ ᾿ 

Rem. 1. The neuter πᾶν is long only as ἃ monosyllable ; in 
composition it is, agreeably to analogy, short ; as ἁπᾶς, ἅπασα, 
ἅπαν, all together. With respect to the accent on the genitive 
and dative plural, πάντων, πᾶσι, see above ὃ 43 Rem. 3. 

Rem. 2. A part of the participles are declined like ἑκών and 
πᾶς. For these, all of which have three endings, see below § 
88. 8. 

Rem. 3. From the adjectives in δὸς arise several contracts, - 
ELC, ETL, TEV, being contracted into ἧς, N06, Hv,—and ὅεις 
9600, dev, in into ous, ou00a, οὖν, viz. 

τεμῆς, τιμῆσσα, τιμὴν, G. τεμῆντος, from τιμήεις honoured, ke. 


μελιτοῦς, μελιτοῦσσα, μελετοῦν, G. usherocvros, from μελιτόεις 
Full of honey, &c. (See § 43 Rem. III.) 


§ 63. ADJECTIVES OF ONE OR TWO ENDINGS. 


1. The remaining forms of adjectives in two endings, all ac- 
cording to the third declension, are the following. 
a) 7S, neut. ἐς.---αληϑής, αλῃϑές, true, 
(G. os, contr. ous) G. ἀληϑοῦς. 
Examples, εὐπρεπής decorous, ἀκριβής exact, ἀγεννής degener- 
ate, αὐθάδης proud, yewdns earthy, ϑηριώδης bestaal. 
b) wv, neut. ον.---ἐλεήμων, ἐλεήμον compassionate; 
(G. ovoc) 6. ἐλεήμονος. 
Examples, ἀμύμων with long v, blameless, ἀπράγμων unoccu- 
pied, εὐγνώμων well disposed. 
c) ες, neut. 4.—idos, (ge, skilful, G. ἴδοιος. 
(G. coc) 
There are very few examples of this last kind. . 
d) The following simple word, viz. ἄθῥην or ἄρσην, neut. 
ἄῤῥεν, ἄρσεν, G. ἄῤδενος, ἄρσενος, male. 


70 | ADJECTIVES. [ὃ 63. 


2. Besides these, there are adjectives formed from a substan- 
tive merely by composition, and retaining as closely as possible the 
termination and declension of the substantive, as may best be 
seen in the examples. These are all of common gender, and have 
a neuter, when analogy admits of one; 6. g. 

εὔχαρις, εὔχαρι, Ὁ. eros, from ἡ χάρες, ὑτος.; 
ἄδακρυς, ἄδακρυ, G. vos, from τὸ δάκρυ, vos. 

Sometimes, however, there is in the.termination a change otf 
ῃ into w, and ¢ into 0, as from πατήρ, ἔρος, comes ἀπάτωρ, 00, G. 
0006, fatherless ; from φρήν, poevos, understanding, comes σώφρων, 
ov, G. ovos, intelligent. . a . 


Rem. 1. Compounds of ποῦς, ποδός, foot, regularly follow their 
substantive, as δίπους, δίποδος, twofooted ; but in the neuter they 
have δίπουν (as εὔνους, εὔνουν, from the contracted second declen- 
sion), which they decline mcrae 3 to the general rule, like the 
Εἰς He (§ 58. 3.) 

. 2. Compounds of yélonc, ὠτος, laughter, commonly for- 
sake the declension of this substantive, and follow the Attic second 
declension (§ 61); as also those formed from κέρας, κέρατος, horn, 
with a change of the δὰ into w. Both, however, have also the 
genitive wz0¢, as φελόγελως, δίκερως, ‘neut. ov, G. ὦ and wros. 
(See § 56 Rem. 3. c.) 


3. When analogy does not admit of the formation of a neuter, 
it remains an adjective of one ending, which, however, is only 
masculine and feminine, and not also neuter, as it is in Latin; thus 
ὁ and ἡ ἄπαις, δος, childless, from παῖς παιδός, also ὁ and τ) μα- 
κρόχειρ, ρος, long handed, from χείρ, &c. Bs 


_ Rem. 3. There are some common adjectives of one ending in 
nS, ἡτος, (ἀργής, ἡμινϑήςν; in ὡς, wros, (ἀγνὼς); and in ὃ and 
yw, (dv, wos" μώνυξ, yoo? αἰγίλυψ, πος, &c.) 

Rem. 4. There are several common adjectives in ας, G. «dos, 
as puyas fugitive, hoya chosen, &c. and a few in ἐς and vs, G. 
ἐδος, υδος, as ἄναλκις, ἔπηλυς. Commonly, however, those in ας 
and ἐς, G. δος, are only feminine, and become, by the omission of 
the substantive, substantives themselves, as ἡ μαινάς (86. γυνὴ) the 
_ Bacchante, 7 πατρίς (sc. γῆ) native country. 

’ Rem. 5. Several adjectives' also are only masculines ; 80. par- 
ticularly γέρων, οντος, old; πρέσβυς old (ὃ 57. 3); πένης, πέν- 
ἤτος, poor ; and ἐϑελοντής voluntary, γεννάδας noble &c. according 
to the first declension. 


ADJECTIVES. 


71 


~ $63) 


EXAMPLES OF THE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 


G. γλυκέος. γλυκείας γλυκέος 
Ὦ. γλυκέϊ εἴ γλυκείᾳ yhunel εἴ 
Α. γλυκύν 7λυκεῖαν γλυχύ 


V. γλυκύ γλυκεῖα γλυκύ 
Dual. 

N.A.V. γλυκέξ͵ -κείχα -κέε 
G.D. γλυκέοιν --κείαιν -τ--κέοιν 
Plur. 

IN. γλυκέες εἷς -xsiae -κέα 
G. γλυκέων -κειῶν -κέων 
D. γλυκέσι -κείαις -κέσε, 
A. γλυκέας εἰς -κείας -κέα 
V. γλυκέες εἴς -κεῖαει -χκέα 


᾿ σοφὸς wise. μακρὸς long. 

‘ Shing ᾿ 
Ν. σοφός σοφή σοφόν Ν. μακρός μακρά μαχρὸν 
α. σοφοῦ σοφῆς σοφοῦ | G. μαχροῦ μακρᾶς μακροῦ 
D.copp σοφῇ σοφῷ D. μακρῷ μακρᾷ μακρῷ 
Α. σοφον σοφὴν σοφὸν Α. μακρὸν μακράν μακρόν 
V. σοφέ σοφή σοφόν V. μακρέ μακρά μακβθὸν 
Dual. Dual. 

ΑΝ. copa σοφά, σοφώ N.A.V. μακρῶ μακρά μαχρώ 

_G. ἢ. σοφοῖν σοφαῖν σοφοῖν | G.D. μακροῖν μαχραῖν μακροῖν 

Plur. Plur. 

Ν. σοφοὶ σοφαὶ σοφά Ν. μακροί μακραΐ ius 

G. σοφῶν α. μακρων 

Ὁ. σοφοῖς σοφαῖς σοφοῖς D. μακροῖς μακραῖς μακροῖς 

A. σοφούς σοφᾶς σοφά A, μακρούς μακράς μακρά 

ν σοφοί σοφαί σοφά V. μακροί μακραὶ μακρὰ 

ἵλεως gracious. 

Sing. -΄ Dual. Plur. 

N. ἵλεως ἵλεων N.A.V. them N. theo ἵλεω 

G. the. G.D. ἵλεων G. thewy - 

D. ἵλεῳ D. thews 

A. ἵλεων A. ἵλεως ἵἕλέω 

V. ἵλεως ἵλεων V. them theo 
- γλυχὺς sweet. χαρίεις charming. 

Sing. Sing. 

N. γλυκύς γλυκεῖα γλυκὺ Ν. χαρίεις τρίεσσα τρίεν 


σ. χαρίεντος πρεέσσης τριέντος 
D. χαρίεντι πθιέσσῃ τρίεντι 
Α. χαρίεντα τρίξσσαν τρίεν 

V. χαρίει(εν) -ρίεσσα -ρίεν 


Dual. 
N.A.V. χαρίεντε e000 ~évté 
G. D. χαριέντοῖν -ἔσσαεν -ἔντοιν 


Plur. 

N. χαρίεντες -οίἰεσσαν τρίεντα 
G. χαριέντων -ριεσσῶν -ρεέντων 
D. χαρέξεσε τρεἕσσαις —gistoe 


A. χαρίεντες τρἱέσσας τρίεντα 
Ψ.: χαρίεντες -olsooae -Οἰενταο 


72 ADJECTIVES. [ὁ 63. 
μέλας black. éxw willing. 

Sing. Sing. 

N. μέλας - μέλαινα μέλαν N. éxwy éxovow éxov 

G. μέλανος μελαίνης μέλανος α. ἑκόντος ἑκουσης ἕχοντος 

Ὁ. μέλαν. μελαίνῃ μέλανε | D. ἑκόντι ἑκούσῃ ἑκόντι 

A. μέλανα μέλαιναν μέλαν Α. ἑκόντα ἑκοῦσαν ἑχὸν 

ν. μέλαν μέλαινα μέλαν V. ἑκὼν ἑχοῦσα ἑκόν 

Dual. Dual. 


N.A.V. μέλανε μελαίνα μέλανε 
G. D. μελάνοιν -haivacy -havow 


Plur. 

N. μέλανες μέλαιναν μέλανα 
α. μελάνων μελαινῶν μελάνων 
D. μέλασι μελαίναις μέλασι 
A. μέλανας μελαίνας μέλανα 
Υ. μέλανες μέλαιναν μέλανα 


πᾶς all. 
Sing. 4 : 
N. πᾶς πᾶσα παν 
Ο. παντὸς πάσης παντὸς 
Ὁ. παντί πάση παντί 
A. πάντα πᾶσαν πᾶν 
V. πᾶς πᾶσα πᾶὰν 
Dual. 
N.A.V.aavre πάσα πᾶντε 
α. D. πᾶντοιν πάσαιν παντοῖν 
Plur. 
Ν. πάντες πᾶσαν πᾶντα 
α. πάντων πασὼν πᾶντων 
D. πᾶσι πάσαις. πᾶσι 
A. πάντας πάσας πάντα 
V. πάντες πᾶσαν πᾶντα 
> ͵ 
αμυμὼν 
Sung. Dual. 
N. ἀμύμων - ἀμύμον 
, Ὁ: ἀμύμονος G. Ὁ. 
Ὁ. ἀμύμονι 


A. ἀμύμονα ἀμύμον 
— V. auvpor 


N. A. Υ. ἀμύμονε 
ἀμυμόνοιν α. ἀμυμόνων 


, < ͵ ε ͵ 
N.A.V. éxOvtE ἑἕκουσα EXOVTE 
c ‘ ͵ 
G.D. ἕχονταιν -οὐσαῖν -ονταῖν 


Plur. 

N. ἑχόντες 
G. ἑκόντων 
D. ἑκοῦσι 
A. ἑχόντὰς 
V. ἑκόντες 


ἑκοῦσαν ἑκόντα 
EXOVOMY ἑχόντων 
ἑκούσαις ἑκοῦσι 
ἑκούσας" ἑκόντα 
ἑχοῦσαι ἑκόντα 


ἀληϑής true. 


eg NE 
N. αληϑης αληϑές 
G. ἀληϑέος ove 
Ὦ. ἀληϑέ! εἴ 
A. alndéa ἢ αληϑές 
V. ἀληϑές 
Dual. 

N.A.V. ἀληϑέε ἢ 
G. D. ἀληϑέουν οἷν 
Plur. ὶ 
Ν. ἀληϑέες εἷς αἀληϑέα ἢ 
α. αληϑέων ὧν 
D. αληϑέσι ᾿ ν 
A. ἀληϑέας εἷς αληϑέα > 
V. ἀληϑέες εἷς αληϑέα ἡ 
blameless. 
. Plural. 


N. ἀμύμονες ἀμύμονα 


D. ἀμυμοσιὲ 
Α. ἀμύμονας ἀμύμονα 
Mi eer ἀμύμονα, 


§ 64.) a ADJECTIVES. j ' id 
- * 


ἔδρες skilful. 


Sing.” Dual. 1 ee : ξ 
Ν. Yous vas N. A. V. ἔδριε a ‘ures ἴδρια 
6. ἴδριος , 6. ἢ: ἐδοίοιν᾽ 6. ἰδρίων 
ee -" cae D. ἔδρεσι 
A. ἔδριν + ἴδοι. — - A. ἔδρεας ἴδρια. 
ΨΥ. ἴδοι | | Υ. ἔδριες Wore 


ὟΝ 


§ 64. ANOMALOUS AND DEFECTIVE ADJECTIVES. 


1. The two adjectives μέγας great, and πολύς much, many, make 
from this simple form, in the nominative and accusative singular 
~ only, masc. μέγας, μέγαν" πολύς, πολύν and neut. μέγα, πολύ. 
All the rest, with the whole feminine gender, is derived from the 
obsolete forms METAAGS, n, ov, and πολλός, 7, ov. E. g. 


N. μέγας μεγάλη μέγα. | πολύς πολλή πολύ 
α. μεγάλου μεγάλης μεγάλου πολλοὺ πολλῆς πολλοῦ 
Ὦ. μεγάλῳ μεγάλῃ μεγάλῳ πολλῷ πολλῇ πολλῷ 
A. “μέγαν μεγάλην μέγα πολύν΄ πολλήν πολύ." 


The dual and plural are regularly formed as. from adjectives 
_ in 0¢, viz: μεγάλω, ας 0 μεγάλοι, at, α᾽ πολλοί, al, a, ὅκα. 

Remark. The forms πολλός, πολλόν, are Ionian ; and the regu- 
lar forms of πολύς are found i in the Epic dialect, as πολέρς, πολέες, 
εἴς, &c. 
ἊἋ Ζ' πρᾷος mild, meek, is in this form used nalts the masculine ᾿ 
and neuter singular. The feminine and the neuter plural! are bor- 
rowed from a form πραῦς (Ion. wey’) used'in the dialects; ac- 
- cordingly we find fem. πραεῖα, neut. pl. πραέα. We also find in 
the nom: pl. masc. both πρᾷοι and πραεῖς, G. only πραέων. 

3. σῶς safe, contr. from SAO, has from this form only σῶς 
of the common gender, Acc. and neut. σῶν, Acc. pl. omg. Rarely 
the fem. sing. and neut. pl. oa. All the rest is from σώος, ας ov. 

4. Defectives are chiefly these, viz. φοοῦδος, ἡ, ov, vanished, 
gone, which is used only in the nominative of all the genders and 
numbers; πότνια venerable, sovereign, used only in the feminine. 


10 


74 _ ADJECTIVES.~—COMPARISON. ~ [ὃ 65, 66. 


§ 65. DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 


12. 1. The Greeks have the three degrees of comparison, Posi- 
tive, Comparative, and Superlative, and a separate form for each. 
This form is common to the three genders, which are distinguish- 
ed only by their appropriate termination. 

2. The most common form of comparison is -reg0¢, a; ov for 
the comparative, and ~1ar08, ἢ, ov for the superlative. 

3. Adjectives in o¢ drop their ¢ before this termination, if a 
long syllable precede, and they retain their ὁ unchanged; 6. g. 

βέβαιος firm, βεβαιότερος, βεβανότατος 
j ἰσχῦρός strong, ἰσχυρότερος, τατος 
πιστός faithful, πιστότερος. τατος. 
Also after mutes before liquids (§ 7. 10.) in prose, as σφοδρὸς ve- 
hement, σφοδρότατος. 
4. Ifa short syllable precede, the o is changed into w; e.g. 
σοφὸς wise, σοφώτερος, τατος 
καίριος timely, καιρεώτερος, τατος 
καϑαρὸς pure, καϑαρώτερος, τατος 
ἐχυρὸς secure, ἐχυρώτερος, τατος. 

Rem. 1. Some adjectives in o¢, particularly i in the Attic writ- 
ers, instead of ὁ or ὦ; take αὐ or ἐξ or Uc, as μέσος in the midst, 
μεσαίτατος" ἐῤῥωμένος strong, ἐρῥωμενέστερος" λάλος loquacious, 
λαλίστερος. 

Rem, 2. Some in avog wholly omit the o, as γεραιὸς old, γε- 
οαΐτερος. So too πάλαιός, σχολαῖος, περαῖος. 

Rem. 3. φίλος dear, friend, commonly does the same, as φἰλ- 
τερος, φίλτατος, or inserts atl, as φιλαίτερος, τατος. 

Rem. 4. ‘The contracts in ἑος, ovs, contract the ew into w, as 
πορφυρεώτατος, moggueutatos,—those i in 00¢, ov¢, on the other 


hand, take an é¢, in the uncontracted form, according to Rem. 1, as 
ἁπλόος, ἁπλοέστατος, and hence contracted ἁπλοῦς, ἁπλούστατος. 


§ 66. ADJECTIVES IN US, ας, 4S, ξές, 


1. of other adjectives, those in us merely drop the θ᾽ as εὑρύς 
broad, εὐρύτερος; τατος. 


ὁ 67. | DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 75 


τ 


2. The same holds of those in ας, G. ανος, which however 
_ here resume the ν which had been dropped before the ¢, as μέ- 
hag black, 6. péhavos—pehavregos. 
_ 3. Those in ἧς and εἰς shorten this termination into ἐς ; 6. g. 
. ahn dns true, G. €0¢, uAndéoraros 
πένης poor, G. τος, πενέστατος 
χαρίεις charming, G. ἐντὸς, χαρεἕστατος 
An exception is ψευδής false, G. <os, ψευδίστατος, 

_ 4. The other adjectives, take most frequently ἔστερος, more 
rarely ἐστέρος, and undergo the same change before it, as before 
the termination of the: case; as ἄφρων irtational, G. ἄφρον-ος. 
_ compar. ἀφρον-ἔστερος ἅρπαξ rapacious, G. ἄρπαγ-ος, compar. 

ἁρπαγοίστατος. 


§ 67. COMPARISON BY tay, ἐστος. 


4. A much less frequent form of comparison is the following, 
Viz. com. “tory, neut. -iov, for the comparative, and -στος, 7, ov for 
the superlative. 


Nore. For the mode of declension, see above in ὃ 55 μείζων. 


2. This form of comparison is adopted as follows, viz. 

a) By some adjectives in ug, as ἡδύς sweet, ἡδίων, ἥδιστος. 

b) By some in ρος, with the omission of the 0, as αἰσχρὸς base, 
αἰσχίων, αἴσχιστος. ν 

3. In some comparatives of this form the preceding consonant 
is, with the ὁ, changed into oo or τε: thus τάχυς swift, sup. τά- 
zeotos, has this for its most common form of comparison, and also 
takes a @ in the beginning; as Gacowy, neut. Paooor, Att. ϑάτ- 


7 


tov, ϑάττον. Hence it appears that the τ in τάχυς had its origin 


in #, according to ᾧ 18. 


‘Rem. This form of comparison always has the accent on the 
. antepenult, if the quantity of the last syllable admits it; as ἡδύς, 
ἠδίων neut. ἥδιον, ἥδιστος. 


7S ADJECTIVES.—IRREG. COMPARISON. 5 68, 


74 > Rem. 2. Of the adjectives in ὃς ἀνὲν ἡδύς and τάχυς adopt 
this form commonly; most of them adopt the regular form ὕτερος 
and uraros, and a few only take the other form, ἐφ ύδαιοι, ἴῃ 
the poets. 


Rem. 3. Of those in, 00S the following belong here, viz. αἷ- 
σχρός base, ἐγϑρὸς hostile, οἰκτρός sad, κυδρός glorious. But in 
these the other form is also in use, and of οἰχερῦς the compara- 
tive in (wy is not used. 


Rem. 4. Here too is to be reckoned μακρὸς long, on account 
of its forms of comparison μάσσων ἴον μακίων, superl. unxeoros,— 
in which latter there is also a change of the vowel, so as to con- 
form to τὸ μῆκος length. More ath however, are the forms 
μακρότερος, μακρότατος. 


§ 68. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 


Several adjectives have quite an anomalous comparison, by 
which they derive the comparative and superlative degrees from 
obsolete forms of the positive. Where there is more than one 
form of comparison for one positive, each of the comparative 
forms usually has one of the more definite significations of the pos- 
itive, or is used by preference in particular connexions ; of which, 

- however, the single instances must be left to observation. 


EXAMPLES. 
Comp. Sup. 
1. ἀγαϑὸς good, ἀμείνων neut.-voy betier ἄριστος best 
βελτίων βέλτιστος 
κρείσσων OF χρείττῶν %OUTLOTOS 


λωΐων commonly Agar, Awioros commonly λῷστος. 


“ἢ 


πᾳ the elder poets the regular contparalite corresponding to 
ἄριστος is still found, viz. ἀρείων," and οἵ χράτέστος even the 
“positive κρατὺς Instead of κρείσσων the lonians make κρέσσων. 


* Traces of the original positive degree may be found in ” dons, the 
“name of the god of war, and én the abstract ἀρετή virtue. 


8 69.] ᾿ ΠΡΕΡΕΟΤΙΨΕ COMPARISON. 77 


2. κακός bad, xaxiov — | κάκιστος 
oe . χείρων [ χείριστος 

7 = iis ἥσσων. Of ἥττων -ἥκιστος. 

The form ἥσσων has only the signification of worse, weaker, 
more useless, and is always opposed to χρείσττων. ‘The superlative 
ἥκιστος is ‘little used; though the neut. pl. ἥκιστα. occurs fre- 
quently as an adverb. 


3. μέγας great, μείζων (lon. μέζων) μέγιστος. 
4. μικρὸς small, ς ἐλάσσων, ττων ἐλάχεστος 
5. ὀλίγος few, ΜῊ εἰ ἢ ὀλίγεστος. 
The ancient positive was Αἰ ΧΎΣ. The oo forms 
μικρότερος -Tatos are also used. 


6. πολύς much, πλείων or πλέων more, πλεῖστος most. 


The Attics in certain phrases use πλεῖν for the neut. πλεῖον, ; 


ἃ5 πλεῖν ἢ μύριοι. The lonians and Dorians contract thus, πλέον 
mheuv, πλέονες πλεῦνες. 


7. καλός beautiful, καλλίων κάλλιστος. 
8. ῥᾷάδιος easy, bear ὑὁᾷστος. 
The Jonians, who make ῥηΐδεος in the positive, compare thus, 


δηΐων, ῥήϊστος, from an obsolete positive ῥαΐς, Onis. 
é 


9. ἀλγεινὸς painful, ᾿ ἀλγίων ἄλγιστος. 
The regular form ἀλγεενότερος -τατος is, however, more com- 
mon in the masculine and feminine. 
10. πέπων ripe, πεπαίτερος πεπαίτατος. 


11. πίων fat, πιότερος πιότατος. 


§ 69. DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 


1. There are also defective comparisons, which have no pos- 
itive; and in this view we may regard some of the anomalous 
comparisons given above, as ἥττων, κρείττων, λῴῷστος, ὅτε. 

2. To the class of defective comparisons may be referred the 
adjectives derived from particles, and those which indicate sequence. 


76 


᾿ 78 πὴ _ NUMERALS, [Ὁ 70. 


Most of them have other additional avOoR, to be learned by 
particular observation, viz. 


πλησιαίτερος πτᾶτος, from πλησίον near ; as also in Vaio a pro- 
pe, propior, proxunus. 


πρότερος the former, prior, πρῶτος the ‘first, from πρό before. 
ὑπέρτερος -τατὸς and ὕπατος, higher, highest, from ὑπέρ above. 

ἔσχατος the last, from ἐξ out of. . 
voteoos -raros, the latter, the last. 


Rem. 1. In the poets, particularly the epic, many forms of 
comparison of this kind are found, as φέρτερος, PEOTATOS, also φέ- 
evoros, braver, better, which may be connected with the positive 
ἀγαϑός. in the same way may be considered as defective some » 
in ioy, LOTOS, when there is a corresponding abstract substantive 
in 0¢, as ῥιγίων mare dreadful, κέρδιστος most crafty, ὕψιστος 
highest, from the substantives τὸ δῖγος horror, κέρδος cunning, 

ὕψος height. 
᾽στὶ Rem. 2. It is-a case somewhat different, when from a substan- 
tive used adjectively, degrees of comparison are formed, as ἑταῖ- 
θος friend, ἑταιρότατος the most intimate ; κλέπτης (gen. ᾽ου) thief, 
κλεπείστατος most thievish. , 


§ 70. “NUMERALS.—THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
+ : 


1. The cardinal εἷς one is thus declined: 


os ee N. 
N. εἷς, μία, ἕν 
G. ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός, S&C. | 
Here is to be observed the irregularity of the accent in pio, meas, 


Mee, μίαν. 
From εἷς are formed, by composition with the negative parti- 3 
cles οὐδέ and μηδέ, the negative adjectives, viz. 


M. F. N. ; 
οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν ἰ ΠΩΣ 
μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδὲν 
τ In the declension of these derivatives the accent of the primi- 


tive is retained, as οὐδενός, οὐδεμιᾶς, &c. © 


͵ 


, Ὁ 70. EA ‘NUMERALS. | 9 


2. The cardinal δύο two has of course the dual oe: viz. NN. 
A. duo, 6. D. δυοῖν. : 


The Attics also said δυεῖν, but only in the genitive. They 
also use δύο indeclinably in the genitive and dative. The dual 
ἄμφω both will be given below in ὃ 78. ; 


3. The cardinal τρεῖς three is thus declined: 


M. ἃ F. aR. 
Ν. τρεῖς τρία 
G. τριῶν 
D. τρισί (v) 
A. τρεῖς. . τρία 
4. τέσσαρες or τέτταρες four. 
Μ. & F. ae | 
_ NN. τέσσαρες or τέτταρες τέσσαρα 
G. τεσσάρων 
t D. τέσσαρσι or τέτταρσι (v) 
᾿Α. τέσσαρας τέσσαρα 


5. The remaining single numbers as far as ten, and the round 
᾿ numbers up to a hundred, are not declined. They are as ssa viz. 


πέντε Jive ᾿ 
ἕξ six 
ἑπτὰ seven 
ὀχτὼ eight 
Evvean ᾿ 3 nine 

; δέχα ten 
εἴκοσι (v) twenty 
τριάκοντα ἡ thirty 
τεσσαράποντα forty 
πεντήκοντα Sifty 
ἑξήκοντα ' sixty 
ἑβδομήκοντα seventy 
ὀγδοήκοντα eighty — 
ἐγνενήκοντα ninety 


< 7 
EXATOV hundred 


80 NUMERALS. | [5 70. 


----.. .-. 


6. The following is the usual form of those cardinals which are 
compounded of the units and tens, viz. ἕνδεκα eleven, δώδεκα twelve, 
τριφκαίδεκα thirteen, τεσσαρεςκαίδεκα, πεντεκαίδεκα, ἑκκαίδεκα, 
ἑπτακαίδεκα, ὀκτωκαίδεκα, ἐννεακαίδεκα. Ὁ ny 

Less common are δεκατρεῖς, δεκαπένξε, &e. . 

In these compositions τρεῖς and τέσσαρες are also inflected, as 
τεσσαρακαίδεκα, τεσσαρσικαίδεκα, δεκατριῶν, ἃς. 

7. The remaining compound numbers are usually written sepa- 
rately, and when the smaller number precédes, they are connected 
by xav, but not commonly when it follows; as πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν; 

: 


OF εἴκοσι πέντε. 


? 


8. The round numbers after a hundred are regularly inflected,viz. 


διακόσιοι, Ol, α “two hundred : 
τριακόσιοι, Ol, ἃ three hundred 
U 

TETONKOOLOL, Ob, α four hundred 
πεντακόσιοι. — Gb, ἃ Jive hundred 
« bad ul o 
ἑξακοσίοι, ὁ. αὖ, α six hundred 

ἢ ἑπτακόσιοι. Ob, α seven hundred 

Ρ ὀχταχόσιοι, + αἵ, α eight hundred 
5 ν , . 
évvaxoovot,| Ol, α nine hundred 
χίλιοι, αὐ, ἃ a thousand 
διςχίλιου τος ταν ἃ two thousand 

Ne TOUS YtALOL, Ol, α΄ three thousand 

τετρακιςχίλον αἱ, α - four thousand 
μύριοι ; Ol, OF ten thousand 
Ouguveroe Cb, α twenty thousand. 


Remark. When other words are compounded with these num- 
bers, “ovo- (μόνος) indicates unity, δὲ-- two, τρί-- three, TerQa- 
four ; as Μονόκερως, δίχερως, &c. The other numbers are usual- 
ly formed in ὁ and a, as πὲ πεντα-μετρος, χιλιο-τάλαντος. 


ΕΓ 


* The @ in πεντακχύσιοι and the subsequent numerals is short. 
> Υ͂ ᾿ 
Τ ἐννακοσίου omits the € of ἐννέα. 


{ Mveioe used indefinitely, like the English word myriad, is distin- 
guished by its accent. 


2 ™ 


87} τοῖς _ NUMERALS. 81, 


"Ἢ § 71. ORDINAL AND OTHER DERIVATIVE NUMBERS. ἃ 


1 Phe two first ordinal numbers are two defective forms of 19° 


comparison, viz. j 
πρῶτος the first, pri ΤΡ, ΘΠ βρη the first of two, prior. 
- δεύτερος the second. Ὁ | 
The others are the following, viz. ' 
τρίτος ἐμγτὰ 
τέταρτος fourth 
πέμπτος" fifth 
EXTOS sixth 
{ ἕβδομος seventh 
ὄγδοος eighth 
ἔγνατος ninth 
δέκατος tenth 
ἑνδέχατος eleventh . 
δωδέχατος twelfth 
τριςκαιδέχατος . thirteenth 
τεσσαρακαιδέκατος Fourteenth &e. 
εἰχοστὸς twentieth 
τριαχκοστὸς thirtieth 
τεσσαραχοστός fortieth &c. 
EXATOOTOS hundredth . τ 
᾿διακοσιοστός two hundredth &c. 
χιλεοστός ~ thousandth 
μυριοστός ten thousandth. 


Here also in composition, the smal number usually precedes 
with καὶ, or follows-without it, as rovaxoores πρῶτος, or πρῶτος 
καὶ τριακοστός. To these ordinal numbers the interrogative form 
πόστος refers, which cannot be rendered by any one word in En- 
glish; in Latin quotus ? | 

2. The numeral adverbs, which answer to the question how 
many times? are the following, viz. ἅπαξ once, a τρίς, τετράκις, 


*From πέμπε in the ancient and the Zolic dialect for πέντε. See 16 
Rem. 1, c. 
1] 


80. 


᾽ Ἢ 


82 PRONOUNS. Seren: |. 72. 


πεντάκις, ὀχτάκις, ἑκατοντάκις, χιλιάκις, &e. The interrogative 
is ποσάκις, how many times ? | 

The following are the adjectives, which answer to the ques- 
tion how-many-fold ? viz. ἁπλόος contr. ἁπλοῦς simple, διτιλοῦς, rou 
mhous, τετραπλοῦς, πενταπλοῦς, &c. (δ 60); or also διπλάσιος, &c. 

4. The words which express the several numbers taken as sub- 
stantives, are all formed in ag, G. adog. Thus ἡ μονάς unity, δυάς, 
τριᾶς͵ τετράς, πεντάς (also πεμπτὰς and meumes), ἕξας, ἑβδομάς, ὁ 
ὀγδοάς, ἑννεάς, δεκάς, &c.—einas (20), τρρακάς, τεσσαρακοντάς, 
&e.—éxarorras, χιλίας, μυρίας. 


PRONOUNS. 
ᾧ 72. PRONOUNS SUBSTANTIVE AND POSSESSIVE. 


1, The substantive or personal pronouns, of the first and sec- 
ond person, are ἐγώ I, ἡμεῖς we, ov thou, ὑμεῖς ye, with long v. 

2. The third person (of which the accusative is 5) has no 
nominative singular, like the Latin se, which, in the Attic writers, 
it also resembles in the reflexive signification of self. In the plu- 
ral number it has a particular form for the neuter, which howev- 


er rarely occurs. 


Rem. 1. This pronoun is but little used by the Attic writers, 
for in the direct sense of ham, her, it, they substitute for it the ob- 
lique cases of αὐτός, and in the reflexive sense ἑαυτόν. 


DECLENSION. 

Sing. 1 thou he 
Nom. | eyo συ | -- 
Gen. 1° ἐμοῦ, μοῦ σοὺ οὗ 

Dat. | ἐμοί, μοί | σοὶ ᾿ | οἷ 
Acc. 4 ἐμέ, μέ σε 1 ἕ 
Dual. — we two ye two they two 
N.A. | νῶϊ νώ | σφῶϊ, σφώ | σφωέ 
GD. 1 νῶϊν, νῷν σφῶϊν, σφῷν  σφωΐν 


4. 72. τς ρβονοῦνδι. ᾿, 88 


Plur. we ob Pape they 
Nom. | ἡμεῖς͵ | ὑμεῖς | σφεῖς N. σφέα 
oe. ἡμὼν οὐμῶν σφῶν , 
"Dat. | ἡμῖν ὑμῖν σφίσι (v) 
τ Ace. ἡμᾶς ὕμας i) σφᾶς N. σφέα 


Rem. 2. The oblique cases of the first and second persons SI 
in the singular, and of the third person in all numbers, with the 
aiid of the circumflexed forms σφῶν and σφᾶς, are subject 
to inclination (ὃ 14). In the first person, the monosyllable forms 
are always enclatic; the dissyllable forms, orthotone. ‘These en- 
_ clitics, moreover, become orthotone, (1) as is the case with other 
enclitics, when a particular emphasis rests on them ; (2) especial- 
ly when ἐ they are governed by ὃ a preposition, as περὲ σοῦ, ἐν σοί, 
παρὰ σφίσιν, παρ ἐμοῦ, εἰς ἐμέ. 

Rem. 3. For the purpose of emphasis the particle γέ is append- 
ed to these pronouns, in which case the accent is thrown back in 
ἐγώ, ἐμοὶ, and ἐμέ, as ἔγωγε, ἐμοῦγε, ἔμοιγε, ἔμεγε, σύγε, Kc. 

Rem. 4. Dialecis.. The following are the forms which the 
pronouns assume in the different dialects. 

a) The Dorics for ov make tv,—for the encliti¢ σοί they make 
z0i,—also for the enclitic σέ they make τύ. 

Ὁ) The genitive in ov of these pronouns has its origin in <0, 
and accordingly we find in the epic poets ἐμέο, σέο, ἕο, or ἐμεῖο, 
σεῖο. εἶο. Hence the lIonians and Dorians have ἥμεν, μευ, σευ, , 
εὖ (ὃ 27 Rem. 5). 

c)*The poets make use of a wenttive of a peculiar character, 
formed by appending the syllable δὲ») viz. ἐμέϑεν, σέϑεν, ἔϑεν. 
See also § 116. 

d) The Ionians resolve the contraction of the plural, and say 

ἡμέες, UMEES, σφέες.,---ἡμέων, ἡμέας, Ke. 

6) The Dorics, on the other hand, abbreviate the plural in 
the first and second person, as ἀμές, ὑμές, and in the accusative 
they adopt the termination ¢, which is otherwise peculiar to the 
dual, as ae, vue, for ἡμᾶς and ὑμᾶς. Hence, the pronunciation 

and accent being changed; the following epic forms arise : 


Nom. ἄμμες, umes, 
Dat. ἄμμῖν, ἢ υμμῖν, OF ἄμμι, ὕμμι; 
Acc. ἄμμε, ὕμμε. 
f) There is also a similar abbreviation of the plural in the 
third person, viz. ᾿ 
Dat. ogiy or ogi, 
Acc. σφέ. 
This abbreviated form of the accusative the Attic poets use as an 


82 


84 ι PRONOUNS. | [S$ 79, 74. 


Se ee a δ. 


accusative in the singular also. Itis accordingly found for αὐτόν, 
nv, 0, and αὐτούς, ἄς, ἃ 

g) Finally, there is also a merely enclitic accusative of the 
third person, viz. Ionic μέν, Doric and Attic viv, also used for all 


genders, him, her, and it, and for the plural them. The Attic viv, 


however, is used only in poetry.” 


4. The possessive pronouns derived from the foregoing perso- 
nal pronouns are regular adjectives of three endings. Their com- 
mon form is inflected from the genitive singular ; 6. g. 


4 5 ~ = te > ’ > U . 
Gen. ἐμοῦ — ἕμος, Eun, ἐμὸν, mine ? 
΄ ~ ' A 
Gen. σοῦ — σῦς, σή, σόν, ᾿ thine 
“Gen. οὗ 0 7, Ov, his, her, 4 
; ὼ ; —0o, ἢ OV, hts, her, rs. 
Also from the nominative plural ; e. g. 
ἡμεῖς — ἡμέτερος, ας OV, Our Ὁ Ὁ 
ἄν . ἡμεῖς --- ὑμέτερος, a, ov, your 


a | σφεῖς — OPETEQOS, ας OV, their. 


- Rem. 5, For σὸς the Dorics and Tonics make τεύς, & pe ov, 
and for 6¢ they make é0¢, « (7), ὁ ov. But for the plural there is 
an older and shorter form, ἀμὸς or ἀμός, and UMOS, ἡ, OV. 

Rem. 6. The ‘possessives νωΐτερος, σφωΐτερος, formed from 
the duals νῶϊ, σφῶϊ, are found only in the ancient poets. 


- § 73. 
“To the substantive pronoun also belongs ὁ, 7),20 δεῖνα, any one, 
aceriain one. At is thus declined, viz. Nom. and Acc. δεῖνα, G. δὲϊ- 
voc, D. dsivt, Pl. οἱ δεῖνες. - 


Remark. We sometimes, though very rarely, find δεῖνα wholly 
indeclinable, as τὸν δεῖνα, τὸν τοῦ δεῖνα sc. υἱόν. 


§ 24. : 


i. The four following adjective pronouns are regularly declin- 
ed, except that they have 9 in the neuter. 3 
αὐτός, εὕὐτή, αὐτὸ. self. 
EXELVOS, ἐκείνη, ἐκεῖνος this, that. 
ἄλλος, ἄλλη, ἄλλο, another. 
᾽ ᾿ς ἦρ, ἧς 0, see in ὃ 75. 


͵ 


§ 74.} PRONOUNS. 85 


Rem. 1. ἐκεῖνος comes from ἔκεϊ there. The Tonic form of 83 


‘it is κεῖνος, q, 0. ᾿ 


“ 


9, The pronoun αὐτός has a threefold signification ; ; QC) self; 
(2) in the oblique cases, him, her, it; (3) with the article, the 


same. Farther details on this subject will be found in the syntax 


(δ 127.) It may here only be added, that in this last meaning, it 


is often contracted with the article (according to ὃ 28 Rem. 1),’ 


"ἢ ~ ΕἸ ~ ~ ~ ? ~ - ἃ 
as ταὐτοῦ, ταὐτῷ, ταὐτῆῇ, for τοῦ αὐτοῦ, &c. where it is also to 
be remarked, that in this case the neuter ends in ov as well as in 


0, as ταὐτὸ and ταὐτόν, for τὸ αὐτό. Care must be taken not to 


confound ταὐτῇ and ταὐτά with ταύτῃ and ταύτα from οὗτος. 


3. From αὐτός is formed the common reflected pronoun,* viz. 
by compounding αὐτός with the accusative of the substantive pro- 


nouns (gu, σέ, é’), and then declining it through the oblique cases. - 


- ~ ~ ~ ~ ͵ ‘ . 
G. ἐμαυτοῦ, ἐμαυτῆς, D. ἐμαυτῷ, 4, A. ἐμαυτόν, ἣν. mine, me. 
G. σεαυτοῦ or σαυτοῦ, Kc. thine, thee. 


G. ἑαυτοῦ or αὐτοῦ, &c. his, her. 


The last has also an accusative neuter ἑαυτό, αὐτό, and is declin- 
ed throughout the plural, as ἑαυτών, ἑαυτούς, &c. The two first 


persons form the plural without composition, as ἡμῶν αὐτῶν, 


= ~ > ~ 
vpoy αὐτῶν, &c. 


Rem. 2. In all these compositions of αὐτός the Ionics have 


' wv instead of au (δ᾽ 96. 9), and do not elide the «. ‘They accord- 


ingly say, ἐμεωυτοῦ, σεωυτόν, ἑωυτόν, &c. 


4. From ἄλλος is formed the reciprocal pronoun, viz. 
“6. ἀλλήλων. D. ἀλλήλοις, aes. A. ἀλλήλους, as, a 
Dual. ἀλλήλω, a ἀλλήλοιν, acy, each other. 


"- 


; 


- * So called, when the action refers back to the subject. For instance, 
in,the phrase ‘ he clothes me, me is the common personal pronoun; in 
the phrase, ‘ I clothe me,’ it is the reflected pronoun. When an action is 
reptesented as mufual, the pronoun is called reciprocal. This last name, 
however, is usually considered to include both cases, and in many gram- 
mars the pronouns called reflected in the text, are classed as reciprocal.’ 


᾿ 


84 


86 THE ARTICLE. - ἘΦ 78, 


ᾧ 75. THE ARTICLE. , , 


1. The Greek grammarians give the name of -Irticle, τὰ ἄρ- 
doa, to the two simplest signs, which, partaking of an adjective 
character, serve to point out a substantive, and which, in two 
clauses of a complete sentence, refer to each other. In the mod- 
ern languages one of these is called the definite article (the), and 
the other the relative pronoun (who, which).* 

2. Of these two articles, the one is the prepositive article, viz. 
6, 7, τὸς the. This coincides in its inflection with the adjective pro- 
nouns above given, with the following exceptions, viz. 

a) That the masculine and feminine of the nominative singular 
and plural are unaccented (§ 10. 4) and have the rough breath- 
ing, instead of which all the other gh have a τ. : 


* An example of such a complete sentence, where both the articles 


. : age . “ἢ > «ε 
appear, is this: “6 this is the man, who will save us,” οτος ἑἕστέν O 


᾿ανὴρ Ὃς σώσει ἡμᾶς. Hence, as these two words correspond to each 


other exactly like joints, and thus unite two sentences as members of one 
body, the Greeks have called them τὰ ἄρϑρα, articulos, articles, or, lit- . 
erally translated, joints. N ow that the first of these two articles, 0, ἡ, τό, 
the, so frequently stands alone with its simple sentence, and thus, strictly 
speaking, ceases to be an article, is accounted for by the consideration, 
that in a multitude of such cases the second part of the sentence is retain- 
ed in the mind, being some such phrase as “" of which we are treating,” 
or “¢ which you know,” or ¢* which is here in question,”? &c, and in this 
way it gradually became the usage of language to attach the prepositive 
article, the, to any object, which is to be mentioned as sufficiently defin- 
ed by the nature of the sentence and the attendant circumstances. The 
grammars of the modern languages preserved the name of article for the 
prepositive article only, without reflecting on the origin and cause of this 
name ; but the postpositive article was called (and correctly when con- 
sidered by itself) the relative pronoun, And as in modern languages an- 
other pronoun (in English @ or an), which is nothing but a weaker τὶς, τὶ, 
quidam, in like manner shows the substantive to be undefined, just as the 
points it out definitely, the latter was called the definite, the former the 


875. ΕΝ THE ARTICLE. ; ia 87 


b) Not only the neuter, but in the nominative singular the 85 
masculine also, ends in o. - 

The other is the postpositive article, é, ts 0, who, which, This 
is 5 declined precisely like the adjective pronouns in§ 14. 1. τ᾿ 


DECLENSION . “δὲ 


Prepos. Art. Postpos. Art. : 
Sing. M. F. N. M. F. N. 
Nom.|o ἢ τὸ | og ἥ δ᾽ 
Gen τοῦ τῆς τοῦ ov ἧς οὐ 
Dat. |r» τῇ τῷ iio ἢ ᾧ : 
Acc. |rov τὴν τὸ | ὅν ἥν oO 

* - Dual 

N. A.| τώ τὰ τὼ @ a @ 
G.D.| τοῦν ταῖν τοῖν |\oiv αἷν οἷν 
Plur.. 
Nom.|oi ai ta |jlot αἵ oe 
Gen. | ray τῶν τῶν ἢ ὧν ὧν ὧν 
Dat. τοῖς ταῖς τοῖς οἷς Ὁ αἷς οἷς Ὁ 
Acc. | tovs τὰς τὰ ove. ac. ἃ 


3. The postpositive article or relative pronoun is often 
strengthened, partly by the enclitic mo, as ὅςφπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ, 
&c. and partly by composition with tis, as ogres, &c. for which 
last see below in § 77. 

Rem. 1. The peculiarities of the dialects are the same, as in 


the first and second declensions, as τοῖο for τοῦ, ἃ for 7, τὰς for 
τῆς, &c. 


indefinite article, although the two words have nothing in them that con- 
nects, or can be called a joint. It is therefore but reasonable for the 
Greek grammarians to follow the ancient Greek names, as they contain 
in themselves their own justification. At least, the articles need not be 
considered, in any language, as forming a distinct part of speech. They 
are essentially adjective pronouns, and therefore should be classed among 
them, _ 


88 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. ὃ 76. 


Rem, 2. In the ancient language the two articles were in form 
the same, and were only distinguished by their place and accent; 
as is still the case with 7, οἵ, αἵ. ‘The epic poets have also ὃ for 
ὅς, and all the forms of the prepositive article which begin with 
τ, are used by the lonics and Dorics for the corresponding forms 
of the postpositive article, as τὸ for 0, τήν for nv, &e. _Besides 
this, the Dorics use τοί, ταί, both for οἱ, ai, and for οἵ, αἵ, 

Rem. 3. In strictness, however, both forms are nothing else 
but the ancient simple demonstrative pronoun this ; and, as will 
appear in the syntax, are. both often used for ne pronoun. in the 
writings of the ancients. 


_§ 76. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. ἡ 


1. The Greeks have a double form for the general demonstra- 
tive pronoun this, that. The one is formed simply by appending 
the enclitic particle δὲ to the prepositive article, viz. ὅδε, ἥδε, 


" τόδε, G. τοῦδε, τῆςδε, &c. Pl. οἵδε, aide, rade, rovsde, &c. 


2. The other, οὗτος, is derived from thé same article, and 
conforms itself to it, throughout a very anomalous inflection. For 
where the prepositive article has the aspirate or the τ, this pro- 
noun has the same; and where ‘the article has ὁ or w, this pro- 
noun has ov in the first syllable; and where the article has ἢ or 
a, the pronoun-has αὖ in the first syllable ; as ὁ- οὗτος, οἷ-- οὗτοι, 
τῶν- τούτων, ἡ-- αὕτη, Ta- ταῦτα, &C. 


Sins Plur. 
Ἵ M. F. ἣ N. M. F. N. 
N.| οὗτος αὕτη τοῦτο οὗτοι αὗται ταῦτα “ 
r ’ , hed 
α. [τούτου ταύτης τούτου τούτων τούτων τούτων͵ 
? ’ 
D.| τούτῳ ταύτῃ τούτῳ τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις 
~ i : ~ 
A. τοῦτον ταύτην τοῦτο | τούτους ταύτας ᾿ ταῦτα 
Μ, F. N. 
ὰ ¢ ν ΣΝ 
Dual. Ν. A. [τόὐτω ταῦτα τούτω 
’ ͵ ° 
GD. | τούτοιν τρὐύταῦν τούτοιν ; 


~ 


4 


§ 77.] INTERROG. AND INDEFINITE PRONOUN. _ 89 


ᾧ 77. INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUN. 
iy 


‘The interrogatwe pronoun for who? which ? what? is τίς, neut. 
zi, G. τίνος. It has the accent always on the «, as tives, D. pl. 
rist, and is thereby distinguished, as it also is in the nominative 
‘singular, by the invariable acute accent (§ 11), from the indefinite 

| pronoun τὶς, neut. zi, G. τενός, a certain one, any one; which, 
moreover, as enclitic, is commonly used without accent. The 
‘declension of tic, both as interrogative and indefinite, is regular, 
according to the third declension, and the ὁ is short throughout. 

Rem. 1. In the few cases, where the monosyllable τὶς zi, in 
consequence of other enclitics following it, receives the acute, the 


context or the accent of the preceding ‘word: will distinguish it 
from the interrogative ; as ἀνήρ τίς ποτε. 


2. For the genitive and dative of both pronouns, the following 


forms are often used, viz. τοῦ and τῷ (for all three genders), or- _ 


thotone for τίνος tive, and enclitic for reves τινί." 

For the neuter plural of the indefinite pronoun: we Gade ἄττα, 
Jon. ἄσσα, not enclitic, instead of teva, as δεινὰ ἄττα for δεινά 
τίνα. νας ; 

3. The compound relative ogrzg, which is a strengthening of 
ὅς, has a twofold inflection, viz. 
Nom. ὅςτις, ἥτις, ὅ,τι (see § 15. 9.) 
; Gen. οὕτενος, ἤθτενος, 
᾿ς Ῥαΐ. ᾧτενε, ᾿ἧτενες &e. are. ᾿ 

Also the following form, analogous to the secondary form of 
zi¢ mentioned in no. 2, viz. ὅτου, ὅτῳ, for οὗτινος, wri, but 
not for the feminine, and also ἅττα, Ion. ἅσσα, for atwe. 

Rem. 2. The secondary form τοῦ, τῷ, must be carefully distin- 
guished from the genitive and dative case of the article, from which 
it is shown to be distinct by the threefold gender and the usage of 
the dialects. The τοῦ of the article is by the epic poets resolved 


into τοῖο, but the τοῦ for τένος and τινὸς is resolved into τέο by 
the punks, and tev by the Dorics. 


* As τῷ τεχμαίρη τοῦτο; whereby provest thou this 2 γυναικὸς του 


of a φονέα woman ; yonoPat τῷ to use any thing. 


12 


87 


90 τ CORRELATIVES. τ [§ 78. 


4. By composition with ov and μὴ are formed from the in- 
definite cig the negative pronouns οὔτος οὔτι, μήτις μήτι; 7 
which are declined like τίς. 


§ 78. CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. ᾿ 


1. Correlatives are words, referring to each other, of which the 
one contains a question, the other the various most simple an- 
gg swers toit. The general correlatives are already contained in the 
foregoing pronouns, viz. 
Interrogative τίς who? 
Demonstrative 0, ὅδε. οὗτος, this. 


Indefinite τὶς, any one, some one. 
Relative ὅς; compound ogres, who. ᾿ 
_ Negative οὔτις, μήτες, OF οὐδείς; μηδείς, none (§ 70. 1. ) 


. Each of these has its feminine and neuter. 

. 2. When, however, the ideas contained in those words τὰ 
directly referred or confined to two objects or divisions of the sub- 
ject, they are expressed by the following, viz. ὶ 

'Interrogative πότερος, ἴω ov, which of two. 
Demonstrative δ, ὅδε, οὗτος, this. 


Indefinite ὁ ἕτερος (ὴ ἑτέρα, &c.) one of two. 
Relative’  —- πότερος which of two. 
Negative ᾿ς οὐδέτερος, μηδέτερος, neither of two. 


Remark. ὁ ἕτερος often forms with those portions of the article, 
which end in a vowel, a crasis, in which however a long « is 
always found.* E. g. ἅτερος, ἁτέρα, ἅτεροι, for ὁ ἕτερος, ἥ ἑτέρα. 
οἱ ἕτεροι" υϑάτερον, θατέρου, ϑατέρῳ, ϑάτερα, for τὸ ἕτερον, τοῦ 
ἑτέρου, τῷ ἑτέρῳ, τὰ ἕτερα. ᾿ς 


This ὁ ἕτερος corresponds precisely to the Latin alter ; and, 
when one has been already named, it is to be rendered the other. 

3. To the question τίς and πότερος, may be answered every one. 

| ‘This answer has in Greek the form of a comparative or superla- 

tive, viz. ἑκάτερος, ας ov, each of two ; Exaxoros, ας ov, each of many. 


* This long αἱ probably has its origin in an elder Doric form of ἅτερος 


for ἕτερος, of which the short & becomes long by acrasis with the article, 
as mentioned in the text. 


ἜΜ. CORRELATIVES. | 91 


4. Other particles responsive to τίς are the following, viz. ἄλ- 
hos another (ὃ 74.1), πᾶς, πάντες, each, all; corresponding to 
which, when the question is πότερος, are the following, viz. ὁ ἕτε- 
ρος the other ; GUPOTEOOS, ας OV, ἀμφότεροι, as, ας both. For this 
last we find, in certain connexions, simply the dual N. A. ἄμφω, 
G. Ὁ. ἀμφοῖν, with the accent thrown forward, and for all three 
genders. 


§ 79. OfHER CORRELATIVES. 


- 1. Besides these general correlatives, there are others more 
precise, referring to the properties or relations of the object, such 
as how made, where found, &c. These are formed in Greek by a 
very distinct analogy, but as they are partly in the adjective, and 
partly in the adverbial form, the latter must remain to be con- 
sidered below. 

2. Every such series of correlatives has its radical form and 
termination of inflection common ; but is peculiar in its initial let- 
ters. The interrogative begins with a 1, as πόσος quantus, how 
much? how large? how many? The same form, with a change 
however of accent, is sometimes used indefinitely, as ποσὸς ali- 
quantus, of a certain size or number. When, instead of a 7, it be- 
gins with a τὶ it is in the demonstrative, as τόσος tantus, so great, so 
much, so many. If, instead of this consonant, the word begin with 
the aspirate, it is relative, as ὅσος quantus, as large as, as much as. 
The negative of these forms is not found in the commonedialect. 

3. In addition to the simple relative, there is also the compound, 
‘which is used by preference in certain connexions. It corresponds 
~ to ὅςτες, ὅτου, among the ‘general correlatives, and is formed by 
prefixing the syllable 6, without ere to the interrogative 
form, as πόσος, relative ὅσος and ὁπόσος. - 

4. The simple demonstrative τόσος is used as a perfect demon- 
strative pronoun, for the most part only in the poets. Resort is 
commonly had to a strengthened form; and as the article ὁ (the 
primitive demonstrative, subsequently used merely as an article,) 
is strengthened either by the enclitic δὲ (ode), or by being chang- 


89 


90 


ἃ 


- 


92 ΟΟΒΒΕΓΑΤΙΨΈΒ." τὰς 539. 


ed into οὗτος, so the corresponding process is observed here, -o¢ 
being in the latter case changed into -οὗτος, e. g: τόσος, τοσόςδε 
or τοσοῦτος. ‘The first of these is inflected in the middle of the 
compound, thus τοσόςδε, τοσήδε, τοσόνδε, G. τοσοῦδε, δο. 

The form with -oures governs itself, with respect to ov 
and αὖ, according to the simple form οὗτος. In the neuter, how- 
ever, it-has both ov and o. eoeey we have the following 


forms, viz. 
N: τοσοῦτος, τοσαύτη, τοσοῦτον and τοσοῦτο 


G. τοσούτου, τοσαύτης, ὧο. 
ΡΙ. τοσοῦτοι, τοσαῦται, τοσαῦτα, &c. 


5. The following are sccongipely the three most entire series 


of correlatives. ; 
Interrog. Ὁ Indef. Demonst. Relative.. 

πόσος; ποσὸς τόσος τς [ὅσος 
how great? how τοσόςδε ὁπόσος 
many ? quantus ἢ τοσοῦτος 

ποῖος ; | ποιὸς τοῖος οἷος 
of what kind ἢ ᾿ τοιύοδὲ ὁποῖος 
qualis ?_- ~ τοιοῦτος 

πηλίκος ; ‘ankiune | τηλίχος ἡλίκος 
how old? how τηλικύοδε onnhizos 
large ? τηλικοῦτος 


ΟῚ Nore. For the Ionic forms χύσος, κοῖος, ὑχόσος, &c. see § 
16. °3.0¢ αν 

Rem. 1. There are still other ὠπηρενζοοί correlatives, which 
in addition to the interrogative form have only the compound rel- 
ative, as’ particularly ποδαπός, ποδαπός, where born? and the 
derivatives from πόσος and ποστὸς (for which we have no. cor- 
responding English word*) ; ποσαπλάσιος how many fold? ono- 
στος, ὁποσαπλάσιος, &c. The same is the case with πότερος " 
and. ὁπότερος mentioned above. 

Rem. 2. As the.root’ of these words ae “iis correlative 
force by virtue of the initial letters, 7 &c. some of them attain 
other shades of signification, by composition with the general cor- 
relatives, érsgoc, ἄλλος, πᾶς &c. Thus to the question 7070¢may 


——— --τ-τ...--.-.. 


* The-how-manyeth 2 would represent ποστος in English. In German, 
der wievielste ? ; 


Ν 


§§ 80, 81.] AFFIXES.—VERBS. 98 


be answered ἐτεροῦος, ἀλλοῖος; of | another kind, παντοῖος of every 


L dest Φέια: 
Inl 6 ‘manner, to ποδαπός" corresponds ἀλλοδαπὸς of anoth- 
ountry, παντοδαπὸς of every country, ἡμεδαπὸς of our country, 


feta μεῖς. 


§ 80. AFFIXES. 


1. Allthe compounded and strengthened relatives, such as ὅς- 
τις, ὅτου, ὕςπερ, ὁπόσος, &c. receive upon all their forms the affix 
οὖν, which retains the accent on itself, and in this connexion cor- 
responds precisely with the Latin cungue, and expresses the com- 


91 


pleteness of the relation, as ὅςτες who, ὁςτεςοῦν quicunque, whoever, — 


whosoever, ἡτιφοῦν, ὁτιοῦν, ὁτῳοῦν, ὁντιναοῦν OF ὑντινοῦν,--- 
ὁςπεροῦν, ὑποσοςοῦν, ὁπηλικουοῦν, &e. 
Rem. 1. To strengthen still more this signification, use is 


made of the form δήποτε, as ὁςτιςδήποτέ ἐστιν whosoever it may be, 


ὁσονδήποτε, &c. which is, τόσ often written in two sepa- 
rate words. 


2. In like manner among the Attics, and in the familiar style, 
the demonstratives, for the sake of greater strength, append to all 
their forms what is called the demonstrative i, which in like manner 
retains the accent, is always long, and absorbs all short vowels at 
the end of the word to which it is affixed, as οὗτος ovrosi this here, 


hiece, avtni from αὕτη, τουτί from τοῦτο, Tovrovi, &c. ταυτί from - 


. ταῦτα, ὁδὶ from ὅδε, ἐκεινορί that there, ἐκεινωνί;, &c. τοσουτονί, 
τοσονδὶ, &e. 


Rem. 9. When the enclitic γέ (§ 150. 2) is attached to the de- ~ 


monstrative, this / follows it, as τοῦτό ye, τουτογί. 


§ 81. THE VERB. 


1. The parts of a Greek verb, such as the modes and tenses, 
may be presumed to be known, from the analogy of other langua- 
ges. The Greek, however, is richer than either the English or 
Latin, particularly by the distinction of the Middle Voice, of the 
Optative as a different mode from the Subjunctive, of the’ Aorist 


a8 a separate tense, of the Dualasa separate number, and by a. 


92 


94 ᾿ THE VERB. [§ 81. 


great diversity of modes and participles, in reference to the tenses. 
Meantime it should here be remarked, that by no means all that 
can be formed by conjugation and declension is actually found to 
have been used in every verb, although for convenience, all the 
eg are exemplified i in one verb, in the grammar. 

2. In the second place it should be premised, that in the Greek, 
more than any other language, a certain form endowed by the 
general analogy with a certain signification, may yet, in single 
cases, have another and even an opposite signification; as a 
passive form may have an active meaning. The grammar of 
course must treat of the forms as they are in themselves, and 


' then attach to them their most. usual signification. It is impos- 


sible, however, that the significations should be fully phi till 
they are systematically unfolded in the syntax. 

3. All that is necessary to the understanding of the formation 
of the verb is here for the most part supposed to be known from 
other languages, such as the general idea of the various voices, 
modes, and principal tenses. With respect to the optative mode 
and middle voice, sufficient preliminary information will present- 
ly be given. The tenses alone of the Greek verb require a more 
detailed previous description. 

4. The most obvious distinction of the tebaes is into present, 
past, and future. The past time, however, in common language 
admits of more subdivisions than the others. Among the tenses 
which fall under this head, (and which bear in Latin the common 
name of preterita,) is this difference to be observed, that in one 
of them the mind of the speaker remains in the present time, and 
makes mention of a thing past or happened. This is the perfect 
tense. In the other preterite tenses, the mind transports itself 
to the past time, and narrates what then happened.* _ This narra- 
tive tense has in the Greek the subdivisions of imperfect, pluper- 
fect, and aorist, whose signification will be unfolded in the syntax. 

5. Hereupon is founded the division of the tenses into the 


* In a lively narration this is therefore often.done by the present itself. 


§ 82.] VERBS.—SYLLABIC AUGMENT. ; 95 


LEADING cami viz. ἜΞΕΡΕ perfect, and future, and HISTORICAL TEN- 


SES, viz. imperfect, pluperfect, and aorist. 


6. All the tenses are distinguished from each other in a ἔνγο- 


fold manner; (1) all of them by their respective terminations, and 
(2) the past tenses by a prefix, called the augment. The historical 
tenses are farther distinguished from all the others, and among 
them from the perfect, by an augment appropriated to themselves, 
and by a peculiar manner of declension.—Of each of these, in order, 
an account will be given. 


‘ ᾧ 82: THE SYLLABIC AUGMENT. 


i. The augment is of two kinds, according as the verb begins 
with a vowel or a consonant. If the verb begin with a consonant, 


the augment makes a syllable of itself, and is therefore called the 


Syllabi Augment. 

2. The augment of the perfect tense is formed by prefixing the 
first letter of the verb with an ¢, as τύπτω, perf. τέττυφα, and 
therefore the augment of the perfect is also called a reduplicative 
augment, or simply a reduplication. If the first letter is an aspirate, 
it follows from what was said in ὃ 18, that instead of the aspirate, 
the corresponding smooth is used, as φελέω I love, πε-ᾳίληκα ϑύω 
1 sacrifice, τέτϑυχα. The third future, which is derived from the 
perfect (§ 99), retains this augment. 

3. The historical tenses, on the other hand, simply prefix an 
#, aS τύπτω, imperf. écunrov, aor. é-ruwa,—and the pluperfect, 
which according to its form and signification is derived from the 
perfect, prefixes this ε to the reduplication of the perfect, as rv- 
πτω, perf. ré-ruga, plup. ἐ-τετύφειν. , 

_ 4. If the verb begin with 9, this letter is doubled after the ε, 
as ῥάπτω I sew, imperf. ἔθῥαπτον (δ 21. 2); and in this case the 
perfect and pluperfect take no other augment than this, instead 
of the usual reduplication, as perf. ἔθῥαφα, plup. ἐῤῥάφειν. 

5. When a verb begins with a double consonant, instead of 
the reduplication, ¢ alone is used, which remains without change 


93. 


96 | VERBS.——TEMPORAL AUGMENT. ~~ ‘[§83. 


in the pluperfect ; as ψάλλω I play, perf. ἔψαλκα, plup. éwoduerr’ 


ζητέω I seek, ζέω I abrade, perf. pass. ἐζήτημαι, ἔξεσμαι. The 


same takes place in most cases where two consonants begin a 


word ; a8 perf. ἔφϑορα from φϑείρω, perf. pass. ἐσπαρμαν from 


᾿σπείρω I sow, ἔκτισμαν from πτίζω I = ἔπτυγμαὲ from πτύσσω 


94 


ἘΣ bie θὰ 


΄ 


Remarks. 


1. From this last rule the following are excepted, and, of 
course, are subject to the general rule, viz. ._— 

a) Two consonants, of which the first isa mute and the second 
a liquid; as γράφω I write, γέγραφα. So too χέχλεμαι, κέπνευκα, 
&c. But γν and often yA assume only a simple «¢, as γνωρίζω, € éy- 
νωὠρεσμαι" κατ-ἐγλωττισμένος, δι-ἐγλυπται and dva- γέγλυπται. 
᾿ 8) The perfects μέμνημαι and κέκτημαι, from μνάω I remember, 
and zzaouae I acquire. 

c) Some anomalous perfects, as πέπταμαι and πέπτηχα, in 
which, however, the az is formed by syncope from met. See in - 
the list of anomalous verbs πετάννυμι, πέτομαι, πίπτω. 

2. A few verbs beginning with liquids, instead of the redupli- 
cation, take the syllable é¢ or éi, as AHBS εἴληφα. See in the 
anomalous verbs λαμβάνω, λέγω, μείρομαιυ, and P#S§2 under εἰπεῖν. 

3. In the three verbs βούλομαι I will, δύναμαι I can, μέλλω I 


shall, the Attics often add the ‘temporal to the syllabic. augment, 


/ 


as ἠδυνάμην for ἐδυνάμην. For the syllabic augment before a 
vowel, directions will presently be given. 

4. "The augment of the historical tenses is often omitted by 
the Ionics and all the poets, except the Attics; as (Pade for ἔβαλε, 
Bn for ἔβη, γένοντο᾽ for ἐγένοντο &c. In the pluperfect this omis- 
sion prevails even in prose; as τετύφείσαν, τέἕτυπτο, for ἐτετυ- 
φέισαν. ἐτέτυπτο᾽ δεδίει for ἐδεδίει, ὅτο. 

5. In the epic writers thé second aorist active and middle of- 
ten takes the reduplication, which in this case is retained through 
all the modes (ὃ 85); as πέπεϑον, nenvdeiv, for éxvdov, πυϑεῖν, 
from πείϑω. “" 


§ 83. TEMPORAL AUGMENT, 


1. When the verb begins with a vowel, aspirated or not, the © 
augment, with that vowel, is converted into one long vowel ; and 


’ this kind of augment, which is called the Temporal, remains un- 


changed through all the preterite tenses. In general in this aug- 
ment, αἱ and ¢ are changed into 7, and o into.w; as avuw 1 fulfil, 


~ 


ᾧ 83.] VERBS.—TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 97 


impf. ἡνυον; perf. ἤνυκα, plup. ἠνύκεεν,---ἐλπίζω I hope, impf. 7A- 
olor, perf. ἤλπικα, plup. ἡλπέκειν,---ὁμελέω I associate with, impf. 
ἰμίλεον, perf. ὠμίληκα, plup. οἱμιλήκειν. ᾿ ς 
᾿ 9. The following verbs, viz. ἔχω, gam, ἕλκω and ἕλκύω, ἕρπω 
and ἑρπύζω, ἔϑω (see anomalous verbs) and ἐθϑέζω, ἑλίσσω, éorvaw, 
Zovw, ἕτω and ἕπομαι, ἐργάξομαι, change the ε not into 7, but in- 
to és, as impf. εἶχον, perf. etoyaouas, &c. 

Rem. 1. See also εἷλον, ἑλεῖν, among the anomalous verbs un- 
der aigéw, and the verbs belonging to the radical form “£22, ὃ 108. 

3. The vowels cand v can only be augmented when they are 
short, and that by lengthening them, as “ἱκετεύω, aor. Ἱκέτευσα, 
and even when the vowel is already long by position, this aug- 
ment ought to be indicated in pronunciation; as ἐσχύω Ἴσχυον, 
ὑμνέω ὕμνουν. Ὁ 

4. Of the other vowels already long in themselves, @, accord- 
ing to no. 1, usually becomes 7, while the others, 7, ως i, 0, admit 
‘no augment whatever,as ἡττάομαι, impf. ἡττώμην, perf. ἥττημαι, 
plup. ἡττήμην; excepting in the case of the accent, as specified 
below. ' 

5. A diphthong is susceptible of augment, when its first vowel 
can be altered in the above mentioned manner ; in which case, if 
the second vowel be ¢,-the iota subscript is used. Accordingly 
᾿αὔξω 1 increase makes ηὔξον᾽ εὔχομαι I pray, ηὐχόμην" αἰτέω I 
demand, ἄδω I sing, ἤτεον, ἤδον᾽ οἰχέω I dwell, ἤκεον. 

Many verbs, however, neglect this augment, as is stated in the 
next remark, and with ov it never takes place; as οὐτάζω, οὔτα- 
Lov. oa vA 

Rem. 2. In general many verbs, in which the augment would de- 
stroy the euphony or lead to confusion, remain unchanged. Among 
these are many beginning with an «, av, or Οὐς followed by a vow- 
‘el, as aw, αὐαίνῳ, otaxitw,—only that the short a, as in aw, is 
lengthened,—impr aio (a long), avaivero, ofaxiler, &c.—Some 


others also beginning with ov have no augment, as o/vilw, oixov- 
> 7 . . . : ᾿ 
ρέω, otovgéw. In like manner also all which begin with ἐδ, as 


«εἴχω, εἶκον, εἶξα, with the single exception of εἰκάζω I conjecture, 


which in the Attic writers receives an augment, as é/xaoa, εἴκα- 

Omar, Att. ἤκασα, ὕΓκασμαι. ‘Those that begin with ἃ are not uni- 

form in this respect, as εὔχομαι, ηὐχόμην and evyouny. ‘Those 
13 


95 - 


96 


97 


98 | VERBS.—TEMPORAL AUGMENT. [ὁ 83. 


compounded with εὖ will be mentioned below, § 86 Rem. 5. ‘The 
Ionics and the poets not Attic often omit this augment, as they do 
also the syllabic, in verbs of all sorts ; as ἀμείβετο for ἠμείβετο, 
ἔων for εἴων from éaw, ἅμμαν for 7 ἡμμαῖ. ; 

Rem. 3. Inasmuch as the increase, effected by this augment, 
consists only in lengthening a short vowel, it has the name of Tem- 
poral Augment, αὔξησις yoorexn, from χρόνος time, which word 
denotes also the quantity of syllables. 

Rem. 4. This augment has its origin in the contraction of the 
syllabic augment ¢ with the vowel ‘of the verb; as ἄγω é-ayov 

ἦγον. ἴῃ this, however, the contraction of ἐξ into ἧς and ἐθ into 


. ὡς departs from the common practice (see §27); while that of eo 


into ἡ, and ἐξ into εἰ, é-eyor εἶχον, conforms to the general law of 
contractions. 

Rem. 5. Hence is to be explained the accent of some com- 
pounds. For while the tone, as far as possible, inclines to the 
antepenult, we find in αἀνῆπτον from ἀνάπτω a circumflex on the 
penult, which had its origin in this contraction. In this manner, 
the augment is occasionally visible only in the accent ; as from 
ἀπείργω is formed the imperative ἄπεεργε, but the third person of 
the imperfect tense is ἀπεῖργε. 

Rem. 6. The syllabic augment, moreover, has actually main- 
tained itself in.-many cases before a vowel. Among these cases 
are reckoned, in the common dialect, the following three verbs, 
which by the general rule should not have the temporal augment, 
viz. 

ὠϑέω I push, ὠνξομιαι TI buy, οὐθέω, 
Impf. ἐώϑουν, EMVOULNY, ἐούρουν. 


Rem. 7. In like manner, in the perfect tense, the temparal aug- 
ment has its origin in the syllabic ¢, fer, since the common redu- 
plication consists in repeating the first consonant with an ¢, when 
the verb began with a vowel it admitted only of prefixing the «, 
which was then with the initial vowel of the verb transformed in- 
to the temporal augment. Even the « of this kind is retained un- 
altered in the verbs just quoted, as perf. ἐώνημαι from ὠνέομαι, and 
besides this inthree other perfects, ‘viz. ἔοικα, ἐολπα, ἔοργα, from 
sino, ἕλπω, ἔργω. The ὁ in these perfects is formed by ἃ muta- 
tion of the vowel of the root—which will be treated of below— 
and the ¢ is a reduplication, so that we ‘have ἔργω é-opya, like 
δέρκω δέ-δορκα. 

Rem. 8. As we saw above (ὃ 82 Rem. 3) ‘that the syllabic 
augment was increased by the temporal, so in the verbooaw J see 
the temporal augment is commonly increased by the syllabic, re- 
taining the aspirate, as impf. ἑώρων, perf. ἑωρακαιὶ 

Rem. 9. When a verb begins with <0, the second vowel takes 
the augment. This occurs in the verb ἐοοτάξω T celebrate a Festi- 


~ 


§ 84, 85. 7 μά REDUPLICATION, ETC. 99 


3 ἑώρτ 1 in the pluperfects belonging to the pent τα men- 
tioned in. tem κα viz. dainevy, ἐώλπειν, ξώργεεν. 


— 84. ΑὙΤΙΘ REDUPLICATION. 


᾿ς ‘Though a reduplication like that of the syllabic augment does 
not exist in verbs that take the temporal augment, yet several of 
them have, in the perfect tense, a peculiar, and, as it is called, the 
Attic reduplication ; which, however, is so far from being found in 
Attic writers alone, that most of the verbs which assume it, reject 
altogether the above described simpler form. It consists in this, 
that in the perfect tense, before the ordinary temporal augment, 
the two first letters of the verb, without changing the vowel, are 


repeated, e. g. 
aysiow I assemble, (ἤγερκα) ἀγτήγερκα, 
ἐμέω I spit, ᾿ (ἥμεκα) ἐμτήμεκα, 
ὀρύττω 1 dig, (wouya) ὀρ-ὠὥρυχα, 
ὄξω I smell, (ada) ὄδδ-ωδα. 


Res. 1. This form inclines to a short vowel in the third sylla- 
ble, and therefore shortens the long vowel, as in ἀλείφω, pert. 
ἀλήλεφα, ἀλήλιμμαι ἀκούω, perf ἀκήκοα. 

Rem. 2. The pluperfect sometimes takes a new temporal aug- 
ment, most frequently in ἀκήκοα, ἠκηκόειν. This however is not 
generally the case (ὃ 82 Rem. 4.) 

Rem. 3. As the second aorist in the poets, with the temporal 
augment, sometimes assumes the reduplication of the perfect (§ 82 
Rem. 5), the same also happens with this Attic reduplication, in 
such away that the temporal augment precedes it ; as APS , perf. 
ἄρηρα, aor. ἥραρον. In common language the verb ἄγω (see an- 
omalous verbs) has such an aorist, yiz. ἤγαγον. This reduplica- 
tion also remains in the other modes, which drop only the tempor- 
al augment, as ἀράρη, ἀγαγεῖν, ἀγαγών. 


§ 85.0 
THE AUGMENT IN REFERENCE TO THE MODES AND PARTICIPLES. 


_ All the augments prevail as well in the passive and middle, as 98 
in the active voice. As faras the modes and participles, however, 


99 


10. 6ὁτη - VERBS.—-AUGMENT IN COMPOSITION. [Ὁ 86. 


are concerned, the aorist and perfect only come into consideration, 
since the imperfect and pluperfect tenses are confined to the in- 
dicative mode. Here the following rule prevails. viz. coi 
The augment of the perfect is retained through all the modes and 
participles ; that of the aorist, only in the indicative. 


Thus with the syllabic augment, e. g. from τύπτω. 


Perf. τέτυφα [πῇ τετυφέναν Part. τετυφώς. 
Aor. ἔτυψα Inf. τύψαι Part. τύψας. 

So also with the temporal augment, 6. g. from ἀκριβόω. 
Perf. ἠκρίβωκα Inf. ἠκριβωκέναι _ Part. ἠκριβωκῶς. 
Aor. ἠκρίβωσα Inf. ἀκριβώσαν — Part. ἀκριβώσας. 


Remark. This rule may be more precisely stated, viz. Every 
thing that is a reduplication, or stands in the place of reduplication, 
(consequently the irregular reduplication of the aor. λέλαϑον, 
part. λέλαϑων, and the like, ὃ 82 Rem. 5.) remains through all 
the modes; while the simple augment is confined to the indicative. 
For this reason the irregular aorist ἤγαγον drops in the infinitive. 
mode the temporal augment, but retains the reduplication, as 
ἀγαγεῖν (δ 84 Rem. 3.) 


§ 86. OF THE AUGMENT IN COMPOSITION. 


The following is the chief rule for the use of the augment in 
the compound verbs, viz. , 

In the verb compounded with a preposition, in the augmented ten- 
ses the augment follows the preposition. 

_E.g. προςφέρω, προς- ἔφερον: ἀποδύω, ἀπ-έδυσα, ἀπο-δέδυκα" 
συλλέγω, συν-ἕλεγον᾽ ἀπαλλάττω, ἀπ-ήλλαττον. 

In most other forms of composition the augment is prefixed, 
as μελοποίξω, Euehonolour, μεμελοποίηκα' πλημμελέω, πεπλημμέ- 
ληκα ἀφρονέω, ἠφρόνουν. i 

Rem. 1. In some cases, where the simple verb is nearly or | 
quite obsolete, the augment precedes the preposition ; as ἐκάϑευ- 


δον, ἐκάϑιζον, ἠφίουν from ἀφίημι. The best writers however 
sometimes use the other form, as καϑηῦδον. 


ᾧ 817. ᾿ΨΈΒΒΒ.--- ΝΕ ΠΕΟΉΙΟΝ. ἢ : 101 


Rem. 2. Properly speaking, all such verbs have the augment 
prefixed, as are not so much themselves compounded with anoth- 
er word, as derived from a compound word of another part of 
. speech, as δεινοπαϑέω, ἐδεινοπάϑουν, from decvonadns οἰκοδο- 
HE, ῳχοδόμουν, from ofxodouos.—With these, however, are 
classed in respect to the place of the augment, the other compound 
‘verbs not compounded with a preposition, although ‘they retain 

the single verb without change, as μέλοποιέω, aqoovew, ὅτε. 

Rem. 3. Hence it results, that even some verbs compounded 
with prepositions prefix the augment; as ἐναντιοῦμαι, ἠναντιού- 
μην" αντιβολώ, ἠντιβύλουν, the former of which has its origin in 
ἐναντίος, and the latter is formed altogether by composition, with- 

out a previous existence as a simple verb. It is most usual, how- 
ever, that even in such verbs the augment should follow the pre- 
position. Hence we find uniformly ἐξεκλησίασαν, ἐνεκωμίαζον, 
προεφήτευσα. συνήργουν, ἐπιτετήδευκα, ἔνε είρουν, and various 
others, although of all these verbs Unainesdtes, ἐγκωμιάζω, προ- 
φητεύω, συνεργέω, ἐπιτηδεύω, ἐγχειρξω.) no simples exist, but they 
are all derived respectively from ἐχκλησία, ἐγκώμιον, προφήτης. 
σύνεργος, ἐπίτηδες, and from ἐν and χείρ. 

Rem. 4. The following verbs usually take the augmentin both 
places at once, viz. avogdow I set up, ἠνώρϑουν" ἐνοχλέω I trou- 
ble, ἠνώχλησα" ἀνέχομαι I endure, ηνειχομην'" nagowew Ἷ rave, 
πεπαρῴνηκα. —Still more anomalous is this in the verbs διακονεῖν 
to minister to and διαιτᾷν to decide, δεδιηκόνηκα, κατεδιήτησα, i in- 
asmuch as these are derived from διάχονος, diate, where ‘he α 

does not begin ἃ new word. 

Rem. 5. The words compounded with εὖ and δὺς assume in the 
middle only the temporal augment; as εὐεργετεῖν, εὐηργέτουν᾽ 
δυςαρεστεῖν, δυςηρέατουν. When, however, an immutable vowel 
or a consonant follows those particles, they either receive the aug- 
ment at the beginning, as ἐδυσώπουν from δυςωπεῖν, δεδυστύχηκα, 
ηὐφραίνετο, or those beginning with εὖ more commonly take no 
augment, as svwyounny from εὐωχεῖσϑαι. 

8 


΄ 


§ “87. 
INFLECTION BY TERMINATION. —-NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 


1. All terminations of the Greek verb are divided, in virtue 
᾿ of their ending and their inflection by numbers and persons, into 
two leading classes, plainly distinguished from each other. In sig- 
nification the one class is for the most part active, and the other 
_ passive. In consequence of this, notwithstanding the departure — 


100 


102 VERBS.—INFLECTION. ᾿ς 5.81; 


in single tenses from the prevailing signification, the one class is | 
called the active voice, and the other the passiwe. 

2. In each of these classes, the leading tenses, viz. the present, 
perfect, and future, follow an analogy in some degree peculiar to 
themselves, and in which they are distinguished from the histori- 
cal tenses. " t 
_ 3. All this is apparent from the following table, which contains 
the usual terminations of the different tenses, and their inflection 
by the three numbers and persons. It is applicable in the present 
form only to the indicative mode. Its application to the subjunc- 
tive and optative will be explained below. 


ACTIVE FORM. PASSIVE FORM. 

Leading tenses. 
1 Shoe» 1 iain 7: 

Sing. |— S$ - | por (oar) ταῦ 

Dual | wanting τὸν τὸν μέϑον odov odor 

Plur. [Mey . τὲ Ow, σὲ Meda ots νται 
Historical tenses. 

Sing. | — oS -- | μὴν (o0) to 

Dual | wanting τὸν τὴν  petov o8ov σϑην 

Plur. {μὲν te ν(σαν) ] meta of ντὸ 


Thus λύομαι, λέλυμαι, λύσομαι, λυϑήσομαι, are respectively the 
first_person of the leading tenses of the passive form of λύωῳ I loose. 
All that intervenes between the termination wee and the root λυ, 
or if nothing intervenes, is the peculiarity of the particular tense ; 
and this will be treated of below. 


Remarks. 


1. The terminations in the foregoing table, begin with that 
consonant from which the remainder οὔ the word onward, in the 
same tense, is in the main the same. A portion of the conju- 
gational form attaches this consonant immediately to the root of 
the tense (see below the perfect passive and the conjugation in με); 
but by far the greater portion of the conjugational form interposes 
another yowel, called the connecting vowel between, which is far 


. from, being uniform, a8 Av-o-wev, Av-é-re, λύτει-ς. The more 


precise detail therefore of the mode, in which the termination is 
attached to the root, must appear from the paradigm below. The 


8.81. VERES.—-INFLECTION. : 103 


foregoing table Srhibits oul in one point of view, that ‘in which 
the various forms of tenses coincide. 

2. The first and third persons singular Act. are not indicated 
‘in the table, because in most cases they do not terminate in a con- 
sonant, but have as it were, the connective vowel alone,* which, 

er, differs widely in the different tenses. Compare’e. g.1. 

ως 3. Av-ev, with λύτοτμεν, or 1. ἔλυσ-α, 3. ἔλυσ-ε, with ἐλύσ-α- 
nay In the greater portion of the historical tenses, "the first per- 
son has a permanent ν (ἔλυ-ο--ν, ἐλελ ὑχ-ξέςν,) and the third person, 
when its vowel is ἐς takes the ν ἐφελκυστεκόν, (ἔλυ-εν or ἔλυ-:.) 
In the infrequent conjugational form in μέ. both persons have a 
termination in the present, altogether peculiar, viz. us, ov, (§ 106). 

3. The third person plural, active voice, in the leading tenses, 
is given according to the common usage of language. It is proper, 
however, to remark here, that in the Doric dialect it terminates 
in ντέ, and that the vowel before the ov in the common form is 
always long, because an v has dropped out; as τύπτουσι, Dor. 
τύὐπτοντι τετύφασι. Dor. τετύς ανσι, (ὃ 103. IV. 1.) 

4. The terminations os and oo, in the second person of the 
passive, are only to be regarded as the foundation; for in most ca- 
ses they undergo some change. The manner in ‘which they are 
combined with what precedes them, will be explained in its place 
below; see § 103 Rem. Il. 

5. With regard to the peculiarities, in which the historical 
tenses differ from the leading tenses, the following points must be 
attended to in reference to the preceding table. 

a) A character, which runs through the whole active and pas- 
sive form, is that the third person dual, which in the leading ten- 
ses is the same as the second, (as pres. ᾿τύπτετον, τύπτετον, pass. 
τύπτεσϑον, τυττεσϑον,) in the historical tenses uniformly ter- 
minates in ἦν, as imperf. 2. ἐτύπτετον, 8. ἐευπτέτην, pass. 9. ἐτύπ- 
τέσϑον. 3. ἐτυπτέσϑην. 
᾿ς δὴ Besides this, the third person plural active affords but one 
other permanent distinction between the leading and the historical 
tenses. In the former it always terminates in σὲν or ov (ovow, 
aoey, or aov,) while, in the historical tenses, it bas a fixed », (ον, 
av, ἕέσαν, σαν.) 

9) In the passive form, on the other hand, the two classes of 
tenses throughout the whole singular ommnber and all the third 


—— 


* ΤῈ may still be called the connective vowel, though in these cases it 
has nothing to connect, because in substance it is identical with that vow- 
‘el, and is dropped in those forms which do not take the connective vowel. 


Compare e. g. ἐσϑη with ἐτέϑη-ν and ἐτίϑε-μεν, in ὑγρὸς é or 7 be- 
longs to the oat: 


101 


102 


104 VERBS.——-INFLECTION. 7 [ὁ 88. 


persons are distinguished. From the nov of the leading tenses is 
uniformly derived μὴν ἴῃ the historical; and from the tes, both 
singular and plural, in the former is always. derived τὸ in the lat- 
ter. Equally constant is the distinction between the terminations 
σὰν and oo. 

6. The dual is wholy wanting in the first person of the active 
voice, that is, it does not differ from the plural. 


§ 88. INFLECTION BY MODES AND PARTICIPLES. 


1. The imperfect and pluperfect exist only in the indicative 
mode. All the other tenses exist in the other modes and partici- 
ples, though by no means found in actual use in every word. The 
future only always wants both the imperative and subjunctive. 

2. The Greek language has the optative, in addition to the oth- ᾿ 
er usual modes, which derives its name from the signification im- 
plying a wish, but is used in various others. Its precise force is 
taught in the syntax ; it need here only be remarked, that its im- . 
port is substantially that of the imperfect tense subjunctive mode 
in Latin, which is not found in Greek. 

3. This remark is intimately connected with the following 
main rule, relative to the inflection of the optative and subjunc- 
tive, viz. : : 

In the subjunctive mode, all the tenses are ΡΣ ΜΕΘ accordige to the 
analogy of the Luavine tenses of the indicative ; in the optative mode, 
according to that of the HIsToRICAL tenses.* 

Consequently, in the table given above (§ 87. 3), the upper 
row contains the terminations also of the subjunctive mode, and 
the under row those of the optative. 

4. The subjunctive uniformly connects with the terminations 
of the leading tenses the vowels w and 7, instead of the peculiar 
vowels of those terminations in the indicative. The subjunctive 
therefore, both active and passive, of the common conjugation, as 
in τύπτω. may be easily forined by the following rule, viz. 


. 


* Accordingly the third person dual of the optative, even of the leading 
tenses, always ends in ἦν, and in the third person sing. and plur. of the 


‘passive voice always in TO. 


3 88.] : ~ VERBS.—INPLECTION. 10 


cll ἀν, 


Where the indicative dials has ὠς 0, ov, the subjunctive has ὦ; 
where the indicative has &, &t, 4, the subjunctive has 4 ἢ, ἢ: E. g. 


~ 


fa 
Ind. τύπτω, ouev, over, ομαις δε: 
Subj. τύπτω, muers wor, μαι, &e. 


. 
Ind. τύπτετε, exac, &e. | 
Subj. τύπτητε, nrav, ὅτε. 


Ind. τύπτεις, εἰ, πὰ &c. 
Subj. τύπτῃς, 7, 1, &e. 


The subjunctives of all the different tenses and conjugations, 
follow these endings of the present of the usual regular ‘conjuga- 
tion. 

5. The optative has, as its peculiar characteristic, an 0, which 

it combines, with a vowel of the verb or the termination of the 
tense, in a diphthong, that remains unchanged through all num- 
-bers and persons. The termination of the first person’ active is 
either ue or yy, as τὐπτοιμι, εὐϑείην, and in‘ the last case this 7 
remains, together with the diphthong, through all the other ter- 
minations, as Ort, οἐς, Ov, &c.—einv, cing, ein, εἰησαν, &c. Inthe 
passive voice this diphthong stands uniformly directly before the 
terminations of the historical tenses, as τυπτοί- μην, τυϑεῖ-το. 


6. "The amperative has a second and third person in all the 
numbers. Its terminations in all the tenses are these, viz. 


Active 85... ,.τω OD. τον, των P. τὲ, τῶσὰν or ντῶν. 
Passive 8, (σοὺ), σϑω D. σϑον, σϑων P. ode, σϑωσὰν or σϑων. 


7. The infinitive has the following terminations, viz. 


Active ἐὸν or vat or ae. 
Passive σϑαι. 


8. The participles are all adjectives of three endings; the 
feminine is therefore, agreeably to the rule in § 58. 2, formed af- 
,ter the first declension of nouns. The masculine active has ντὸς 
in the genitive, which requires ¢ or v in the nominative, and in 
the feminine oa. E. g. 


14 


4 


105 


106 VERBS.—INFLECTION. - [§ 89. 


J ~ - » 
ὧν OY οὖς, ουσα, ον ἄς, ἄσα, ἂν 
G. οντος. . ὑ G. αντος. 
εἰς, EL0G, ἐν US, VOM, VY _ 
G. ἐντος. ". _G. ὑντος. 


_ From this the participle of the perfect active is wholly differ- 
ent, being uniformly as follows, viz. ὥς, υἷα, os, G. ὁτος. 
The participles of the passive voice all.end in μένος, 4, ov. 
Remark. Among the modifications which the preceding in- 
flections undergo, attention must be particularly paid to the con- ὁ 
traction, not so much of the contract verbs properly so called, as of 


some: parts of the usual conjugation, where contraction takes place; 
as will be shown below. See ὃ 95 Rem. 6. ὃ 103. III. 6. 


- 


§ 89. INFLECTION OF THE ACTIVE, PASSIVE, AND MIDDLE 
VOICES, 1. . 


1. The idea of passive includes in it the case, in which the 

' action that 1 suffer, is performed by myself. Such an action may 

104. therefore be expressed by the forms of the passive voice. This’ 

is.what is called the reflective sense. ‘The Greek language, how- 

ever, goes farther, and uses the passive voice, in connexions in 

which the verb has only a secondary connexion with the subject, 

as I prepare myself a house. All these cases, which will be farther 

explained in the syntax, make out the idea of middle; and the 
passive, when used to express them, is called the Middle Voice. 

2. We have already seen above (§ 87) the general differ- 
ence of the active and passive forms. According to that differ- 
ence, every active is converted into its natural passive ; which is 
here, for greater convenience, exhibited only in the first person 
of the indicative of the general tenses. 


ACTIVE. PASSIVE. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 

Pres. @ | + onav || Impf. ον , ὑμὴν 
Perf. ας. χα μαι Plup. ἐόν, κεν μὴν 

#GE σω Couns | Aor, 9% ᾿σάμην 


6) οὑμαιν ἢ ον ὁμὴν 


ᾧ 89. ᾿ VERBS.—INFLECTION. 107. 


3. Now in this natural passive form the present, the imperfect, 
the perfect, and the pluperfect tenses express in all cases, where 
the idea of middle can exist, that idea; so that it is only from the 
context, that it can be determined, in any given case in these 
tenses, whether the signification is passive or middle. But in the 
aorist and future, the above form of the passive is, for the most 
part, used only as a middle, and for the passive idea a particular 
form is used, which has this peculiarity, that the aorist, notwith- 
standing its passive meaning, assumes nevertheless in its inflection 
of person and number the active form ; while the future, formed 
from this aorist by increment, passes again into the passive form, 
viz. 


Aor. Pass. pee 
nV 


Fat. Pass, ὃ Gone 
In distinction from these forms, the above mentioned forms of the 
natural passive are called in the Greek grammar the Future and 
Aorist Middle. The four first named tenses, however, the pres- 
ent, imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect, which may be used equal- 
ly in both significations, and might hence well be called Passive- 
Middle forms, are in the Greek grammar simply called passive, 


105 


and can only be called middle in connexions, where they have a | 


reflective sense, and this must be ascertained by the syntax. 


Remark. It may be observed here that the medial form of 
the aorist is not only banished from all verbs, which do not admit 
the idea of the middle voice; but that in many, the passive aorist 
in ϑὴν and ἣν has adopted the medial signification, and’is there- 
fore used only in a limited, though not an inconsiderable class of 
words. Here, however, every verb is assumed in the grammar 


to be entire; and it must be left to further remark to ascertain in - 


what parts my particular verb is defective. 


108 Τν VERBS.—+-INFLECTION. ~ -[5.90. 


§ 90. INFLECTION BY TENSES. 


~1. As the tenses in general are comprehended in what has 
been stated above, it is only further to be remarked, that some of 
them appear in two forms, which bear in the grammar the names 
‘of first: and second, without any diversity of signification. The 
double form of the perfect is found only in the active voice, that 
of the future and aorist in the active, passive, and middle voices. 
2. Besides this, the passive has still another third future, or 
paulopost future, as it is called, which takes the reduplication of 
the perfect, and of which the signification will be given in the 
syntax. ᾿ 
3. All the tenses, belonging to the Greek verb, will now be 
» detailed according to the division given above of active, passive, 
and middle. ; ; 
Nore. In the following table the augments and the termina- ἡ 
tions of the first person singular are indicated. The larger dash 
stands.for the proper root of the verb ; the shorter, in the begin- 


ning, for the first letter repeated in the augment. The aspirate 
over the termination denotes that the preceding consonant is as- 


pirated. 
ACTIVE. PASSIVE. MIDDLE. 
Pres. —a —ouor |; like 
: Impf. é— ov é— ὁμὴν the 
1. Perf. -€— OF κα -— — wae passive 
1. Plup. | &e—éworxew| ἐπε --- μὴν | 
\ 2. Perf. -E— a 
2. Plup. 1 é-e«— εν * 
3 1. Fut. — ow —dnoouae | —oouatr 
1. Aor. “| é&—oa E— ϑὴν a— oauny 
2. Fut. --ὦ --ἡσομαν [---οῦμαι 
2. Aor. . €or ἐ.--- ny é— Ouny 
3. Fut. . ' wanting -ε — σοβαν wanting. 
106 4. The connexion of these-terminations of the tenses or tem- 


poral forms, as they might be called, with the root of the various 
verbs, requires a particular explanation, Which is called the doc- 
trine of the formation of the tenses —This, however, must be pre- 
ceded by the consideration of the characteristic of the theme. 5 


~ 


΄ ᾿ -- 
“ ᾿ 5 


δῷ 91, 92.3 -  -VERBS.— THEME. om . 109 


F 2 ,, 
ς _ > 


i 


§ 91. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE THEME. 


1. That letter, which immediately precedes the chief vowel 
of a temporal termination, is called the characteristic of said tense, . 
viz. according to the foregoing table, o is the characteristic of the 
first future and first aorist active and middle. : 

2. More particularly, however,.the letter which remains (af- 
ter casting away every thing which belongs to the termination of 
the conjugation) at the end of the root itself, is called the charac 
teristic of the verb. It is necessary therefore only to cast away 
the ὦ of the present tense, and the last letter or the two last let- 
ters are the characteristic, as in A¢y-w the y, in φονεύω the ev.* 


τ ὃ 92, A TWOFOLD THEME. 


1, That ἜΑ which remains, after dropping the w of the 
present tense, is not always the pure root of the verb. For when 
the other tenses are divested of their peculiar augments and ter- 
minations, there remains with many verbs a root, more or less 
diverse from that of the present. 

2. Some of these differences consist merely in the changeable 
nature of the vowel, or its being shortened or lengthened, as τρέ- 
πῶ ἔτραπον, δέρκω δέδορκα, λείπω ἔλεπον, φαίνω φανῶ ἔφηνα, 
- βάλλω ἔβαλον. which are to be considered merely as changes in- 
cident to inflection. 

3. In others the difference is more considerable, where the 
pute and simple root of the verb, as recognised in the. other 
tenses, is in the present by additions or changes rendered more 
full and larger; as τύπτω ἐτύπην, root ΤΎΠ, in the present - 
᾿ ΤΎΠΤ'; τάσσω ἐτάγην, root TAT, in the present AZZ; λαμ- 


- 


* The etymological root of the verb, which in φονεύω is Mov, is not 
here meant; but the grammatical root of the verb, of which év is also a 


part. So in φιλέω and τεμάω. ¢ and e, not 2 and ft, are the character- 
istics. 


+ 


107 


} 


_ 110 VERBS.—THEME. κυρῶ Ὁ fGe92. 


βάνω ἔλαβον λήψομαι, root 44B, AHB, in the present 44M- 
BAN. : ae | cA 

4. It appears, therefore, that the ancient and more simple form, 
which has been preserved in some of the tenses, has passed over 
into a more strengthened form in the present. But since the 
grammar, for the sake of uniformity, always starts from the pres- 
ent, in all verbs where more considerable discrepances of this 
kind appear, an obsolete or ancient present, corresponding with the 
form preserved in the other tenses, is assumed for the conven- 
ience of grammatical use. 

5. Every form of the present tense, whether obsolete or not, 
from which you start in forming the single parts of any verb, is 
called a theme. To prevent the unnecessary multiplication of 
themes in this grammar, instead of an obsolete theme in o, its 
root alone in capital letters is sometimes given, as ΖΤΎΠ, TAT, 
&c. | 

6. In reality, this confounding of forms, like the similar one in 
the declension of nouns (§ 56), is an anomaly ; and accordingly 
the catalogue of anomalous verbs (to be given below) consists prin- 
cipally of verbs of this class. When, however, the difference of 


_the usual from the obsolete or assumed theme is common to a 


considerable number of verbs, which also coincide in the charac- 
teristic of the present tense in use, this also is reckoned among the 
diversities of the usual conjugation. ee 

7. Here are to be reckoned those verbs, in which the true 
characteristic is only concealed in the perfect tense by insertion 
or change of letters. These are of three sorts, viz. 

a) In verbs whose characteristic is mz, the στ is an addition for 
the sake of strength, while the true characteristic is one of the 
labials 8, 2, g.* E. g. . 

κρύπτω I hide, τύπτω I strike, ῥάπτω I sew. 


KP TBR TYMS ‘PADQ 


* See ἡ 20. 


? 


os : ἘΦ . ᾿ - 
492]. ΟΛΈΒΒΒ,- ΤΉΕΜΕ. 114 


b) Of most of the verbs in oo or zz, the true characteristic is 


one of the palatics 7, κι y. Eg. 
᾿ χάσσω I dispose, φρίσσω I shudder, βήσσω I cough. 


ee e TAT @DPIK2 . BHXQ 
Some, however, have one of the linguals; see Rem. 2 and 3 be- 
low. x ‘ 


᾿νο Of most of ‘those in ¢ (Dor. od) the true characteristic is 
0, but several have χ. E.g. , 
goalw I say, ὄξω I smell.—zoagw I scream. 
@PAAL OAR KPAT2 


108 


8. All these verbs retain the fuller and less simple form in the | 


present and imperfect of the active and passive, while every thing 
else is formed from the simple theme. For the sake, however, 
of brevity and grammatical uniformity, these differences of the two 
themes are usually treated as common inflections; and as if e. δ. 
in τύψω, τυπείς, &c. the τ of the present τύπτω were dropped; 

or as if before the o in φράσω (fut. of φράζων), not the simpler 
characteristic ὃ, but ¢ were omitted. 


Rem. 1. To the verbs in ¢, whose pure characteristic is 0, be- 
longs the greatest number of derivatives in (Cw and af. To the 
characteristic y belong all that indicate a sound or call, as κράζω 
I scream, στενάζω I groan, τρίζω I chirp, οἰμώζω I lament &c. with 
some others, particularly orale I drop, στίζω I prick, στηρίζω I 
prop, σφύζω I palpitate. The three following, viz. πλάζω I drive 
about, κλάζω I sound, σαλπίξω I sound a trumpet, on the contrary, 
: have yy as the true ’ characteristic, (future πλάγξω &c.) 

Rem. 2..On the other hand, some verbs in oo or tr have, as 
the true characteristic, not the palatic, but the lingual, and follow 
therefore the analogy of those in ¢, as πλάσσω I form, xacow I 
stroke, πτίσσω I husk grain, fut. πλάσω &c. 

Rem. 3. Some verbs vibrate between the two characteristics 0 
and 7. See in the list of anomalous verbs conalw, παίξω, βαστα- 
ἕξω, νάσσω. 

Rem. 4. It has been stated in general terms above, that in the 
characteristic πε, the true characteristic is always one of the labial 
mutes ; and in oo or 17, one of the palatics, or according to Rem. 
. 2, one of the linguals. Which particular letter, however, it may 
be in any single case, is for the most part indifferent ; since,as we 
shall see below, most verbs are in use only in those tenses (the 
first future, first aorist, and perfect,) which are obliged, in obedi- 
ence to the general rules (§ 18 &c.) to change this pure charac- 


109 


112 _ VERBS.~—FORMATION OF THE TENSES. [Ὁ 98. 


teristic ; and indeed the three mutes also in the like way. For ex- 
ample, from the future βήξω it is clear, that the true characteristic 
of βήσσω is a palatic, but not which. It is true we are able, i in 
these cases, to conjecture from kindred forms, which palatic is the: 
true characteristic ; but as the declension of the verb isnot there- 
by affected, it is not unsafe in all verbs, whose true characteristic 
is not obvious from the conjugation, to regard x as the true char- 


_ acteristic of those in mz, and of those in oo or rr either y or 0 


(Rem. 2), which latter is the basis of the kindred termination ¢ 
It will remain therefore only to take note of the few verbs, which 
really, in one of their tenses, retain unchanged a different letter 
from the regular characteristic of that tense, viz. 

_a) In-at,—fianro I injure, κρύπτω I conceal, in both of 
which the true characteristic is @. —Oanro I sew, ϑάπτω 1 bury, 
oxanto I dig, δίπτω I throw, ϑρύπτω I break, in all which the 
true characteristic is φ. 

b) In oo, τε,--- φρίσσω 1 shudder, the true characteristic of 
which is x. Ba) 


§ 93. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 


1. The attaching of the temporal endings, as they are given 
above (§ 90), cannot take place directly, nor without consideration 
of the general rules of euphony; which require, that the charac- 
teristic of the verb, if it do not harmonize with the ending, should 
undergo various changes and modifications. In addition to this, 


various peculiarities, founded in usage, are to be considered. 


2. The subject will be more intelligible, if we observe what 


‘*@nses are derived one from another, or coincide one with anoth- 


er. The tenses in this respect are. divided into three classes, in 
which they are arranged in the order, in which, in most verbs, 
they are found. 


I., Present and imperfect active and passive. 


Π. First future and aorist active and middle. 
_First perfect and pluperfett, with perfect and pluperfect pas- 
sive, and paulopost future. 
First aorist and first future passive. 


? 


{Π|: Second future and second aorist active and middle, denial 


aorist and second future passive, second perfect and plu- 
perfect. τ 


- 


~ 


Ὁ 94.] ΨΕΒΒΒ.--- ΤΈΝ3Ε8. 118 , 


Should any particular verb, made use of as a paradigm, want 
any of the preceding tenses, such tense of that verb is neverthe- 
less inserted in the grammar, as a guide to other verbs, in which 
it is used. 

Every change made in a verb in the tenses. quoted first. in ei- 
ther of the preceding series, takes place in the other tenses of the 
same series, unless some particular rule or exception prevent. 


Remarx. The circumstances in which the tenses, in each of 
the preceding series, for the most part, agree with each other, 
are principally the following, viz 

a) The tenses in series 1. make no alteration whatever in 
the radical form of the present active, which is in real use; and 
where the present active belongs itself to a strengthened form of 
the root (in conformity with what was stated above), it is found in 
all the tenses of this series, as τύπτω, ἔτυπτον Kc. while the tenses 
of the second series, for the most part, and of the third series 
altogether, are derived from the simple form. 

b) The series Il. comprises all those tenses, in which the 
characteristic of the verb is generally changed by inflection, par- 
ticularly by the addition of a consonant in the termination, as τύ- 
wo &c. 

c) The series Ill. on the other hand, retains unchanged 
the characteristic of the verb,-as ἐεύπην, and alters only occasion- 
ally the radical vowel. In this series of tenses alone, therefore, 
—when the first series contains a strengthened form—the true 
characteristic of the verb is to be recognised, since in the second 
series, should the said characteristic be a palatic, though this fact 
may be known, yet it cannot be ascertained by mere inspection, 
which of the palatics is the characteristic. 


§ 94. THE TENSES. 


1. In order to learn the formation of the tenses, it is necessary 
to assume only one part or form of the verb, from which to derive 
them all; and the present indicative active is made use of for this, 
All the other varieties of person and mode—as soon as this one 
person is known—are derived uniformly in all verbs, according to 
the manner to be unfolded in the paradigms μεῖον; with the qual- 
ifications expressed in §§ 87, 88. 

15 


110 


~ 114 VERBS.~—FUTURE ACTIVE. [§ 95. 


ill 


Remark. The perfect alone is of a formso peculiar, that sever- 
al of its personal and modal inflections must be learned at the 
same time, as being in some degree ny ja of each other : 


(§§ 97, 98.) 


2. Several tenses are formed in a manner 580 simple and regu- 
lar throughout, that they may be satisfactorily learned from the ex- 
amples, which follow below. For more convenient inspection, 
however, they are here detailed in the usual Sats Sa in O— | 
The tenses then are derived as follows, viz. 

a) From the present in ὦ, the imperfectin ov, τύπτω ἔτυπτον. 
ἦς pb). From every tense in , a passive in ouoe. From the pres- 
ent active, the present passive, τύπτω τύπτυμαι, and from the fu- 


‘ture, the future middle, τύψω τύψομαι. Under this moreover is 


included the second future or the circumflexed ayers in w, middle 
οὗμαν (§ 101. 2.) | 

c) From every tense in ov, a passive in ὁμην. From the im- 
perfect, the imperfect passive, ἔτυπτον, ἐτυπτόμην. and from the 
second aorist active, the second aorist middle, ἔτυπον ἐτυπόμην. 

_ d) From the first aorist, the aorist middle, merely by append- 
ing the syllable μὴν, ἔτυψα ἐτυψάμην. 

e) From the perfect in every case the pluperfect; in the ac- 
tive voice, by changing the α into eu, τέτυφα éretugécy,—in the 
passive voice, by changing was into μην, τέτυμμαι ἐτετύμμην. 

f) From each of the tivo forms of the aorist passive, the cor- 
responding future passive is formed by changing ἦν into joouas, 
ἐτύφϑην and ἐτύυπην---τυφϑήσομαι, τυπήσομαι.. 

The other tenses have their particular rules. 


§ 95. "FUTURE ACTIVE. 


1. The principal form of the Greek future is the termination 
ow. it is found in by far the greatest number of verbs, and is 
thence called the first future, as παύω, fut. παύσω. 

2, When the characteristic of the verb is a consonant, the - 
changés incident to σ take place, viz. 


Γ \ ιν" ; < 
Ἔ ͵ 


τ Ὁ VERBS.—FUTURE ACTIVE. ὁ 115 © 


λέγω, πλέκω, τεύχω, fut. λέξω, πλέξω, τεύξω 
ϑλίϑθω, λείπω, γράφω, — Iwo, λείψω, γράψω 
σπεύδω, πείϑω, πέρϑω, --- σπεύσω, πείσω. πέρσω. - 
8. In verbs in mt, in σ΄ or TT, and in ¢, the real characteristic 
according to § 92 is adopted. In consequence zz is changed in- 
to w, oo or tr into ἕξ, and ¢ into o, 6. g. 
τύπτω (7'YTTQ) ~ fat. εύψω 
ῥάπτω (PAD) — άψω 
τάσσω (TAT) --τάξω - : 
φράζω (DP.AAL)— φράσω. 
In the rarer cases, as is also taught in the same place, ¢ is 
changed into ἕξ. and oo or τε into 6, 6. δ. 
ο΄ χράζω (KP_ATQ) fut. κράξω 
2 πλάσσω (ITA AOR) — πλάσω. | 
4. When the characteristic of the verb is a vowel, the syllable 
before the ending ow is by rule long, whatever be its quantity in 
the present, 6. g. | 
 daxgvem (Ὁ) fat. δακρύσω (Ὁ) 
tia (ἢ -- εἰὐω (i) : 


“ 


In consequence of which rule « and o are changed into 7 and 
@, as φιλέω, δηλόω.---«φιλήσω, δηλώσω. 
- For exceptions to this, see Rem. 3 below. 
5. The characteristic « is changed into 7) in the future, except 
when one of the vowels «, ἐς or the consonant 9 precedes, in which 
case the future has long a,* 6. ο΄. 


, > , ͵ τ - 7 
τέμαω, anata, fut. τεμήσω, ἀπατήσω 


, ? 7 
Boaw, éyyvaw, — βοήσω, éyyunow 
>! , a7 U - 
ἕαω, μειδέάω, --- ἑάσω, μειδιάσω (ἃ) 
’ ς ’ δι - 
docw, gagaw, — δράσω, φωράσω (δ) 


_For exceptions see below Rem. 4. 


* Compare the similar rules.in the first declension ὁ 34, 2, and in the 
. feminine of adjectives ὁ 59. 2. 


΄ 


112 


119 


110 VERBS.—FUTURE ACTIVE. ce [ὁ 95. 


6. On the other hand, the penult syllables of the futures in 
ὅσω. 160, ὕσω, are always short when they come from verbs in ¢@ 
or in 60, tr, as in φράσω, dixaow, voutow, κλύσω. from φράζω, 


'δικάζω, νομίζω, κλύζω, and in πλάσω, πείσω, from πλάσσω, πτίσσω. 


Reniarks. 


1. When the’o of the future is preceded by a labial, the change 
takes place mentioned ὃ 25. 4, as σπένδω, fut. σπείσω. 

.2. In the Doric dialect, in the first future and aorist, most of | 
the verbs in ¢, oo, rr, which commonly have 0, take an &, as 
κομίξω, δικάξω, from κομίζω. δικάζω. 

3. Several verbs, that have ἃ short vowel as a characteristic, 
have the same unchanged in the future, as γελάω I laugh, σπάω 
I draw, fut. ago" αἰνέω I praise, καλέω I call, Céw I boil, fut. ἔσω" 
ἀρόω Ϊ plough, fat: dow" ἀνύω I fulfil, ἐρύω 1 extract, fut. vow. 
Some verbs vibrate between both forms, partly in the future itself, 
as ποϑέω I desire, fut. ἔσω and now, partly in the tenses which are 
derived therefrom (compare § 92.2.) as λύω I loose, fut. λύσω, 
perf. pass. λέλυμαι. See in the anomalous verbs aivew, αἱρέω, 


δέω, ποϑέω, duo, dv, Avo. 


4. The verb ἀχροάομαι I hear has ἀκροάσομαι, contrary to the 
analogy of Boaw fut. now. On the other hand, χθάω, χοαάομαιυ,ς f. 
yonow, &c. iscontrary to the analogy of dod, ασω. 

5. The following six, viz yéw I pour out, ὅέω I flow, veiw I 
swim, πλέω I sail, πνέω I blow, ϑέω I run, have ev in the future, ἢ 
as χεύσω, δεύσομαι, &c. see anomalous verbs. The two follow- 
ing, καίω I burn and xiaiw I weep, whose original form, preserv- 
ed in the Attic dialect, is κλάω, xa, with a long ας take αὖ in the 
future, as xavow, χλαύσω, see anomalous verbs. 


ATTIC FUTURE. 


16. When the termination ow is preceded by a short vowel, the 
6 is occasionally omitted, in the Ionic dialect, and, in the Attic. di- 
alect, the two syllables are contracted into one, and marked with 
a circumflex, as from τελέω I finish, 


Fut. τελέσω τελέσεις, &e. 

lon. τέλέω τέλέεις τελέει τελέομεν τελέξετε τελέουσυν : 

Att. τελῶν τελεῖς τελεῖ τελοῦμεν τελεῖτε τελοῦσιν. 
From βιβάζξω I lead, Ἷ 

Fut. βιβάσω βιβᾶσεις ὅτ. .“ 

Ton. (βιβάω βιβάεις &e. obsolete.) _ 

Att. βιβὼ βιβᾷς βιβᾷ βιβώμεν βιβᾶτε βιβῶσιν. 
The same prevails in the modes and participles, and in the mid- 
dle voice. See the present tense of the contract verbs below. 


§ 96.] VERBS.—-FIRST AND SECOND AORIST. 117 | 


= 


7. If the short vowel be v, the two vowels do not admit of 
contraction. In this case, after the omission of the o, the ὦ is 
circumfleced, and inflected, in every respect, like a contract verb 
in ἕω, as from κομίζω. 


Fat. κομίσω κομίσεις ὅτο. 
ΠΑΙ͂. χομοώ κομεῖς cet εοὔμεν cette εοὖῦσι. Mid. κομεοῦμαι &c. 


ἴῃ the Attic writers, this is the most usual form of the fatare in 
verbs of this class. 


SECOND FUTURE. 


8. When, in order to form the future, the termination ¢w, and 
the ὦ, εἷς &c. οὔμαι &c. formed from it, are attached to the char- 
acteristic of the verb, it is called the second future ; which form of 
the future’ is the most common with verbs, whose characteristic is 
A, μιν, Qs with respect to which more precise rules are given be- 
low in§ 101. A formation of the same kind, in some other verbs, is 
to be regarded as wholly anomalous; see in the anomalous verbs 
βύχομαι and éCouce. 

. The Dorics attach the terminations ὦ &c. over, οὔμαι (or, 
more exactly in the Doric dialect, εὔμεν, evuac,) to theo (ξ, w) 
of the common first future, as TUWO, τυψοῦμεν OF τυψεῦμεν, and 
this form is also used in the Attic and common diaiect, as the 
future middle of some verbs ; as from πνίγω I suffocate, Fut. Mid. 
᾿ πνεξοῦμαι. 
~ 10. An ἐπ ον anomalous form of the future, viz. in oma, 
may be seen under πίνω and éodiw, in the list of anomalous 
verbs. 


. § 96. FIRST AND SECOND AORIST. 


1. The Aorist terminating in ἃ is called the First Aorist. This, 
however, has a twofold formation, adding either σὰ or simply « to 
the characteristic of the verb. In the same cases where the fu- 
ture, according to the rule, ends in ow—that is, universally, ex- 
cept in verbs in 4, u,v, o—the first aorist ends in ow, wherein the 
same changes take place, as in ow, viz. 
τύπτω, TUWH, aor. 1. ἐτυψα 
κομίζω, xouiow, --- ἐκόμισα 
φιλέω, φιλήσω, — ἐφίλησα 
πνέω, πνεύσω." — ἕπνευσα. 


114 


115 


- 


x 


man παι VERBS.—FIRST AND SECOND AORIST. [ὁ 96. 


Verbs, on the other hand, in 4, 4, v, 0, whose future ends not in | 


σώ, but in ὦ, have this aorist not in σα; but in α alone ; the par- 


ticular rules for which will be given in treating verbs of this class 
below in § 101. 

Rem. 1. A few verbs of the anomalous class, though they are 
not verbs i in 4, u,v, @, form their first aorist in « instead of σα. as, 
yéw, ἔχεα. For the first aorist in χὰ of some verbs in st, as ἔδω- 
xa, see those verbs below. | 

2. 'The aorist in ov is called the Second Aorist. The termina- 
tion is immediately attached to the characteristic of the verb ; 
where, however, three things are to be observed, viz. ᾿ . 

a) The second aorist is uniformly derived from the pure and 

simple characteristic, when the same exists, according to 
§ 92, in a strengthened form in the present. 

b) The penult of the present is commonly shortened in the 

second aorist. _ 

c) The « in the radical syllable of the verb is usually changed 

into ας, in the second aorist. | 

3. It is only by these changes that the second aorist is distin- 
guished, in form, from the imperfect; and all verbs which cannot 
undergo these changes (e. g. ἐρύω, γράφω, &c.) or where there 
would be no difference but the quantity of the vowel (as in xdiv), 
have no second aorist.* ae Ga : 

4. It is also altogether wanting in derivative verbs, formed 
from other words with a regular termination, like ζω, ifw, aivo, 
VV, EVM, OW, HW, and ἕω. 

Rem. 2. Of other verbs, moreover, the greater part have the 
first aorist, and much the smaller portion the second, although it 
is assumed in the grammar, even in verbs which do not possess it, 


in order to teach the formation αἱ other tenses, particularly the 
second aorist passive.} 


* They may have nevertheless a second aorist passive, as ἐγράφην, 
866 ὁ 100. ' 


- + The learner is therefore to be apprised, that in the following exam- 


_ ples the forms ἔτυπον, ἔκρυβον, ἔρῥαφον, ἤλλαγὸν, ἕκαον, &c. are 


either not found at all in Greek writers, or very rarely; and that ἔτυψα, 


- 


~ 


8967 VERBS.—FIRST AND SECOND AORIST. — 119 


a 


5. In conformity with these principles, the changes and abbre- 
viations (indicated generally above in no. 2,) of the characteristic 
and vowel of the present into the characteristic and vowel of the 
second aorist, are accomplished in the respective cases, ‘as fol- 
lows, viz. 
Pres. 24. Sec. Aor. 4 — βάλλω ἔβαλον 


= --- τύπτω ἔτυπον 
— πὶ -- - f — xountm  éxouGov 
: g— ῥάππιω ἔσῥαφον 
— 60,77 — — γ -- ἀλλάσσω ἤλλαγον 
ee π᾿ (ὃ — φράζω ἔφραδον 
ἣν — χράζω  ἘἬἔχραγον 
— αἱ —' Sa — νοῶ ἔχαον 
— 7 ae! ge oe ANOO ἔλαϑον 
erat brah 92 ἡ; — λείπω. ἔλειπον 
é or ἃ in the verbs 4, u, ν, @ 
BP ge: τε πὶ τῶ a ye φεύγω ἔφυγον 
-- ε -- — α — τρέπω ἔτραπον 


εν. 3. To avoid the danger of mistaking an imperfect, or in 
other modes a present, for the second aorist, or the reverse, it is 
to be observed in addition to the rule in no. 3, that, as was taught 
§ 94. 2, the real imperfect tense of a verb always conforms exact- 
ly to the actual present tense, and consequently, i in the indicative 
mode, that only is the true aorist, which differs in form from the 
imperfect in actual use, and, in the other modes, from the present 
in actual use. Accordingly ἐ ἔγραφον from γράφω, can only be im- 
perfect, and γράφῃς only subjunctive present. 

Rem. 4. In some verbs, the second aorist has the syllable be- 
fore the termination long, content with the other points of differ- 
ence noted in no. 2, as εὗρον, ἔβλαστον. &c. see the anomalous 
verbs evgioxe, βλαστάνω. In a few cases, where the vowel would 
otherwise be long by position, a transposition restores the common 
relation between the present and second aorist, as δέρκω, ἔδρακον. 
See the anomalous verbs δέρχω, πέρϑω. 

Rem. 5. The second aorists in ν, wy, vy, and the syncopated 
πος are treated below under the head of verbs in ys, § 110 

em. 5, 6. : 


ἤλλαξα, &c. are pie instead of them. The former, however, are given 
to show the formation of the second aorist passive of these verbs, which 
actually occurs in the Greek writers. 


- 


116. 


i 


120 —"  VERBS.—FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT. [Ὁ 97. 


§ 97. FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT. 


1. The first perfect has two terminations, both ending in α, 
ας, &c. ery 
a) If the characteristic of the verb be β, 1, @, or 7, *, y, this 


’ letter is (or remains) aspirated, and α is attached to it. E. g. 


τρίβω, λέπω, γράφω, perf. réruupa,* λέλεφα, γέγραφα 
λέγω, πλέκω, τεύχω, λέλεχα, πέπλεχα, τξτευχα. 


If the characteristic of the present is changed (§ 92), it can still 


_be recognised in the future; and as the same letters, which effect 


in the future a change into ἕξ or w, produce in the perfect a χ or 
g, so to form the perfect from the future it is only necessary to 
change those double letters into these aspirates. Ἐν g- | 
τάσσω (τάξω), perf. τέταχα 
τύπτω (τύψω), --- τέτυφα. 
Ὁ) In all other cases the first perfect ends in κα. This termi- 
nation in the verbs which make the future in ow, is attached to 


the root in the same manner, and with the same changes, as the 
00), 6. g. 


tin ἜΑ(τισωὴ perf. τέτικα 
quien φιλήσω) — πεφίληκα 
τίμάω (τιμησὼ) δ — τετίμηκα 
ἐρυϑριάω (ἐρυϑριᾶσω) “--- ἠρυϑρίακα 
onan (σπάσω) -- ἔσπᾶκα 
πνέω (πνεύσω) --- πέπνευκα. 


So also the following, with the omission of the linguals, viz. 
πείϑω (πείσων perf. πέπεικα 
κομίζω (κομίσω) — κεκόμίκα 

The verbs in 4, μ, v, @ will be considered below in § 101. 


2. Several verbs have a second perfect in a. It is this form,, 
which, in the elder grammarians, in consequence of its being, in 


- afew rare instances, found to have an intransitive or reflected 


* With ὁ long as in the present. 


§ 97.) _ YERBS,—FIRST AND SECOND PERFECT. 121 


meaning, was called the Perfect Middle. In reality, however, it 
is found, both in virtue of its prevalent signification and of the 
analogy of its formation, to be a second form of the perfect active. 
This form attaches the same terminations, as the first perfect, to 
the characteristic of the present, without any change, as λήϑω 
Rhy Pa, σήπω σέσηπα, φεύγω πέφευγα. 
3. There are three things here to be noted, viz. 
a) When the characteristic of the present is not simple (§ 92) 
the simple characteristic appears in the second perfect, ΟΕ 
as in the second aorist, e. g. 


ἢ πλήσσω ( HAHT2) — πέπληγα 
φρίσσω (ΦΡΖΚΩΛ — πέφρικα 
ὄζω (OAL) — ὅδωδα. 

b) In general this form prefers a long vowel in the penult, 
even when the second aorist has a short one. Hence the second 
perfect of φεύγω (second aorist ἔφυγον) is πέφευγαά. The short 
ας accordingly, whether it exists simply in the present, or has been 
introduced into the other tenses by shortening the ἢ or αὐ of the 
present, is commonly. changed in the second perfect into ἡ, e. g. 

ϑάλλω (fut. aio) --- τέϑηλα 

λήϑω (δοτ. 9 ἔλάϑον) --- λέληϑα 

δαίω (aor.2 ἔδαον) --- δέδηα. 
But sometimes this is merely made long, as κράζω (ἔκραγον) 
κἔχραᾶγα. 

c) This perfect, moreover, is inclined to the vowel ο. and it 
therefore not only remains unaltered, as in κόπεω (KOTI2) κέκο- 
sto, but it is also adopted as a change of «, as dsoxw, δέδορκα, 
TEK &, τέτοκα (see anomalous verbs tixzw). This circumstance 
operates in a twofold manner on the «¢ of the present, according 
as € or ὁ is the basis of this diphthong, which is to be determined 
from those tenses that shorten the vowel, as ᾿.6 second future and 
second aorist. Ifthe radical letter be ¢, wich is the case only 


* The mode of writing δέδηα as also πέφηνα, « σέσηπα Sc. is incor- 
rect. 
16 


11 


118 


192 ere en PASSIVE. 605 ~ LS 98. 


in vale in be My Uy 9. abi & ” changed in 0; ni it be τ then it is 
changed into ov, 6. g. ἐν sh ὟΝ 
σπείρω (fat. σπερῶδ) --- ἔσπορα 
λείπω (aor. 2 ἕλυπον) — λέλουπα. 

4. The same remark may be made of the second perfect, which 
was made above ( 96. 4) of the second aorist, viz. that it exists 
only in primitive verbs, and that the greater number of these, as 
also all derivatives, have only the first perfect. tas 

Rem. 1. Some first perfects also change é into o. Such are 
πέμπω T send, πέπομφα" κλέπτω I steal, κέκλοφα" τρέπω I turn, and - 
τρέφω 1 nourish, τέτροφα. See also λέγω, συνείλοχα; among the 
anomalous verbs. In like manner ¢¢ is changed into ov in δεδοῖκα 
from the anomalous Z7£/2. 

Rem. 2. It has already been remarked (§ 84 Rem. 1), that af- 
ter the Attic reduplication the vowel. of the perfect i is shortened, 


as ἀχούω axrxoa, ἀλείφω ἀλήλιφα, ΕΑ ΕΎΘ ἐλήλυϑα.. ) 
Rem. 3. For several shortened forms of the perfect, as βέβαα 


for βέβηκα, βέβαμεν for βεβήκαμεν &e. see δ 110 Rem. 4. 


$98: | PERFECT PASSIVE. 


1. In the Perfect Passive the terminations pol, Oot, Tat, Kc. 


and in the Pluperfect, wnyv, oo, to, &c. are attached to the charac- 


teristic of the verb, not, as in the other passive forms, by means 
of the vowel-of connexion (ὃ 87 Rem. 1, owas, exée, &c-). but im- 
medrately, inasmuch as the daria erietin precedes the ἃ or xa of 
the regular first perfect active, from which the perfect ran is 
formed. 


Rem. 1. When therefore a verb has no first perfect in use, it is 
supplied in the grammar, asin λέίπο (λέλοεπανΡ the first - perfect 
λέλειφα is supplied, to form therefrom the perfect passive λέλδεμι- 
μαι. : 

2. There ark anche two general nites for the forinatilin, 
of this tense, viz. 


I. If the first perfect have g, 7, these letters undergo a change 


‘ . 
§ 98.) -VERBS.——PERFEGT PASSIVE. 123 


before fly σι τῷ according to the general rules in §§ 20, 29, 23. 
Hence from Ἐξεύψα and πέϊλεχα are formed 
π΄ τέτυτμμσι, τέτυτψαι, τέτυτπται, 
for -φμαι, -ῷσαι, πτῷται. 
πέπλε-γμαι, πέπλε-ξαι, πέπλε-κται, 
ἢ -χμαυ, -σαι, -χται. 
% order to avoid the concurrence of three consonants (§ 19. 2) in 
the farther inflection of this tense and the pluperfect, the o is omit- 
ted from the terminations σϑέ, oFar, σϑω, ὅζο. e.g. 
π΄ Φᾷ pers. pl. τέσυφϑε for -gode or - ᾧϑε, abe 
Inf. πεπλέχϑαι for -χσϑαε or -ὅϑαι. 
The third person plural in vzau and vro cannot be formed, con- 
sistently with the analogy of the Greek language ; and its place is 
therefore supplied by an union of the participle with a tense of 
: εἶναν to be ; see the paradigm οἵ τύπτε below. 
Rem. 2. In the Tonic dialect, however, instead of yras and yto 
there is found «ras and aro, see § 103 Rem. Ill. 5 | 
_ Il. The second-general rule for the formation of the’ perfect 
passive is, that when the first perfect active is formed in κα, this 
termination is merely changed into was, and this as follows, viz. 
a) If the characteristic of the verb be a vowel, this change is 
directly effected, 6. g. 
πεποίηκα---πεποίημαι, Gat, ταῖς &c. 
(veo, γεύσω,) νένευκα ---νένευμαι, OU, TAL, KC. 


b) But when before the x of the first perfect active, as also 
before the ow of the future, a lingual has dropped out, its place is 
. supplied by an o before the terminations of the perfect passive, e. g. 


πείϑω (πέπεικαν). --- πέπεισμαι, 3 pers. πέπεισται Kc. 
ἄδω (ἄσω, ἦκα) --- ἥσμαι, ἧσταϊ &e. 
φράξω (πέφρακα) --- πέφρασμαι, σται &c. 
Before another σ, however, this σ is again omitted, as 2. pers. 
sing. πέπειτ-σαι. 2. pl. πέπεισϑε, 3. pl. as above. ᾿ Ξ 
c) The rules for the perf. pass. οἵ yerbs in 4, μὲς». 0, are given 
separately in ᾧ 101 below. 


119 


120 


124 ' YERBS.—PERFECT PASSIVE. [ὁ 98. 


Rem. 3. The o of the perfect active, which is derived from an 
= in the present, does not pass into the perfect passive, as κλέπτω 


ι(χέλλοφα) κέκλεμμαι. But the following three verbs, viz. τρέπω 1 


turn, τρέφω I nourish, στρέφω I turn (trans.) have in the perfect 
passive a peculiar change of the ¢ into ας as τέτραμμαιε, τέτραψαι, 
&c. τέϑραμμαι from τρέφω Can is OPED, see ὃ 18. 2), ἔστραμ- 
Mal, 

Rem. 4. Some verbs change the diphthong εὖ, which exists 
originally in their present, or is assumed by them in the future, 
into v in the perfect passive, as τεύχω, (τέτευχα) τέτυγμαι. 50 
also φεύγω, and πνέω (πνεύσω πέπνευχα) πέπνυμαι. In χέω (χεύ- 
ow) this change is already made in the perfect active κέχυκα, 
κέχυμαι. Of the variable quantity of some verbs in ἕω, UW, see 
above §95 Rem. 3. 

Rem. 5. The o before the termination of the perfect, passive is 
assumed by several verbs, which have no lingual, but a vowel for 
their characteristic, viz. pure verbs, as ἀχούω ἤκουσμαι, κελεύω 
κεέχέλευσμαι, and particularly several of those which retaina short 
vowel unchanged, as τελέω {τελέσω) τετέλεσμαι. 

Rem. 6. When yy is brought to stand before μι, one 7 is omitted, 


as ἐλέγχω, perf. ἐλήλεγχα, pass. ἐλήλεγμαι" σφίγγω, ἔσφιγμαι. The 


other terminations follow the rule, as ἐλήλεγξαι, yuta, &c. ἔσ- 
φιγξαι, &e. 

Rem. 7. In like manner where the perfect passive would have. 
uu, and another m is added from ‘the root of the verb, one « is 
naturally omitted, as κάμπτω, κέχαμμαι, κέκαμψαι, ἃς. 

Rem. 8. The ‘subjunctive and optative can only be formed, 
when the termination is preceded by a vowel allied with the ter- 
mination of the subjunctive, or which combines with the ὁ of. the 
optative, 6. g. 


KT HOMEL, ieee. 93). Subj. κέχτωμαι, Ny ntat, &e. 
Opt. κεκτήμην, κέχτῃο, κέχτητο, &c. 
πέράω, πεπέραμαι, Opt. πὲπεραίμην, &c. 


Also when the vowel is ὁ or v, optative tenses may be formed (as 
υ is a kindred vowel) by the suppression of the ὁ. The vowel 
must, however, be long, as hum, λέλυμαι (see ὃ 95 Rem. 3.) Opt. 
3. pers. λέλυτο. The use, however, of all these forms is very 
limited, and usually superseded by composition with the tenses of 
εἶναι. See the paradigm. 


! 


: §§ 99, 100.] VERBS.—FUTURE AND AORISTS PASS. 125 


~ 


i 


§ 99. THIRD FUTURE. 


‘Phe Third Future or Paulopostfuture of the passive, in respect 
to signification (§ 139) and form, is derived from the perfect pas- 
sive, of which it retains the augment, substituting σομαν for the 
termination of the perfect passive. [{ is therefore only necessary 
to take the ending of the 2d pers. perf. pass. in σαν (was, Ear) and 
change the as into oar, 6. g. 


bc ms (τέτυψαι) — τετυψομαι 
τέτραμμαν (τέτραψαι) ---- τετράψομον 
πεφίλημαν (πεφίλησα!) ---- πεφιλήσομαι 
πέπεισμαι (πέπεισα --- πεπείσομαι. 
Rem. 1. In those cases, in which the vowel of the first future 
is shortened in the perfect passive, the third future makes it song 
again as λελύσομαι. See §95 Rem. 3. 


Rem. 2. The verbs which have the temporal augment, and | 
the verbs 4, u, v, @, have no paulopostfuture. 


§ 100. FIRST AND SECOND AORIST PASSIVE. 


i. All verbs form the aorist of the passive either in Oy or nv, 
and many-in both ways at once. The former is called first aorist, 
the latter second aorist.; see above ὃ 89. 3. : 
' 2. The first aorist passive attaches ϑὴν to the characteristic 
of the verb, e. g. | 
- qawdseven — ἐπαιδεύϑην 
στέφω | — ἐστέφϑην. 


{tis here understood (see § 20), that the characteristic of the 121 
verb, when it is a smooth or middle mute, is changed into one of 
the aspirates, 6. g. 

λείπω, ἀμείβω, --- ἐλείφϑην, ἠἡμείφϑην 

λέγω, πλέκω, --- ἐλέχϑην, .ἐπλέχϑην 

τύπτω ( TYTI2) — ἐτύφϑην 

τάσσω ( TAT S2)— ἐτάχϑην. 


126 VERBS.-—FIRST AND SECOND AOR. PASS. — [§ 100. 


3. In respect to the remaining changes of the root, which take 
place in the series of the first future (§ 93. 2), the first aorist pas- 
sive governs itself principally according to the perfect passive, in- 

» asmuch as it assumes σ in the same cases, e. g. 

πείϑω (πέπεισμαι!) — ἐπείσϑην 
κομίζω (κεκόμεσμαι) ---- ἐκομίσϑην 
téhew (τετέλεσμαι) --- ἐτελέσϑην,. 

The radical vowel is also in most cases changed in the same 
Way, as in the perfect passive, e. g. 

φιλέω (πεφίλημαι) — ἐφιλήϑην 
τιμάω (reciunuce) — ἐτιμήϑην 

τεύχω (τέτυγμαι) --- ἐτύχϑην. 

4. The second aorist passive attaches ἦν to the pure charac- 
teristic of the verb, and in so doing, follows all the rules given 
above for the second aorist active. It is necessary therefore to 
form the second aorist active, whether it is used ' or not, and then 
change the ον into mY, &. 

τύπτω, ἕτυπον, — Pelaon 
τρέπω, ἔτραπον, --- ἐτράπην.. 

- Rem. 1. A few verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel, assume 
σ in the first aorist passive, without having it in the perfect passive, 
as παύῳ, πέπαυμαι,---ἐπαυσϑην" μναοβαι, μέμνημαι, -ἐμνήσϑην. 
For the opposite exception ome, σέσωσμαι,---ἐσώϑην, see anom- 
alous verbs. 

Rem, 2. Those which, without being verbs in A, 4, νη 0, change 
their « into @ in the perfect passive (§ 98 Rem. 3), retain their ¢ 
in the first aorist, as orgegw (ἔστραμμαι) ἐστρέφϑην" τρέπω, ἐτρέ- 
φϑην" τρέφω, ἐϑρέφϑην. 

Rem. 3. As it is not possible in the passive voice, for ἃ confu- 
‘sion of the imperfect and second aorist to take place as in the ac- 
tive, so those verbs have a second aorist passive, which, according 
to § 96. 3, cannot have it in the active. In this case it may be 
formed ia the imperfect active, as in other cases it is formed 
from the second aorist active. The rule, however, prevails that 
the long vowel is made short in the second ai. e.. g. 

γράφω, impf. ἔγραφον, — ἐγράφ 
τρίβω. impf. ἕτριβον,  deadaene (ahott ὁ). 
122 Rem. 4. For the same reason also some verbs, whose radical 
vowel is ¢, form a second aorist passive, without changing « into 
a, as φλέγω, ἐφλέγην. 


’ 


- § 101.) VERBS IN Ay ft, ν᾽ 6. - 121 


§ 101. vers In 4, HM, ν, o- 


1. “The verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four letters A, 
HY 9, depart so extensively from the analogy of the other verbs, 
that it is necessary here to exhibit their peculiarities in one ἘΣ 
nected view. 

2. All verbs of this class, strictly speaking, want the first future 
in ow, and have instead of it the second future (§ 95 Rem. 8.) 
The termination of this future, in the Ionic, is ἕω, secs, Mid. couac, 
&c. and this-in the common dialect is contracted as follows, viz. 

νέμω, fut. νεμέω. com. vEpor 

μένω. fut. μενέω, com. μενῶ. : : 
Of this future the further inflection (veua, εἰς, εἴ, ovpmer, site, 
οὖσι, &c. Mid. οὔμαε, 7, εἴται, &c. see in the paradigm,) is to be 
compared with the present of the contract verbs in ἕω (ὃ 105.) 

3. The syllable before the termination, when it is long in the 
present, is without exception shortened in this future, 6. g. 
ψάλλω, στέλλω, fut. ψαλῶ, στελῶ 
κρίνω, ἀμύνω, fut. κρινῶ. ἀμυνῶ. 


< 


To this end, the diphthong at is changed into short @, and εὐ. into 
é, as αἴρω), fut. ἀρῶ" κτείνω, fat. κτενῶ. 

_ 4. The first aorist of these verbs is formed also, without 6, in 
a alone. They retain therewith the characteristic as itis in the 
future, but lengthen again the syllable before the termination,. in- 
dependently however of the present, as they either simply lengthen 
the vowel of the future, e. g. 

Ξ δ οἷν - τίλλω (εἰλῶ) -- ἔτιλα 

κρίνω (xoiva) — ἔκρινα. 

 ἀμύνω, (αἀμῦύνῶ) --- ἤμῦνα, Sa ΗΝ 
ΟΥ̓ ‘hey: eave the ε of the future into ét, and @ into ἡ: e.g. 


μένω, στέλλω. TEiver, (ἀγῶ; otek, τενῶ) --- ἔμεινα, ἔστειλα, ἔτεινα 
ψάλλω, φαίνω, (ψαλὼ, φανῶν --- ἔψηλα, ἔφηνα. 

Several verbs, however, which have ac in the present, take along 123 

α ip the first aorist, as πεθαίνω (negavo), éxcoava, Inf. περᾶναι. 


158 VERBS IN A, M, ν, @. [δ 101. 


Rem. 1. The verbs αἴρω and ἄλλομαι beginning with a, have 
α in the first aorist, which, only in the indicative, in consequence 
of the augment, is changed into ἡ. aS ἦρα, ἄραι, ἄρας ἡλάμην, 
ἁλάμενος. ἢ 
5. The second aorist retains the vowel exactly as it is in the 
future. E. g. : 
βάλλω (βαλῶ) --- ἔβαλον. pass. ἐβάλην 
φαίνω (pave) — ἃ. 2 pass. ἐφάνην 
“ κλίνω (κλινῶν -- ἃ. 2 pass. ἐκλίνην (short vt). 
But the é of the future in dissyllable Yerpe | is changed into a (comp. ᾿ 
§ 96.2.) E. δ. | 
κτείνω (ἁτενῶ) - — ἔχτανον 
στέλλω (στελῶ) — ἃ. 2 pass. éoradny. 


Polysyllables retain the ¢, as ὀφείλω, ὠφελον. 


6. The second perfect, when it is used, is formed entirely ac- 
cording to the rules given above (§ 97. 2,3.) E. ge 
ϑαλλὼ — τέϑηλα,. φαίνω — πέφηνα ἡ 
APEMQ — δέδρομα. 
The ev of the present, since (as appears from the future) it has its 
origin, in verbs of this class, not in the radical ἐς but in ¢, passes 
into o alone, and not into οὐ, as σπεέρω (σπερῶ). ἔσπορα. 

7. The first perfect, the perfect passive, and first aorist passive, 
follow the general rules in attaching the terminations xa, wae, &c. 
yy, to the characteristic, retaining the changes of the future. E. g. 

σφάλλω (ogakm) — ἔσφαλκα, ἔσφαλμαι ᾿ 

φαίνω (φανῶ) -- πέφαγκα, ἐφάνϑην 

αἴρω (ἀρῶ) -- ἦρκα, jonas ἡρμένος, ἤρϑην ἀρϑείς, 

| Inf. ἀρϑῆναι. 
The perfect passive also drops the o of the terminations o@ac, 
ods, &c. (§ 98.2.) E. g. 
σφάλλω, ἔσφαλμαι, 2 pers. pl. ἔσφαλϑε 
, on φύρω, πέφυρμαις inf. πεφύρϑαι. 


“® The mode of writing with the ¢ subscript, as ῇρα, ἄραι, ἔφηνα, &c. 
"ἢ ΞΎ ‘ ‘ ξ te - one . U Hy . -- 
and with the acute in the infinitives, as πέραναν ὅζο. is incorrect. 


$101.) _ VERBS ΙΝ A, μ, ¥, 0. 129 


8. Here, however, the two following departures from the anal- 
ogy of the other verbs are to be observed, viz. 
a) When the future has an «, the dissyllables i in these venues 
change it into. E. g. 
στέλλω (σεελώ)--ἐσταλκα,ἔσταλμαι, ἐστάλϑην, aor. 2 pass, ἐστάλην 
πείρω (E90) -πέπαρκα, πέπαρμαι, aor. 2 pass. ἐπάφην. 
b) The following verbs in ‘vw, eivw, ὕνω, viz. κρίνω, κλίνω, 
τείνω, κτείνω, πλύνω. drop the ν in these tenses, and assume the 
short vowel of the future, but. in such a way, that those in είνω 
change that short vowel, which is ¢, into αὰ. E. g. 
—noivn (κρίνω) — xéxoina, κέχρίμαι, ἐκρίϑην 
τείνω (revo) --- τέτάκα τέταμαι, ἐταϑην 
πλύνω (πλυνῶ) --- πέπλί κα. πέπλύμαι, ἐπλύϑην. 


Rem. 2. The polysyllables, according to the rule, retain ε΄ un- 


124 


changed in the penult, as ἀγγέλλω, ἡγγελκα, ἡγγέλϑην. This is 


done also in the perfect passive of dissyllables which begin with 
& a8 εἴρω. ἔερμαι. 

Rem. 3. The verbs which retain », occasion difficulty in the 
perfect passive. They preserve, however, the » unchanged in 
the following cases, viz. 

a) In the second person singular, where it even remains before 
6, aS φαίνω. πέφανσαι. 

b) In the terminations which begin with o®, in which howey- 
er the o is dropped in consequence of the νη as inf. πεφάνϑαι. 
866 no. 7 above. ~ 

c) In the 3d sing. as πέφανται he has appeared. 

In the same manner, however, the 3d pl: is formed, (as xé- 
xoavras from xoaivyw,) where v is omitted, according to the next 
remark. - But this form is extremely rare on account of this very 
confusion, and the compound form with εἰσὶ is preferred. 

Rem. 4. Before the terminations beginning with μς the follow- 
ing is a usage with respect to the ν." 

ἑ The » passes into μι, as ἤσχυμμαι from aioyvye. 

The ν is dropped, retaining the shee vowel, as τέτράχῦμαν 
evi τραχύνω. ' 

6) Most commonly instead of » we find σ, as φαίνω (φανῶ), 
nepacuat’ μολύνω, μεμόλυσμαι. 

Rem. 5. The elder and the Aolic dialects formed the future 
and the first aorist, even of these verbs, with 0, as κείρω ἔκερσα; 
τείθω τέρσω, which form is the most usual in some verbs, as φύρω 
I knead, φύρσω. 

17 


125 


130 VERBALS IN τοῦ AND Té06. [§ 102. 


ὁ 102. _ VERBALS IN τός AND τέος. 


1. With the formation of the tenses must be connected that of . 
the verbal adjectives in ro¢ and réoc, which, in signification and 
use, nearly resemble participles. See the Remark below. 

2. Both terminations always have the accent, and are attached 
immediately to the characteristic of the verb, which undergoes 
the changes required by the general rule. The vowel is in va- 
rious cases changed. ‘These changes coincide in every respect 
with those of the aorist passive, except that of course when the 
aorist has gd, 49, these forms have mr, xr. We can therefore 
compare with these 'verbals the 3d sing. perf. passive, which has 
also τς though in respect to the leading syllable it departs, in many 
verbs, both from the first aorist and the verbals. ce : 

3. Accordingly we have the following forms of yerbals, viz. 


πλέκω (πέπλεκται, ἐπλέχϑην) — πλεχτὸξ 

| πλεχεέος 
λέγω (λέλεκταυ ἐλέχϑην) -- λεχτός 
γράφω (γέγραπται, ἐχράφϑην) --- γραπτὸς 
στρέφω (ἔστραπται, ἐστρέφϑην --- στρεπτός 
gueaa (πεφώραται, ἐφωράϑην) .— φωρατέος 
φιλέω (πεφίληται, ἐφιλήϑην) --- φιλητέος. 
aigew (ἤρηται, ρέϑην) — «aigsros 
παύῳ (πέπαυται, ἐπαύσϑην) --- παυστέος 
στέλλω (ἔσταλται, ἐσταλϑηνὴ | --- σταλτέος 
τείνω (τέταται, ἐτάϑην) — τατέος 
yew (κέχυται, ἐχυϑην) — χυτός ἡ 
. πνέω (πέπνυται, ἐπνεύσϑην) --- πνευστός. 


Remarx. The verbal in τός corresponds in form with the Latin 
participle in tus, and has in fact the same signification, 6. g. γλεκ- 
TOS woven, OTEENTOS twisted. But most commonly it conveys the 
idea of possibility, like the Latin termination clis, as στρόπεος ver- 
satilis, flexible, ὁρατὸς visibilis, visible, ἀκουστὸς audible. The ver- 
bal in τέος, meantime, has-the idea of necessity, and corresponds 


with the Latin participle in dus, as φόλήτεος amandus, a person to 


be loved. See §134. Rem. 4. 


4 


᾿ ὁ 103.]} | BARYTON VERBS. | 191 


§ 103. THE BARYTON VERB. 


1. The foregoing rules, as well as the other details of the va- 

rious modes and tenses, will now be all illustrated in an example 
with the common baryton verb τύπτω, to which will be subjoin- 
_edsome other peculiar examples of baryton verbs as they are 
used, and lastly one of the class in 4, μι, v, 0, viz. ἄγγελλω. 
2. Baryton verbs, as was explained above in § 10. 2, are in 
their natural form, in which the termination of the present tense is 
always unaccented ; in distinction from those, whose two last syl- 
lables are contracted and marked with a circumflex, and hence 
called verba contracta by the Latin grammarians, and perispomena 
by the Greek. The latter will be treated separately below. 


Rem. 1. The learner will bear in mind that τύπτω is here 
used only as a paradigm or example, in which every thing is ex- 
hibited in one view, which belongs to the various verbs of this 
kind, although neither τύπτω nor any other single verb is found 
in all the modes and tenses here given. * See ὃ 104. 

2. It was formerly usual to give the second future active and 
middle with the paradigm of τύπτω. Inasmuch, however, as this 
form is wanting in all the verbs of the class to which τύπτω belongs 
viz. those whose characteristic is not 4, 4, 7, @, of course in the 
greatest number of verbs, it was here ‘omitted in the preceding 
edition, but introduced in full in ayyéhio, in the paradigm of 
verbs in 4, u,v, ρ. It is now subjoined also in τύπσω. 

Rem. 3. In order to havé the whole conjugation in one view, 
a table is subjoined, which gives the first person of the declinable 
modes, the second person of the imperative, the infinitive, and the 


"masculine gender of the participle, in all the tenses of the active, 


126 


passive, and middle voices. This is immediately followed by the ἢ 


same verb, inflected at full length. 


* The parts of εὐπτω in actual use may be seen in the list of anomalous 
verbs, where it is placed, in | consequence of another form of the future not 


here introduced, viz. τυπτήσω. 


[§ 105. 


’ 


PARADIGM OF τύπτω, 


132 


127 


Soasniouns mgozuaz | aounr ᾿αἰεη οι onions alniouna ΒΟΥ ὅ Z 
Soasnaouns IQOI2UAL | - alunjouas | ΠΣ anja ὅ 5 
. Soazninhaz r0.g.00RA2 gar aluninihaz 79 ηωήϊα.2 auuniohnas ἼΒΙΧΟΥ 1 5 
δοαφηϊοήνα2 γοοϑήνιια alenroihaa ronloar aInjny 1 ἔπ 
‘aAIsseq 91}} UI 998 θομϑάπῃᾳ pue 299}194 bi capes: pure juesaig 
δοαϑηοήνη1921 γηφοϑήνῷι1 ᾿αἰενγοήινα 19. τ υοήνχη 19, ᾿ ΘΑΠΊΠ ἢ ¢ 
‘$1902 malar IguuaL alizUuat ounL auicnrz 15μοὸν ὦ 
͵ 
Soazooluuas qn. gozrohuns aunioouunr ronooluar amMjn | ὅ 
‘ 
S2ghn2 maughar | 12ughar aluzghaz ogdhas Αἰ θάψαν ysloy 1 
δοαφηροίερφηλ γτηροθοιρῴηι aunioougdar annoougdas omjnd T 
aluniinazag | yajradnig = 
Soazna222 anghaazz | oraaza Soazninaiz2 | 4 @ soazninaza2 vorinia132 109.191 © 
: Ἢ | yaaa] αἰεν!ο 11:1 γρομϑάα! =» 
Soagno1uaz 90.9-922uN21 | 2011A2 alnoauns qono1uas rorioruar 10959.4 
ga ) br aks ͵ ͵ 
ποτ. AIZUAL ἘΣΤΕ] γη 7011 muaL AOUAL? ἸΒΙΟΥ͂ ὃ 
~ ͵ 
ατοπα1 AizUnd amoung muar aij] ὅ 
Sahar roha2 Aoi anrohar maz miha1? SOV 1, 
amhaz AFA amroar . mihaz ΘαΠ}} ἢ 1 Ω 
i i A191L2913 yoojrodnyg ὅ Ξ 
δ: 6.191 90AZUA122 | 310.132 mM10UN122 Ογ110.132 UNAZL γ091.9ᾳ ὅ = 
᾿ ; : arzharz23 | ἸὨοΘμθάπ|α 1 
Smbhas32 anazhazz2 | 2ha1z1 anlobn232 mbha122 nba 132 Ἰ09.194 ἴ 
: ᾿ ὃ ao1un23 yoojsod aly 
AMIUAL AIFLUNL 112 γηἸ1011|1 M1uAL mauar |, ~ yuasaig 
"ATAIOLLUVA “DANLINIANI "waa "SALLViLdO "FALLONOLANS “SAILYOIGNI : 


y ἃ few verbs, see above in 


ich is here given, see § 108. IV. 
- 


unctive and optative, which occur in onl 


ὺ 


gular sub 
ὁ 98 Rem. 8, For that w 


* For the re 


Ἢ. 


a 1 
§ 103.] PARADIGM OF τύπτω. 133 
oe INDICATIVE MODE. 
(ὦ Ῥχρβεπί, I strike. 
8. τύπτω, τύπτεις, τύπτει, ; 
D. : ᾿ς τὔύπτετον, TUNTETOY, 
P. runrouev, © TUNTETE, τύπτουσι (υ). 
Imperfect, I was striking. 2 
5. ἔτυπτον, ἔτυπτες, ἔτυπτε (ν),, 
D. : ἐτύπτετον, ELUNTETHY, 
P. ἐτύπτομεν ἐτύπτετε: ἔτυπτον. 
μὲν, : abies 
; First Perfect, I have struck. 
5. τέτυφα, τέτυφας, τέτυφε (ν), 
D. TETUPATOY, τέτυφατον 
P. τετύφαμεν, τετύφατε, τετύφασυ (ν). 
: First Pluperfect, I had struck. - 
τ 5, &wervqesy, ἐτετύφεις, » ἐτετύφει, 
; | Ὁ. τ ἐτετύφειτον, ἐτετυφείτην, 
Ῥ, ἐτετύφειμεν, ἐτετύφειτε, ἐτετύφεισαν OF ἐσαν. 
: Second Perfect, I have struck. 
5, τέτυπα, τέτυπας, τέτυπε (v) 
D. τετύπατον, τετύπατον, 
Ῥ, τετύπαμεν, τετύπατε, τετυπᾶσι. 
Second Pluperfect, J had struck. 
S. ἐτετύπειν, ἐτετύπεις, τ΄ ἐτετύπει, 2 
D. i ἐτετύπειτον, ἐτετυπείτην, 
> , > t > 
P. ἐτετύπειμεν. ~ ἐτετύπειτε. ἐτετύπεισαν OF ἔσαν. 
- First Future, I shall strike. 
S. τύψω, τύψεις. τύψει, 
Ὁ. τύψετον, τύψετον, 
? 
P. ruwouer, TUWETE, τύψουσεν. 


128 


129 


194 


PARADIGM OF τὐπτω. 


[5 103. 


by 


»” 
ἑτυψα, 


Sis? ὰ 
ἑτυψαμεὲν, 


Second Future, J shall strike. 


TUN, 


τυποῦμεν, 


ἕτυπον. 


, 
ἐτυπομεν, 


͵ 
τύπτω, 


’ 
TUNTWMEY, 


‘ 
TETUQH, 


τετύφωμεν 


| 
‘ 
τύψω, 


τύψωμεν, 


First Aorist, I struck. 
ἔτυψας, 
ἐτύψατον, 
ἐτύψατε, 


aw 
TUNES, 
τυπεῖτον 
LUNEITE, 


Second Aorist, 1 struck. 


ἔτυπες, 
t 
ELUNETOY, 
’ 
ἐτυπετε, 


SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 


Present. 


' 
TUNENS, 

, 
TUNTHTOY, 

' 
τυπτητὲ 


Perfect. 


τετύφης, 

τετυφήτον, 
͵ 

τετύφητε, 


First Aorist. 


TUWNS, 
τύψητον. 
τύψητε, 


ἔτυψε (v), > 
ἐτυψάτην, 
Erupay. 


τυπεῖ, 
τυπεῖτον, 
τυποῦσν (). 


ἔτυπε (y), 
ἐτυπέτην, 


ἕτυπον. 


τύπτῃ, 
͵ 
τύπτητον, 
Ud 
τύπτωσε (ν). 


τετύφῃ 
τετύφητον 


τετύφωσε (ν) 


τύψῃ, 
τύψητον, 
cvwaoe (ν). 


§ 1031 


- PARADIGM OF τύπτω. 


Ss. tino, 
D. -«. 
P. εὐπωμεν, 


S. τύπτοιμι, 
D. 


P. τευπτοιμὲν, 


΄' 


7) , 


τετύφοιμε, 


9 


, 
P. τετυφοιίμεὲν, 


τύψοιμι, 


’ 
τυψοιμεν, 


5. τύψαιμι, 
P. τὐψαιμὲν," 
5. τυποῖμι, 


By; 
P. 


τυποῖμεν, 


Second Aorist. 


A 
τύπης, 
τύπητον, 
τύπητε, 


OPTATIVE MOOD. 


Present. 


’ 
TUNTOLS, 

’ 
TUNTOLTOY, 

Li 
TUNTOLTE, 


Perfect. 


7 
TETUGOLS, 
TETUPOLTOY, 
τετύφοιτε, 


First Future. 


τύψοις, 
τυψοίύτον. 
τύψοιτε, 


First Aorist. 


τύψαις, 
τυψαιτον, 
τύψαιτε, 


Second Future. 


τυποῖς, " 
TUNOITOY, 
τυποῖτε, 


Ι! 


’ 

TUN, 
τύπητον, 
͵ ~ 
τύπωσι (ν). 


τύπτοι, 
tuntoitny, 


a 
τυπτούξν. 


τετύφοι, 

τετυφοίτην, 
7 

τετυφοίεν. 


’ 
TUWOL, 
TUWOITHY, 
TUWOLED- 


τύψαι, 
τυψαίτην, 
τυψαιεν.Ἔ 


‘ 


τυποῖ, 
τυποίτην, 
τυποῖεν. 


* See Remark III. 3, ὈεΙον»- 


131 


136 


? 


PARADIGM OF τύπτω. 


[§ 103. 


5. τύποιμι, 
D. 3" 


͵ 
Ῥ. τυποιμὲν, 


7 


Present 

First Perfect 
Second Perfect 

First Future 

First Aorist 

Second Future 

Second Aorist 


} 


Second Aorist. 


INFINITIVE MODE. 
TUNTEW 
τετυφέναν 
τετυπέναυ 
TUWEL 

τύψαι. 

τυπεὶν 

τυπεῖν 


᾿ 
τύποις, τύποι, 
͵ ἊἋ 
τυπούτον, τυποίτην, 
' ’ 
τύυποίτε, τυποιύξν. 
IMPERATIVE MODE. 
Present, Strike. 
τύπτε, τυπτέτω, 
τύπτετον, τυπτέτων, 
’ ͵ 
TUNTETE, τυπτέτωσαν OF TUNTOYTOY. 
Perfect. 
TELUGE, TETUPETO, 
, 
TETUMPETOY, TETUPETOY, ' 
rf 
TETUQETE, τετυφέτωσαν. 
First Aorist. 
t ’ 
TUWOY, TUWATH, 
’ t 
τυψατον, τυψατῶν, 

, 
τύψατε, τυψατωσαν. 
Second Aorist. 

F was » 
Tune, τυπέτω, 
΄ ᾿ 
_ TUMETOY, TUNEL OY, 
τύπετε, τυπέτωσαν. ~*~ 


to strike. . 
to have struck. 


to have struck. 


to be about to strike. 
to have struck. 

to be about to strike. 
to have struck. 


'. PARADIGM OF τύπτω. 137 
: " PARTICIPLES. 
Present, striking. . 

ΟΝ. τύπτων, ᾿ τύπτουσα, τύπτον, 

G. τύὐπτοντος, Οἐτυπτούσης, τύπτοντος, &c. 

᾿ τ 

Perfect, having struck. 

N. τετυφώς, τετυφυῖα, ἡ τετυφὸός, 

G. τετυφότος, τετυφυίας, τετυφότος. 
ale First Future, about to strike. 

N. τύψων, τύψουσα, τύψον, 

G. τύψοντος, τυψούσης, τύψοντος. 

| First Aorist, having struck. 
N. τύψας, τὐψᾶσα, τύψαν. 
G. τύψαντος,. τυψάσης, ’ τύψαντος. 
Second Future, about to strike. 
N. τυπῶν, . τυποῦσα, τυποῦν,᾿ 
G. τυποῦντος, τυπούσης, τυποῦντος. 
Second Aorist, having struck. 
N. tuna, τυπούσα, ᾿ζυπόν, . 
G. τυπόντος, τυπούσης, τυπόντος, . 


18 


192 


198 PARADIGM OF τύπτω, [§ 103. 
PASSIVE 
| INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. — OPTATIVE. 
Present S. τύπτομαι, LURTO MEL τυπτοίμην 
Tam struck τύπτῃ or εὐ Ὁ. τύπτῃ τύπτοιο 
τὐπτέται τὐπτήταύ τὐπτοίτο 
7.2}. τυπτόμεϑον τυπτώμεϑον τυπτοίμεϑον 
| τύπτεσϑοὸν τύμτησϑον τὐπτοισϑον 
τύπτεσϑον τύπτησϑον | τυπτοίσϑην 
τ᾿ τυπτόμεϑα * τυπτώμεϑα | τυπτοίμεϑα 
τύπτεσϑε τύὐπτησϑὲ 'τύπτοιίσϑὲ 
τύπτονταν τύπτωνταν | τύπτοιντο 
Imperfect 8. ἐτυπτόμην D. ἐτυπτόμεϑον r. ἐτυπτόμεϑα 
TI was struck ἐτύπτου ἐτύπτεσϑον ἐτύπτεσϑε 
᾿ ἐτύπτετο ἐτυπτέσϑην ἐτύτπιτοντο 
Perfect 8. τέτυμμαε τετυμμένος ὦ | τετυμμένος εἴην 
Ihave been struck τέτυιμαι See below the verb εὐμέ 
τέτυπται 
DD. τετύμμεϑον 
τέτυφϑον 
τέτυφϑον 
af τετύμμεϑα 
τέτυφϑε a 
TETUMMEVOL εἰσίν 
Pluperfect 8. ᾿ἐτετύμμην Aon ἐτετύμμεϑον Ρ, ἐτετύμμεϑα 


I had been struck ἐτέτυϊμο ἐτέτυφϑον ἐτέτυφϑε 
ETETUNLO ’ ἐτετύφϑην ἐετυμμέγοι ἦσαν 
1 Future τυφϑησομαι Subj. wanting | τυφϑησοίμην 
T shall be struck rugOnon or ét, τυφϑύσοιο ὅζο. 
&c. as in the | as in the 
resent Present 
1 Aorist S. ἐτύφϑην τυφϑὼ τυφϑείην 
I was struck ἐτύφϑης τυφϑῆς τυφϑείης 
ἐτύφϑη τυφϑῇ τυφϑείη 
Ὁ. = — —_- 
ἐτύφϑητον TUG 'ϑῆτον τυφϑείητον 
- ὶ ἐτυφϑήτην τυφϑῆτον τυφϑειήτην 
P. ἐτύφϑημεν τυφϑῶμεν τυφϑείημεν 
Γ τυφϑεῖμεν 
᾿ , ἐτύφϑητε TUPONTE τυφϑείητε 
- Ἂ ΓΗ. τυφϑεῖτε 
ἐτύφϑησαν τυφϑώσι (ν) | (τυφϑείησαν) 
᾿ τυφϑεῖεν t 


2 Future τυπησύμαν 1 ‘shall be struck through ail the, 
2 Aorist ἐτυπὴν I was struck through all the 
3 Future | 


rervwonat I shall have been struck, through all the 


~* See below Rem. If. 3. 


Τ The shorter form is more commonly 


» 


~ 


PARADIGM OF τύπτω. 139 
VOICE. ἘΝ 
\ IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
be struck ; TUNTEOO HL TUNTOMEVOS, ἡ, OV 
τυπτου to be struck being struck - 
τυπτιέσϑω ᾿ 
᾿τύπτεσϑον 
τυπτέσϑων 
τύπτεσϑε 
τυπτέσϑωσαν or τυπτέσϑων 
3 oe + τετύφϑαι TETUMMEVOS, ἡ, OY 
τέτυψο have been struck to have been having besn struck 
τετυφϑὼ struck τὰς 
τέτυφϑον 
τετυφϑων 
τέτυφϑε ᾿ 
τετυφϑωσαν or τετυφϑὼν 
Imperat. wanting τυφϑήσεσϑαι | τυφϑησόμενος, 
, to be about to | %, ov about to be 
be struck struck 
Sie 3 τυφϑῆναι τυφϑείς struck 
τυφϑητι be struck to have been tugteou 
τυφϑητὼ struck τυφϑεν 
; Gen. 
τύφϑητον ' τυφϑέντος͵ 
τυφϑήτων 
τύφϑητε 
τυφϑήτωσαν 


Modes like the 1 Future 


Modes like the 1 Aorist 


Modes like the 1 Future 


used in the Ist and 2d persons, and always in the 3d. 


133 


PARADIGM OF τύπτω. 


[§ 103. 


! 


MIDDLE 


The Present, the Imperfect, the Perfect, and. 


the Pluperfect 


OPTATIVE. 


INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1 Future ruwouae wanting τυψοίμην 
like the Pres- like the pres- 
ent pass. ent pass. 

at 5 

1 Aorist 8. ἐτυψάμην τύψωμαν τυψαίμην 
ἐτύψω τύψῃ τύψαιο 
ἐτύψατο τύψηται τύψαντο 

Ὁ. ἐτυψάμεϑον τυψώμεϑον τυψαίμεϑον 
ἐτύψασϑον τύψησϑον τύψαισϑον 
ἐτυψασϑην τύψησϑον τυψαίσϑην 

P. ἐτυψάμεϑα τυψώμεϑα τυψαίμεϑα 
ἐτύψασϑε τύψησϑε τύψαισϑε 
ἐτύψαντο τύψωνταν τυψαῦντο 

2Future 5. τυποῦμαι, | wanting τυποίμην 
τυπῇ ΟΥ̓ εἴ τυποῖο 
τυπεῖταν τυποῖτο 

D. τυπούμεϑον τυποίμεϑον. 
τυπεῖσϑον τυποῖσϑον 
τυπεῖσϑον τυποῖσϑον 

P. τυπούμεϑα τυποίμεϑα 
τυπεῖσϑε τυποῖσϑε 
τυποῦνται τυποῖντο 

“τ 2 Aorist -ἐτυπόμην TUM M MOL | τυποίμην 
like the Im- These two modes like the Pres- 
perfect pass. | ent pass. 


* 


The verbal adjectives (§ 102) are 


΄ 


6105. PARADIGM OF τύπτω 141 


~ 


VOICE. 

5-3 135 
tenses are the same as in the Passive Voice. 
_ IMPERATIVE. | INFINITIVE. ὀ  “ PARTICIPLE. 

wanting 7 τυψεσϑαε TUWOMEVOS, 
. ie" is N, ον 
΄ 
oon a= “τύψασϑαι τυψάμενος, 
τυψαν ᾿ N, ον 
τυψασϑω ‘ 
τύψασϑον — 
τυψασϑων ; . 
τύψασϑε 
τυψάσϑωσαν or τυψάσϑων 


wanting TOs τυπεῖσϑαι τυπούμενος, 
Hy OV 


τυποῦ | τυπέσϑαι τυπόμενος, 
, 

τυπέσϑω N, ον 

τυπέσϑον 
’ 

τυπέσϑων 

τυπέσϑε 

, ᾽ 
τυπέσϑωσαν or τυπέσϑων 


τυπτός, τυπτέος. 


142 PARADIGM OF παιδεύω. τ. [ὁ 103. 


/ 


ῖ 


EXAMPLES OF OTHER BARYTON VERBS AS THEY OCCUR IN USE. 


i 


I. παιδεύω 7 educate, Middle T cause to ΡΞ 


ACTIVE VOICE. ἐς 
: Ind. Subj. Opt. Imper. 

Pres. παυδεόω παιδεύω παιδεύοιμι παίδευε. 
παιδεύεις παιδευης παιδεύοις παιδευέτω 
᾿'παιδεῦει παιδεύῃ &e. παιδεύοι ἕο.  ἅο. 

&ec. ' | 
Inf. Partie. 
παιδεύειν παιδευῶν 
| παιδεύουσα 
' παιδεῦον. 
Imperf. 
ἐπαίδευυν, ες, € (v) &c. 
Perf. Ind. Subj. πεπαιδεύκω Opt. πεπαιδεύκοιμε 
πὲπαίδευκα, | Imp. not in use Inf. πεπαιδευκέναι 
ας, € (v) &e. Part. πεπαιδευκώς, υἷα, ὃς ' 
ῬΙυρογῇ, 


ἐπεπαιδεύκευν. εἰς, Ev, KC. 


Future Opt. παιδεύσοιμι Inf. παιδεύσειν 
παιδεύσω Part. παιδεύσων 

Aorist. Subj. Opt. - Imper. 
ἐπαίδευσα, ας, παιδεύσω παιδεύσάνμε παίδευσον | 

é(v) ἅς. | ἡ) ἢ) 0. παιδεύσαις 'παιδευσάτὼ 
παιδεύσαν &C. &e. 
Inf. Part. 
TMALOEVOHL παιδεύσας 
παιδεύσασα 


παιδεῦσαν 


| § 103.) PARADIGM OF παιδεύω. 148 


"2 


- 


PASSIVE VOICE. 


Pres. ad Subj. Opt. Imper. 
παιδεύομαι παιδεύωμαι παιδευοίμην παιδεύου 
παιδεύη or & παιδεύῃ παιδεύοιο παιδευέσϑο 
παιδεύεται παιδεύηται &e. παιδεύοιτο &c. &c. 
&e. Inf. Pert. 
παιδεύεσϑαι παιδευόμενος, ἡ, OV 
" 
Imperf. 
ἐπαιδευόμην, ἐπαιδεύου, ἐπαιδεύετο τα. 
Perf. Ind. 
S. πεπαίδευμαι D. πεπαιδεύμεϑον Ῥ, πεπαιδεύμεϑα 
πεπαίδευσαι πεὲπαίδευσϑον πεπαίδευσϑε 
πὲπαίδευται πεπαίδευσϑον πεπαίδευνται 


* Subj. and Opt. wanting. - Imp. πεπαίδευσο 
πεπαιδεύσϑω &c. 


Inf. πεπαιδεῦσϑαι Part. πεπαιδευμένος © 
. Pluperf. t | . 
5. ieexatioiun> Ὁ. ἐπεπαιδεύμεϑον ΡῬ. ἐπεπαιδευμεϑα 
-ἐπεπαίδευσο ᾿ ἐπεπαίδευσϑον ἐπεπαίδευσϑε 
ἐπὲπαίδευτο ἐπεπαιδεύσϑην ἐπεπαίδευντο 
F stake Ind. Opt. παιδευϑησοίμην Inf. παιδευϑησεσϑαυ 
παιδευϑήσομαι Part. παιδευϑησόμενος 
Aor. Ind. — Subj. Opt. Imp. 
ἐπαιδεύϑην — madevOo παιδευϑείην παιδεύϑητε 


νος Inf. παιδευϑῆναι Ρατί. παιδευϑεὶς 


3 Future. Ind. | Opt. πεπαιδευσοίμην Inf. πεπαιδεύσεσϑαι 
πεπαιδευσομαι Part. πεπαιδευσόμενος 


MIDDLE VOICE. 


Future. Ind. Opt. παιδευσοίμην [πῇ παιδευσεσϑαι 
. ποιδευσομαν ' Part. παιδευσομενος 
Aor. [πᾶ.΄ | « Subj. ὩΣ ΦΑΜΕΝ ' Imp. 
ἐπαιδευσάμην παιδεύσωμαν παιδευσαίμην παίδευσαι 
σω, σατο &c. | ηςἢται &c. αἱο, αὐτὸ ὅς. παιδευσασϑὼω 


Inf. παιδεύσασϑαν Part. παιδευσάμενος [&c. 


Verbal Adjectives παιδευτύς, παιδευτέος. 


144 εὐ ΡΑΒΑΡΙΟΜ OF σέΐω, ETC. _ _ [§ 103. 


IL. σείω I shake, Middle I move myself vehemently. 


ACTIVE VOICE, 
Pres. δείω Subj. σείω. Opt. GElouut, σείουις, GEloL ἅς. 
Imp. σείε, osverw &e. []}πῇπ. σείειν. 
. Part. σείων, σείουσα, σεῖον. Ἢ 
Imperf. éosvov. Perf. σέσευκα: Pluperf. ἐσεσείκευν. Fut. σείσω. 
Aor. ἐἔσεισα. Subj. osiow. Opt. σείσαιμι, σείσαϊς, σείσαϊ &c. 
. τς Imper. σεῖσον, arm &c. Inf. σεῖσαι. 
Part. σείσας, σείσασα, ELOY. 


PASSIVE VOICE. 


Pres. “σείομαν _ Imperf. ἐσειόμην. 

Perf. σέσεισμαν Ὦ, σεσείσμεϑον Ῥ. σεσείσμεϑα 
σέσεισαν ᾽ σέσεισϑον σέσεισϑε 
σέσεισται σέσεισϑον 3 pers. wanting. 

Subj. and Opt. wanting. Imp. σέσεισο, σεσείσϑω &c. 
Inf. σεσεῖσϑαυ Part. σεσεισμένος 
Pluperf. ἐσεσείσμην Ὁ. ἐσεσείσμεϑον P. ἐσεσείσμεϑα 
ἐσέσεισο ἐσέσεισϑον . ἐσέσεισϑε 
ἐσέσειστο ἐσεσείσϑην 3 pers. wanting. 


Fut. σεισϑήσομαν — Aor. ἐσείσϑην 3 Fut. σεσείσομαε ., 


MIDDLE VOICE. 
- Fut. σείσομαν Aor. ἐσεισάμην 


Verbal Adjectives osvoros, σειστέος. 


Ill. λείπω I leave, Middle (poetical) I remain. 


; ACTIVE VOICE. a 
Pres. λείπω Subj. λείπω Opt. λείποιμι, λείποις, Aetmoe μ᾽ 
Imp. λεῖπε Inf. λείπειν Part. λείπων. 
Amperf. ἔλειπον | 


Perf. (2) λέλουπα -Pluperf. ἐλελοίπειν 
Fut. λείψω ; | : 
Aor. (2) ἔλιπον —s Subj. λίπω Opt. λίπον = Imp. λίπε. 


»" a - 
Inf. hinsiv Part. λιπών, οὖσα, ov. 


™ 


§ 103.]_ PARADIGM OF γράφω. : 2 145 


PASSIVE VOICE. 


Pres. . λείπουμαυ:.: —S Imperf. ἐλειπόμην © | 

Perf. λέλειμμαι Subj. and Opt. wanting. 
-λέλευιψαι Imp. λέλεεψο, λελείφϑω &e. ' 
λέλειπται &c. Inf. λελεῖφϑαν — Part. λελδιμμένος. 


Pluperf. ἐλελείμμην, wo, πτοὸ ἃς. 
, Fut. ., λειῳφϑήσομαι Aor. ἐλείφϑην ἡ 
3 Fut. λελεέψομαι. 


: . MIDDLE VOICE, 
Fut. λεέψομαι τ 
_ Aor, (9) ἐλιπόμην Subj. λίπωμαι Opt. λιποίμην 
Imp. λιποῦ &e. Plur. λίπεσϑε &c. 
/ Inf. λιπέσϑαν — Part. λιπόμενος 
Verbal Adjectives λειπτός, λειπτέος. 


. 


—— 
- 


IV - γραφὼ I write, Middle I write for mysel , 1 accuse. 
ἘΞ ACTIVE VOICE. 


‘Pres. γράφω - Imperf ἔγραφον. 
Perf. γέγραφα Pluperf. ἐγεγράφειν 
Fut. γραψω _ Aor. > ἔγραψα. | - 


PASSIVE VOICE. 


Pies. γραάφομαι Imperf. ἐγραφόμην 
Perf. γέγραμμαι, γέγραψαι, γέγραπταν ἔχε. 

Pluperf. ἐγεγράμμην, wo, πτὸ &c. 

1 Fut. γραφϑήσομαν seldom used 

1 Aor. ἐγράφϑην seldom used. 

2 Fut. γραφήσομαν 2 Aor. ἐγράφην 
8 Fut. yeyoawouas.* 


é 


ee MIDDLE VOICE.. 
Fut. yoowouas Aor. ἐγραψάμην, 


Verbal Adjectives yeanros, γραπτέος. 
aon 19 


ν᾿ - 


΄ ἃ 


146 ᾽ ᾿ PARADIGM OF ἄρχω, : [5 103. 


V. ἄρχω I lead, rule, Middle I begin. 


- ACTIVE VOICE. 


Pres. ἄρχω Imperf. ἤρχον 
Perf. (ἤῤχα) and Pluperf. are very rarely used 
Fut. ἄρξω 
Aor. ἦρξα Subj. ἄρξω Opt. ἄρξαιμι, ἄρξαις, ἄρξαι &e. 
Agee τὰ Imp. ἄρξον, ἀρξάτω &e. 
Inf. ἄρξαν Part. ἄρξας. 


PASSIVE VOICE, 


Pres. ἄρχομαι Imperf. ἠρχόμην 


Perf. ἤῤγμαι Ὁ. ἤργμεϑον P. ἤργμεϑα 
ee eee ἀμ 
7 ORTH ,ἤρχϑον ᾿ 3d pers. wanting 


Subj. and Opt. wanting. Imp. ἦρξο, ἤρχϑω &e- 
Inf. ἦρχϑαν —- Part. ἠργμένος 


Pluperf. ἤργμὴν Ὁ. ἤργμεϑον ὉΡ. ἤργμεϑα 
5 Ὰ Ἕ Φ 
1050 οἦρχϑον ἤρχϑε 
ἤρκτο ἤρχϑην 3d pers. wanting 


Fut. ἀρχϑήσομαι 

Aor. ἤρχϑην Subj. αρχϑὼ Ορι. ἀρχϑείην Imp. ἄρχϑητι 
| | Inf. ἀρχϑῆναν Part. ἀρχϑείς 

3 Future wanting (see ὃ 99 Rem. 2.) 


MIDDLE VOICE. 
Fut. ἀρξομαν , 
Aor. ἠρξάμην Subj. ἄρξωμαν Ορί. ἀρξαίμην Imp. ἄρξαι 
Inf. ἀρξασϑαν Ῥανί. ἀρξάμενος [|ἀσϑω &c, 


Verbal Adjectives (in an active and peels meaning) 
ἀρχτὸς, ἀρκτέος. 


~ 


§ 103.) | PARADIGM oF σχευάζω. peo, ΦΑ͂ΝΝ 


VI. oxevagw I prepare. 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


Pres. oxevato Imperf. ἐσκεύαζον 

Perf. ἐσκεύακα rae ἢ 

; ms ὃ ’ > ͵ ἥ 

Subj. ἐσκευλκω Ορί. ἐσκευακοιμυ Imp. not used 
| Inf. éoxevanévac _ Part. ἐσκευακώς 


Pluperf. ἐσκευάκειν 
Fut. σκευάσω 
Aor. ἐσχεύασα Subj. σκευάσω Opt. σκευάσαιμε, cous, oe &c. 
a Imp. σκεύασον 
Inf. oxévacat Part. oxevacas. 


PASSIVE VOICE, 


Pres. oxevalouce Imperf. goxevalounv 
Perf. ἐσχεύασμαι D. ἐσκευάσμεϑον Ρ, ἐσκευάσμεϑα 
ἐσκεύασαι ἐσκεύασϑον ἐσκεύασϑε 
ἐσκεύασταν ᾿ ἐσκεύασϑον 3d pers. wanting 
Subj. and Opt. wanting Imp. ἐσκεύασο, ἐσκευάσϑω ἄς. 
Inf. ἐσκευάσϑαι Part, ἐσκευασμένος 


Pluperf. ἐσκευάσμην, «oo, aoro &c, 


Fut. σκχκευασϑήσομαι 


Aor. ἐσχευάσϑην 
3 Fut. (ἐσχευάσομαι) not in use. 


MIDDLE VOICE. 
Fat. ὀκευάσομαν : 7 
Aor. ἐσχευασάμην Subj. σκευάσωμαν Opt. σκευασαίμήν 
, Imp. σκεύασαι, σκευασάσϑω &e. 

Inf. σκευάσασϑαι Part. σχευασάμενος. 


Verbal Adjectives σχευασεός, σκευαστέος. 


΄ 
s 


= 


iF aie PARADIGM OF κομίζω, eee) |< 103. 


VII. κομίζω 1 bring, Middle I receive. 
ACTIVE VOICE. 


Pres. κομίζω τ Imperf. ἐκόμεξον 
Perf. κεχύμικα  Pluperf. ἐκεκομίκευν 
Fut. κχομίσωω =. 
Attic Fut. xoucw > D. P. κομιοῦμεν 
HOMLELS κομιεῖτον κομεξῖτε 
κομιεῖ εὐ κομεξῖτον ο πομιοῦσιυ (v) 


Opt. κομιοῖμι, οἷς &e. Inf. κομιεῖν 
; Part. κομιῶν, οὖσα, οὖν Gen. οὔντος 
Aor. ἐκόμισα. Subj. χομίξο οί. κομίσαιμι, σαις, σαν &c. 
Imp. κόμέσον Inf. κομίσαν Part. κομίσας. 
ἊΣ PASSIVE VOICE. 
Pres. xomilouae Imperf. éxouclouny 
Perf. κεκόμεσμαι (compare ἐσκεύασμαι) : 
Subj. and Opt. wanting ~ Imp. κεκόμισο, ἰσϑὼ &c. 
Inf. κεκομίσϑαι Part. κεκομισμένος 
Pluperf. éxsxoulouny 
Fut. χομισϑήσομαι 
Aor. = éxopiodny 
3 Fut. (κεκομέσομαι) not used. 


| : MIDDLE VOICE. 
Fut. ᾿ xouloouce " 


Attic Fut. zoucovuae ‘D. κομιούμεϑον P. κομιούμεϑα 
| ο΄ χομιεῖ * κομιξῖσϑον κομιεῖσϑε 
κομιεῖται =. κομιεῖσϑον κομιοῦνται 
Opt. κομιοίμην, κομιοῖο &c. 
ὙΕΨ _ Inf: κομιεῖσϑαι Part. κομιούμενος 
Aor. ἐκομεσάμην Subj. κομίσωμαν οί. xoucoaiuny ᾿ 


Imp. κόμισαν Inf. κομίσασϑαει Part. κομισάμενος. 


Verbal Adjectives zousoros, κομιστέος. 


* See Rem. II. 3) below. 


- Ὃ 
Π 


8108. ᾿ς ΒΆΝΑΡΙΟΝ OF φυλάσσω. Ὁ 149 


Ἢ 


VIII. φυλάσσω" guard, Middle I guard myself. 


es _ ACTIVE VOICE. 


Pres. φυλάσσω Imperf. ἐφύλασσον. 
: ος φυλάττω ἐφύλαττον ὁ 
: ,.; Perf. πεφύλαχα ᾿ς Pluperf. ἐπεφυλάχειν 
Fut. φυλάξω Aor. ἐφύλαξα 


τὰ ’ 


PASSIVE VOICE. 


Pres. φυλάσσομαι Imperf. égviacoouny 
_ φυλάττομαν ἐφυλαττόμην 
Perf. πεφύλαγμαν Ὄ. πεφυλάγμεϑον Ρ, πεφυλάγμεϑα 
πεφύλαξαι πεφύλαχϑον πεφυλάχϑε 
πεφυλακται πεφύλαχϑον . 84 pers. wanting 


Subj. and Opt. wanting. Imp. πεφύλαξο, πεφυλάχϑω &e. 
! . Inf. πεφυλάχϑαι. Part. πεφυλαγμένος 
Pluperf. ἐπεφυλάγμην. Ὁ. ἐπεφυλάγμεϑον P. ἐπεφυλάγμεϑα 

- ἐπεφύλαξο ἐπεφύλαχϑον. ἐπεᾳφύλαχϑε 
ὶ ἐπεφύλακτο ἐπεφυλάχϑην 3d pers. wanting 
Fut. guiay 97 come. | | 
Aor. ἐφυλάχϑην 
(3d Fut. πεφυλαξύμαι. 

_MIDDLE VOICE. 

Fut. φυλάξομάᾶι Aor. ἐφυλαξάμην. 


Verbal Adjectives φυλαχτός, φυλακτέος. 


150 PARADIGM OF ὀρύσσω. [§ 103. 


TX. ὁὀρύσσω I dig. 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


Pres. ὀρύσσω Imperf. ὥρυσσον᾽ 
| ὀρύττω ὥρυττον oe 
Perf. ὀρώρυχα Subj. ὀρωρύχω Opt. ὀρωρύχοιμι 


Imp. not used Inf. ὁρωρυχέναι 
Part. ὁὀρωρυχώς 


Pluperf. ὀρωρύχειν 
Fut. ὀρύξω 
Aor. ὠὦρυξα Subj. ὀρύξω Opt. ὀρύξαιμε Imp. ὄρυξον 
Inf. opvéae ῬΡαγί. ὀρύξας. 
PASSIVE VOICE, 
Pres. ὀρύσσομαι Imperf. ὠρυσσόμην 
ὀρύττομαι ὠρυττύμην 


Perf. ρώρυγμαν 
Subj. and Opt. wanting Imp. ὁρώρυξο, ὁρωρύχθῳ &e 
Inf. ὀρωρύχϑαις  —— Part. ὀνωρυγμένος 


Pluperf. cowovyuny 

1 Fut. ὀρυχϑήσομαι | 2 Fut. ὀρυγήσομαϊ 

1 Aor. ὠρύχϑν. . 2 Aor. wovyny 
Inf. ὀρυχϑῆναι &e. 6 Inf. ὀρυγῆναι &c. 


3 Fut. wanting (see ὃ 99 Rem. 2.) 


| MIDDLE VOICE. 
Fut. ὀρύξομαι ) : 
Aor. ὠρυξάμην Subj. ὁρύξωμαν Opt. ὀρυξαίμην Imp. ὄρυξαι 
Inf. ὀρύξασϑαι  —- Part. ὀρυξάμενος. 


Verbal Adjectives oguxres, ὁρυχτέος. 


en 


~ 


PARADIGM OF ἀγγέλλω. ‘151 


~ 


| Present Ind. 


; 


- 
Υ 


EXAMPLE OF VERBS IN A, μν ν; Ὁ. 


ἀγγέλλω I announce. 


ACTIVE VOICE, 


Subj. ayyéhhw, . Opt ἀγγέλλοιμι; Imp. =, 
ἀγγελλαῦ. Inf. ἀγγέλλειν, Part. ἀγγέλλων. 
Imperfect 
ἤγγελλον. 
Perfect Ind. Subj. ἡγγέλκω, Opt. ἠγγέλκοιμι, Imp. not used, 
ἤγγελκα,. Inf. ἠγγελκέναι, Part. ἡγγελκώς. 
Pluperfect 
ἡγγέλκειν. 
2 Future Indicatwe. 
ayyEho + ἀἰγγελεῖς ὁ ἀγγελεῖ 
dD. = ἀγγελεῖτον ἀγγελεῖτον 


P. ἀγγελοῦμεν ἀγγελεῖτε 


ayyehovor ("). 


Ὁ ἤγγειλα. 


Optative. 

S. ἀγγελοῖμι ἀγγελοῖς ἀγγελοῖ 

dD -- ἀγγελοῖτον ἀγγελοίτην 

P.. ἀγγελοῖμεν ἀχγελοῖτε ἀγγελοῖεν 

or 

ἀγγελοίην, οἰης, oin, &c.* 
Inf. ayyeheiv. 
Part. frrehan, ἀγγελοῦσα, ἀγγελοῦν, Gen. ἀγγελοῦντος. 

"ΟἹ Aor. Ind. Subj. ἀγγείλω, Opt. ἀγγείλαιμι, Imp. ἄγγειλον, 


Inf. ἀγγεῖλαι, © Part. ayyeihas. 


_ 2 Aor. Ind. 
ἤγγελον. 


Subj. ἀγγέλω, Opt. ἀγγέλοιμει; Imp. ἄγγελε, 
Inf. ἀγγελεῖν, Part. ἀγγελῶν. 


* See below, Rem. Ill. 2. 


“152 ns PARADIGM oF ἀγγέλλω. 3 τ  [§ 108. 
PASSIVE VOICE, _ 


137 Pres, Ind. | Subj. ἀγγέλλωμαι, Ορί. ἀγγελλοίμην, Imp. ἀγγέλλου, 


ayyehhomes. Inf. ἀγγέλλεσϑαι, Part. ἀγγελλόμξνος. 
Imperfect 
ἠγγελλόμην. 
Perfect | Indicative. 
᾿ς ἤγγελμαι; ἤγγελσαι, ἤγγελται, ν΄ 
Ὁ. ἠγγέλμεϑον, ἤγγελϑον, ἤγγελθϑον; : 
P. ἡγγέλμεϑα, ἤγγελϑε, (ηγγελμένον εἰσίν.) 


(Subj. and Opt. ἠγγελμένος ὦ and εἴην.) ; 
Imp. ἤγγελσο, ἡγγέλϑω, &e. Inf. ἡγγέλϑαι, Part. ἡγγελμένος. 


Pluperfect 
ἠγγέλμην, οὐ ἥἤγγελσο; ἤγγελτο, 
Ὁ. ἡγγέλμεϑον, ἤγγελϑον, ἡγγέλϑην, ,. 
P. ἠγγέλμεϑα, ἤγγελϑε, (ἡγγελμένου ἦσαν.) 
1 Future 


ἀγγελϑήσομαι, &c. 


1 Aor. Ind. | Subj. ἀγγελϑῶ, Opt. ἀγγελϑείην, _ Imp. ἀγγέλϑητι, 
ἠγγέλϑην. Inf. ἀγγελϑῆναι, Part. ἀγγελϑείς. 
2 Future 


ἀγγελήσομαι, &c. 


= 


2 Aor. Ind. 
nyyEhny. 


Subj. ayyeho, Opt. ayyedeinv, - Imp. ἀγγέληϑε, 
ΙΕ. ἀγγελῆναι, Part. ἀγγελείς. 


3 Future wanting. (See § 99 Rem. oY ux 


§ 103.] | PARADIGM OF ἀγγέλω. 153 


σ΄ 


MIDDLE VOICE. 
Future Indicative. 
ἀγγελοῦμαι, ayyehn or si,  ἀἀγγελεῖται, 
D. ἀγγελούμεϑον, ἀγγελεῖσϑον, ἀγγελεῖσϑον, 
P. ἀγγελούμεϑα, αγγελεῖσϑε, ἀγγελοῦνται. 
Ι OPTATIVE. 
5, ayyehoiuny, ἀγγελοῖο, ἀγγελοῖτο, 
D. ἀγγελοίμεϑον, ἀγγελοῖσϑον, ἀγγελοίσϑην, 
P. ἀγγελοίμεϑα, ἀγγελοῖσϑε, ἀγγελοῖντο. 


Inf. ἀγγελεῖσϑαι, Part. ἀγγελούμενος, n, ov. 


1 Aor. Ind. | Subj. ἀγγείλωμαι, Opt. ἀγγειλαίμην, ayysihavo, &e. 
᾿ ἡγγειλάμην. Imp. ἀγγειλαι, 
Inf. ἀγγείλασϑαι, Part. ἀγγειλάμενος. 
9. Aor. Ind. Subj. ἀγγέλωμαι, Opt. ἀγγελοίμην, Imp. ἀγγελοῦ, 
ἠγγελόμην. Inf. ἀγγελέσϑαι, Part. ἀγγελόμενος. 


Verbal Adjectives ἀγγελτός, ἀγγελτέος. 


20 


198 


199 


154 REMARKS ON THE PARADIGMS. [Ὁ 103, 


REMARKS. — ἊΝ 


I. Accent. 


i. As the foundation of the doctrine of accent in the verbs, it 
is to be understood, that it is placed as far back as possible, and, 


_in consequence, always on the first syllable of dissyllables, as τύπ- 


τως TUNTE, φεύγω; φεῦγε. - 

In trisyllables and polysyllables, whenever the nature of the 
last syllable admits, it is placed ‘on the antepenult, as TUMTOMED, 
TUNTOVOL, τέτύᾳ AOE, τυ ὑπτομαι, ἔτυπτε, ἔτυψα, ἐφύλαξα. So also in 
imperatives, as φύλαττε, φύλαξον, φύλαξαι, where the present is 
φυλάττω, inf. φυλάττειν, in consequence of the long final syllable. 

Hence verbs of two syllables, when compounded, throw the 
accent, if the last syllable admits it, on the preposition, as φέρε, 
pene ον οφερει ἀπόφευγε. 

2. Apparent exceptions to this rule are cases, where acontrac- 
tion takes place, viz. 

a) Cases where, according to § 83 Rem. 4, 5, the temporal 
augment had its origin in a contraction, as in such compound verbs 
as ἀνῆπτον from ἀνάπτοω. : 

b) The case of the circumflexed future of every kind, accord- 


| ing to § 95 Rem. 6 seq. Also the aorist of the subjunctive pas- 


sive (see below Rem. III. 6) τυφϑώ, rune. 
9. Real exceptions to the general rule are the following, viz. 
a) The second aorist (for the sake of distinction from the pres- 


ent) has the accent on the termination in the following cases, viz. 


(1) In the infingtive and participle active, and infinitive middle, 
always, as τυπέῖν, τυπών, τυπέσϑαι. 

(2) In the 2d sing. of the imperative of some verbs, as γενοῦ 
εἰπέ, &c. 

b) The infinitive and the participle of the perfect passive, are 
distinguished from all the rest of the passive form, in having the 
accent regularly on the penult, as τετύφϑαι, πεποιῆσϑαυ, τέτυμ- 
μένος, πὲποιημένος. 

c) Infinitives in vow have the accent on the penult, as TéTUGE- 
ναι, TUPOHNVAL, τυπῆναι. 

4) The infinitive of the first aorist active in a, and the 84 per- 
son of the optative active in οὐ and av, retain the accent on the 
penult, even when they are polysyllables, e. g. 


Inf. φυλάξαι, παιδεῦσαι. 
3d pers. Opt. φυλάττοι, φυλάξαι, moadevout.* 


* By this, and because, according to § 12 Rem, 5, the 3d sing. opta- 
tive never has the penult circumflexed, the three singular forms of the first 


ᾧ 103.}. REMARKS ON THE PARADIGMS. 155 


5. All participles i in ὡς and ets have the acute on ‘the fast syl-_ 1 
able, as τετυφώς, τυφϑείς, tumei¢.—So also, in the verbs in: me, 
the participles in éc¢, ac, ovg, and υς.. 

6. Where the masculine of a participle has the accent, the 
other genders retain it, without any other consideration than that 
of the nature of the syllables, as φυλάττων, φυλάττουσα, φυλάτ- 
τον" τιμήσων, τιμήσουσα, τεμῆσον᾽ TETUPWS, τετυφυῖα, TETUGOS. 


I]. Second person singular passive. 


1. The original termination of the second person of the passive 
form oa and oo (see the table above in § 87) has been retained, in 
the common conjugation, only in the perfect and pluperfect, and 
in the verbs in az. It was found originally also in the present and 
imperfect, as τύπτεσαί, ἐτύπτεσο, in the imperative τύπτεσο, in 
the first aorist middle Zruwaoo, in the subjunctive τύπτησαε, &c. 

2. The Ionics dropped the o from this ancient form, and, ac- 
‘cordingly, form it in eas, nas, £0, ao. The common dialect again 
_ contracted these forms into ἡ, ov, and w, as follows, viz. 


; lon. Com. lon. © Com. 
Present Ind. τύπτεαι, τύπτη, Imperat. τύπτεο, τύπτου, 
Subj. τύπτηαι, cont) ; Imperf. ἐτύπτεο, ἐτύπτου, 
ist Aorist Middle, lon. ἔσύψαο, Com. éruwo. 


In like manner in the optative, from ozoo was formed ozo, which, as 
it does not admit of contraction, was retained as the common form. 

9. The Attics had the peculiarity, that instead of contracting 
the eas into ἡ: they contracted it into ¢, (see the paradigm.) This 
form i is only used in the future active, and in the verbs βούλομαι, 
οἴομαι, and the fut. ὄψομαν (see anom. ὅράω,) 2d pers. βούλει, 
0tét, Owet,—so that βούλῃ and οἵη are necessarily in the subjunctive. 


: Ul. - Particular lonisms and Atticisms. 


1. The Ionic dialect forms, from the imperfect and the two 
aorists, a peculiar form in oxov, passive and middle oxouny, which 
however, is formed in the indicative alone, and has commonly no 
augment, e. g. ΄ Υ 

τύπτεσκον, τυπτεσκόμην, from τὐπτὸν, -ὁμην, 
τύψασχον, τυψασκόμην from éruwe, τάμην, 
τύπεσκον, τυπεσκόμην, «from érunOY, -ὁμην. 


This form is only used of a repeated action. 


͵ 


aorist are distinguished, viz. Inf. act. παιδεῦσαι, 3d Opt. act. παεδεύσαε, 
Imperat. mid. παίδευσαι. Since, however, the number of syllables or 
the character of the penult rarely admits this accentuation, in general two 

_ of these forms, and in such verbs as τύπτω all three, are liable to be con- 
founded with each other. 


141 


156 REMARKS ON THE PARADIGMS. et me 


-9. lustead of the optative in Ove, there was also a form in 
olny, oins, On, plural olnuev, oinre, oinoay, that bears the name 
of the Attic. It is found chiefly, however, only in the contract 
verbs (see below,) and hence also in the 2d fut. as φανοίην from 
SHtte fut. φανῶ. See in ἀγγέλλω. 

. Instéad of the Opt. Ist aorist active in ose, there was a 
eaciiivia! form in e¢a (τύψεεα, ας, δ, &c.) of which the following 
terminations were much more common than the regular form, viz. 

Sing. 2 τύψειας, 3. τύψειε (vr), for -avc, -ae, 
Plur. 3. τύψειαν, for αὐξν. 


4. The form in στῶν and Pass. σϑὼν of the 58 pers. pl. of the 


amperative is called the Attic, because it. is the most common in 


the Attic writers. In the active voice, it is always identical with 
the genitive plural of the participle of the same tense, with the ex- 
ception of the. perfect. 

δ. In the third pers. pl. pass. in the indicative and optative, but 


never in the subjunctive, the lonic dialect converts the ν into «, 
as follows. 


Opt. τυπτοίατο for TUNTOLYTO 
Perf. πεπαύαται for πέπαυνται 
— κελλίαταιν for κέχλινται. 


This never takes place in the termination ovraz, though occa- 
sionally in ov7o, with the change however of ὁ into ¢, as ἐβού- 
λεατὸ for ἐβούλοντο. Particularly is the 834 pers. plur. perfect 
and pluperfect passive formed by the help of this lonism, when 
the characteristic of the ‘verb is a consonant, (see § 98. 2.) 6. g. 


λ τετύφαται for -ῳφνταῖι, 
- ἐτετάχατο for -χντο, 
ἐστάλαται for πλνται; 
from τύπτω, τάττω, στέλλω &e. 


6. The circumflexed forms are by the Ionics resolved with ἃ. 
change of accent, and this not only in the 2d fut. (§ 95 Rem. 6, and 
§101. 2,) but also in the infinitive 2d aorist active in εἴν, as φυγέ- 
ξύν for φυγεῖν from φεύγω, ἔφύγον, and in the,subjunctive of both 


‘ 


aorists passive in ὦ, (comp. the subj. of verbs in μι) 6. g. 


Subj. 1 aor. pass. τυφϑέω for rupee, 
Subj. 2 aor. pas’. rumew for zune. 


This ε is, by the Epic writers, lengthened into ¢¢ or 7. 
IV. Additional peculrarities of dialect. 


1. The 3d pers. plur. of the leading tenses instead of. Ov OF Ge 
has commonly in the Doric dialect vzz,.as was remarked in § 87 
Rem. 3, and hence the long vowel before sat 6 in the common 
form is ‘explained, viz. 


΄ - 


§ 104.] List OF BARYTON VERBS. 157 - 


“΄ 


τύπτοντι, τετύφαντι, for τύπτουσι, τετύφᾶσι, 
Subj. τύπεωντε for. τύπτωσις. 
2 Fut. μενέοντι contr. μενεῦντυ for (μενέουσι) μενοῦσι. 


κε. The Doric dialect forms the 3d plural of the aorist passwve 
in ἐν instead of your, as ἔτυφϑεν, érunev, ἴον -ησαν. See below 
in the conjugation of verbs in me. 

_ 3. The Ist pers. plur. active in μὲν is converted in the Doric 
. dialect into μὲς {τύπτομες, ἐτύνψαμες); and in the 1st plur. and 
dual pass. in μέϑα, μεϑον, the Dorics and the poets interpose 6, as 
TUNTOMEDO A, TUTTI oueodov. 

4. The infinitives in evy and vase, in the ancient language and 
in the dialects, had a form in μὲν and mévac, viz. 


τυπτέμεν, τυπτέμεναι; for τύπτειν 
tetugeuer,enevar ἴον τετυφέναιν 
τυπῆμεν, τυπήμεναι, for τυπῆναι. 


5. The Dorics more particularly formed the infinitive partly 
in ἐν or ἣν instead of evv, and so also the 2d pers. of the present 
in ἐς instead of ecg. 

6. The ancient language, in the 2d pers. of the active form, 
has instead of ¢ the termination ofa, which in the poets is still 
frequently found appended to the subjunctive and optative, as 
EO), note for ἐϑέλης, κλαίοισϑα for κλαίοις. In the common dia- 
lect this is retained only in certain anomalous verbs (see below 
εἰμί, φημί, and οἶδα). 

7. The epic poets,in the 3d person of the subjunctive, have 
How or Ho¢ instead of ἡ; as τύπτησιν, ἔχησες for τύπτη, ἔχη. 


§ 104. LisT OF BARYTON VERBS. 


1. In the foregoing rules and tables, the manner of forming the 
several modes and tenses in different sorts of yerbs has been. giv- 
en, as far as it results from the examination of several regular 
verbs. But in the numerous cases, in which a verb has several 
formations of the same tense, it is not possible from the foregoing 
rales and examples, to fix with certainty, what form is actually 
most in use. And asin Latin, particularly in the third conjugation, 
‘it requires to be remarked in each single case, what the perfect 
and supine are, so in Greek, it is necessary to observe what is the 


“usage in each single verb; that is, to observe each of the tenses, ' 


which has been made the subject of separate remark above. 


142 


149 


= 


158 LIST OF BARYTON VERBS. 7 [§ 104. 


φῳ- Principally, however, it is important to know whether, in . 
any particular verb, the second aorist active, the second perfect 
and the second aorist passive, are in use. For ‘since the other 
form, viz. the first perfect, and first aorist passive is—taking the 
whole catalogue of verbs—by far the most usual,tit is to be assum- 
ed in each verb, if the use of the other form is not particularly 
known. It must also be known, with respect to every one of the 
enumerated tenses ; since it by no means follows, that a verb, 
which has the second aorist active, has also the second aorist pas- 
sive, &c. , . 

3. Here, however, prevails the following fixed rule, that all 
trisyllable and polysyllable derivative verbs, which have for the 
most part the following endings, viz. a¢w, (fw, aivw, vww, svo, 
Om, aw, ἕω, and are such as the following, viz. 

ἑορτάζω from ἑορτή, νομίζω from νόμος, 


σημαίνω from σῆμα,  εὐϑύνω from εὐθύς, , 
παιδεύω from παῖς, “ δουλόω from δοῦλος, 
τίμάω from τιμή, φιλέω from φίλος, 
form without exception, only the 1 Aorist active, 1 Perfect’ (ἴῃ 
καὶ} 1 Aorist passive. κὸν ᾿ Hig 


’ Remark. Some of these verbal terminations, however, are to 
be regarded in several verbs not as derivative terminations, but as 
merely lengthened forms. This is the case when the verbs are _ 
not derived from a noun or adjective, but are only a more simple 
form of the present lengthened (δ 92). These-latter are able, from 
their simple form to derive some tenses, as the 2d Aorist, and are 
accordingly placed in the anomalous verbs, as ολεσϑαίνω from 
OAIZ4$2, 2 Aorist ὠλεσϑον dopow from LEM, ἔδαμον. The 
termination «vw is always merely a lengthened form of this kind, 
and the verbs which have it, belong accordingly to the anomalous 
verbs. 

4. For all other verbs and-for all forms which are not fixed to 
particular cases in the preceding remarks, individual observation 
in reading the classics must be/recommended. To aid this obser- 
vation, however, lists of the baryton and contract verbs will be 
given, containing the verbs of most frequent recurrence, particu- 
larly the primitives, with ay enumeration as exact as possible of 


the forms in use. . | : 


81.417 6 6ῸΟ ΠΙΒῚ OF BARYTON VERBS. 159 


Explanations of the lists. 

1. As the lists are intended to serve as collections of examples 
of the-preceding rules, besides the primitives the most common 
derivatives are also contained in them. . 

2. It is to be assumed of each verb, when nothing else is stated, 
that it has its aorists and perfect after τύπτω, and that its whole 
inflection may be known from the preceding rules. The same 
~ holds of every tense not expressly given, so that when, for in- 
stance, under any verb, nothing but the second aorist stands, this 
holds only of the second aorist active (and middle,) while the aorist 
passive and perfect active follow the paradigm. Se doe 

3. Where the second aorist passive is given, it is necessary 
also always to form the first aorist passive, as very commonly it ex- 
ists, as a less frequent form, together with the second aorist, and 
the verbs, which actually want it altogether, cannot be given with . 
any certainty. : 

4. The perfect active in many verbs is not in use; butthisalso ΄ 
can seldom be asserted with entire confidence ; and it is therefore 
necessary in each verb to form it according to analogy, and derive 
the perfect passive from it. 

5. The formation of the passive can without scruple be also 
applied to intransitive verbs, as there are cases, in which the third 
person of the passive is also used in intransitive verbs. 

6. Butto form also the middle of those verbs, in which that 
voice is not used, would be an exercise in barbarisms of no utility. 
In order, therefore, to do this with confidence, it must be marked 
in each single case, where it is found. It needs only to be noticed 
that in many verbs, where it is found, it is only in compounded 
forms, which are to be learned from the lexicon. For mere exer- 
cise, however, the swmples may be made use of. Where nothing 
but MID. is given, there the aorist and future middle are formed 
from those tenses in the active. 

' ἢ, All verbs are regarded as regular, whose tenses are con- 
structed by the preceding rules; without regarding the significa- 
tion or their anomalies. For this reason not only the deponents 
of the passive and. middle voice (ὃ 113. 3) are here inserted, but 
also verbs, whose single tenses do not correspond in signification. . 
with their forms; as, in the more important -caseés, is especially 
remarked. _ ; 

. 8. When future middle is immediately subjoined to the active, 
it signifies, that such a verb has its future of the middle formation 
{according to § 113. 4,) though with the signification of the active 
voice. 

9. The expression ‘ PASS. has σ᾽ refers only to the first aorist 
and perfect, and is found only under verbs; in which the o in these 
tenses is not a matter of course; see above ὃ 98 and 100. 


144 


᾿ 


145 


160 LAST OF BARYTON VERBS. ἡ TS 104. 


fast of baryton verbs. 


ἀγάλλω adorn, MID. am proud. © 
ἀγγέλλω announce, MID.—2d Aorist active and middle, little 


used. 


ἀγείρω assemble,— Attic redup-—MID. 
ayyo strangle, transitive in the Act,—MID. Jntransitive. 
ἄδω contracted from ἀείδω sing, Fut. Mid. 


᾿ἀϑροίζω collect. 


ἀϑύρω play: 


_ αἰκίζω abuse. 


αἰνίσσομαι, TTOMAL, Mid. conceal by a riddle. 

αἴρω lift, §101 Rem. 1, MID. 

aioow act. and depon. rush, hasten. Attic ἄττω. 

αἰσχύνω put to shame, § 101 Rem. 4. PASS. am wena 

aiw hear. Only the present and imperfect. For augment see 


§ 83 Rem. 2. 


ἀκούω hear, fut. mid.—2d perfect ἀκήκοα, plup. ἠκηκόενν. (See 


§84 Rem. 2.)—PASS. has o, perfect without reduplication ἤκουσ- 
μαι. ; 


ἀλαλάζω halloo, fut. ἕω, §92 Rem. 1. 

ἀλείφω anoint, perf. ὃ 84. MID. 

ἀλλάσσω, ttm, change,—PASS. second aorist. 
ἄλλομαι Mid. spring, see ὃ 101 Rem 1. 
ἀμβλύνω blunt. 


᾿ ἀμείβω" change, MID. 


ἀμέλγω milk. 
ἀμύνω defend. Perfect wholly wanting. MID. 
ἀναίνομαι (not a compound) MID. deny, has no other form 


except first aorist, which takes 7, ὃ 101. 4. 


ἀνύῳ fulfil, § 95 Rem. 3. PASS. has 6. MID. 
ἀπολαύω enjoy. Has the augment in the middle, though the 


simple is not used. See § 86 Rem. 1. 


ἅπτω kindle. 
ἅπτω fasten, MID. cleave to, touch. 
ἄρδω irrigate. aa has only present and κῴῤοι, 


§ 104. ss BJS’ OF BARYTON VERBS. , 161 


‘donolo and aguorra fit, MID. 

ἀρπάζω rob, commonly ἀρπάσω &c. ἡρπάσϑην. The dialects _ 
not Attic make conato &c. ἡρπάγην, see ὃ 92. Rem 3. 

ἀρύω. draw out, like ἀνύω, MID. 

ἄρχω rule, MID. begin. 

ἀσπάζομαι, MID. embrace, greet. 

ἀσπαίρω gasp. . 


* 


ἀστράπτω lighten. 
βαδίξζω go, future Mid. 
᾿βάπτω dip, characteristic g. PASS. second aorist. ᾿ 
βαστάζω bear, fut. ow. In the Passive it takes the other char-— 
acteristic, yuas, yInv. See ᾧ 92 Rem. 3. 
βϑάλλω milk. 
᾿ βήσσω, ττω, cough. 
βιάζομαι Mid. compel. PASS. see § 113 Rem. 3. 
᾿ βλαάπτω injure, characteristic 8, PASS. 2 aorist. 
βλέπω see, second aorist, PASS. see § 100 Rem. 4." 
βλύξω flow out. 
Bovisve counsel, MID. 
βρέμω sound, has no aorist nor perfect. 
Boexyo moisten, PASS. am damp, second aorist. 
γέμω am full, has neither aorist nor perfect. 
γεύω cause to taste, Mid. taste. 
γλύφω cut, augment of the perf. see § 82 Rem. 1. | 
γνωρίζω recognise. 146 
᾿ς γράφω write, second aorist, PASS. ὃ 100 Rem. 3. MID. | 
δακρύω weep. 
δανείξω loan at interest, MID. borrow at interest. 
δέρω flay, PASS. second aerist. 
δεσπόζξω rule. 
δεύω moisten. 
δέχομαι Mid. receive. PASS. see below ‘ Anomaly of significa- 
tion,” § 113 Rem. 3. 
dixalw judge, Mid. 
διώκω (not a compound) purstie. 
21 


162 : LIST OF BARYTON VERBS. [5 104. 


147 


δουλόω enslave. — | ‘ 
δράω do, act, not to be confounded with the forms of the anom- 


alous διδράσκω. 


δρέπω pluck, MID. rs 

ἔϑίξζω accustom, augment εὐ. 

εἰκάξω conjecture. Augm. see § 83 Rem. 2 

εἴκω yield, augm. see ὃ 83 Rem. 2 and 5, ne to be confounded 


with the anomalous. ΑΚ 82. 


εἴργω shut out, augm. § 83 Rem. 2 and 5. > Ι 
ἐλέγχω refute, Att. reduplication, perf. pass. § 98 Remi 6. 
ékloow, trm, wind, augm. ¢.—MID.* 

ἕλκω draw, augm. ¢4-—MID. 

ἐλπίζω hope. 

ἔλπω cause to hope, ἔλπομαι hope, has besides the press and 


imperfect only the perfect and pluperfect, viz. ἔολπα, ἐώλπειν, 
§ 83 Rem. 7 and 9, with the slenifestinn of ΜΌΝΗΝ and msi yeas 
hope, hoped. 


éootatw celebrate a festival, augm. § 83 Rem. 9. 
ἐπείγω (not a compound) promote, PASS. hasten. - 
ἐπιτηδεύω apply myself, augm. ὃ 86 Rem. 3. 
ἔργαζομαι Mid. labour, augm. «-—PASS. § 113 Rem. 3- 
ἐρείδω prop, Attic reduplication. —MID. 

ἐρέσσω, TIM, row, fut. ow. 

ἑρμηνεύω interpret. Pm ὶ 
ἐρεύγω spit out, second aorist.—MID. 

éoifw contend, rival, Attic reduplication. 

ἕρπω creep, augm. δἰ. 

ἐτάξω commonly ἐξετάζω, examine. 

εὐϑύνω make straight, direct. 

εὔχομαι Mid. pray, augm. ὃ 88 Rem. 2. 

700 please, Mid. enjoy, rejoice. 

ἥκω come, arrive. Ὁ 

ϑαλλω sprout, second perf. 

Salnw warm. 


ϑάπτω bury, ὙΣΩΝ ΚΕ Ε g, 2aorist, PASS. see 9 δ 8.9. 


. 5 10. _ LIST OF BARYTON VERBS. 163 


ϑαυμάξω admire, fut. mid. ; ΕἸΣ 
- ϑέλγω fascinate. es ; Agee 
ϑερέζω reap. 
ϑήγω whet. 
_ ϑλίβω crush, second aorist, PASS. § 100 Rem. 3. 
_ ϑραύω break, shatier, PASS. has o. 
ϑρύπτω rub, characteristic g, 2d aor. pass. see ὃ 18. 3. 
ϑύω, see anomalous verbs. 
᾿ ἱδρύω place, put. 
ἐϑύνω straighten. 
᾿ ἱκετεύω supplicate. 4 
iuaoow scourge, fut. ow. 
insion act. and pass. depon. desire. 
ἱππεύω ride. 
ἐσχύω am able. 
καϑαίρω (not compounded) purify, 1 aorist has 7.—MID. 
naive kill, 2d aorist. ‘The perfect is ΤῊ wanting. PASS. 
has neither perfect nor aorist. 
'καλύπτω hide, MID. 
κάμπτω bend, PASS. perf. §98 Rem. 7. 
_ κεέρω shave, PASS. 2d Aorist—MID. 
κελεύω order, PASS. has o. 
κέλλω land, fut. κέλσω. see §101 Rem. 5. | 
: κήδομαι᾽ care for, only present and imperfect. The active 
. κὐδῳ ἡ injure, only in the poets. as 
κηρύσσω, TIO, proclaim. 
κινδυνεύω incur ddnger. 
uhate sound, characteristic yy, ὃ 92 Rem. 1. Perf. χέκλαγγα. 148 
κλείω shut, PASS. both with and without o. 
κλέπτω steal, fut. mid.—Perf. see § 97 Rem. 1.—PASS. 2d 
 aorist. : 
κλίνω bend, § 101.8. b.—PASS. Ist and 2d aorist—MID. rarely 
used. | ea 
κλύζω rinse. 
κγίζω twitch, burn. 


164. LIST OF BARYTON VERBS. [ὁ 104.: 


os 


κολάζω ach, fut. mid. 
κολούω mutilate, PASS. with and without 0. 
κομίζω bring.—MID. obtain, receive. 
novi be dust, (xoviow, κεκόνιμαι.) 
κόπτω cut, epic 2d perf.—PASS. 2d aor.—MID. 
κράζω scream, characteristic 1s perf. xexoaya, 2d aor. —3d 
fut. instead of fut. act. 
᾿ χραίνω fulfil. 
κρίνω judge, δ 101. 8. b. MID. : . 
κρούω knock, PASS. has o.—MID. 
πκρύπτω hide, characteristic .—PASS. 1st and 2d aor. MID. 
χτάομαι Mid. acquire, perf. κέκτημαι possess. 
κτείνω kill, see § 101. 8, ist and 2d aor. 2d perf. 
χτέζω found. 
᾿ χυλίω roll, PASS. has o. 
κωλύω prevent. 
λέγω say, MID. See this verb, for some of its compounds, in — 
the list of anomalous verbs. 
λείβω pour out, shed. 
λείπω leave, 2 aor. 2 perf.—MID. 
λέπω shell, PASS. 2d aorist. see ὃ 100 Rem. 4, 
Anya cease. 
doy Guat Mid. reckon, conclude. 
λυμαίνω destroy, 1st aorist has 7.—MID. 
Aum, see anomalous verbs. 
μαίνομαι depon. rave, 2d aor. pass.—2d fat. mid. or 2d fut. 
pass. The active is found only. in the compound ἐκμαίνω mad- 
den. 'The perfect active μέμηνα has the intransitive Baie 
μαλάσσω, rr, soften. 
μαραίνω wither, Ist aorist has long ἃ, PASS. wither in its in- 
transitive sense. 
μέμφομαι Mid. blame. 
μένω, see anomalous verbs. 
᾿μερίξω divide, MID. 


μηνύω interpret. 


§ 104.] LIST OF BARYTON VERBS. , 165 


μαίνω pollute, ist aorist has ἡ. 
μολύνω contaminate. 
ναάσσω, ττω, fill, fut. ἕω. It has in the PASS. the other ‘form 
σμαι, σϑην. See§92Rem. 3. 
véuo, see anomalous verbs. 
_ ψεύω wink, nod. 
~ ψήχομαι Mid. swim. 
- wig snow. 
νομίζω think, believe. 
οδύρομαι Mid. lament. 
οἰκτείρω bewail. 
oiuale deplore, fut. οἰμώξομαι, aor. ᾧμωξα: 
ὀκέλλω disembark, trans. 
᾿ὀξύνω sharpen, stimulate. 
ovetdigw reproach. 
ὀνομάζω name. 
ὁπλίζω arm, MID. 
ὀρέγω reach, Att. redup. MID. 
ὁρίζω limit. 
ὀρύσσω, ττω, dig, Att. redup. va 
. παιδεύω educate, MID. 
παίζω play, fut. παίξομαι and παιξοῦμαι. see § 95 Rem. 9. But 
the aor. is ἔπαισα, perf. pass. πέπαισμαν &c. see § 92 Rem. 3. 
meio, see anomalous verbs. 
παλαίω wrestle, PASS. has σ, 
πάλλω shake, PASS. 2d aorist. 
πάσσω bestrew, fut. cow.—MID. 
πατάσσω strike, MID. 
παύω put to rest, PASS. ist aor. see δ 100 Rem. 1 MID. rest. 
meio persuade, PASS. belzeve, which signification is shared al- 150 
so by the 2d perf. πέποιϑα. 
meee perforate, PASS. 2d aorist. 
πέμπω send, perf. §97 Rem. 1, perf. pass. ὃ 98 Rem. 7. MID. 
πένομαν am poor, used only in the present and imperfect. 
περαίνω finish, 1st aorist, see § 101. 4. 


101 


106 | LIST OF BARYTON VERBS. [§ 104. 


melon compress, oppress. ee. οι Ng 
πιστεύω believe. a SY: EAT 
whem cause to wander, characteristic vy, see §92 Rem. 1.— 
PASS. wander. | Ὁ 
πλάσσω, tr, form, fut. ow, MID. 
πλέχω braid, PASS. 2d aor.—MID. 
πλύνω wash, 566 ὃ 101 Rem. 8. “" 
πνίγω suffocate, trans.—Fut. mid. Dor. ὃ 95 Rémi 9) o> Sig 
suffocate, intrans. 2d aorist, see § 100 Rem. 3. ; 
τς mogevw bring, lead; PASS. journey. 
᾿πορίξω procure, MID. acquire. 3 
πράσσω, trom, do. It has ἃ throughout.—Ist perf. I have done, 
2d perf. néngaya 1 have been, MID. - 
πρέπω adorn, become, only in active. 
πρίω saw, PASS. has o. 
mtuiw stumble, PASS. has o. 
πτήσσω crouch. - 


͵ 


πτίσσω stamp, fut. ow. 

πτύσσω fold, MID. 

πτύω spit, PASS. has o. - 

πύϑω rot. 

ῥάπτω sew. 

ὁέπω sink. 

δίπτω. see anomalous verbs.» __ 

σαίνω wag the tail, flatter, only in active, Ist aor. has ἡ. 
Oulvw sweep, Ist aor. has ἡ. 2d perf. 

σαλπίξω sound a trumpet, characteristic yy, see ὃ 92 Rem. 1. _ 
σέβομαι “depon. reverence. 

osiw shake, PASS. has 4, MID. 

σημαίνω denote, mark, Ist aorist has ἡ, MID. 


onnw cause to decay, PASS. rot, has 2d aorist. ‘This meaning 
extends also to 2d perf. ae 


σίνομαις injure. 
σκάζω limp. 
σκάπτω dig, characteristic g, PASS. 2d aorist. 


™~ 


3 § 104.) List oF BARYTON VERBS. ὁ Z 167 


σκέπω cover. 
σκέπτομαι Mid. survey. 


σκευάζω prepare, MID. ~ ‘ 


σκήπτω act. and mid. support myself. 


σκώπτων scoff. 

σπείρω sow, 2d perf. —PASS. 2d Aorist. 
σπένδω pour out, shed, see § 95 Rem. 1. MID. 
σπεύδω hasten. 

onovdalen ‘ Susie with zeal, fut. mid. 

στάζω drop, fut. £0, see ant Rem. 1. 


_ OTEYO cover. 


στείβω tread, PASS. 2d aorist. 
στείχω step, Ist and 2d aorist. 
στέλλω send, PASS. Ist and 2d aorist, MID. 


- στένω sigh, only in the preseand imperf. 


στενάζω groan, fut. Ew, see ᾧ 92 Rem. 1.. 

στέργω love, am satisfied. 

στέφω fill, crown, MID. 

στηρίξω prop, fut. ξω, see § 92 Rem. 1. 

στοχάζομαι MID. conjecture. : Ι 
στρατεύω act. and mid. take the field. 


στρέφω turn, trans. see 498 Rem. 3, and § 100 Rem. 2. PASS. 


ist and 2d aorist, MID. 


oe, 


eupliis pipe. 
σύρω draw, PASS. 2d aorist. _MID- 


᾿σφάλλω deceive, PASS. 2d aorist. 


σφάϊτω slay, PASS. 2d aorist. | 

σφίγγω bind, PASS. perf. see ὃ 98 Rem. 6. 
σφύζω palpitate, fut. Eo, gon Rem. 1. 
σχίζω split. 


σχολάξω am at leisure. ὡς 


ταράσσω, ττω, disturb, MID. 


“τάσσω, tro, arrange, ῬΆΒΒ. 15} and 2d Aorist.—MID. 
. τέγγω wet. 


τείνω stretch, § 101. 8. 


153 


168 | LIST OF BARYTON VERBS. ὁ [§ 104. 


τεκμαίρω limit, ist Aor. has 4.—MID. prove, testify: ἢ 

τεχταίνω build, 1st Aor. has ἡ. 

τέἕλλω, an obsolete word little used but in composition, as ἐπύ- 
τέλλω commit. See ὃ 101. 8. MID. 

τεύχω prepare, see ὃ 98 Rem. 4, compare the sneuniille tvy- 
χάνω. 

τήκω soften, melt, PASS. melt intrans. 2d Aor.—The 2d perf. 
has the same meaning. 

τίλλω tear out, see ὃ 101. 4. 

tim, see anomalous verbs. 

τινάσσω shatter, MID. 

τρέμω tremble, has no aor. nor perf. 

τρέπω turn, see § 97 Rem. 1, ὃ 98 Rem. 3, and § 100 Rem. 2. 
The 2d aorist is the most common tense in ACT. PASS. and MID. 
᾿ς φρέφω nourish, fut. ϑρέψω; &c. δ 18. 2. Perf. rérooqa.—PASS. 
perf. τέϑραμμαι, τεϑράφϑαι, 2d aor. ἐτράφην, Ist aor. ein is 
rare) édo¢mOnv.—Fut. mid. for. pass.—MID. : 

τρίβω rub, 2d aor. PASS. ὃ 100 Rem. 3. 

toilw chirp, fut. §w, perf. τέτριγα. 

υὑβροίξω to treat with indignity, abuse. 


! 


ὑφαίνω weave, 1st aorist has 7. 

‘vo rain, PASS. has o. 

φαίνω show, PASS. together with.the fut. mid. and 2d aorist 
pass. appear. 

φαρμάσσω, TTH, physic. 

φείδομαι Mid. spare. 

φεύγω fly, flee, fut. φεύξομαν and φευξοῦμαι, see ὃ 95 Rem. 9. 
—2d aor.—2d perf. see ὃ 97. 2.—Perf. pass. see ὃ 98 Rem. 4. 

φϑέγγομαιν Mid. sound, perf. ὃ 98 Rem. 6. 

φϑείρω. destroy, 2d perf.—PASS. 2d Aorist. 

φλέγω burn, trans. PASS. 2d Aor.. 100 Rem. 4. 

φράζω speak, indicate, MID. 

φράσσω, trw, surround, PASS. 2d Aor.—MID. 

φοίσσω, ttm, shudder, characteristic x, 2d perf. 

φροντίζω care for. 


- 


᾿Ξ τοῦ 1 CONTRACT VERBS. 169 
φρύγω roast, PASS. 2d aorist, see § 100 Rem. 3. 
φυλάσσω, ττω, guard, MID. 
queen kacad, fut. φύρσω, see §101 Rem. 5. 
gurevo plant. 
χαρίζομαι Mid. am kind, grant. 


ο΄ χορεύω dance. 


χρήζω need, desire, only in pres. and imperf. Compare the 

anomalous χράω. 

yoiw anoint, PASS. has o.—MID. 

ψάλλω strike the harp, sing. 

wave touch, PASS. has o. 

ψέγω blame. 

ψεύδω deceive, PASS. lie. 

ψΨηφίζω count, number, MID. decree by vote. 

ψύχω, see anomalous verbs. : 

odive travail. 


᾿ 
§ 105. CONTRACT VERBS. 


1. Verbs in ew, ἕω, ow, in most of their forms, follow altogeth- 
er the preceding rules and examples ; and reference is uniformly 
had to these verbs, in the chapter on the formation of the tenses. 
But in the present and imperfect, of the active and passive voices, 
when the vowels a, <, 0, immediately precede the vowel of the 


termination, (and in the Ionic dialect partly remain there unchang- 


ed,) a contraction takes place in the .fttic and common dialect. 

2. This contraction is subject to the general laws of contrac- 
tion, given above in § 27, with the exception of a few terminations 
in the verbs in ow.—While according to the general rule, δες 


. should be contracted into ov, and oy into ῳ, the ἐ of the second and 


third persons prevails in the verbs iti ow, and the terminations dec 

and o7¢ are contracted into ove, and oee and o7 into oz, as follows, 
viz. 

2d pers. Ind. Act. μεσϑόεις 

— Subj. — μισϑόης 


22 


contr. μεσϑοῖς, 


170 CONTRACT VERBS. [§ 105. 


154 3d ΕΝ ἢ πος ere contr. μέσϑοῖ, 


So also 2d pers. Ind. and Subj. Pass. μεσϑόῃ contr. μεσϑοῖ. 


Inasmuch, moreover, as 00 is also contracted inte oe, in these 
persons in the active voice, the three modes, indicative, subjunc- — 
tive, and optative,are alike. The infinitive in ὀξὺν is regularly 
contracted, viz. μεσϑύειν, μισϑοῦν. 

3. Also the verbs in ἄω have. the whole indicative and sub- 
junctive alike in the active and passive, in the contraction made 
according to the general rule, whereby both a and ay are con- 
tracted into «,—oes and ay into ¢,—and a0, «ov, ow, into ὦ. 


171 


8106] 


155 


‘Sozan0 gon 


B32) 


“tang. “noaog ‘amgom 


502200g.0701 


Ὅ 


‘209g. ‘non00g ‘amogonl 


anogom 


(2) 2920g-00n 
φιποροτη 
arnogomn 
a01n0gom 
aornogom 
109070 
S10g07 
‘ogo. 


sa 
EFAS 5 


azogorn 


(2) τοπορρθγηὴ 


- 


FLT 


2220g-0001 
aznoogon 
202709090 
2022007 


2209090 


‘ 


5790 907} 


oogom 


" 


‘$02acna4 Ὥ 


‘am ‘000 ‘atorina 


S02a00n12 "Ὃ 


don ‘29200 ‘apna 


anne 


(a) 29001112 


anzoni4 


(a) 2 aononnaa 


210012 222002 
aznanra aznonn 
A010 A023 
aon ao1z0n12 

PLES 93002 

Shrina $2202 
ona wonr2 
ὙΠ wouoy 7 


‘juas01g 


‘MOIOA DAILOV 


4 
‘50200010 ‘ry * 
Sano ‘nono ‘demo πο 
ὍΝ ‘S0240770% Ἢ 
> ‘103 “09002 ‘acogrou 
‘adeno 
412101: αγ39101, 
ἔν 
(4) 202070% (a) τ0π03701: 

2112701 9123701 
az2nN1070U azno210u "ἃ 
A01)2101L π01933201: 

40217701 101237010 
— — ‘d 
1270 932201 
5127016 $733701 
701 MMOL 'S 
"ayus 7 90) Ὀούριι 
᾿ 
. 


CONTRACT ΥΕΛΒΒ.. [ὁ 105. 


172 


(‘anolu0) “9110 πη ι0-- 
αἰεαίιτο ‘aoaleo 
lao (5.0 = ‘algo gornl 
“OHV 

azi0gom ~ a00gorm 

φ4 10,91) 92100. 915] 
αφηορϑτνὴ aanro0gor 
alajogom alu200g090 
aomagorn a02100g-0111 
104.970 200.9011 
Sr0gomn S200g.97 
miogom amhoogorm 

(2) Ἔριν (a) mm0g0001 
22m.g010) 22ko.go 
asningom azniaogom 
ao1m.g.om ao1kogor 
aorm.g.ond ao2logom 
1091) ogo 
Siogor suogom 
‘ogo mogom 


¢ 


156 


. (anole 
cgi 


azn wna 
alsvioniaa 
πολ ηγ1 
ὦν: 
διγνὴγ1 
anitonia2 


(2) 190112 
22072 
aznoonr2 
01012 

a o2inr2 
nL 
Sons 
oni 


«φγἰυὦ 
ἐφολἰε( 


αφηϊεώ-- 


Al ὠ γγ1 


az100N712 
22700N12 
aznronnrs 
aluajonn 
40220012 
20014 
Sones 
aonna 


(2) λ00) 721 
22Wonrs 
aznonn1 
aorkiona2 


aoakionas 


(ano9lj0) ‘22h70 ᾿αφηϊεο-- 
alkz20 ‘ao2lipo 


ujo ᾿δίη0 — Saujor0% 
OM 
4310701 2102901 
2210701 22702701 
a2n10701L aznir02901: - 
al110101 al2j0200% 
2021070 40270270 
— — ‘d 
10701 203701 
510701L 5103701 
9119701 airoz70u Ὁ 
‘aanqnjdg 
(2) 290701 (2) 2903700 
2alirou 2243201 
aznorou azn310uL | 
κολίετοιι πολ 3101, 
aozluo1 κολίι3γτ01; 
hou (3701, 
δί(201.. 53701 
(101: (3701: *S 
“Φαηοι(ης! 


175. 


΄ 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


᾿ 


§ 105.] 


157 


‘on “Smu- ἍΜ] 


qoaznlinnaz22 ὙΠ] 


moluna3 
moun 
arzKuniaza3 


n“luny132 


ὍΝ ᾿δώκ- “04 


οἰ) 013 “LOY | 
mowou ἽΠΜΤ 
arzxlurousuz ‘dnd 


͵ 


razxur0ueu ‘fu »κίι οιφι, slag 


"21402, JO Β98091 Surpuodsa1109 94} 9.7} Ajastovad poulsoy 918 SulMoj[o} 100} 987, 


99090) 

momgom 

aren gong; 

ὍΝ Sex "DT ὃ 
mazno.gornan ὙΠ ππκωρογνφη 
παορφο)ν ᾿ ποο Ὁ} 
3100 GOIN? 221320072 
aznrogors aznloogorms 
akarogom au2320Q.09N3 
a0rn0gome a0220g.09N2 
no goin? 20g.0)n2 
Sno goin? 590.)0}}}2 
Anogoyn?  M00g-0)N2 


ac2anogom 41200999" 30 


͵ 


anomsn0gom 40009220070 
. 2200 g0mm 212090101 
— amn0gom κω 430 (925) 
᾿ποιπο 91) 20220900 
ornogon 120900 
er 3090)" 


Δ a00n)23 
g2nvna3 22900123 
ΠΩΣ aznorna23 
aleaionina3 , aluaznn ae 
ΛΟΔ 713. aozz0M123 
sanlya3 2022 
Sonyag 530n123 
aon}a3 a00n}23 | 
‘poajredwy 

Am 2aonnye Am2400N72 IO 
ΠΣ ΩΣ anom2130012 
22012 22002 
acrones doa370n72 
ozone. aoazanna 
aon , 13 ]11 

: ovlja “pons 


απο) οι 
22137013 
aznnorou? 


αἰε1)31013 , 


A011370U32 
a210U? 
5737012 
An0j 012 


ΤΣ) 

: 91997013 
asvio2013 ‘d 

ala321013 

A013770U2 
--- ‘d 

9270102 

599101:3 
A0ZI0U? °S 


AMIANOIOU AM1A0370U a0 


AN0 09292701 
2217270 


00 272701: 


10213701 
1)270U 
92701. 


AND01377 Ou 
223370 "ἃ 
πο 159101. 
πολ1937101: “(J 
(0139101. 
99201:. °S 
ὀδιμνλναα! 


)δ. 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


174 


J 


! 
Wi 
i 


m1aMgom 
spon gar 
ag2ned gor 


i κορϑίο nom 


a0gowgomn 
aog2ning oa ἡ 
tmx0 worn 
fogom 


amnagom 


Soasnaogom 
megonogom 


mzano porn 
2g0n0G oT 
ng 2nivo. fom 
a0gonogonm 
a0gonogom 


aogznaogom 


ΣΥ͂Σ ΩΣ 
“οροτὴ 
sovlaogor 


79 1600. 015)] 
2p0lo@orn 


ngzn@ogornt 


20g9%0gorn 
aogologor 
angen gor 
morte porn 

tio gor 


aonaogorl . 


Soa2n00g.01n) 


τ ρο3ορογηὴ 


72 1400 }0Υ}] 
2G.030g001 
ng snoogom 


ΥΩ 


angor0gorn 
aog2noo gor 


g1damnrs 
2.gonne 
ng2nornn 
A0. gona 
a0gonNre 
aogenernaa 
2)1 Χ)}}71, 
naa 
ΩΣ 


Soasnonrz 
7 (ΟΣ 


70 2. ΛΔΡΥ771 
9 ΟχνΗ71 
n.g32nto 72 
aogoonre 
A0g.onni2 
aogenoniz 
7.51 Ὁ}}7}2 
pola 
ronannaa 


101000101172 
2polonna 
agsnonner 
aogounrra 
aogoleaure 
aoganonvys 
monet 


ronan 


50a ΩΣ 
1.9 ‘ones 


Ὁ 1 4ΟΪ71 
2Q070NI2 
i 


ogsenonniz 
A0G9 pond 


AOLv9 gona 


dogznonwrs 
9702300092 


rovionnr. 


‘juasarg 


“HOIOA AAISSVA ἡ 


91020009 01L 
sgoleror 
wg2niorot 
aogouror 
aogoleroru 
a0g2"en70% 
γ)1} 101: 
lirou 
annleoro4 


Soaznaor0u 


90.G-012201L 


γ᾽ 1πΠ 070: 
2600727016 


| 70.6.2 1'10101L 


A0.Q.912704L 
A0.-912701L 
aogennroionr 
“990:21370% 

13. 10 ‘lou 


“qonlaon04 


101A FIO 
2g0li370%: 
Ἀφ, ὠφ οι ‘a 
adgolsr0x 
adgourr01 
aog2neeron Ὁ 
δ λοι. 
ΝΣ 
2} 3101 Ὸ 


‘aauounlony 


Soazno200n ‘ad ing 
7... 0 93201: 


ΩΝ 


791 40 9701: 
FG.OF2701 
mgso2710u "ἢ 
A0G-032701 

209-033701L 
a0g2n02201. ‘a 

90132001. 

733 10 li27010 
7} 0 9701: Ὁ: 


anupoepury 


175 


CONTRACT VERBS. 


ὁ 105.] 


159 


o1anogor n> 
2G000. G09 ni 
nganhogorny 
al.g.0n0gor ni 
AN G900.G-07 ns 
ANG? nao G91 nip 
01 10g ni 

(00 G09 np 
aurivogorms 


angon0 nom 
20909.92009 
2p020g09 
amponogomn 
a0g.0n0g0mn 
wgonogorn 
aogom 


ο016410 6.027] 
299109000 
npziiogom 
akgojogom | 
409-0109-0101 
aog2niogor 
o110gom 
o10gon 
alunjogorn 


02000409013 
29920 Q.07N2 


ng2noogom i 


“alug020g0m 
A0.G-920Q9 mi 
aogznoogonds 
02209972 

no agony 

alu vloo gone 


40 .-030¢.07). IO 
AnowM 020001 
3090 20.0901 

am 90209-0001 
1090209010 

ω φοϑορουν 
n00gom 


02a700g-901 
2.g-0700g-090 
09310090001 
Au go00gom 
a0g0100g070 
a0g2nzo0g.on 
02100g-070 


0700,.0901 


aknoogom 


, 


01amMn123 01400n123 
2g 00123 2Q-030n1 a3 
n.g2nlaonrag nganonnra 
alugonnra akgovonna3 
AOG-O% onna3 A0G-020 γ1712 
Aopen nr 23 aog2nonna? 
o21nn23 02901123 
(719 ΛΟ)» 
alurieonina3 auinlonnna2 
‘yajaoduy 

A.G.90 1 ao @:030172 10 
anomgo0nna ΠΥ ΩΣ 
: 2ponnea 360 sonra 
angonnas ampozonna 
A0.G-0% ona a0goz0n4. 
ΥΩ 0). 020002 
oonaa πον γ1 
o1acnnaa o2aronnaa 
2gotonas 29.0700 12. 
ΕΣ (9 ΝΠ] 0 Ὁ 71 
αἰμροὐγνΐγ Algo yonna2 
A0G-96 toaa 404-0200N12 
aog2nionrn aog2nzonns 
ordnra o1onaa 
otona2. , 0n00n02 

alin oviaa alenonnaa 


02A0000u2 
29.91270117 
ng2nnoro13 
alug 91910209 
40449127013 
aogsnaorou? 
02197013 
aororg 
aluninorouz 


ACO .0)2701L 
A090 6.012701 
2.4-019702 
A00.6.992701L 
A0.9.91270% 
0.G.013101 
00102 


01410701 


2410107014 
0.927070 
αἰερολοτοι, 
406010702 

A0921}0701. 
021070% 
010701 
alinio10u 


022037013 

9. .03370113 
ng2nio2013 τ 
aleg0227013 
A0G.03390U2 


Aogenono0u7 ‘a 


02327013 
077013 
alerio2n0u3 ‘S 


A, G-032701L 10 


~ A090 G-933101L 


247032701 “ἃ 
A0..032701L 
AOG927001L *(T 

,G-03770L 
᾿ς 207701 Ὃ 


"9010 ϑ61} 


010103701 
29-0703701L 
70.9.3n1103701 “i 
altg.0102701L 
A0-9102701L 
aog2nyor001% Ἢ 
02703701 | 
07097031 
alusipostou Ὁ 


Ν 


"96 110) 


-ὁ 


160 


176 CONTRACT VERBS. [ὁ 105. 


All other tenses admit no contraction. But inasmuch as the 
declension of the perfect and pluperfect passive of these verbs is 
not sufficiently clear from the paradigms just given, they are here 
inflected at length. The other tenses are inflected like τύπτω. 


Perfect. 

Indicative. 8. πεποίημαν τετίμημαι μεμίσϑωμαι 
πεποίησαι τετίμησαι μεμίσϑωσαι 
πεποίηται τετίμηται μεμίσϑωταυ 

D. πεποεήμεϑον τετιμήμεϑον μεμισϑώμεϑον 
πεποίησϑον τετίμησϑον μεμίσϑωσϑον 
πὲεποίησϑον τετίμησϑον ιμεμίσϑωσϑον 

P. πεποιήμεϑα τετιμήμεϑα μεμισϑώμεϑα 
πεποίησϑε teviunove | μεμίσϑωσθϑε 
πεποίηνταν τετίμηνταν μεμίσϑωνταν 

Infinitive. πεποιῆσϑαι τετιμῆσϑαν μεμισϑῶσϑαι 

Participle. πεποιημένος τετιμημένος μεμισϑωμένος 

Subjunctive. πεποίωμαινδ τετίμωμαυδ μεμίσϑωμαυΐ 

ἢ ἡταῦ, &e. n, ταῦ, &e. @, ταῦ; &e. 

Optative. 8. memoununy® τετιμήμην" μεμισϑῴμην" 

. πεποίῃο τετίμῃο μεμίσϑῳο 
πεποίητο τετίμητο μεμίσϑῳτο 

D. πεποιήμεϑον τετεμήμεϑον μεμισϑῴώμεϑον 
πεποίῃσϑον τετίμῃσϑον μεμίσϑῳσϑον 
πεποιηῃσϑὴν τετιμησϑὴν μεμισϑῳσϑην 

Ps πεποιήμεϑα τετεμήμεϑα μεμισϑώμεϑα 
πεποίῃσϑε τετίμῃσϑε μεμίσϑῳσϑε 

᾿πεποίηντο τετίμηντο μεθ 

Imperative. 8. πεποίησο τετίμησο μεμίσϑωσο | 

fe πεποιήσϑω τετιμήσϑω μεμισϑώσϑω 

D. πεποίησϑον τετίμησϑον μεμίσϑωσθϑον. 
πεποιήσϑων τετεμήσϑων μεμισϑώσϑων 

P. πὲεποίησϑε τετίμησϑε μεμίσϑωσϑε 
πεποιήσϑωσαν | τετιμήσϑωσαν as i aye | 

σαν 


* See § 98.Rem. ὃ. 


$105.) 


CONTRACT VERBS. — 


i Pluperfect. 


S. ᾿ἐπεποιήμην ἐτετεμήμην ἐμεμισϑώμην 
ἐπεποίησο ἐτετίμησο ἐμεμίσϑωσο 
‘ ἐπεποίητο ἔτετίμητο é ἐμίσϑωτο 
D. ἐπεποιήμεϑον ἐτετεμήμεϑον ἐμεμεσθώμεϑον 
ἐπεποίησϑον ἐτετίμησϑον ἐμεμίσϑωσθϑον 
ἐπεποιήσϑην ἐτετιμήσϑην ἐμεμισϑώσϑην 
P. ἐπεποιήμεϑα ἐτετεμήμεϑα j ἐμεμισϑώμεϑα 
ἐπεποίησϑε ἐτετίμησϑε ἐμεμίσϑωσϑε 
» ἐπεποίηντο ἐτετίμηντο ἐμεμίσϑωντο 
1 Fut. ποιηϑήσομαν cond comet μεσϑωϑήσομαν : 
1 Aor. ἐποιήϑην ἐτιμήϑην ἐμισϑώϑην 
3 Fut. πεποιήσομαι TETLMNOOMAL pegenannee 
MIDDLE VOICE.* / 
i Fut. ποιήσομαν τεμήσομαν | μεσϑώσομαι 
1 Aor. ἐποιησάμην ἐτιμησάμην Ι ἐμισϑωσάμην 
/ Verbal Adjectives. 
. ποιητός τίμητός 6Σἐ1ἰἠἰἱ μισϑωτός 
ποιητέος τιμητέος | μισϑωτέος 
Remarks. 


1. The uncontracted or original form of these verbs is, in res- 
pect to verbs in ἕω, peculiar to the lonic dialect. 

_ verbs, it is wholly disused, with the exception of a few poetical 
forms in ἄω. 

2. In the Attic and common dialect, the foregoing contractions 
are never omitted; with the exception "however, in general, of the 
shorter words in ἕω (as rgéw), from which, though we say τρεῖς 
ἕτρευ, πνεῖν. &c. we use, on the other hand, the full forms τρέω, 

, χέομαι, TOLOMEY, πνέουσι, πνέῃ, &c. 
. A few contract verbs in ew, instead of the vowel of contrac- 
ἐξ ‘hea ας have a Doric ἢ ; see Rem. 9 below. They are principally 
the following, viz. 


> Ὺ 


πριεῖσϑαυ to make for one’s self, τιμάσϑαι to honor as in the active, 
μισϑούυσϑανυ to cause to let to ones self; i. 6. to hire. 


23 


In the other © 


161 


162 


178. CONTRACT VERBS. [§ 105. 


ζῆν to live, χρῆσϑαυ to use, 
πεινῆν to hunger dOvwyyv to thirst, 


from (aw, χράω, (see both among the anomalous verbs below,) 
πείνάω, dewao. Accordingly we have ζῆς, ζῆ, eon, yontae, &c. 


Further remarks on the dialects. 


4. As the Tonics form the 3d pers. of the common conjugation 
in eae and <0, the verbs in ἕω are subject. to!a multiplication of 
vowels; such as moveéae, Enawveeat, &c. which, however, with res- 
pect to ¢sv, is remedied by an elision of the ¢, as ἐποιξο. 

5. The lonic dialect often converts ας in verbs in a, into é, 
as Ovéw ὁρέομεν for ὁράω Ooaouer, χρέεταν for χρᾶται, &C. 

6. In the 3d pers. plur. where the Ionics, according to § 103. 
III. 5, change the o into ας and in particular use ἕατο for ovo, 
they make use of the same termination, with the elision of one ὃ, 
also for govro of the imperfect, as Zunyav-euro, (for -ἄοντος -€ovt0) 
commonly ἐμηχανῶντο. In the perfect, they not only change yyv- 


tat into yatas, but commonly shorten also the 7 into δ, as τέτεμ- 


ἕαται for τετίμ-ηνται. 

_ ἢ, The epic writers have the peculiar license, on account of 
the metre, to protract again the vowel of contraction by inserting 
before it the kindred long or short vowel, as (ὁράεεν) ὁρᾷν, ὁράᾳν' 
(dvaw) ὁρῶ, ὁρόω. Particip. fem. (ἡβαουσα) ἡβῶσα, ἡβώωσα, &c. 

8. The Doric dialect, instead of contracting <0 into ov, com- 
monly contracts it into εὖ. and that this is also’ done by the Ionics 
has already been remarked; see ὃ 27 Rem. 5. These dialects 
moreover not only say ποιεῦμεν, ποιέῦμαι, ποιεῦντες, ἐποίευν, from 


_ verbs in ἕω, but also in the verbs in ow, 6. 5. ἐδικαίευν, πληρευν- 


τὲς, from δικαέόω, πληρόω. 

9. The Dorics, who uniformly use elsewhere α for ἡ, desert 
in this case this analogy, and make use of 4, without ὁ subscript, 
instead of all contractions of aes and sev, as ogy for ὁρᾷν; τολμῆ- 
τὲ for τολμᾶτε, κοσμὴν for κοσμεῖν. 


Last of contract verbs. 


The same explanations apply to this, as to the preceding List 


j of baryton verbs. 
ἀγαπάω love. 


ἀγνοξω am ignorant of, fut. mid. 

ἀδικέω wrong. 

αἰδέομαι depon. am ashamed of, fut. ésouat, perf. and aorist 
have o. | | 

αἵματόω make bloody. 


§ 105.] stor CONTRACT VERBS. ἢ 179 


aigéw, see anomalous verbs. 
aitew demand, MID. 
αἰτιάομαι Mid. criminate. 3 
ἀκέομαν Mid. heal. fut. ἐσομαι. perf. ‘olin 6. 
anohovdew follow. 
ἀκρεβόω know accurately, MID. 
ἀκροάομαι Mid. hear. 
ἀλάομαν depon. wander. , Ἐ 163 
ἀλγέω suffer pain. 
_@héw grind, retains ¢ in its inflection, Attic redup—PASS. 
has σ. 
ἀλοάω thresh, fut. το. § 95. 5. 
ἁμάω mow, MID. 
ἀμφισβητέω contest, differ in opinion, augment at the begin- 
ning. 
ἀνεάω (not a compound) Pass. with fut. mid..am grieved. 
ἀξιόω estimate. 
ἀπαντάω meet, fut. mid—Augment in the middle. > 
ἀπατάω (not compounded) deceive. 
ἀπειλέω (not compounded) threaten. 
aoaouae Mid. beg. 
ἀρυϑμέω count, MID. Ἢ 
ἀρκέω suffice, retains ¢ in its inflection. Pass. with the same 
meaning has o. 
ἀρνέομαι Mid. deny. “a 
᾿ἀρόω plough, retains o in the inflection, Attic ΜῊ Pass. 
without o. 
ἀρτάω hang, fasten, MID. 
, ἀσκέω exercise. 
αὐλέω pipe. 
βιόω, see anomalous verbs. 
βοάω cry out, see § 95 Rem. 5, Fut. mid. 
- βουκολέω feed, trans. 
Boovraw thunder. 
γελάω daugh, fut. mid.—Has ἃ in inflection. PASS. has o. 


164 


180 : LIST OF CONTRACT VERBS. [ὁ 105. 


> 


γεννάω beget, MID. 

danavew Act. and depon. expend. 

δεξιόομαι Mid. salute with the right hand. 

δέω. see anomalous verbs. 

δηλέω injure, MID. 

δηλόω manifest. 

dvartaw (not a éompound) am a judge, PASS. abide, live ; for 
augment see § 86 Rem. 4. 

διακονέω (not a compound) minister to, for augment see § 86 
Rem. 4=—MID. same signification. 

διψάω thirst, see Rem. 3 above. 

δουλόω enslave, MID. 

‘doaw do, (different from διδράσκω, see anomalous verbs.) 


| ϑυσευζέω am unfortunate. 


ExW ponent, augm. él. 

ἐγγυάω (not compounded) pledge, MID. guarantee. 

éyyeroew deliver over, augm. ὃ 86 Rem. 3. 

ἐλεέω pity. 

ἐμέω spit, has ¢ in the inflection, Att. redup.—PASS. has o. 
évaytiaouat depon. am opposed to, augm. at the beginning. 
ἐνϑυμέομαν depon. consider, augm. ὃ 86 Rem. 3. 

ἐνοχλέω annoy, augm. ὃ 86 Rem. 4. : 


᾿ ἐπυϑυμέω desire, augm. δ 86 Rem. 3. 


ἐπιχειρεὼ undertake, augm. § 86 Rem. 3. 
ἐράω lowe, 1 aor. Pass has o with active signification: 
ἐρευνάω Act. and Mid. investigate. 


᾿ἐρημόω make waste. 


ἐρυϑρίαω blush. 

ἐρωτάω ask. 

ἑστιάω entertain, treat, augm. εὐ. 

εὐεργετέω benefit, augm. § 86 Rem. 5. 

εὐσεβέω am pious, augm. § 86 Rem. 5. 

εὐωχέω feast trans. PASS. feast intrans. augment § 86 Rem. 5. 
Caw, see anomalous verbs. 

Céw boil intrans, retains ¢ in its inflection. 


P on 


§ 105.] LIST OF CONTRACT VERBS. 


181 - 


ζηλόω emulate, am zealous for. 
ζητέω seek. ; 
ζωγραφέω paint. 

ἡβάω am young. 

Ἴγέομαι Mid. think, believe. 
ἡμερόω tame. 

ἡνεοχέω drive. 


ἡσοάομαι PASS. am inferior, am overcome: 


᾿ ἠχέω echo, sound. 
ϑαῤθδέω, ϑαρσέω, confide am bold. 
ϑεάομαι Mid. behold, contemplate. 
Snow hunt. 


᾿ϑλάω crush, ἃ in the inflection —PASS: has o. 


ϑυμιάω burn incense, perfume. 
ϑυμόω am wrathful., 
ἑάομαν Mid. heal. 
ἱδρόω δτοεαΐ. 
ἱμάω draw up, MID. 
ἱσεορέω inquire. 
κακόω injure, weaken. 
ο΄ xavyaouce Mid. boast. 
᾿ κεντέω prick, sting. 
κινέω move. 


165 


χλάω break, ἃ in the inflection. PASS. has o, (not to be con- 


founded with χλάω, κλαίω, see anomalous verbs.) 


| κληρόῶω choose by lot, MID. cast lots. 


χνάω scrape, contracts ae into 7. See above Rem. 3. 
κοιμάω put to sleep, tranquillize, PASS. (Epic mid.) aloe 


κοινόω Act. and Mid. make common, share. 
κοινωνέω partake. 

κολλάω glue. 

κολυμβάω swim. 


wogee sweep, (different from xogéyvuus, see anomalous verbs.) 


κοσμέω adorn. 


é oreo» Act. and Mid. am angry, resent, retains ¢ in its ‘inflection. 


κρατέω have power, take hold: of. 


i 


182 LIST OP CONTRACT VERBS. [ὃ 105. 


κροτέω strike, clap. 
κτάομαι Mid. acquire, Perf. possess. 
“rune sound, roar. 
κυβερνάω pulot, direct. 
λαλέω speak. 
λιπαρέω implore. 
λοιδορέω reproach, Act. Pass. and Mid. 
λυπέω grieve. 
λωβάομαι Mid. abuse. 
λωφάω remit, rest. 
μαρτυῤρέω testify. 
μειδιάω smile. 
166 μετρέω measure, MID. 
᾿μηχανάομαν Mid. contrive, devise. 
μιμέομαι Mid. imitate. 
utoew hate. 
véw spin, (for véw swim, see anomalous verbs.) 
vexaw conquer. 
νοέω think. 
vovdetew exhort, warn. 
ξέω abrade, smooth, polish, retains the ¢ in the inflection, wal in 
PASS. has o. 
oinéw dwell. 
οἰκοδομέω build, MID. 
ὀκνέω hesitate, am not willing. 
ὁμολογέω agree with, confess. 
onraw rodst. 
900m set upright, MID.—For augm. of compound ἀνορϑόω 
see § 86 Rem. 4. 
᾿ὁρμάω Act. and Pass. hasten, strive. 
oouew lie at anchor. ὃ 
ὀρχέομαν Mid. spring, dance. 
oveéw, augm. ὃ 83 Rem. 6. | . 
ὀχέω drive trans. PASS. drive intransit. 
παροφνξῳ rage, augm. ὃ 86 Rem. 4 
πατέω tread. 


Ἂς 


ὁ 105.] LIST OF CONTRACT VERBS. 183 


πεινάω suffer hunger, see above Rem. 4. 
πείράω try, examine ip a ped with fut. mid. and aor. pass. 
attempt, undertake. 
περάω pass over, fut. περάσω (long a) &c. 
᾿ megaw bring over, fut. περάσω (short «), Att. fut. περώ, ᾷς, ¢ 
&c. PASS. has o. 
πλανάω mislead, PASS. wander. 
πλεονεκτέω am covetous. 
πληρόω fill. 
πονέω Act. and Mid. labor. 
πτερόω give wings to. 
πωλέω sell. 
διζόω cause to root, PASS. take root. 
onuecow mark, MID. 
σιγάω keep silence, fut. mid. 
σιτέομαν Mid. eat, feast. j 167 
σιωπάω keep silence, fut. mid. 
σκίρτάω leap. 
σμάω scour, contracts a into ἡ. See above Rem. 3. 
_ σπάω draw, ἃ in the inflection, PASS. has σ. MID. 
στεφανόύω crown, MID. 
συλάω plunder. 
σφριγάω swell, am puffed up. 
_ rehéw finish, fulfil, retains ¢ in the inflection, PASS. has o. MID. 
τηρέω observe. 
τιμάω honor, MID. 
τιμωρέω help, revenge, MLD. 
τολμάω dare. 
τρέω tremble, see above Rem. 2. retains « in the inflection. 
τρυπάω bore, perforate. 
τρυφάω am effeminate, debauch. 
τρυφόω make proud, PASS. am proud. 
᾿φϑονέω envy- 
φιλέω love. 
φοβέομαν depon. fear 
φοιτάω visit. 


108 


1.4 | VERBS IN Mate [Ὁ 106. 


φυσάω blow. 

χαλάω yield, relax, ἃ in its inflection, PASS. has o. 

yevoow Act. but more commonly Mid. subject. 

ywoew go, yield, fut. mid. 
ψάω rub, contracts a into 7, see above Rem. 3. MID. ‘ 
ὠνέομαι Mid. buy, augm. ὃ 83 Rem. 6. 


IRREGULAR CONJUGATION. 
§ 106. VERBS IN ww. 


1. The first class of irregular verbs are those in ms, a class 
which contains but few verbs and parts of verbs, which differ also 
still farther from each other in several points. 


Rem. 1. The verbs, which are given in the grammar as exam- 
ples of this formation, are almost the only ones in which it pre- 
vails in all those parts, to which it can be applied. Whatever else 
is governed by this analogy will be given in the list of anomalous 
verbs. For the most part, it is only sengle tenses of certain verbs. 


2. All verbs in we have a root, which, according to the usual 


_ formation, should terminate in ὦ pure. It is therefore usual in 


the grammar to deduce the more frequent from the obsolete form, 
and to say that ridyue is derived from O22. 

3. The conjugation in we is peculiar only in the Present, Im- 
perfect and Second Aorist ; and the essentials of it consist in the 
terminations of inflection. Thus μὲν, TE, V, Wat, instead of being 


-attached to the root by a connective vowel (omer, été, ov, ouac), 


are joined immediately to the radical vowel of the verb, e. g, 
ride-—uer, ἵστα-μαι, δίδο-τε, ἐδείκνυ-τε, ἔϑη-ν. ὦ 
See Rem. 8. | 
4. In addition to this, there are some peculiar terminations, viz. 
ui—in the 1st pers. sing. pres. Indic. 
ov or ovyv—in the 3d pers. sing. pres. Indic. 
81—in the 2d pers. sing. Imperat. 
Besides, the infinitive of those tenses always ends in vas, εὐ the 
nom. masculine of the participle not in v, but in ¢, with the omis- 
sion of v, whereby the radical vowel is lengthened in the usual 


ᾧ 106.] VERBS IN μό. 185 


manner, as ἄς, εἰς, ovs, US, which ending has always the acute ac- 
cent... eo 7... ] - : ᾿ 
_5. The subjunctive and the optative combine the radical vowel 


of the verb with their termination into one long vowel, which 


should regularly be always accented—In the subjunctive, when 


- the radical vowel is « or ἐς this contracted vowel is ὦ and ἡ. as 


> 


ὦ, ἧς, ἢ; ὦμεν, Are, ὥσιν. | 
But when the radical vowel is 0, the contracted vowel is uni- 
formly ὦ, as 
"Ἀεὶ, ὦ, OS, W, ὥμεν, OTE, ὥσεν. 

The optative has ἃ diphthong with ¢, to which is subjoined the 
termination in ἦν, as τυϑ-είην, ἱστ-αίην, δεδ-οίην. 

The verbs in vue most commonly form these two modes ac- 
cording to the analogy of verbs in vw. 

6. Several short radical forms connect with the abovenamed 


169 


cHanges a reduplication, wherein they repeat ‘the first consonant - 


with an ἐς as 
AOSz δίδωμι, ΘΕ τἰϑημι. 
If the root begin with oz, ar, or an aspirated vowel, ὁ alone. is 
prefixed with the aspirate, as 
ΣΊ 42) ἵστημι, ΠΤ 22 ἵπταμαι. “EQ i ἕημι.. 
And it is only in this way, that the second aorist can be formed in 
verbs of this kind; as it is only by the absence of this reduplica- 
tion, that it is distinguished from the imperfect, and, in the other 
modes, from the present (see § 96 Rem. 3.) as 
τείϑημε, Impf. ἐτίϑην, Aor. ἔϑην. 
7. The radical vowel, in its connexion with the terminations 


of this conjugation, in the singular of the indicative always be-- 


comes long ; viz. α and ¢ become ἡ (Ist pres. jue), 0 becomes ὦ 
(ist pres. wc), and v is lengthened, as vue. In the other termi- 
nations it almost always appears in its original shortness, as τέϑη- 


μι----τίϑεμεν, ἔϑεσαν, τυϑέναι, TIDETL, τίϑεμαι, but with some ex- — 


ceptions, which will be seen as they occur in the paradigms, and 
in the Pist of anomalous verbs below. 
8. All the other tenses are formed in the usual manner from 
94 


170 


186 VERBS IN μό. ~ [§ 106. 


the root and without reduplication, as τέϑημι (OZR), fut. ϑήσω. 
The verbs, however, of this class, have, as anomalous verbs, even 
in these tenses, other peculiarities, which are not incident to their 


character as verbs in mv, and are therefore to be separately con- 
. sidered. | 


Rem. 2. The two verbs ὕστημιε and δήέδωμι shorten their vow- | 
el, éven in those tenses of the passive voice, which are regular: 
E.g. Act. στήσω perf. ἕστηκα, eae perf. ἕσετάμαι, aor. ἐστάϑην 

— δώσω — δέδωκα, —  — δέδομαι, — ἐδόϑην. 
The verbs riOyue and ἕημι (δ 108) do the same only in the 1 
aor. 8, g. ἐτέϑην (for ἐϑέϑην, from OLS82,) 
ἐϑείς part. 1 ‘aor. pass. (from “Z732.) 
In the perfect active and passive, these two change the radical 
vowel into εὐ, 6. g. ) 
TEDELKOL, TEDELMON ELKO, εἴμαιυ. 

Rem. 83, The three verbs τίϑημι, ἵημε, δίδωμι have a form 
of the 1 aor. in xa wholly peculiar to themselves, as ἔϑηκα, ἦκα, 
ἔδωκα, which must be carefully distinguished from the perfect. 

Rem. 4. In the imperative of the 2 aor. some verbs, instead 
of 6, have simply ¢, 6. g. 

ϑές for ϑέϑι, ἕς for Ee, δὸς for dode. 

Rem. 5. As the termination of the 2 pers. pass. in the common 
conjugation (7, ov) had its origin in ἔσαν. ἐσὸ (see § 103 Rem. I. 1, 
2.) and as the connective vowel is dropped in the verbs in me, the 
termination of this person in these verbs is simply oae, 00, as in 
the perfect and pluperfect of the common conjugation. Accord- 
ingly we have rids-oat, ἐτίϑε-σο. ἵστα- σαι, &c. But here also 
a contraction with the radical vowel takes place, as 78m, ἐτέϑου, 
‘org, ἵστω, for ἵστασαι, ἵστασο, &c. ᾿ 

Rem. 6. The form in uvué belongs only to a few very anoma- 
Jous verbs, which derive their tenses, with the exception of the 
perfect and imperfect, from a simpler form, as δείκνυμι from 
AFIK&, σβέννυμι from SBLQ &c. and aré therefore introduc- 
ed here as defectives (see ὃ 112-6.) In order to know with ease, 
when v is long or short, it is necessary-only to compare the verb 
ἵστημι. Thus δείκνυμι has its v long, as ἕστημε its ἡ, and δείκ- 
νυμὲν has v short, as ἕσταμεν its a. Aor, 2 ἐδυμὲν has long v, 
as ἔστημεν has its penult long, &c. see δύω in the anomalous verbs. 

Rem. 7. All verbs in we increase their anomaly in this, that. 
even in the present and imperfect, in various persons and modes, 
they very often abandon the analogy of verbs in μέ, and are de- 
clined regularly like verbs in ἕω, aw, dw, that is, as contract 
verbs; and those ‘in vue like verbs in vw; retaining, however. 
the reduplication, that is, following an imaginary root, as 7/- 
@EQ, &e. | j ; 


ΦΊΟΤ] 


VERBS IN #é.—PARADIGM. 


187 


§ 107. 1. parapicm oF THE CONJUGATION ON ft. 


I place 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


Present. 


Indicative. 

5. τέϑημι ἵστημι 
τείϑης ἵστης 
τίϑηοι (ν) ἰἵστησε (ν) 
τίϑετον ἵστατον 
τίϑετον ἵστατον 

P. rideuev ἵσταμὲν 
τίϑετε ἵστατὲ 
τυϑέασι (ν) ᾿|, ἱσεᾶσι (v) 

or ; 
τεϑεῖαι (v)* 
Infinitive. 
τυϑέναι [ἑστάναι 
Participle. 

M. redeis(evros) | i ἱστάς (avros) 

Fs. τυϑεῖσα iot aoe 

N. τοϑὲν ἱσταν 

Subjunctive. 

5. τεϑώ ἱστώ 
τιϑῆς ἵστῃς 
τυϑῃ ἱστῃ 

Ὁ. ---ῆτον, ἤτον ---ἥτον, ἦτον 

P. ὠμεν,ἢτε,ὥσε | Opev,7re,wor 

Optative. . 

S. redeinr ᾿ iotainy 
ευϑείης ἱσταίης 

. τιϑείη ἱσταίη 
τυϑείητον ἱσταίητον 
τιϑειήτην ἱσταιήτην 

P. τεϑείημεν ἱσταίημεν 
τιϑείητε ἱσταίητε 
(reGsinoav) | (ἱσταίησανν) 


I cause to stand I give 
(from Θ 2:2) (from STAN) (from ZO) (from decxvvw) 


δίδωμι 
ὁὀίδως 
Gide (v) 


δίδοτον 
δίδοτον 
δίδομεν 
δίδοτε 


διδόασι (v) 
or 
διδοῦσι (v)* 


| διδόναι 


διδούς(ὀντος) 
διδοῦσα 
διδὸν͵ 


διδῶ 

διδῷς 

διδῷ 

—aror, ὦτον 
ὦμεν, ὦτε, σε 


Ἰδιδοίην 
‘| διδοίης 


διδοίη 
διδοίητον 
διδοιήτην 
διδοίημεν 
διδοίητε 
(διδυίησανῚ 


7 show 


δείκνῦμι 
δείκνυς 
δείκνυσι 
δείκνυτον 
δείκνυτον 
δείκνυμεν 
δείκνυτε 
δεικνύασε (ν) 


or 
δεικνῦσι (v)* 


| δεικνύναι 


δεικνύς (ὑντος) 
δεικνῦ Oo, 
δεικνύν 


from 
Osenvuw 


from 
δεικνύω 
/ 


* The third | person plural in aov is the Attic; the circumflexed form 


τυϑεῖσι, διδοῦσι, Osexvuot, is rather Ionic. 


171 


172 


188 VERBS IN ft.—PARADICM. [ὁ 107. 


; τ 
Of this optative there is in the dual and plural an abridged form, 
which in the 3d pers. plur. is exclusively used, as follows, viz. 


D. τυϑεῖτον ἱσταῖτον διδοῖτον 
τυϑείτην ἱσταίτην διδοίτην 
P. τυϑεῖμεν ἱσταῖμεν διδοῖμεν ᾿ 
τυϑεῖτε ἱσταῖτε διδοῖτε 
τυϑεῖεν ἱσταῖεν διδοῖεν 
Imperative. : ᾧ 
τίϑετουν ἴσταϑε, com. | δίδοϑε, δείκνυϑιε, com. 
ἕτω, &c. | torn, ar &c.| orm, &e. δείκνῦ, Vrw,&C. 
3Pl. τυϑέτωσαν ‘iorarwoay  διδότωσαν δεικνύτωσαν 
' or τὐϑέντων |or ἱστάντων | or διδόντων | or δεικνύντων 


« Imperfect. 

S. éxiPnvt ἵστηνΐ ἐδίδωνΐ ἐδείχκνυνΐ 
ἐτίϑης ἵστης ἐδίδως ἐδείκνυς 
ἐτέϑη ἵστη ἐδίδω ἐδείκνυ 

Ὦ. — -- — — 
ἐτίϑετον ἵσξατον ἐδίδοτον ἐδείκνυτον 
ἐτυϑέτην ἱστάτην ἐδιδότην ἐδεικνύτην 

P. ἐτίϑεμεν ἵσταμεν ἐδίδομεν ἐδείκνυμεν 
ἐτίϑετε ἵστατε ἐδίδοτε ἐδείκνυτε 
ἐτίϑεσαν ἵστασαν ἐδίδοσαν ἐδείκνυσαν. 

Perf. τέϑεικα ἕστηκαϊ δέδωκα from 
Plup: ἐτεϑείκειν ἑστήκειν or| ἐδεδώκειν ΔΚ 
εἱστήκειν 
Fut. ϑήσω | στήσω δώσω | from 
1 Aor. ἔϑηκα ὃ ἔστησα ἔδωκα AEIK& 


* With regard to riders see § 18. 4. 


The second person in + is lit- 


tle used in prose. Instead thereof, in the abbreviated form, ἵστη and 
δείκνυ are used ; and in the verbs declined like contracts, τίϑεν and δίδου. 


+ The singular of, this tense, with the exception of ors, is usually 
declined like the contracts, and like the form in 0@, as 

. ἐτίϑουν, εἰς, εθ. ἐδίδουν, ους, ov. ἐδείκνυον, ες, € (v). 

t With respect to the perfect and pluperfect of fornue the following 
things are to be remarked, viz. 

1. The augment ;—inasmuch as the €, which stands instead of the re- 
duplication, is aspirated, contrary to the analogy of other verbs (see ὁ 82. 


5), and the pluperfect often increases this augment by the temporal aug- 


ment é¢, ΄ at 
2. The abbreviated forms in use, instead of those of the regular conju- 


gation, which see below. 
3. The change in signification, which will also be mentioned below. 


§ From this irregular aorist in #@ (see ὁ 106 Rem. 3) no modes or par- 
ticiples are formed. 


δ᾽107.7 VERBS IN t,—PARADIGM. 


189 


- Second Aorist.* 


Indicative. 
8. ἔϑηνϊ ἕστην ἔδων 
like the ἕστης like the 
Imperf. é0TH Imperf.. 
i - | 
ἕστητον 
f ἐστήτην 
Ρ. ἕστημεν 
ἔστητε 
ἔστησαν 
Infin. ϑεῖναι στῆναι 


Part. ~ Geis, ϑεῖσα, Dev 
Subj.t oo, O75; &e. 


Opt.t ϑείην 
Imperat. (Sere) ϑές 
ϑέτω — 


. ϑέτον, ϑέτων 
ϑέτε, τωσὰν OF 
ϑέντων 


στας, στᾶσα, oray 

στῶ, orns, &c. 

σταίΐην 

orn Oe § 

στήτω 

στῆτον, στήτων- 

στῆτε, τωσαν or 
σταντῶν 


| wanting 


δοῦναι 

δούς, δοῦσα, δὸν 

δώ, dws, δῷ, &e. 

δοίην 

(dod) dos 

δότω 

doror, δότων 

δότε, τωσαν OF 
᾿δόντων 


* The 2 aor. ἔστην departs from the analogy of the imperfect and of 
the verbs in me in general, by its long vowel in the dual and plural (( 
106. 7.)—The 3d pers. pl. ἔστησαν is the same with the 3d pl. 1st aor. 
and must therefore, as their significations differ, be ascertained by the 


connexion, 


+ The singular (indic. act.) of ἔϑην, ἔδων, is very rarely used. 


1 This tense, in these modes, is declined precisely like the present, 


‘and the optative undergoes the same abbreviations in dual and plural. 


§ The imperative 077+ is in composition sometimes abbreviated, as 


παρᾶστα. 


118. 


190 VERBS IN {tl.—-PARADIGM. [ὁ 107. 
PASSIVE VOICE. 
Present. 
Indicative. 

S. τίϑεμαν ἵσταμαι donor δείκνυμαν 

τίϑεσαιν or ἵστασαν or Oidooue δείκνυσαιν 
τίϑῃ ἵστᾳ 
τίϑεται ἵσταται δίδοται δείκνυται 

Ὁ. τυϑέμεϑον | ἱστάμεϑον διδόμεϑον | δεικνύμεϑον 
τἰϑεσϑον ἵστασϑον ὀίδοσϑον δείκνυσϑον 
τίϑεσϑον ἵστασϑον δίδοσϑον | δείκνυσϑον 

P. τυϑέμεϑα | ἱστάμεϑα διδόμεϑα δεικνύμεϑο, 
τίϑεσϑε ἵστασϑε δίδοσϑε ὁεικνυσϑὲ 
τίϑενται ἵστανταῦ δίδονται δείκνυνταν 

Inf. ride0Fae ἵστασϑαν δίδοσϑαι δείκνυσθαι 
Part. τυϑέμενος ἱστάμενος διδόμενος δεικνύμενος 
Subjunctive. 

5. τιϑώμαι ἱστῶμαι διδῶμαι 
τυϑῇ ἱστῇ διδῷ 
τύϑῆται ἱστήται διδῶται 

Ὁ. τυϑωμεϑον ἱστώμεϑον διδώμεϑον from 
τυϑῆσϑον | ἱστῆσϑον διδῶσϑον δεικνύω 
τυϑήῆσϑον ἱστῆσϑον διδῶσϑον 

P, τιϑώμεθϑα | ἱστώμεϑα διδωμεϑα 
τυϑῆσϑε ἱστῆσϑε διδωσϑε 
τυϑώνταν | ἱστωνταῦ διδώνται 

Optative. 
1714 58. τιϑείμην" | toraiuny διδοίμην 
τυϑεῖο ἱσταῖο διδοῖο 
τιϑεῖτο 'ἵ' ἱσταῖτο διδοῖτο : 

Ὁ. τυϑείμεϑον | ἱσταίμεϑον | διδοίμεϑον from 
τυϑεῖσϑον | ἱσταῖσϑον διδοῖσϑον δεικνύω 
τιϑείσϑην | ἱσταίσϑην διδοίσθην “i 

P. τυϑείμεϑα ἱσταίμεϑα διδοίμεϑα 
τυϑεῖσϑε ἱσταῖσϑε διδοῖσϑε 
τυϑεῖντο ἱσταῖντο διδοῖντο 


* The subjunctive and optative are hete formed according to the strict 
In the common language and in single verbs, some irregularities, 
These irregularities consist in plac- 


rules. 
especially in the accent, take place. 


ing the accent nearer the beginning of the verb, .as τίϑωμαι, ἱσταιτ, 
and in the termination o/uyy for δξίμην, as τέϑοιτο for τυϑεῖτο. ἣ 


1 


VERBS IN #¢.——-PARADIGM. 


§ 107.] 191 
_ Imperative. 
τίϑεσο Or ἵστασο or | δίδοσο or dzixvuco 
εἰϑου ἵστω δίδου 
τύϑέσϑω δες. ἱστάσϑω &e. | διδόσϑω &c. |! δεικνύσϑω ἃς. 
: Imperfect. 
5, ΠΡΌΣ | ἱστάμην ἐδιδόμην ἐδεικνύμην 
ἐτίϑεσο or 1 ἵστασο or ἐδίδοσο or ἐδείκνυσο 
ἐτίϑου ἵἕστω ἐδίδου 
ἐτίϑετο ἵστατο ἐδίδοτο ἐδείκνυτο 
Ὁ. ἐτυϑέμεϑον | ἱστάμεϑον | ἐδιδόμεϑον | ἐδεικνύμεϑοι 
ἐτίϑεσϑον | ἵστασϑον 1 ἐδίδοσϑον | ἐδείκνυσϑον 
ἐιεϑέσϑην | ἱστασϑην ἐδιδόσϑην ἐδεικνύσϑην 
Ρ. ἐτυϑέμεϑα | ἱστάμεθα ἐδιδόμεϑα | ἐδεικνύμεϑα 
ἐτίϑεσϑε ἵστασϑε ἐδίδοσϑε ἐδείκνυσϑε 
ἐτίϑεντο ἵσταντο ἐδίδοντο ἐδείκνυντο 
Perf. τέϑειμαι ἕσταμαι δέδομαι from 
τέϑεισαι ἃς. ἕστασαι &e. δέδοσαιν &ce. | AEIKR 
Plup. ἐτεϑείμην | ἑστάμην ἐδεδόμην 


From the other modes of the perfect it is easy to form the Infini- 


tive τεϑεῖσϑαι, δεδόσθαι, Participle τεϑειμένος. 


Imperative ἕσ-- 


ταῦο. &c. "The Subjunctive and Optative are not in use. 


1 Fut. τεϑήσομαινΝ σταϑήσομοι δοϑήσομαι, from 
1 Aor. ἐσέϑην ἐστάϑην ἐδόϑην ABIKR' 
The 2d and 3d fut. and 2d aor. are wanting. 
MIDDLE VOICE, 
; 175 
1 Fut. ϑησομαεῖ στησομαι δωσομαι . from 
1 Aor. ἐδηκάμην ἑστησάμην ἐδωκάμην | ΔΕΙΚΩ 


* In τεϑήσομαι, ἐτέϑην, the τε is not to be mistaken for the redu~ 
; plicative augment. 
ed to τὲ, in consequence of # in the termination (ὁ 18.) Otherwise it 
would be €0¢9nv, ϑεϑήσομαι. 


It is the radical syllable ®¢, which however is chang- 


+ The aorists ἐϑηκάμην, ἐδωκάμην belong exclusively to the dia- 
lects. The common prose uses in the middle voice, only the 2d aorist of 
these verbs. 


110 


192 VERBS IN #t.——PARADIGM. [Ὁ 107. 
Second Aorist. 
Indicative. Re Ὲ . 
ἐϑέμην ἐσταμην — ἐδομὴν ὶ wanting.. 
(ἔϑεσο) ἔϑου &e. (é0000) ἔδου &c. 
decline according to the imperfect passive. 
Infin. ϑέσϑαι στάσϑαι - δόσϑαν 3 
Part. ϑέμενος όταμενος douevos 2 
Subj. ϑώμαι στώμαν δώμαν Ξ 
Opt. ϑείμην + | σταίμην doiuny | oR 
Imper. (ϑέσο) Gov OTAGO, OTH (do00) dov 
decline according to the present passive. ὃς 
Verbal Adjectives. 
ϑετὸς στατός“ [δοτὸς from ' 
ϑετέος στατέος 


| δοτέος AEIK&. © 


Il. Remarks on ἵστημέ. 


1 The verb ἵστημι is divided between the transitive significa- 
tion to place and the neuter to stand (δ 113. 5.) In the active voice 
the following tenses have the transitive signification, viz. Present 
ἵστημι, Imperf. ἵστην, Fut. στήσω. Aor. Ist ἔστησα. 

The following have the intransitive signification of stand, viz. 
Perfect ἕστηκα, Pluperfect-éornjxevy, 2d Aor. ἔστην. 

The passive has throughout the signification to be placed, and 
the middle signifies variously to place one’s self, to place, to erect. 

2. In addition to this, the perfect active has the signification of 
the present, and the pluperfect of the imperfect (see § 113 Rem. 2.) 


ἣ ἕστηκα I stand 
éornzew I was standing 
ἑστηκὼς “ standing &c. 


3. In this case there commonly prevails, in the dual and plural 
and in the other modes, an abbre¥iated form of the perfect and 
pluperfect, resembling the formation of the present of verbs in uz, 
ned is found also in other verbs and will be explained below 
in ὃ 110. 


* The 2d Aor. middle of orn is not found in the Greek writers, and 
is only inserted here as a guide in other verbs, 6. g. for ἐπτάμην from ἵπ- 
zoel (see among the anomalous verbs πέτομα). 


~ 


δ 107.] VERBS IN μὲ. 198 


Perf.  ‘Plur. ἕσταμεν, ἕστατε. ἑστᾶσι, 
‘Du. ἕστατον 
Pluperf. Plur. ἕσταμεν, ἕστατε, ἕστάσαν 
- c r 
Du. éoraror, ἕστατην 


Subjunce. ἑστῶ, ἧς, ἡ &c. Opt. ἑσταίην 

Imperat. ἕοταϑι, ἑστάτω ὥς. 

Infin. ἑστάναι 

Partic. (éoraws) ἑστώς, ἑστῶσα. ἑστώς. G. ἑστῶτος 


(Jon. ἑστεώς, τος) ᾿ 

It is hence apparent, that this: perfect and pluperfect, in the 
greater part of their declension, have both the formation and the 
signification of the present and imperfect. 

4. In consequence of this present signification (and because the 
future στήσω means J shall place, and στήσομαε I shall place myself,) 
there has been formed from ἕστηκα I stand, a separate anomalous 
future ἑστήξω or ἑστήξομαε I shall stand, with which may be com- 
pared the similar future of ϑνήσκω among the anomalous verbs. 


Ill. Remarks on the dialects in the verbs in με. 


1. Several of the dialectical peculiarities of the regular conju- 
gation of verbs are found also in the verbs in we. Such are the 
imperfects and second aorists in oxov, which always before this 
termination, have the short radical vowel, as imperfect τέϑεσκον. 
δίδοσκον. 2d aor. στάσκον, δόσκον. In like manner the infinitiyes 
τυϑέμεν for τυϑέναι, δόμεναι for δοῦναι &c. 

2. The Dorics use τὸ for oe, in sing. τέϑητε for τίϑησε &c. and 
in the plural, replacing also the vy which had dropped out according 
to ὃ 103 Rem. IV. 1. as τεϑέντε, ἱστάντε, διδόντι, for εἶσι, dor, οὖσι. 

3. The third pers. pl. in σαν of the imperfect and of the 2 aor. © 
act. is diminished a syllable by the Doric and epic writers, and 
ends merely in ν with a preceding short or shortened root, as ἔτε- 
ev for ἐτίϑεσαν, ἔσταν for ἔστησαν, ἔδον, ἔδυν. for ἔδοσαν. ἔδῦσαν. 

The subjunctive undergoes in the Ionic dialect a resolution or 
lengthening, as * & 

; τυϑέω, Geo, -ἕηῃς -En ἔς. for τιϑώ, Go, -ἢς, -7, KC. 
ἑστέω, στέω &c. for istw &e. 
daw, dung &c. for δῶ, δῷς ἄς. 

To which may also be added the mode of lengthening used by 

the epic poets, as ϑείω, orn &c. (see ὃ 108 Rem. Ill. 6.) 


25 


94 _ IRREGULAR vERBS.— μι. [δ 108. 


| 177 § 108. ‘£2,’ £2, anv "72. 


Among the other irregular verbs in μὲ are some small ones, - 
whose radical form is partly “#82, and_ partly "EQ and “12, and 
which are therefore easily confounded, espécially in composition, 
where the breathing is partly lost—Thus προῤεῖναι may come: 
from εἶναι and from εἶναι, and although in ἀφεῖναι and ἀπεῖναι, 
the effect of the rough and smooth breathing respectively is visi- 
ble, yet even this distinction disappears in the lonic writers, who 
do not aspirate the consonant. 

The radical form ἡ δὰ has three chief meanings, viz. 1. I send, 
2. I place, 3. I clothe ; “£82 has the signification I am ; and IR is - 


΄ 


I go. 


I." /yue send, throw, from “E22. 


This verb may be compared with τί ϑημε, from the analogy of 
which it departs but littie. The ὁ, according to § 106 Rem. 6, 
takes the place of ἃ reduplication. When the short radical vowel 
ἑ ages the hese it is susceptible of the augment in panies into 

- See § 83. 2. 
Remark. The comparison of this verb with τέϑημι is here 


necessary. Every tense and mode, therefore, which any where 
occurs, is given sin the following paradigm. 


ACTIVE VOICE. 


Indicative. 
Present. ; 
Sing. Dual. ~ Phar. 
inut, ing, ἵησι, | ἵετον, ἵετον, ἵεμεν; ete, (iegouv) 
inovv or ἱξεσι. 
Imperfect. 


inv (or ἵουν from | ἵετον, ἱέτην, | ἵεμεν, ἵετε, ἵεσαν. 


‘/EQ) 


: 


Ἂ " - 


ο 4 108.} IRREGULAR VERBS.— ἤημε. i= = Ae 
First Aorist. Perfect. Pluperfect. 
ἧκα. | εἶκα. | εἵκειν. 
: First Future. 


HOw, -εις, τῆι, | -ἕτον, τέτον, | -omer, -Ere, -ουσι-. 
Second Aorist. 
τ [4 fd Py 
ἦν, NS 1, * | ἕτον, ἕτην, ] ἕμεν, Ete, ἕσαν, or with 
. augm. εἶμεν, εἶτε, εἷσαν. 
Subjuactive. 
Present. 
c~ -“ ~ c~ e* ~ -~ ~~ 
io, ing, in, | invov inrov, | imper, inre, iwor (v)- 
: : Second Aorist. 
= Ἴ -: = τ 
ἧτον, ἧτον, | wer, ἥτε, woe (yr). 
- Optative. 
- Present. 
isiny, ising, isin | ἱείητον, ἱεετήτην, | ἱείημεν iéinre, ἱείησαν. 


Second Aorist. 


einyv, nS, ἡ | sinrov, einrny, | etnuev, εἵητε, etjoor.t 
Imperative. 
Η | _Present. | 
Sing. Dual. Plur. 
3», ον ἐν « 7 <J o cv . 
tee (com. fee, ἱέτω | ἵετον, ἱέτων, | tere, ἱέτωσαν. 
from 12.) 
Second Aorist. 
a ὧν . -, - ξ - ΓΝ 
i, ἕτω, | ἕτον, ἕτων, | ee, ἕτωσαν. 
Infinitive. 
Present. Second Aorist. 
ἱέναι. | τ εἶναι. 


* Not used in the singular, the first aorist taking its place. 


+ For which common use employs εἶμεν, εἶτε, εἶεν. 


178 


190 LRREGULAR VERBS.— Jue. [§ 108. 


Participles. 
Present. Second Aorist. 
isis, ἱεῖσα, ἱέν. | εἷς, εἶσα, ἕν. 


PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICES. 


Indicative. 


Present (Passive and Middle). 
ἵξτμαι, Oo, Tal, | μέϑον, σϑον, σϑον,  μέϑα, Oe, vr. 


Perfect (Passive and Middle). 
εἷμαιυ, εἷσαι, εἶταν | εἵμεϑον, εἶσϑον, εἶσϑον | εἵμεϑα, ciode, civtae 
179 First Aorist (Ραββίνο 
ἔϑην, or with the augment εἴϑην. 


First Aorist (Middle.) — 
Sing. - Dual. Plur. 
ἠκ-άμην, 0, ατο, | ἄμεϑον, ασϑον, ἄσϑην, | ἄμεϑα, ασϑε, aVTO. 


Second Aorist (Middle.) 
éuny, or commonly with the augment εἵμην. 


Subjunctive (Second Aorist) ὧμαν 


Imperative -- οὗ 

Infinitive --- ἕσϑαι 

Participle — ἕμενος. 
! . 


Verbal Adjectives. 


ἑτός, ἑτέος. 

Remark. This verb occurs but rarely in its simple form. It is, 
. therefore, to be remarked chiefly for the use of the preceding 
forms i in compounded verbs, as 2d aor. ἀφεῖναι, ἄφες, ἀνεῖμεν | for 
ἀνείημεν. Mid. προέσϑαι, ἀφέμενος, &e. The compound ἀφίημι 
often takes the augment inthe beginning, as ἠφίεσαν. 


> 


6 108 IRREGULAR VERBS.— ΖΣἤμαι. 197 


Il. “£2 place, “Huce sit. 
1. From this 2:2. in a transitive sense, the following forms 
only are in use, viz. 
Ξ First Aorist εἶσας ς Middle εἱσάμην, 
where the diphthong is properly an augment, but passes never- 
theless into other portions of the verb, as 
Participle , éoas, 
Future Middle εἴσομαι. 
2. Another form of the perfect passive from this root has ac- 
quired the force of an intransitive present, viz. juce I sit. 


Indicative. 7 180 
Present. 
Sing. Dual. Plur. 
> ca > « - - ε - - 
ἤμαι, σαι, ταῦ Or | ἡμέϑον, σϑον, ἡσϑον [ἡμεϑα, ἤσϑε, ἡνται. 
ἥσται, 
r Imperfect. | 
ἥμην, ἧσο, ἧτο or ἧστο,  ἥμεϑον, ἦσϑον, ἥἤσϑην, | ἤμεϑα, ἦσϑε, 
Ἃ _ | ἦντο. 
Imperative. 
Present. 
ἦσο, ἤσϑω | ἦσϑον, ἥσϑων, | node, ἤσϑωσαν. 
Infinitive. Participle. 
Present. Present. 
ἧσϑαι. | ἥμεν-ος, ἡς ον. 


Of more common use is the compound κάϑημαι, ἐκαϑήμην, 3d 


Sing. ἐκάϑητο or καϑῆστο, Inf. uc Subj. κάϑωμαι, Opt. 
καϑοίμην, κάϑοιτο. 


ΤΠ]. “Evvupe I clothe, I put on. 


This verb is declined like δείκνυμι, and forms the defective por- 
tions from the theme “ZR, see §112. 6. 


: Except in composition its use is confined to the poets. Hence 
we find 


198 IRREGULAR VERBS.—Liui am. - [ὁ 108. 


Fut. ἔσω, Zoow. Ist Aor. Zoo, (Inf. Zou,) Mid. ἑσσάμην. 
Perf. Pass. εἶμαι, εἶσαις εἵται, &c. also ἕομαι. 
Plup. 2d pers. ἕσσο, 3d pers. Zoro. 
In prose, the compound ἀμφιέννυμι is used, viz. 
Fut. ἀμφιέσω, Att. ἀμφεῶ. Ist Aor. yugisoa. 
Perf. Pass. (cugeéiuae) com. ἠμφίεσμαι, ἠμφίεσαι, ἡμφίεσται; &e. 


IV. Eiul I am, from £2. 


1. Indicative. 
Present. 
5. εἰμί, εἷς or éi, ἐστίν or ἐστί, 
D. ἐστόν, ἐστόν, 
> ᾿ : BeaAD ΄ a >_F 
P. éopuer, - ἔστε ELOLY, ξέσι. 
181 Subjunctive. 
Present. 
3 > 
5. ὦ, Ga Ss 77) 
D. ες ἥτον, ἦτον, 
53 > 
P. ὦμεν, ἦτε, ou (7). 
Optative. 
Present. : 
S. εἴην, εἴης, εἴη 
D. | εἴητον, εἰήτην, 
P. εἴημεν, εἴητε, εἴησαν OF εἶεν. 
Imperative. 
Present. t 
S. toou* , ἕστω, 
Ὁ. ἕστον, ἔστων, 
Ρ. ἔστε, ἔστωσαν ΟΥ̓ ἔστων. 


* Not to be confounded with code know, see οἶδα, § 109. 


Ὃς 


§ 108.] IRREGULAR veRBS.—Elue go. 199 ᾿ 


- Imperfect. 
5. ἦν, ἧς com. ἦσϑα (δ 116.6.) ἦν, 
By’ ἤτον, ἥστον, ἤτην, ἤστην, 
Ρ. ἥμεν, ἥτε, ἦστε, ἦσαν. ἢ 

The Future is borrowed from the Middle. 

S. ἔσομαι, ἔση or ἔσει, ἔσεται Com. ἔσται, 
Ὁ. ἐσόμεϑον, ἔσεσϑον, ἔσεσϑον, 
P. ἐσόμεϑα, ἔσεσϑε, ἔσονται. 


Infinitive present εἶναι, ζαϊ. ἔσεσϑαι. Partieiple present ὧν (Gen. 
ὄντος,) οὖσα, ὄν, fut. ἐσόμενος. a 
Verbal Adjective ἑστέου. “ 


2. Besides the future tense there is alsa borrowed from the 
middle voice the imperfect ἤμην and the imperative ἔσο. both 
of the signification of the active voice, but rarely found in the old- 
er writers. Of this imperfect the Ist pers. sing. is most in use, 
and commonly with the particle av were I, should I be, see ὃ 140. 8. 

3. The present tense εἰμί, with the exception of the second 182 
person εἶς is enclitic. It is actually subject to inclination, where 
it is the mere copula of a proposition ; but wherever it signifies 
real existence, it retains the accent. The third person singular. 
in particular, has it in that case on the first syllable, as @eo¢ ἐσ- 
tiv" ἔστι woe δοῦλος. “orev, moreover, is always accented on 
the first syllable at the beginning of a sentence, after the unac- 
cented particles οἷς, ov, εἰ, and.after τοῦτο and αλλά, when these 
words are subject to apostrophe, as οὐκ ἔστι, τοῦτ ἔστεν. When, 
however, the inclination is only obstructed (see § 14. 5), the ac- 

᾿ς cent is placed on the last syllable, as in the other parts of the 
_ present tense, as λόγος ἐστί, κακὸς δ᾽ ἐστίν, ἐσμὲν γάρ, &e. 


V. εἶμι, I go, from ᾽7Ώ.. 


Ind. Pres. S. εἶμι εἷς com. εἶ εἶσι (v) 
dD. -- ἔτον ἔτον 
P. ἔμεν ἔτε ‘aoe (v) 


Subjunc. ἴω. Opt. ἴοιμε or toiny 

Imperat. (90, ἴτω &c. 3. pl. ἔσωσαν or ἰόντων 

Infin. ἰέναι ᾿ 

Ρατί. ἰών (with the accent always on the last sylla- 
ble, as other verbs in the Part. 2d Aor.) 


- 


189 


200 


IRREGULAR VERBS.—@yut. 


[Ὁ 109. 


Imperf. S. 


¥ 


» it Wee εἰ 
new com. Hie or He 


ἥξεις 


vw ΕΣ 
Heb OY HELV 
ἐ ε 


ἤευτον OF ἦτον 
yeitny or ἥτην 
ἤειμεν OF ἦμεν 
ἤξιτε OF ἦτε ἔ ὲὸ 
ἤεσαν 


The middle, with the signification of to hurry, is also only us- 


ed in the present and imperfect, Viz. ἔεμαι, ἐέμην, and is declined 


like ἵεμαι, from injue. 


Rem. 1. 
occur, and it is therefore a true defective. 


Verbal Adjectives ἐξόν, iréov, and ἐτητέον. 


In the common dialect no other parts of this verb 


It is to be noted, how- 


ever, ‘that according to usage, the preceding active forms belong 
to the anomalous verb ἔργομαι, 7A Mor, (see the list of anomalous 
verbs,) of which they supply the place of several obsolete tenses. 
With respect to the present indicative eius, the fol- 
_ lowing rule must be carefully noted, viz. 


Rem. 2. 


The Present εἶμι has the force of the Future I wit co. 


᾿ 


It accordingly takes the place of the rarer form ἐλεύδομαν (see 
the anomalous ἔρχομαι). 
The other modes of éiué may be used either as present or fu- 


ture. 


Rem. 3. The epic language has also fut. εἴσομαι, Ist aor. εἰσά- 
μὴν, the same as the corresponding tenses from «dw (see ide 
§ 109), with which, therefore, they must not be confounded. 


§ 109. OTHER IRREGULAR VERBS IN μέ. 
I. Φημὶ I say, from © AL. 
Ind. Pres. S. φημὶ φὴς φησί (νὴ) 
Dp. ὡς gator φατὸν 
P. φαμέν φατέ φασί (v) 
Subj. φῶ Opt. φαίην 


Infin. 


φάναι Part. pac 


Imperat. padi 


§ 109.] IRREGULAR VERBS.— Kia. Οἶδα. 201 


Impf. 8. ἔφην οὐ ἔφης com. ἔφησϑα ἔφη 
: D. — ἔφατον ἐφάτην z 
P. ἔφαμεν ἔφατε ἔφασαν 


Fut. φήσω. Aor. Ist ἔφησα. 

The middle φάσϑαε, ἐφάμην, isalso used; and, in a Passive ac- 

ceptation, some perfect tenses, as πεφάσϑω be it satd, πεφασμένος. 
Verbal adjectives gatos, φατέος. 

Rem. 1. The present indicative, with the exception of φής, is 
subject to inclination, see § 14.3. 

Rem. 2. This verb, like the foregoing, is is a defective, which in 
use combines with the anomalous verb εἰπεῖν, and forms a whole | 
with the tenses of the latter. ᾿ : 

Rem. 3. The single tenses of this verb are arranged and nam- 
ed above, according to their formation. - In practice, however, it 
is to be observed, that the imperfect ἔφην is usually a genuine 
aorist, and synonymous with εἶπον. Τὸ this ἔφην is conformed 
the infinitive gavac, which is always a preterite.* 

Rem. 4. By apheresis the following forms occur in the com- 184. 
mon language, viz. nui 1 Say, inquam, and in the imperfect ἦν, ἢ 
for ἔφην, ἔφη, or φῆν, φῆ, in the phrases ἦν 0 ἐγὼ said I, ἢ i 
ὅς said he. 

IT. jane I lie, from KEQ. 


Pres. zéiuat, κεῖσαι, κεῖται &c. 3. pl. xEwtar 
Inf. κεῖσϑαι. Part. κείμενος. Imperat. κεῖσο ὧς. 
Subj. κέωμαι, κέῃη &c. Opt. xeotunv 
Imperf. éxeiuny, ἔκεισο, ἕκειτο Kc. 
Fut. κείσομαι Ye 
Compound καταάχεέμαι, κατάκεισο &c. Inf. κατακεῖσθαι: 


ΠῚ. Oida I-know, from LIAL. 


1. "The ancient verb εἴδω properly signifies I see ; a few of its 
tenses only signify J know. As these latter have several other 
anomalies, they are here considered separately. The significa- 
tion may be seen in the list of anomalous verbs below, under the 

~ head of εἴδω. 


_* That is to say, where a direct proposition, as ἔφη 0 “Tlegiadsie 
Pericles said, is converted into an indirect, as φάναιτὸν Περικλέα, then 
paves corresponds with ἔφη. Whenever a present infinitive is requisite, 
resort is had to λέγεον or φάσκειν. 


9 


- 


185 


202 | IRREGULAR VERBS.—Oida. Ὁ 5 110. 


2. Strictly speaking, οἶδα is the second perfect from εἴδω (as 
ἔουκα, Ion. οἶκα, from εἴκων) ; but acquires with the signification 
know, the force of the present tense, as the pluperfect does that of 
the imperfect (δ 113. 2.) In the regular declension of οἶδα the 
second person οἶδας, and the whole plural οἴδαμεν, οἴδατε, οἴδασι, 
are but little used. In the place of οἶδας is used οἶσϑα, abbrevi- 
ated from the ancient form οἴδασϑα (see ὃ 103 Rem. IV. 6); for 
the other part see the Rem. below. 

Perf. (Present) 8. οἶδα I know, οἶσϑα οἶδε (v) 


D. — ἔστον ἴστον 
P. ἴσμεν ἴστε. ἴσασι (ν) 
᾿ 


Inf. εἰδέναν Part. εἰδώς 
Sub. εἰδῶ Opt. εἰδείην 
' Imperat. to01,* ἴστω &c. 
Pi~perf. (Imperf.) 5. dew I knew 
ἤδεις, ἤδεισϑα 
ἤδει 
Wega P. ἤδειμεν or ἦσμεν 
ne: NOELTE OF ἦστε 
ἤδεσαᾶν OF ἦσαν 
Future εἴσομαν (more rarely εὐδήσωλν I shall know. 
Verbal adjective ἱστέον. ὁ 
The aorist and the real perfect are supplied from γιγνώσκω. 


Remark: Instead of ἔσμεν the Ionics say ‘duer, from which it is 
apparent that all the forms ἔδμεν or ἔσμεν (ὃ 23. 2) tore &c. are 
formed by syncope from οἴδαμεν, οἴδατε &c. (see § 110 Rem. 3.) 
In the Doric dialect there is a peculiar present ἔσημν (dooce) which 
has the same origin, but is rare and very defective.f 


§ 110. OF ANOMALY.—SYNCOPE AND METATHESIS. 


1. One species of anomaly in verbs arises from Syncope. In 
some verbs this takes place in the radical portion, from which the 


* Not to be confounded with éo@v from εἰμί, 


+ It is to be observed that the lexicons commonly exhibit all these 
tenses under the head of the present 20m, eid, and ἔσημι. 


§ 110.] VERBS.—ANOMALY. 203 


ΞΕῪΝ is deopped; as πετάσω; perf. pass. πέπταμαι. See the anom- 
alous verb πέταννυμε. 


Rem. 1. In some verbs the 2d Aorist is formed in this manner 
alone, as πέτομαι: (Imperf. ἐπετόμην), Aor. ἐπτόμην. See below 
ἐγείρω. 


2. The most common syncope is that of the connective vowel. 
To this class belong all the verbs in uz, as we have seen above. 
Some particular cases require se parate remark here. 


Rem. 2. A few verbs have such a syncope only in some parts 
of the present and imperfect. Most complete is χεῖμαν (for κέομαι, 
κείομαι.) Also the first person present and imperfect of οἶμαι, 
ᾧμην, for οἴομαι, wounv. See also Aovw below. 

Rem. 3. In the perfect and pluperfect, shorter forms are some- 
times produced by syncope ; and when such perfects have the sig- 


nification of the present (ὃ 113. 2) they have also an impera- 


tive in Ov, as from κράζω 


Perf. χέκραγα, Ist plur. κεχράγαμεν, 
Pluperf. “π--ἐκεκράγειμεν; SYNC. ἐκέχραγμεν, κέκραγμεν, 
Imperat. κέκραχϑε. 

Here too may be mentioned the example already referred to, 
of the shorter forms derived from οἶδα, which had their origin in 
the abbreviation of the diphthong, as iOuev, ἴσμεν, and their deri- 
vatives ἔστε, ode, ἦσμεν for 7demuev-&c. The poetical dialect 
furnishes also several examples. This sort.of abbreviation is very 
natural when the characteristic of the verb is a vowel, as δεέδεα 
(which is another form or a second perfect from δέδοικα") makes 
the following, viz. 


Perf. Plur. δέδιμεν, δέδιτε (for δεδίαμεν, τε) 
ΡΙυροτγί.---ἐδέδιμεν, ἐδέδιτε (for ἐδεδίειμεν, τε) 
Imperat. δέδιϑε. 


Rem. 4. Hence is to be explained the transition of some very 
common perfects into the formation of those in wz, as follows. In 
some perfects in χὰ of verbs in aw, there is assumed a simpler 
form, or a second perfect, in aa, several examples of which are 
actually preserved in the epic dialect,f and this is then in most ter- 
minations syncopated in the manner shown above. Thus tiaw, 
τέτληκα (τέτλαα.) Plur. τετλάαμεν, sync. τέτλαμεν (with short a.) 
Infin. τετλαέναι, syne. τετλάναι (with short a). As this coincides 


— 


* See the anomalous, verb ZE/82. * 


+ As βεβάδσι, BeBauwe, for βεβήκδσι, βεβηκὼς, from the anoma- 
lous verb Paiva. 


186 


; 


204 VERBS.—ANOMALY. __ [§ 110. 


_ exactly with ἕσταμεν, ἱστάναι, the greater part of the other forms 
of the verbs in μὲ are found, as well as these perfects, in the yerbs 
in question. E.g. | 
Perf. Plur. τέσλαμεν, τέτλατε, τετλᾶσι (v) 
Ὁ. τέτλατον ‘, 
Pluperf. Plur. ἐτέτλαμεν, ἐτέτλατε, ἐτέτλασαν 
" . ἐτέλατον. ἐτετλάτην. ; 
Infin. τετλάναι (short «) 
Imperat. τέτλαϑι; τετλάτω &e. 
Opt. τετλαίην. 

The Subj. of this verb in this form is wanting; see instead of 
‘it above (on ἕστηκα in Rem. II. under foryuc) the subjunctive | 
ἑστῷ, ἧς, ἢ &c. 

The participle alone is not formed upon the analogy of verbs 
in μὲς but ends in ὡς, contracted from «wg, so that the masculine 
and neuter are the same, viz. aws¢ and ads, G. aoros, contr. ὡς, 
tos, and this contracted form has a feminine peculiar to itself in 
wou, as from βέβηκα (see anomalous verbs βαένω) Particip. βεβη-. 
HWS, υἷα; OS . 

βεβως, βεβῶσα, βεβὼς 
G. βεβωτος. 


Of the perfects governed by these laws, which are chiefly 
these four, viz. τέσληχα, τέϑνηκα, βέβηκα, ἕστηκα. thejsingular 
alone in the perfect and pluperfect is used in the regular form 
(τέτληκα, ας, ὃς ἐτετλήκειν, ees, ev), while all the other parts have 
these abridged forms, which are more used than the regular forms. 

Rem. 5. Many verbs form by syncope an aorist in », ora 2d 
aorist, which distinguishes itself from the imperfect, principally 
by the absence of the connective vowel, and in respect to the ra- 
dical vowel and its quantity, follows exactly the first perfect or 
perfect passive, as . 

φύω (perf. πέφυκα) Imperf. ἔψυον, 2d Aor. ἔφυν (long υ). 
Brow (βεβίωκα) —(éfioov) ἐβίουν. 2d Aor. ἐβίων. 

The greater part, however, of the aorists of this class occur 
only in very anomalous verbs, whose imperfects admit no compari- 
son therewith. In the other modes and participles they coincide 
with the formation in us, except that the vowel and its quantity 
are quite variable, and in consequence every such aorist requires 
to be learned separately, from the list of anomalous verbs. See 
particularly the verbs βαέίνω, διόράσκω, δύω, γεγνώσκω, πέτομαι, 
φϑανω. 


* See the anomalous T1142, ϑνήσκω, βαίνω, and ἵστημι above: 


§ 111.] VERBS.——ANOMALY. 206. 


Rem. 6. In the epic language there are also syncopated aorists 
in the passive voice in μὴν, 60, τὸ, as λύω, ἔλυτο (with short v), 
_ even when the characteristic of the verb is a consonant, as δέχομαι 
ἐδέγμην, ἔδεκτο Kc. 

3. The metathesis of a vowel with a liquid (δ 19. 2) alters the 
root of a verb, in the midst of its inflection. This, however, rare- 
ly occurs. See the anomalous verbs δέρκω, πέρϑω, and also ϑνή- 
σχω, πορεῖν. “ 


§ 111. ANOMALIES FROM DOUBLE THEMES. 


1. By far the greater part of the anomaly in verbs, as in the 
declension of nouns, consists in twofold forms and variety of themes, 
which has been already treated above in §92. Besides the cases 
there quoted, and which may be reckoned among the most com- 
mon changes of conjugation, there is a great number, where the 
new form departs much farther from the regular form, commonly 
without the slightest change of signification. 

2. Often, moreover, the two forms are jointly in use, and many, 
as λείπω and λεμπάνω I leave, κτείνω and χτίννυμι 1 slay, are 
found both ways in the best prose writers. Often, however, the 
one form will belong rather than another to a certain dialect, (as 
ἀγενέω for ἄγω I lead, φυγγάνω for φεύγω I fly are more in use 
with the lonics;) or has remained in use solely with the poets, 
-among which are to be reckoned most of the epic forms. 

3. Commonly the new form, created by lengthening the sim- 
pler, does not extend beyond the present or imperfect, see § 92. 8. 
if the simple form in these tenses is driven wholly out of use by 
the latter form, the verb is hereby constituted anomalous ; inas- 
much as the other tenses are then derived from a verb not in use, 
as Baivo, ἔβαινον, fut. βήσομαε, perf. βέβηκα, &c. from BAL. 


Rem. 1. Often several such different forms are in use together, 
so that a verb, in the course of its declension, will have a mixture 
from three or even more sources. Thus from the root ITH@22 
_ or IEA@S2 exists only the aorist ἔπαϑον. Another form, strength- 
ened by », viz. ENO, from which comes the perfect πέπονϑα 
&c. expelled the simpler form frora use, but has, in its turn, yield- 
ed in the present and imperfect to πάσχω. which, in the lexicons, 


187 


188 


206 VERBS.—ANOMALY. [§ 112. 


is placed at the head of the whole verb; From ΠΑ" ΔΩ is form- 
ed πετάσω &c. but in the perfect pass. the syncopated form πέπτα- 
μαι, and in the present and imperfect, nothing but the increased 
form metavvupe is used, &c. 

Rem. 2. Finally there are some verbs, which form single tenses 
from roots wholly diverse, whose present is more or less obsolete, 
as in Latin στο, ἐμ, latum. Such, particularly, in Greek are Hive, 
εἰπεῖν, ἔρχομαι, ἐσϑίω, ὅράω, τρέχω. φέρω, which are to be con- 
sulted in the list of anomalous verbs. 


§ 112. OTHER ANOMALIES. 


1. Many new forms of verbs are of such a kind, that few or no 
examples precisely similar of such a change in the root are extant 
in the UE ORES 5 as the example given above of ayovéw from & a7 0), 
and πάσχω from ITEN@R, and among those. quoted below as 
anomalous, Zod from ἔδω, ἐλαύνω from ἐλάω, &c. Most, how- 
ever, stand in some visible analogy with others, and must there- 


fore be comprehended in one survey, to be more easily remem- 
bered. 


Norr. When, in the following examples, two forms are con- 
nected by and, this word shows that both are in use; where, how- 
ever, the word from stands, the latter form is either wholly obso- 
lete, and only to be recognised in the tenses formed from it, or 
belongs only to the ancient poets. 

2. One of the easiest changes is ὦ into ἕω or aw Gia, ὧν); 
as δίπτω and ῥιπτέω' κτυπέω from K ΤΎΠΙ (thence ἔκτυπον), 

δαμάω fron AEM (thence ἔδαμον). 

As often, therefore, as the regular inflection of a verb was attend- 
ed with any difficulty, or even productive of indistinctness or want 
of euphony, it was inflected as if the present ended in ἕω, e. g. 

ἕψω, fut. ἑψήσω" αὔξω, αὐξήσω" μένω, μεμένηκα" 

τύπτω, τύψω and τυπτήσω" μέλλω, μελλήσω. - 

3. The verbs in ὦ pure sometimes take the termination oxo, 
as γηράω and γηράσχω, γιγνώσκω from INOR.— 
στερέω and στερίσκω. 


~ 


δ 112.] VERBS.— ANOMALY. 207 


4. Before the termination, v is sometimes interposed, a8 δάκνω 
from AAK®, whence ἔδακον. See also below τέμνω and κάμνω. 

By this process, from ἰω and vw, come ‘va and ὕγω; as πίνω 
‘from THQ, τίω and tivw, ϑύω and Svyw,—and from aw come 
ἄνω and aivw, as φϑάνω from DO AR, βαίνω from BAS2.. 

δ. Trisyllables and polysyliables in ἄνω and αἰνῶ have, for the 
most part, as a radical form a theme in w, which at the same time 
forms some tenses as from ἕω, viz. 


Blasrave from BAAD TQ, 2d Aor. ἔβλαστον, Fut. βλαστήσω. 


ὀλισϑάνω and ὀλισϑαίνω, 2d Aor. ὥλεσϑον, Fut. ὀλεσϑήσω. 


Those in ἄνω are accustomed to insert a nasal in the radical syl- 
lable of the word, but also to shorten the radical vowel, if it be 
long, in the following manner, viz. | 

λείπω and λιμπάνω, φεύγω and φυγγάνω, λήϑω and λανϑάνω. 
See also below ϑιγγάνω, λαμβάνω, λαγχάνω, μανϑάνω; πυνϑάνο- 
μαι, τυγχάνω. 

ΒΈΜΑΒΚ on nos. 4 and 5. The termination ἄνω has the penult 
short ; ‘yo and iv, on the other hand, have it long, both with very 
few exceptions. 

6. A very common change is also ὦ into vvus,* as δείχνυμι 
from JE/K2, whence δείξω, &c. See below ἄγνυμε, ὄρνυμε, 
ὁμόργνυμες ζεύγνυμι. 
When a vowel precedes this termination, the ν is usually 
doubled, and ὁ is changed into a, 6. δ΄. 

κρεμάω and κρεμάννυμιε, see below χκεράννυμε; πετάνγνυμε, 

. σχεδάννυμι,---ζέω and ζέννυμε, see below κορέννυμες 
σβέννυμι, στορέννυμι.----χόω and χώννυμε, see below 
ζώννυμι, ῥώννυμι, στρώννυμε, χρώννυμε. 

7. Several also, like the verbs in ws, have ἃ reduplication in 


189 


the present, as γεγνώσκω from NOX, whence γνώσομαι. So also : 


μεμνήσκω, πιπράσκω, &c. In like manner μένω and μέμνω, πέπ- 
tw from TET, γίγνομαι from TENA. 


* See above ὁ 106 Rem. 6. 


190 


208 VERBS.—ANOMALY. 3 [δ 118. 


8. Sometimes from one-of the tenses a new theme is formed, 
and the derivations from this occur partly as anomalies in the com- 
mon dialect, and partly, and this more commonly, are used as po- 
etical peculiarities; such as the Fut. ἑστήξω, (see above the 4th 
remark to fornuc,) and τεϑνήξω (see Ovnoxw,) from ἕστηκα and 
τέϑνηκα, derived as from present tenses. Imperative οἶσε as from 
Fut. οἴσω (see φέρω.) 

Particularly does the 2d Aor. occasion in some verbs a new for- 
mation as from ¢w,—as well the 2d Aor. active on account of its in-- 
finitive in εἶν, as the 2d Aor. passive when it has an active signifi- 
cation, by the ending ην. Examples of the former are several 
anomalous verbs belonging to no. 5 above, as watery, tt ΨΕῚ 
μαϑήσομαι; μεμάϑηκα, τετύχηκα. Οἵ the ae | is'yaiow, ἐχάρην, 
-τ- χεχάρηκα, κεχάρημαί. 


ᾧ 113. ANOMALY IN SIGNIFICATION. 


1. This whole subject belongs properly to the Syntax, where 


_ we must treat of the signification of the several forms of the con- 


jugations, which cannot be separated from the rules respecting the 
connection of words. ‘Those cases only can here be enumerat- 
ed, in which the variation in signification is in certain verbs so 
common, that this anomaly is to be observed as belonging to the_ 
formation itself, as in Latin odi ; hortor ; audeo, ausus sum. Cases 
of this kind are in Greek far more numerous and more various. 
2. The perfect sometimes has the force of the present. The 
transition from the former tense to the latter, may be rendered 
conceivable, by reflecting, that in the perfect tense the mind rests 
often not so much on the past action, as on the present state or 
condition that resulted from it. Thus τέϑνηκα signifies properly 
I have died ; but regarding the consequent state as permanent, it 
signifies J am dead, and is accordingly a present tense. In some 
other verbs, the original perfect was still farther lost, as xraouae 
I acquire, in ‘the perfect χέχτημαν I have acquired. The conse- 
quence of acquisition is possession, and thus κέχτημοαν came to sig- 
nify simply J possess, without any thought of a past acquisition. 


§ 113.] _ IRREGULAR CONJUGATION. 209 


In every such case, it is to be understood that the “pluperfect is an 
~ Rem. 1. Sometimes the perfect is to be understood, like the 
middle voice, reflectively. [π this case, it becomes a present intran- 
sitive, as in the verb ἴστημε I place, ἕστηκα I have placed ; reflec- 
tively I have placed myself, i. e. I stand. 

Rem. 2. It easily happens, moreover, where the ideas are near 
akin, that the present tense itself assumes the signification of the 
perfect made present in this manner, or the reverse ; whereby the 


present and perfect often come to have the same meaning, es- - 


pecially in the poets, as μέλει it goes to the heart, μέμηλε it went to 
the heart, that is, I take an interest ; hence both mean I feel interest- 
ed, I care for. Azguw I perceive, δέδορκα I have perceived, that is, 
_ Fsee. It is particularly common that the perfect becomes present 
in verbs, which signify to sound, to call, as κέκρᾶγα I scream, τοίξω 
and τέτριγα I hiss. 2a 

_ 3. To the anomaly of signification belongs a departure from 
the signification of the voice. The most prominent case of this is 
-that of the deponent verbs, or those which, with a passive or mid- 
dle form, have an active signification. This irregularity is very 
common in Greek, as is apparent from the lists of verbs already 
- given.. , See 
τς Rem. 8. Several deponents of the middle voice are neverthe- 
less used in the perfect passive in a,passive sense, and form in ad- 
dition to this tense only a Ist Aor. passive ; see above, in the list 
of baryton verbs, βεάζομαι, δέχομαι, ἐργαζομαε. 


Future Middle. 


4. Yery common is the case of verbs in the actiye voice, which - 


make little or no use of the future active, and employ instead the 
future middle, which then has the transitive or intransitive signi- 
fication connected with the active voice ; and of such a verb the 
remainder of the middle voice, with its appropriate signification, is 
usually not employed. This occurs in several of the most familiar 
verbs, as ἀκούω I hear, ἀκούσομαι (never axovow) I shall hear. 
Examples also of this are furnished above in the lists of baryton 
and contract verbs. See also the 8th remark before the first of 
these lists. : 

Rem. 4. Very often the future middle is used for the future 


passive, § 136. 3. 
27 


19] 


192 


210 ANOMALOUS VERBS. [δ 114. 


+ 


5. Under the head of anomaly in signification, must also be reck- 
oned the distinction of causative and immediate signification. This 
is commonly expressed by different verbs, of which the one is de- 
rived in part from the other. In all Janguages, however, and par- 
ticularly in Greek, there are verbs, which express in one form an 
action both directly and as oc¢asioned or caused. Thus gatvecy 
signifies immediately to appear, and causatively io make appear, 
that is, to show. Kodilecy, in like manner, signifies to sit and to 
set. In the older dialect this appears to have been very common, 
and thence it may be accounted for, that several verbs have one 
of these significations in one part, and one in another, and are 
hence accounted anomalous, as we have seen above in ἵστημε- 


§ 114. LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. 


Nore 1. All wholly obsolete themes, which are assumed merely 
for the explanation of those in actual use, are here, as throughout 
this grammar, printed in capital letters. Every theme, on the oth- 
er hand, in actual use, is given in the common character. It is to 
be observed of those obsolete themes, moreover, which are not in 
every instance set down, but are occasionally left to the attentive 
student to supply, that they are merely formed by grammarians . 
from analogy, and are not regarded as having any existence his- 
torically in the language. 

2. To facilitate the use of the list, these obsolete themes, 
where it is requisite, are inserted alphabetically i in the table. Sup- 
posing then, that the learner is able to discover the regular theme 
of the verbs, which occur in reading, according to the general 
rules, this theme is found in its alphabetical place, with reference 
to the form in common use. Thus ἐπράϑην ἰδ derived from 
TIP AQ, and this in the list refers to πέπρασκω. 

Yet the merely apparent themes, which are formed by syncope 
or metathesis, are given only by their first letters ; thus βέβληκα 
by BA which refers to βάλλω. 

3. Of every verb, not the anomalous forms only are given, 
but all the forms in use, except such as are of themselves appar- 
ent. Here the same remark is to be made, as on occasion of the 
first catalogue of the regular verbs, note 2. 

4. Whatever signification, active, passive, middle, or intransi- 
tive, prevails in the present tense, the same extends also to every 
other tense, where pass. or mid. or some other indication is not ὦ 
specially given. Thus when in βούλομαν the future βουλήσομαι 


4114.] LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. ᾿ 211 


_ is borrowed FOES the middle, and the aor. ἠβουλήϑην hie the pas- 
sive, we are to understand, that only these.two forms occur in the 
signification which βούλομαι has in the present, and consequently 

-that no aorist ἡἠβουλησάμην and no fature βουληϑήσομαι is in-use. 


Last of anomalous ois 
A. 
ἄγαμαι admire, Pres. and Imperf. like ἵσταμαι, fat. ἀγάσομαε, 
aor. ἤγάσϑην. 
ἄγνυμε break, forms from ATR f. ἄξω &c. (see § 112. 6.) and 
has commonly the syllabic augment, § 83 Rem. 6. Aor. ἔαξα, aor. 
pass. ἐάγην (short αὐ. The 2d od tg éaya has the passive signifi- 
cation, am. broken. 
ἀγορεύω see εἰπεῖν. 
ἄγω lead, has ἃ Peder oes in the 2d aor. ἤγαγον, ἀγαγεῖν &c. 
(see §84 Rem. 3. )—Perf. 7 ἦχα and with an anomalous redaplica tics, 
ἀγήοχα. Perf. pass. ἤγμαι.--- ΜΠ). 
αἰνέω praise, f. αἰνέσω &c.—Perf. pass. “ἤνημαι, but Ist aor. 
pass. ἡνέϑην (see ὃ 95 Rem. 3.) 
᾿ αἱρέω take, αἱρήσω---ἠρέϑην (see § 95 Rem. 3.)—Aor. act. 
εἶλον, ἑλεῖν &c. from “EAR.—MID. The Ionics have in the per- 
fect a peculiar reduplication ἀραίρηκα, ἀραίρημαι, with the smooth 
breathing. 
αἰσϑάνομαι perceive, f. αἰσϑήσομαν &c.—Aor. ἐσϑύμην (see § 
112. 5) 
ἀλέξω avert, f. ἀλεξήσω (see ὃ 112. 2.) Aor. Mid. ἀλέξασϑαν 
(from 4A EK.) 
ἀλέω or ἀλήϑω grind, f. ἀλέσω (ahd) perf. pass. ἀλήλεσμαι.. 
ahioxouac* am captured, forms its tenses from “4402, as fol- 
lows, fat. ἁλώσομαι and (with active form but passive meaning) 
syncop. Aor. (§ 110 Rem. 5,) ἥλων, better ἑάλων (pl. ἑάλωμεν, 
&c.) Inf. ἁλῶναι, Subj. ἁλώ, ὡς, &c- Opt. adoiny, Part. ἁλούς. 
Perf. (in like manner with passive meaning;) ἥλωκα, ἑάλωκα.--- 
᾿Αναλίσκω see in its order. 


- 


* The active of this verb never occurs, but instead of it always αἱρεῖν. 


198 


0 


4 


ors}. LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. _ [§ 114. ° 


ἁμαρτάνω am frail, err, ἁμαρτήσομαιε. Perf. -ηκα.-- ον. 7j- — 


“waotov. (See § 112. 5.). 


ἀμβλίσκω. miscarry, fut. salon &e. Ass auBhow. — 

ἀμπέχω and ἀμπισχνοῦμαι, see below in ἔχω. 

ἀμφιέννυμι, AM@IER, see above in ἕννυμε, § 108. "Π. 

ἀναίνομαι, see the list of regular verbs. 

ἀναλίσκω consume, expend, forms its tenses-from. avéhow. With 
the Attics it has no augment, as ἀνάχωσα. Tn other dialects it is 
alternately ἀνήλωσα and ἤνάλωσα, and the same in the perfect. 

ἀνοίγω or ἀνοίγνυμι, see οἴγω. ; 

ἀρέσκω satisfy, please, Fut. ἀρέσω &c. Perf. Pass. ἤρεσμαι.-Μ|Ώ.. 

APS (fit) Fut. agow, 2d Aor. 7eag0v.—Perf. agaga, with 
present signification. Ὁ ee 

αὔξω and αὐξάνω increase, Fut. αὐξήσω (see'§ 112. 2..\—PASS: 
with Fut. Mid. means increase intransitively. ὦ 

ἄχϑομαι am indignant, ἀχϑέσομαι, ἡχϑέσϑην. 

8. mitre 

βαίνω go, Fut. βήσομαι, Perf. βέβηκα, 2d Aor. ἔβην like ἔστην, 
accordingly also ἔβημεν, βῆναν BHO βήτω" βαίην, Go. Some of 
the compounds have also a passive, as παραβαίνω I transgress, Pert. 
Pass. παραβέβαμαι, Aor. Pass. παρεβαϑὴν. Verbal Adjective 
βατός.---- ΑἸ] these forms come from #4, and conform entirely 
to ἵστημι, except in the Present—The abbreviated forms of the 
Perfect, as βεβᾶσι, βεβώς, (see § 110 Rem. 4,) are in this verb 
exclusively poetical. bd | ; ι 

This verb has with the lonics also the causative signification te 
bring. This signification is exclusive in the Fut. Act. βήσω and 
the ist Aor. ἔϑησα. See also ὃ 113. 5. 

βάλλω throw, Fut. βαλῶ, sometimes also βαλλήσω (δ 119. 2.) 
Aor. ἔβαλον, Perf. βέβληκα, 1st Aor. Pass. set ἐν οὖν 110. 
i.—MID. iF, 


. ᾿ . “ 
* Shortened in composition, as κατάβα. 
‘ \ 


+ 


ᾧ 114.) LIST OF ANOMALOUS:VERBS. __ 213 


᾿ 


8.42, see βαίνω. - Ρ fos 

κι from BPO, Fut. βρώσω, (ἀρώσομαιρ &c: Aor. 
éBomv. See § 110 Rem. 5. 

Brom live, Fut. βεώσομαι, ist Aor. ἐβίωσα and 2d Aor. ἐβίων, ᾿ 
of which, for the most part, the other modes only are in use, as 
βιῶναι, Part. βιούς, Opt. βεῴην. See § 110 Rem. 5.—MID. 

BA—see βάλλω. 

βλαστάνω sprout, βλαστήσω, ἔβλαστον. See §112 Rem. 5..." 

βόσκω feed, Ἑαϊ. ϑοσκήσω, &c. See § 112. 2. 

βούλομαι will, βουλήσομαε, Perf. βεβούλημαι, Aor. ἐβουλήϑην, 
ἠθουλήϑην. With respect to the augment, see § 82 Rem. 3. 

BPO—see βιβρώσκω. 


1. 


γαμέω marry, Fut. γαμέσω, Att. γαμῶ.---ΑοΥ. ἔγημα, γῆμαι; δια. 
from AMR. Perf. γεγάμηκα, &c-—PASS. with Fut. Mid. take 
as husband, marry. 
_ TENS. To this root, which corresponds with the Latia gigno 
genui, belong two significations; the causative beget, and the im- 
mediate or intransitive am born, become. The voices are anoma- 
lously mingled. Of the Active nothing but the Perfect. γέγονα is 
in use ; all the rest of either signification belongs to the medio- 
passive voice. 'The whole, as found in actual use, may be reduc 
_ ed to a twofold present as follows, viz. 

1) γείνομαν has only the signification of birth, (poetically 
in the present tense,) am born. The Aor. hipaa is used 
transitively, beget, bear. 

2) γίγνομαι (ancient and Attic; more recently γίνομαι.) Fut. 
γένήσομαι, Aor. ἐγενόμην, Perf. γεγένημαι, or (in the active 
voice) γέγονα. All these’ parts of the verb signify-intransitively 195 
born, or simply become, fiert. To these unites itself the signifi-. 
cation of simply to be, since ἐγενόμην and γέγονα are also used 
as preterites to εἶναι, 


γιγνώσκω (ancient and Attic; more recently yevaoxm,) know, 
from NO, Fut. γνώσομαι, Aor. ἔγνων, Plur. ἔγνωμεν, ὅς. Inf. 


"τ 


214 LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. 7 [§ 114. 


_ 


᾿γνώναι. Imp. γνῶϑι, γνώτω, &c. Optyvoiny. Part. A, See 
δ 110 Rem. 5.—Perf. ἔγνωκα, Pass. ἐγνώσμαι. | 


A; . 
δάκνω bite, from AHK, Fut. δήξομαι, Perf. —— ἄς, Aor. 
ἔδακον. See § 112. 4 
δαμάω, see under δέμω. 
- δαρϑάνω sleep, Fut. δαρϑήσομαι, Perf. Bedeig Onna, Aor. ἔδαρ- 
ϑον. See δ112. 5. 
δεῖ. see δέω. 
δείκνυμι show, Fut. δείξω, &c. See ὃ 107. § 112. 6. _MID. 
AEIQ£ Epic diw. From this ancient present is derived the 
Ist Perf. δέδοικα (see 1st and 2d Perf. ὃ 91 Rem. 1.) and the 2d 
Perf. δέδια (short v), both of which have the force of the Pres. 7 
fear. From δέδια are ‘derived the syncopated forms δέδιμεν, δέδι- 
τε, ἐδέδισαν, and. an Imper. δέδυϑι. See § 110 Rem. 3.—Fut. δείσο- 
μαι, Aor. ἔδεισα. : 
δέμω build, Aor. ἐδειμα, Perf. δέδμηκα. Compare § 110. 1. and 
§112.2——MID. The same theme furnishes tenses also to da- 
mow tame, Aor. ἔδαμον, Perf. δέδμηκα, Aor. Pass. ἐδάμην and 
ἐδμήϑην. 


᾽ 


. δέρκω, commonly Beouousts or iBone, see, regard, Are ἔδρα. 
κον, see § 96 Rem. 4, also ἐδοάκην and ἐδέρχϑην, all active. 

δέω bind, δήσω, ἔδησα---δέδεκα, δέδεμαι, ἐδέϑην. See δ 95 
Rem. 3. The 3d Fut. δεδήσομαι (see ὃ 99 Rem. 1.) takes the 
place of the Ist Fut. δεϑήσομαν which is not Attic—MID. 

δέω fail, want, Fut. denow, &c. is commonly impersonal, as δεῖ, 
there is wanting, il faut, Subj. δέῃ, Opt. δέου, Inf. δεῖν, Part. δέον, 
Fut. δεήδει. &c. The Pass. δέομαι I need, is never impersonal, 
δεήσομαι, ἐδεήϑην. 

AHKS&, see δάκνω. 

196 διδάσκω teach, loses σ in its formation; διδάξω, δεδίδαχα, &ec. 

MID. 

διδράσχκω escape, run away, is found only in composition (ἀπο- 
διδράσκω dtadidoaonw)—from APA, Fut. δράσομαι, Perf. δέδρᾶ- 
se Aor. ἕδρᾶν, ἃ ao, ἃ, ἀμὲν &c. 3d Plur. ἐδραν (for Coa. 


8 114.} LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. ᾿ς 9218 


Subj. δρῶ, ᾧς, ᾧ ἅς. Opt. δραίην. Imper. δρᾶϑι. Inf. δρᾶναι. 
Part. δράς. See §110 Rem. 5. This must not be confounded 
with the regular 
δράω do, see above in the list of Contracts. 

δίδωμι gwe, see ᾧ 107.—MID. 

δυκέω seem, think, from AOK 2, Fut. δόξω &c. The Perfect 
is borrowed from the passive δέδογμαι have appeared. The regu- 
lar formation doxyow, &c. is less usual. 

AOR, see δίδωμι. 

AP AQ, see διδράσκω. 

δύναμαι can, Pres. and Imperfect like ἵσταμαε, 2d. pers. Pres. 


δύνασαι better than δύνῃ); which is only Subjunctive. With regard — 


to the Augment, see ὃ 82 Rem. 3. Fut. δυνήσομαι, Aor. ἠἡδυνή- 
ϑην, (also ἐδυνάσϑην), Perf. δεδύνημαι. Verbal Adjective Ouvaros, 

δύω. This verb originally connects the immediate significa- 
tion enter, with the causative inclose, see ὃ 113. 5. In the 
common usage it has only the latter (to inclose, to sink, &c.) and 
retains this meaning in Fut. and Ist Aor. δύσω, ἔδυσα, Pass. édv- 
ϑην. See §95 Rem. 3. The MID. δύομαν inclose myself, δύσο- 
fot, ἐδυσάμην passes into the intransitive meaning enter, submerge, 
&c. which, however, again reverts to a transitive meaning, as en- 
ter a garment, that is, dress. These significations of the immediate 
kind are retained in the active voice in the Perf. δέδυκα, and the 
2d Aor. ἐδῦν, δῦναι, δύς, δῦϑι, dite. See §110Rem.5. To this 
is tobe added a new active form δύνω, which is almost equivalent 
_in signification with the middle δυομαι. 


E. 
éyeigw awake transit. regular in the Act.—Perf. ἐγήγερκα. The 


MID. has the immediate or intransitive signification awake, and has | 


in ‘the Aor. ἠγρύμην, see § 110 Rem. 1. The 2d Perfect with 
an anomalous reduplication 


ἐγρήγορα | 
‘belongs, like other 2d perfects, to the #mmediate signification, but 


197 


216 LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. [§ 114, 


7 


papees, over into a new. present signification, I have awaked, that is, 
Dam awake, I wake.* . Pluperf. with force of Impf. kine | 
ἔδω, see ἐσϑίω. 
ἑδοῦμαι, see ἕζομαι. : 
ἕζομαι, καϑέζομαι, sit. Fut. καϑεδοῦμαι. See ὃ 95 Rem. 8. 
ἐθέλω and ϑέλω will, Fut. ἐθελήσω, ϑελήσω, &c. See § 112.2 
ἔϑω am wont ; instead of this present, use is made of the an- 
omalous perfect «/wOc. gt 
εἴδω see, an ancient verb, of which, in ‘this acceptation, only 
εἶδον, ἰδεῖν, ἰδέσϑαι, &c. are in use as the Aorist of the verb dgaw, 
and are to be seen under that verb. In the Epic language, how- 


_ ever, some other parts of εἴδω are found as tenses of the same 


verb. See on this subject and on the tenses which have the sig- 
nification know ( οἶδα, ἤδειν, εἴσομαι.) above § 109 and ὃ 113. 2. 

εἴκω. Of this verb there is. used as a Present the Perf. ἔθικα 
am like, seem. Part. ἐοικώς, Att. εἰκῶς, Neut. εἰκὸς; (lon. οἶχα, 
οἰκώς, οἰκὸς.) Pluperf. éwxsev. See §83 Rem.7 and 9. The 
verb εἴκω yield, see among the regular verbs. 

εἵμαρται, see MEIPOM AL. 

éiui and εἶμι, see § 108. 

εἰπεῖν say, 2d Aor. Indic. εἶπον, Imper. eine. 'This is more com- 
mon than the Ist. Aor. εἶπα, see aga Rem. 1. Imperat. εἰπὸν with 
anomalous accent, εἰπάτω &c. Inf. εἶπαι. 

With this Aorist, use has closely connected the Fut: ἐρῶ (Ton. 
᾿ἐρέω) from é¢¢w—and from PES the perfect εἴρηκα, see δ89 
Rem. 2.—Perf. pass. εἴρημαι, Aor. pass. ἐβῥήϑην ἀπὰ.ἐρῥέϑην-- 
3d Fut. instead of the common Fut. pass. εἰρήσομαίι. 

For the present of this verb, φημί is used, see ὃ 109, sometimes 


. also ἀγοῤεύειν (properly to speak in public), particularly in com- 


198 


_ which are forms of a degenerate period of the Greek language. 


position, as ἀπαγορεύω forbid, interdict, ἀπεῖπον forbade. In some 
. U >. at 
compounds λέγω furnishes the present, as avridéyw, ἀντεῖπον. 
iow, see εἰπεῖν and ἔρομαι. 
᾿᾿εἴωϑα, see ἔϑω. 


* In most lexicons this perfect is found under ἐγρηγορέω or γρηγορέω, 


- 


~ 


δ 114. 4] ΓΒ. OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. _ 217 


i 


Heid drive, Fut. ἐλάσω (short «) &c. Perf. δι Pose 
perf. ἐλήλαμαι, Aor: ἠλάϑην, Verbal adj. ἐλατός (less correct ἡλά- 
- 6Ony, ἐλαστός.) The theme ἐλάω is rare in the present; but ae 
ἐλᾷς, ἐλᾷ &e. Inf. ἐλᾷν, is the ‘prosaic Attic ee §95 Rem. 6 
EAETGORQ, EAORQ, see ἔρχομαι. 
“EAQ, see αἱρέω. 
» ENETEKES, ENEIK2 &e. ' see φέρω. 
᾿ ἔννυμι, 566 ὃ 108. 
ἐπίσταμαι understand, Impert, ἠπιστάμην (thus far like ἵστα- 


pac) Fut. ἐπεστήσομαε, Aor. ἠπεπτήϑην. 

_ &xw am employed, pursue. This ancient verb, of which for the 
most part. compounds only are in use, has the augment ἐς (διεῖπον), 
_ and an Aorist ἔσπον, σπεῖν, σπών, (ἐπέσπον, ἐπισπεῖν, μετασπών, 
which are rather poetical. ) { 

ἕπομαι follow, cinounv, ἕψομαι. This very common middle 
verb has an Aorist, which corresponds with that of the active ἕπω, 
except that in the indicative it is aspirated, ἑσπόμην, σπέσϑαι, 
6700, which forms occur chiefly in composition. 

EPT2 and évdm, see ῥέζω. 

ἐρέω, § see ἔρομαι and compare εἰπεῖν. 

ἔρομαι ask, occurs in the common language only as an Aorist, 
ἠρόμην, ἤρετο, whence also the other miodes are found. The in- 
finitive nevertheless is written both éveo@as and ἐρέσϑαι.---Ἐπί. 
ἐρήσομαι. The defective parts. are supplied from éowraw. 
The lonians however make use οἵ the present, but write it 
εἴρομαις εἰρόμην, εἰρήσομαι. The Epic dialect has an active form 
ἐρέω. 

ἔρδω go away, ἐθῥήσω. ἤθῥησα, see δ. 412.2. 

ἔρχομαι go, from 8.4. ΎΘ.Ὡ. Fut. ἐλεύσομαι. Aor. ἤλυϑον com- 
monly ἦλθον, ἐλϑεῖν, Imperat. ἐλϑέ, (see ὃ 103 Rem. I. 3,) &e.. 
Perf. ék7j4u9«.—Besides this and especially in composition, sev- 
eral tenses of ¢/uc are more in use than those yee belong to this 
root. See $108. 

ἐσϑίω eat, from ἔδω, Fut. ἔδομαι, § 95. Rem. 10. Perf. ἐδήδοκα, 

98 


218 LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. . [Ὁ 114. 


Perf. ase, ἐδήδεσμαι, Aor. pass. ἠδέσϑην.--- ΑοΥ. act. ἔφαγον = 
BMATR. ye Vernal adj. ἐδεστός. 
199 ἕσπον, ἑσπόμην, see ἕπω. 

evdm, καϑεύδω sleep, f. εὐὑδήσω, καϑευδήσιω: Augment oe Ὁ 
δον, καϑεῦδον, and éxadevdov. \ 

εὑρίσκω find, from E* TPQ, Aor. εὗρον, Imper. evoe, Fut. εὑρήσω 
&c. See δ΄Ὶ19, 2.—Aor. pass. εὐρέϑην, Verbal adj. εὑρετός. —Aug- 
ment § 83 Rem. 2.—MID. 

ἔχω have, f. ἕξω, with the aspir. (see §18 Rem. 3.)—Aor. (as 
if from 2X2) ἔσχον, σχεῖν, Subj. σχώ, σχῆς &c. (compound παρά- 
σχω, παράσχῃς). Opt. σχοίην. Imperat. σχές. MID. ἐσχόμην, Im- 
perat. σχοῦ (παράσχου). Hence anew future σχήσω, Perf. ἔσχηκα 
&c. Aor. pass. ἐσχέϑην: Verbal adj. ἑχτὸς and σχετός. 

From the aorist, σχεῖν is derived a new form of the present, 
ἔσχως which in particular significations, such as hold, seize, &c. is 
preferred, in which also the Fut. σχήσω more properly belongs'to 
this present. From ἔχω there are the following anomalous com- 
pounds to be remarked, viz. | 

avéyo which, only in the middle ἀνέχεσϑαι, with the signifi- 
cation to bear, endure, has the double augment in the imperfect 

and Aor. ἠνειχόμην, ἠνεσχόμην, see ὃ 86 Rem. 4. 

ἀμπέχω enclose, Imperf. ἀμπεῖχον, Fut. ἀμφέξω, Aor. ἤμπι. 
σὸν auncoysiv.—M ID. ἀμπέχομαν or ἀμπισχνοῦμαι. “wear, 
ἀμφέξομαι, Aor. ἠμπισχύμην.Ὁ 

ὑπισχνοῦμαν promise, F. ὑποσχήσομαι, Aor. ὑπεσχόμην, Imp. 
commonly from the passive, vxqoyednre.—Perf. ὑπέσχημαι. 


ἕψω cook, f. éwnow &c. Verbal adj. ép Pos or Ewnros, i νῦν. 
‘EQ and “EQ, see ὃ 108. 


Z. 


Caw live, has according to § 105 Rem. 3. ζῶ, Sy¢, ζῆ, &e. Impert. 
ἔζων, ἕζης, &c. Inf. ζῆν. Jmperat. $y and ζῆϑε. 


* The πὶ stands here, on account of following χ, instead of ᾧ : proper- 


ly ἀμφέχω, ἤμφισχον, instead of ἀμφιέσχον, ἀμφιοσχεῖν ὅζο. 


ᾧ 114.] LIST OF ANOMALOUS ΨΕΚΒΒ5.. 219 


Cevyvupe join, connect, Ἢ ξεύξω &c. See § 112. 6.—2d Aor. pass. 
ἐξύγην. 

ζώννυμε gird, f. ζώσω &c. Perf. pass. Seah, see δ 112. 6. 
—MID. | | 

ἦμαι, see § 108. 200 

jul, av, see above in φημί § 109. 


6. 

BANS, βθε ϑνήσκω. 

Θ΄Φ.2.. perfect as present τέϑηπα I am astonished, where the 
second aspirate is changed, while in the Aorist éragor, the first 
is changed ; see aspirates, §18. This verb is to be distinguished 
from daar, ἐτάφην, in the list of baryton verbs. 

ϑέλω, see ἐϑέλω. ; 

ϑέω run, f. ϑεύσομαι or ϑευσοῦμαι, see .§95 Rem. 5 and 9. 
The other tenses are supplied as in τρέχω. 

᾿ϑιγγάνω touch, formed from diy, Fut. ϑίξω and ϑίξομαι, Aor. 
ἔϑεγον. - 

ϑνήσκω die, from @ ANQ, Aor. ἔϑανον, Fut. Se hes Perf. 
τέϑνηκα, as from ON AQ, see § 110.3. Hence in common lan- 
guage the following abbreviated forms, according to ὃ 110 Rem. 4. 
τέϑναμεν, ate, τεϑνᾶσιν, ἐτέϑνασαν, τεϑνάναι, τεϑναίην, τέϑ- 
'χγαϑι. Ῥατί.. τεϑνηκώς, commonly masc. and neut. τεϑνεὼς (de- 
rived from τεϑναώς, τεϑναύς,) G. εῶτος, fem. te9ve@ou.—From 
τέϑνηκα, however, is derived an Attic form of the future σεϑνήξω 
or τεϑνήξομαι. : 

OPED—see τρέφω. OPEX—see τρέχω. ΘΎΦ--βεε τύφω. 

ϑύω sacrifice, ϑύσω &c.—Ist Aor. pass. ἐσύϑην (short v) see 
§ 18 Rem. 2. and § 95 Rem. 3. 


L 
ilw, καϑίζω set, set myself; MID. set myself, sit, fut. ἱζήσω, 


καϑιζήσω. or καϑιῶ (for καϑίσω according to ὃ 95 Rem. 7.) Aor. 
ἐκάϑισα Ke. 


ἑχνέομαν come, more commonly agexvéouae, f. ἴξομαι, Aor. ixo- 


μην, Perf. ἴγμαι (ἀφίγμαι, Inf. agiyGor.)\—The radical form ixw 
is Epic. 


220. . ᾿ LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. — [Ὁ 114. 


ἱλάσκομαι Mid. expiate, atone, propitiate, Fut. ἱλάσομαι (short αν. 
intapot, see πέτομαι. 

ἔσημε, see οἶδα, ὃ 109. - 

ἵστημε, see ὃ 107, with Rem. 11.--ἐπίσταμαι see in 7. 

ἔσχω, see ἕχω. 

"£82, see eine, § 108, 


201 K. 


καϑέζομαι, neha Koda, zadilo, see ἕζομαι, evdw, 
ἦμαι, ἕζω. ᾿ 

vaio burn transit. Att. κάω (with long ἃ and without contrac- 
tion,) f. καύσω &c. (see §95 Rem. 5.) PASS. 1st Aor. ἐχαύϑην, 

_ and 2a Aor éxany (short «), Verbal adj. xavros, καυστύς, καυστέος. 

The Epic poets have also a Ist Aor. without 0, ἔκηα. 

καλέω call, f. καλέσω, Att. καλῶ and καλοῦμαι, _dudheoa, κέχ- 
Anua, ἔκλήϑην, &c.—Perf. pass. κέχλημαὶν am called, my name is. 
Opt. κεκλήμην, κέκλῃο &c. See §98 Rem. 8.—MID. 

κάμνω tire, from K_AMS, see § 112. 4. Aor. ἔκαμον, Fut. xa- 
μοῦμαι, perf. xexunxa, as from KMAS, | see § 110. 85... 

κεῖμαι, see § 109. 

κεραννυμε mix, from κεράω, see ὃ 112. 6. Ἔ κεράσω, Aor. éxé- 
oaca (with short «).—A syncope with a long α takes place in the 
Aorist Mid. ἐκρασάμην, Perf. κέκρακα, \Pass. κέκχραμαι, ἐχράϑην. 
We also find κεκέρασμαι, ἐχεράσϑην.---Μ 1}. 

κίχρημι, See χράω. 

κλαίω weep, Att. κλάω (with long α and without contraction), f. 
κλαύσομαι or κλαυσοῦμαι, Aor. ἔκλαυσα, see §95 Rem. 5. The 
Fut. κλαέήσω or χλαήσω is rarer.—Verbal adjec. κλαυξόξ, κλαυτὸς, 
xAavotéos.—MID. is.rare. 

κορέννυμι satiate, f. κορέσω &c. see § 112. 6. Perf. pass. xexo- 
ozopac (lon. κεκόρημαι). ‘This is not to be confounded with the 
regular 09m, -ἤσω sweep. 

κράζω commonly χέχραγα cry, see § 113 Rem. 2. xexoauyper, 
κέχραχϑε &c. see §110 Rem. 3.—Fut. κεκράξομαι. 

KP A—see xeoavvupr. 


§ 114.]} LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. _ 221 


κρεμάννυμε hang, Pass. κρεμάννυμαι am hung, and as MID. hang 
myself ; κρέμαμαε, (like ἵσταμαι) hang intransit. to which belong 
«Subj. κρέμωμαι, Opt. κρεμαίμην and xgsuoiuny.—Fut. Act. κρεμα- 
- ow (βδοτέ α), Att. κρεμῶ, ᾧς, ᾷ, &c. The Aor. pass. ἐκρεμάσϑην 
is common to the Mid. and intransit. signification; but the Fut. 
pass. χρεμασϑήσομαι belongs solely to χρέμάννυμαι. In conse- 
quence of which the intransitive has a peculiar future, κρεμήσομαι 
T will hang. 
κυνέῳ kiss, £. κυνήσομαι, or (from KYL) xvow, ἔκυσα (short 
οὐ) The compound agosxuvéw kneel, adore, is regular. 


A, 


λαγχάνω obtain (by lot or fortune,) from AHXQ, f. λήξομοαι, 
Aor. ἔλαχον, Perf. εἴληχα, §82 Rem. 2, or λέλογχα (as if from 
AETX&.) 

λαμβάνω take, from AHBR, f. λήψομαι, Aor. ἔλαβον, Perf. 
εἴληφα, see § 82 Rem. 2.—MID. The Ionics form λελάβηκα, see 
§ 112. 8. and (from 44MB2) λάμψομαι, ἐλάμφϑην, λέλαμμαι. 

λανϑάνω., rarer λήϑω. ἀπὶ hid, Anow, ἔλαϑον, λέληϑα.--Μ10). 
λανϑάνομαι, rarer λήϑομαι, forget, λήσομαι, ἐλαϑόμην, λέλησμαι. 

λέγω say, has in this simple form no perfect active whatever ; 
in the pass. it has λέλεγμαε, ἐλέχϑην. In its compounds, in the sig- 
nification of gather, it has εἴλοχα (ovveihoya), εἴλεγμαν (see § 82 


202 


Rem. 2,) Aor. pass. ἐλέγην, see §100 Rem. 4, and a MID. Also © 


διαλέγομαι converse, has διείλεγμαι, but in the Aorist διελέχϑην. 

AHBA2, see λαμβάνω. 

λήϑω, see λανϑάνω. 

AHX 2, see λαγχάνω. 

λούω wash. In this verb the Attic dialect afmost without ex- 
ception omits the connective vowel before the’ termination, as 3d 

pers. Impf. ἕλου, Ist pl. ἐλοῦμεν, Pass. λοῦμαι &c. λοῦσϑαι, see Ὦ 

_ 110 Rem. 2.—MID. 

λυώ loose, λύσω &c. Perf. pass. λέλύμαι, Ist Aor. pass. EhuOny, 
§95 Rem. 3.—MID. | 


209 


o23 ; LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. | [Ὁ 114. 


M. 


μανϑάνω learn, from MHO2, Aor. ἔμαϑον, f. μαϑήσομαι, 
Perf. μεμάϑηκα, see § 112. 5. 

μάχομαι contend, fut. μαχέσομαι, commonly μαχοῦμαι. See 
§95 Rem. 8. Aor. ἐμαχεσάμην, Perf. μεμάχεσμαι and μεμάχημαι. 
Verbal Adjectives μαχετέον and magnteoy. 

μείρομαν obtain, Aor. éupogor, Perf. ἔμμορα. From the cau- 
sative sense of ME/PS, allot, (whence μέρος part,) comes the 
Perfect Pass. εἵμαρται it 1s fated, an impersonal form, where also 
the εὐ is instead of the reduplication, see §82 Rem. 2. Part. are 
μένος. 

μέλλω shall, am about, intend, Fut. μελλήσω &c. For the aug- 
ment, see § 82 Rem. 3. 7 

μέλω concern, go to heart, is in the Active voice used princi- 


/ 


‘pally in the 3d pers. μέλει, μέλουσι, Fut. μελήσει, &c. (Epic Perf. 


μέμηλε, see § 113 Rem. 2.)—PASS. μέλομαν I take care of, more 
commonly ἐπιμέλομαι, μελήσομαι, ἐμελήϑην. 

μένω remain, has in the Perf. μεμένηκα, see § 112. 2. Verbal 
Adjective μενέτεον. 

μίγνυμι and μέσγω, mingle. Fut. μίξω &c. See §112. 6. 

μιμνήσκω remind, from MNAQ, Fut. μνήσω &c. and Pass. 
μιμνήσκομαι I recollect,I recall, I mention, ἐμνήσϑην, μνησϑήσομαι. 
The perfect hence formed, μέμνημαι, has the signification of the 
present, I remember, that is, 1 am still mindful of. 'To this perfect 


belongs the 3d Fut. μεμνήσομαι Ishall continue to be mindful of. 


The simple form (μνάομαι) μνῶμαι is in the foregoing signi- 
fication in use only among the Ionics ; in the signification woo, it 
is also in use in the common dialect. 


dNV.- 
νέμω divide, allot, Fut. νεμῶ and veunow, Aor. ἔνεεμα, Perf. 
vevéunna, &c. Aor. Pass. ἐνεμήϑην and éveuedny.—MID.  - 
vew swim, fut. νεύσομαν and vevoovmor (δ 95 Rem. 5.) ἔνευσα 
&c.—(véw spin, is regular.) 
vifw wash, takes its tenses from vinzw, νέψω &c.—MID. 


~ 


δ 114.] | LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. 993° 


0. 


ὄξω smell, intrans. Fut. ofjow, &c. Perf. ὄδωδα has the power 


of the ‘present. 

οἴγω or οἴγνυμι, commonly ἀνοίγω, avoiyvuut, open, has the 
Augment in the anomalous manner mentioned § 83 Rem. 8. Impf. 
ἀνέῳγον, Aor. ἀνέῳφξα, Inf. ἀνοῖξαι, &c. and Ist Perf. ἀνέωχα. 
The 2d Perf. ἀνέῳγα has a neutral signification, J am open. 

οἶδα, see ὃ 109. 

οἴομαι think, Impf. @ouny. 1st pers. pres. also οἦμαι, Impf. μην. 
—Fut. ofjoouac, Aor. φήϑην, οἰηϑήναι. 

οἴχομαι go, am gone, οἰχήσομαει, Perf. ὥχημαι, or in the active 
form (with w) οἴχωκα. 

O/2, see οἴομαι and φέρω. 

ὀλεσϑάνω or -αἰνὼ glide, ολεσϑήσω, ὠλεσϑον. See ὃ 112 
Rem. 5. 

ὄλλυμι annihilate, from OA, Fut. odo, Aor. ὥλεσα, Perf. ὀλώ- 
dexa.—MID. ὄλλυμαι pass away, Fut. ohovmas, Aor. ὠλόμην, to 
which belongs 2d Perf. ὄλωλα. 

Guvume swear, Fut. ὀμοῦμαι, εἴ, irae, &c. ὀμεῖσϑαι (from OMQ, 
see § 112. 6).—Aor. ὥμοσα, Perf. ouwpoza, Perf. Pass. ouapo- 
σμαες but in the 3d pers. also ὁμώμοται (as iffrom OMO.)—MID. 

᾿ὀμόργνυμε to wipe off, Fut. ὀμόρξω, &c. See § 112. 6.—MID. 

ovivnur* profit, radical form ON_A& ; hence present and imper- 
fect like ἵστημιε.---Εαἰ. ovnow, Aor. ὥνησα, &c. MID. ὀνίναμαε, 
profit by, 2d Aor. wynuny (ησο, 470, ὅς.) or ὠνάμην, Opt. ὀναίμην, 

Inf. ὄνασϑαι. 
OTT, see Jodo. 


ὁράω see, Impf. lonic ὥρων, commonly ἑώρων, see ὃ 83 Rem. - 


8. Perf. éwgaxu.—Aor. εἶδον, ἰδεῖν, ἰδών, ἰδέ, &c. MID. εἰδόμην, 
᾿ἐδέσϑαι, ἰδοῦ, (and as an interjection ἰδοὺ see!) See above εἴδω.--- 
Fut. ὄψομαι will see, from OTTTS82.—PASS. Perf. ἑωρᾶμαν or 
(though less frequently) ὄμμαι, owas, ὦπται, &c. ὥφϑαι. <Aor- 
ὥφϑην, ὀφϑῆναι. Verbal Adjectives ὁρατός, ὀπτός. 


* A particular reduplication instead of ὄνημι. 


> 204 


224 ‘LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. [ὁ 114. 


ὄρνυμι excite, from OP, Fut. ὄρσω, Ist Aor. ὦρσα. See ὃ 
101 Rem. 5.—MID. dorvumee arise, Aor. ee which belongs 
2d Perf. ὄρωρα. 

oogeaivouce smell transit. Fut. ὀσφρήσομαν, Aor. ὠσφρόμην: 
See’ δ119. 5. ΄ 

ὀφείλω owe 6. g. money; must, Fut. ὀφειλήδω, &e. The 2d 
Aor. ὥφελον occurs only as the expression of a wish. See § 151. 

ὄφλω and (more common in the present) égAcoxava, am guilty, 
condemned, Fut. ὀφλήσω, &c. 


Ms 

παίω beat, Fut. commonly παιήσω, but the other tenses are 
ἔπαισα, πέπαικα, caplet MID, (Compare παίζω in the regu- 
lar verbs.) 
τ πάσχω suffer, from ITH@OQ, Aor. éxadov,—from ITENO2, 
Perf. πέπονθα, Fut. πείσομαι, according to the rule § 25. 4. 
Verbal Adjective παϑητὸς. ) 

πείσομαι, ITENOQ, see πάσχω. » 

πέπρωται, SC πορεῖν. 

πέπτω. SEE πέσσω. 

πέρϑω destroy, Aor. ἔπραϑον. See §-96 Rem. 4. 

πϑσσω. πέττω. cook, Fut. πέψω, &c. from πέπτω. 

πεσεῖν, 566 πίπτω. 

πετάννυμν expand, Fut. πετάσω, &c. See δ᾽ 119. 6. Perf. Pass. 
mertauae (see §110. 1.) but Aor. Pass. is again ἐπετάσϑην. 

πέτομαι fly. From this root is formed by syncope an Aor. ἐπ- 
τόμην, πτέσϑαι, &c. See ὃ 110 Rem. 1. Fut. πέεήσομαι, common- 
ly πτήσομαι, which may be derived from the lengthened form 
neraouut. To this also belongs a formation in μέ, partly in the 
present πέταμαν and ἃ ἵπταμαι; partly in a second form of the Aor. 
ἐπτάμην, πτάσϑαι, &c. In addition to this there is a third Aor. 
ἕπτην, πτήναι, πτάς, &c. and a Perf. πέπτηκα formed from the 
active, which is entirely obsolete in the present. 

TTETQ, see πίπτω. 

πεύϑομαι, See πυνθάνομαι. 


δ 1141 LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. > 48 


—s 


πήγνυμι make fast, f. πήξω, &c. See §112.6. Aor. Pass. ἐπά- 
ynv, 2d Perf. πέπηγα intransit. I stand fast. 
πίμπλημε fill, πεμπλάναι, follows ἵστημε in-present and imperf 
Fut. πλήσω, &e. Perf. Pass: πέπλησμαι, Aor. Pass. ἐπλήσϑην; from 
HAAR or πλήϑω which last form, however, has in the present 
tense only the intransitive meaning am full—When, in composi- 
tion, # comes before the first a, the « in the reduplication is 
dropped, as ἐμπίπλημε, but returns as soon as the augment is in- 
terposed, as ἐνεπίμπλην. 
πίμπρημι burn transit. πιμπρᾶναι, follows tornuc in the Pres. 


and Imperf. the rest from I7P_AS82 or πρήϑω, as ἐπρήσϑην.----ἰ Το, 


same holds of éunimonus, éveniumeny, as of πίμπλημιε. 

πίνω drink; from IT/2, Fut. πίομαι; see ὃ 95 Rem. 10. Aor. 
ἔπιον, πιεῖν &e. Imper. commonly πῖϑε.--- ΑἸ] the rest from ITOQ, 
Perf. πέπωκα, Perf. pass. πέπομαι, Aor. pass. ἐπόϑην, Verbal adj, 
ποτός, TOtEOV.—The forms πίσω, ἔπεσα, have the causative sense, 
_ gtve to drink, δ 113. 5, and have as present πεέπίσχω. 

πιπράσκω sell, Fut. and Aor. wanting. The remainder from 
TIP AQ, πέπρᾶκα, ἐπράϑην, &e. 

_ πίπτω fall, forms from ITETS (see § 112: (ΩΣ in the Dorian 
inisine’, the fut. πεσοῦμαι, Aor. ἔπεσον.--- ΕΓ, πέπτωκα. 

TLAARQ, πλλϑω, see πίμπλημι. 

πλέω sail, f. πλεύσομαι, πλευσοῦμαι----ἔπλευσα, &c. see § 95. 
Rem. 5.—Pass. πέπλευσμαι, ἐπλεύσϑην. 

πλήσσω, πλήττω, strike—2d Perf—This verb retains » the y in 
the 2d Aor. pass. ἐπλήγην, except the compounds which signify 
affright, ἐξεπλάγην, κατεπλάγην. 

πνέω blow, f. πνεύσω or πνευσοῦμαυ &c. Aor. pass SS 

ποϑέω desire, f. ποϑέσω and ποϑήσω, Perf. πεπόϑηκα, Perf. 
pass. πεπόϑημαι, Ist Aor. pass. ἐποϑέσϑην, see §95 Rem. 3. 

πορεῖν, ἕπορον I gave, a defective poetical Aorist. To the same 
theme (with the idea assign) belongs, by means of a metathesis 
(§ 110. 3.) the perfect pass. πέπρωται it is destined, Part. πέπρω- 
μένος. 

29 


206 


226 LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. [Ὁ 114. 


᾿ πρίασϑαι buy. A defective verb, whose forms (énycouny, πρί- 
ασϑαιν &c.) are used as the Aorist of ὠνεῖσϑαι. 
_ WPO—see πορεῖν. 
iI TA—II TO—see πετάννυμι, πέτομαι, πίπτω. 
πυνϑάνομαι hear, from πεύϑομαν (poet-) Fut. πεύσομαι, Aor. 
ἐπυϑόμην, Perf. πέπυσμαι; Verbal adj. πευστός, πευστέον. 


P. 


6%w and ἔρδω do, Fut. δέξω or (from EPI) ἔρξω &c. Perf. 
ἕοργα. 
δέω flow, f. δεύσομαι, Aor. ἔῤῥευσα. More in use, however, in _ 
_the same active signification is the 2d Aor. Pass. é¢6uyy, with the 
Fut. év7joouae, and anew perfect ἐῤῥύηκα, formed from this Aorist. 
§.112. 8. 
Ἢ ῥήγνυμε tear transit. f. δήξω, δ΄119. 6. Aor. pass. ἐῤῥαγὴν.--ἰ 
φᾷ Perf. ἔῤδωγα with the intransitive meaning, J am torn. 
δίπτω and ῥιπτέω throw ; both forms are used in the present 
and imperfect; the other parts are formed only from δίπεω, as 
éiwo &c. Aor. pass. ἐῤῥίφην. 
δώννυμν strengthen, δώσω &c. δ᾽ 112. 6, Perf. pass. ἐθῥωσμαι. 
Imp. ἔῤῥωσο farewell, Aor. pass. ἐῥώσϑην. | 


=. 


σβέννυμι extinguish, f. oBeow &c. ἔσβεσμαι, ἐσβέσθϑην, see ὃ 
112. 6.—The Perf. ἔσβηκα (with 7) and the 2d Aorist of, plur. 
᾿ἔσβημεν, Inf. σβῆνάι, (see ὃ 110 Rem. 5.) have the intransitive sig- 
207 nification to go out, for which meaning however, the passive σβέν- 
νυμαν is more usual. 
σκεδάννυμε scatter, f. σχεδάσω &c. Perf. pass. ἐσχέδασμαι, see 
§ 112. 6. 7 
σμάω wipe, σμῆς &c: see ὃ 105 Rem. 3. Fut. σμήσω &e.—Aor. 
pass. ἐσμήχϑην (from σμήχω.) 
σπεῖν, σπέσϑαι, see ἕπω. 
ΣΊ 422, see ἵστημι. 
στερέω deprive, declined regularly ; but in the passive much 


’ δ τ 


§ 114.] | LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. ὦ 227 


πε 


use is made: of the simpler form στέρομαι, Part. 2d Aor. heiyer 
Fut. στερήσομαι. 
στορέννυμι, στόρνυμι, and σερώννυμε, le extend, form both 
στορέσω, ἐστόρεσα, and στρώσω, ἔστρωσα. Perf. ‘pass. ἔστρωμαι. 

Ist Aor. pass. ἐστορέσϑην. Verbal adj. στρωτός. 

σχεῖν, ἔσχον &c. see ἔχω. 

σώζω save, has in Aor. pass. ἐσώϑην without σι from the elder 
form σαύω (éoawdnv.)—MID. 


T. 


ταφεῖν and ταφῆναι, see OADQ, and ϑάπτω ὃ 104. 
. TAQ, the spparent root of réivmw, τέτακα ἕο. See eB wpe 
TERS, see τίχτω. 
τέμνω cut, forms from TEM®, see § 112. 4, ἔ. τεμῶ, Aor. ἔτε- 
pov.—Perf. rézunua, Aor. pass. ἐσμήϑην. Less used is Aor. ἔτα- 
μον. The Jonians have also in the present τάμνω. 
τεύχω, Two kindred verbs must be carefully distinguished, viz. 
1) τεύχω “prepare, regular, as τεύξω, ἔτευξα, τέτευχα; τέ- 
τυγμαι, τευκτός. 
2) τυγχάνω happen, f. τεύξομαι, Aor. ἔτυχον, Perf. te- 
τύχηκα. 
The idea of τυγχάνω has its origin in ὗς passive of τεύχω.᾽ 
τίχτω bear, from TEKS, f. τέξω commonly τέξομαι, Aor. ἔτε- 
“ov, Perf. reroxa.—MID. poetical. 
tive, see Tim. , 

_ tergaw bore, from TPA, τρήσω &c. Another form, more 
used by the Attics, is ἀξεραινῷς ἑἐτέτρηνα. The perfect is always 
from the radical Τ “42, τέτρηκα, τέτρημαι.- 

τιτρώσκω (epic towm) wound, Fut. τρώσω &e. 208 
τίω honour, is used only by the poets, and is regularly declin- 
ed. Perf. pass. rézeeoe.—In the signification of expiate, it derives 
its tenses from tive expiate, f. riaw, perf. pass. τέτεσμαι, Ist Aor. 
pass. ἐτίσϑην. The MID. tivouas (τίσομαε, ἐτεσάμηνν) has the 
‘signification of avenge, punish. 


209 


928 LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. {§ 114.. 


TAAQ ἜΡΟΝ a verb not used in the present, but from which 
the following tenses are derived, Fut. τλήσομαις Aor. ἔτλην, τλῆναι, 
τλαίην, τλῆϑε see § 110 Rem. 5, Perf. τέτληκα, whence the synco- 
pated forms τέσλαμεν &c. see ὃ 110 Rem. 4. 

TM—see τέμνω. 

τρέφω nourish, f. ϑρέψω § 18. Perf. τέτροφα, see ὃ 97 Rem. 1. 
Perf. pass. τέϑραμμαι,τεϑράφϑαι, Aor. pass. ἐγράφην; more rare- 
ly ἐϑρέφϑην, Verbal adj. ϑρεπτός. 

τρέχω run, forms its tenses rarely from itself, as Siitane, 
ἔϑρεξα, (δ 18); but commonly from AP LMR, Aor. ἔδραμον, Fut. 
δραμοῦμαι, Perf. δεδράμηκα, see ὃ 119, 8. 

- ὙΦ, see ϑρύπτω. 

τρώγω eat, f. τρώξομαι;--Αον. ἔτραγον (from 7} 41:2.) 

τυγχάνω, 566 τεύχω. 

τύπτω strike, has in the Attic dialect commonly fut. τυπτήσω. 
Verb. adj. τυπτητέος.--- ΔΟΓ, pass. érumyv.—MID. 
τύφω incense, smoke, burn, f. ϑύψωῳ &c. ὃ 18. Aor. pass. ἐεύφην. 


@. 

. DATR, see ἐσϑίω. 

DA, see φημί ὃ 109. and φαένω § 101 Rem. 4. 

φέρω bear, has (from Ὁ 248) f. οἴσω and a particular Imperat. 
oioe, for which see ὃ 112. 8. Besides this it has (from ATK or 
ENEK®) ist Aor. ἤνεγκα, 2d Aor. ἤνεγκον, Perf. ἐνήνοχα, (com 
pare § 97 Rem. 1.) Perf. pass. ἐνήνεγμαι, Aor. pass. ἠνέχϑην.----Ἐαΐ, 
pass. ἐνεχϑήσομαι, or οἰσϑήσομαι. Verbal adj. οἰστός, οἰστέος.---- 
MID.—The Ionics have Aor. ἤνεικα, ἐνεῖκαι, Pass. ἠνείχϑην. 

φϑάνω come before, anticipate, forms from DOYS either φϑάσω. 
ἔφϑασα, or φϑήσομαι, ἔφϑην, (φϑῶ, φϑῆναι, rea see § 110 
Rem. 5.) Pert. ἐφϑακα. 

φύω beget, quow, ἔφυσα. —But the Perf. πέφυκα, and Ὗ 2d 
Aor. ἔφυν, φῦναι, Part. φύς, see §110 Rem. 5, have a passive or 
intransitive signification, to be begotten, to become, to be, of which 
meaning are the present and future φύομαε, φύσομαι. 


- 


$1 14 LIST OF ANOMALOUS VERBS. 229 


= = = ἘΞ 


Χ. 

χαίρω rejoice, ἴ. χαιρήσω. Aor. (from‘ the passive) ἐχάρην, 
whence again ἃ perfect with the signification of the present, κεχάρη- 
κα, commonly κεχάρημαι, see δ112. 8. 

χέω pour out, f. χεύσω; ist Aor. ἔχεα, see §91 Rem. 1. Inf. 
| yea, Imp. χέον, χεάτω ἕο. Perf. κέχύκα, Perf: pass. κέχυμαι, Aor. 
pass. ἐχύϑην, §98 Rem. 4—MID. 

χράω. Of this verb there are five different forms, with as 
many distinct meanings. 

1) χράω I give an oracular response, declined regularly ; ; (om, 
LORY, hone c. Aor. pass. ἐχρήσϑην. 

2) κίχρημε lend, like ἵστημε, (but without 2d Aor.)—zo7ou, 
ἔχρησα &c. Mid. κέχραμαι borrow, χρήσομαι, ἐχρησάμην. 

3) χράομαι use, takes in its contraction (according to ὃ 105 
Rem. 3) ἡ instead of a, as yon, 2d sing. χρῆται, χρῆσϑαι ἃς. 
The rest is regular, Aor. ἐχρησάμην, Perf. κέχρημαι. Verbal 
adj. χρηστός. 

4) χρή oportet, it is necessary, impersonal, is inflected partly 
like verbs in yc, as Inf. χρῆναι, Opt. χρείη, Subj. yon, Part. (ro) 
χρέωνΐ, Imperf: ἑ ἐχρῆν (irregular accent,) or τ χρῆν Ὡς ἐχρη.) 
—Fut, θήσει, δ. 

5) ἀπόχρη it suffices, pl. ἀποχρῶσεν, Inf. ἀποχρῆν, Part. 
ἀποχρῶν, wou, ov.—Impf. anéyon.—Fut. ἀποχρήσεε &c. 

χρώννυμε colour, f. χρώσω &c. see ὃ 112: 6, Perf. pass. κέχρω- 

oe | 

χώννυμι heap, dam; also the regular form yoo, Inf. your, 

-χώσω. ἃς. Perf. pass. κέχωσμαι. 


2. 
ο΄ ὥϑέω push, has the syllabic augment (ἐώϑουν) according to ὃ 
᾿ 88 Rem. 6, and forms Fut. ὠϑήσω, and (from 292) ὥσω.---ἔωσα, 
ξωκα, ἕωσμαι Kc. 


* This perfect is chiefly used in the sense of J need. 


? Has its origin in χρᾶον. according to § 26 Rem. 7 


280 PARTICLES. [§ 115, 


210 | § 115. PaRTicuiEs. 


1. The particles are called by the ancient grammarians In- 
Jfiexibles, because they admit of no declension, nor conjugation, Ev- 
ery thing, therefore, which regards their formation or derivation, 
belongs properly to the subject of the formation of words. Some 
points, however, which are closely connected with the other parts 
of speech, or by which several particles are placed in a certain 
relation-to each other, and some small changes effected by posi- 
tion or euphony, shall here be detailed. 3 

2. The most common adverbial form is the termination ὡς, 
which may be regarded altogether as a part of the adjective, since 
it is necessary only to change the termination o¢, nominative or 
genitive, into ὡς as follows, viz. 

φίλος, φίλως" σοφός, σοφῶς. 
σώφρων, (σωφρονὸς,) σωφρόνως" χαρίεις, ἐντος, χαριέντως. 
εὐθύς, ἕος, εὐϑέως. 

ἀληϑής, ἕος, contr. οὖς, ἀληϑέως contr. αληϑῶς. 

35. Certain cases and forms of nouns often supply the place of 
particles, either by virtue of their signification, as will appear in 
the syntax, or by ellipsis. When such a form occurs very fre- 
quently, it is regarded quite as an adverb. So with the dative, viz. 
| κομιδῇ properly with care, hence very much. 

σπουδῇ 


with diligence, labour, hence hardly, scarcely. 
Also a number of feminine adjectives (originally agreeing with 
ὁδῷ from ἡ ὁδὸς way, mode, method,) e. g. 
πεζῇ on. foot, κοινῇ commonly, ἰδίᾳ privately, δημοσίᾳ, 
publicly &c. 
So also in the accusative, viz. 
ἀρχήν properly in the beginning, in the foundation, hence 
© totally. 
προῖκα gratis, for nothing, (from προίξ gift.) 
μακρὰν (sc. ὁδόν) far. 


- 


8 115. PARTICLES. 231 


Rem. 1. Some also are cases with preceding prepositions, e. g. 
“magazonuc. immediately (properly during the thing.) 
nade and καδάπερ (for καϑ' a, xa ameg,) as, as if, like. 
προύργου (for πρὸ ἔργου,) to the end. 
᾿ Some such compound words have small peculiarities of orthogra- 
phy and accentuation, as =f 


> ’ 


ἐκποδών out of the way, aside, (for ἐκ ποδών.) 
ἐμποδών in the way, inconvenient, (grammatically irregular 

for ἐν ποσίν.) ; 211 
4. The neuter of the adjective is also an adverbial accusative, 
‘ when it stands instead of the adverb, as well in the singular as the 
plural. This use, as far as the positive is concerned, is for the 
most part peculiar to the poets; and is used in prose, in only a 
few instances, as ταχύ swiftly, μικρὸν or μεκρά a little. 

5. In the comparative degree, it is very much the usage, that. 
the neuter singular of the comparative and the neuter plural of the 
superlative serve also as degrees of comparison for the adverb, as 
σοφώτερον ποιεῖς thou actest more wisely, αἴσχιστα διετέλεσεν he 
lived most shamefully. The appending of w¢ to the form of com- 
parison of the adjective, as καλλιόνως, is far less common. | 

6. Instead of ὡς, the more ancient dialect formed the adverb 
in w, hence οὕτως and οὕτω, § 30. 4. Here are to be reckoned 

᾿ἄφνω suddenly, ὀπίσω behind, and several formed from prepositions, 
as ἔξω without, ἔσω and εἴσω within, ἄνω above, κάτω below, πρό- 
ow forwards, πόῤῥω far. These form their degrees of compari- 
son in the same manner, as ἀνωτέρω, ἀνωτάτω,---ἃπᾷ in like man- 
ner degrees are formed of some other particles, as ἀπὸ from, a- 
πωτάτω very far from; ἔνδον within, ἐνδοτάτω inmost; ἑκᾶς far, 
ἑκαστέρω" ἀγχοῦ near, ἀγχοτάτω" μακράν far, μακροτέρω. 

7. In all the particles, which take the degrees of comparison’ 
without being derived from adjectives in use, the analogy of the 
adjectives is observed in forming the degrees of comparison, as 
ἐγγύς near, ἐγγυτέρω or ἐγγύτερον &c. or ἔγγιον, ἔγγεστα, where- 
in just the same peculiarities and irregularities are observed as 
there prevail, see Rem. 2 below. Particularly compare with 
“ἢ iwy, coros,” (δ 67. 3) and ‘ irregular comparison’ ὃ 68, the fol- 
lowing, viz. : 


212 


232 GORRELATIVE PARTICLES. [δ 116. 


ἄγχε near, ἄσσον, ἄγχεστα 
μάλα very, μᾶλλον, μάλιστα: | 

And the adverbial neuter corresponding to ἥσσων, (ὃ 68. 2.) 
ἧσσον, ἧττον, less, ἥκιστα least. 


Rem. 2. The following deserve notice, viz. 

πέρα on the other side, over, περαιτάτω or περαίτατα, 

πλησίον near, πλησεαίτερον and -ἔστερον, 

προύργου (Rem. 1) προυργιαίτερον. 

. 3. A few forms of verbs become particles, by common 
use, particularly interjections. Thus ὄφελον, see the anomalous 
ὀφείλω and ὃ 151. ἐδού see, (see the anomalous ogaw.) 

So too εἶεν (from εἴη) be it so! well ! 

ἄγε, φέρε, come on, which is used without alteration as 
an address to several. ~ 
ἴϑε (to one), ἔξε (to more), come on. 
Rem. 4. The’adverb δεῦρο hither is also used as an impera- 
tive, come hither, and in this acceptation it has a plural, when ad- 
dressed to several, δεῦτε ! which is explained as a contraction of 
devo ἴτε. | 


§ 116. CORRELATIVE PARTICLES. 


(Compare ὃ 79.) 


1. Some relations of place are indicated by particles append- 
ed to words, and that as follows ; when the question is 
whence ? by dev, as ἄλλοϑεν from some other place, 
whither? “ os, ““ ἄλλοσε to some other place, - 

where? “ Ov, ““ἀλλοϑὲ somewhere else. 

The vowel before these terminations is a matter of some vari- 
ety, which, however, is best learned by observation, e. g. 49%- 
yndev, οὐρανόϑεν, ἀγρόϑε in the country, ποτέρωϑιυ on which of 
the two sides, ἑτέρωϑε on the other side. | 

2. When the question is whither, the enclitic δὲ is also appen- 
ded, and that to the.accusative without any change, as οὐρανόνδε 
to the heavens, ἅλαδε (from eds) into the sea, ἔρεβόςδε (from to 
ἐρεβοςν to Erebus. 


Rem. 1. Οἴκαδε home, from οἶκος, and φύχαδε to flight, from 
φυγή, are departures from the analogy ; but in 4ϑηναζε, Θηβαάζε, 
the ὃ of the ‘particle δὲ together with the o of the accusative plur. 


™~ 


§116.] CORRELATIVE PARTICLES. 233. 


have passed over into ¢ (ὃ 3. 2.) Several words, however, as- 
sume the ¢, although not in the plural, as ϑύραζε without, from 
Svea door ;’Oluuniage from ᾿Ολυμπία. 

Rem. 2. When the question is where, the termination σὸν or 
ov is attached to the names of several cities ; σύ when a conso- 
nant, and aos when a vowel precedes, as 

᾿ϑήνησι, Πλαταιᾶσιν, ᾿Ολυμπίασι 

from ᾿ϑηναι, Πλαταιαί, ᾿Ολυμπία." 
Some other words take the termination oz, as 
᾿Ισϑμοῖ, Πυϑοῖ, Meyugot, 
from /o@ucs, Πυϑώ, τὰ Μέγαρα, 
en termination has always the circumflex, except in οἴκου at 


3. To the three relations of the place quoted, refer the three 


following interrogations, viz. 
σπιῦϑεν; whence ? 
ποις; whither ? 
που; where? 


of which the first only coincides with the terminations quoted 
above under no. 1. On the other hand, these and some other 
interrogations, of which the most common are πότε and πηνίκα 
when? πῶς how ? πὴ in what direction? in what way? stand with 
their immediate correlatives (indefinite, demonstrative, relative) 
in the same analogy, which we saw above (§ ide in the case of the 
correlative adjectives. 


Interrogative. Indefinite. | Demonstrative. Relative. 


i all enclitic. simple. compound. 
πότε; ποτὲ τότε ὅτε --- ὁπότε 
ποῦ: | ποῦ ee a ov — ὅπου 

᾿ ποῖ; ποί ΕΝ of --.. ὅποι 
πόϑεν; ποϑὲν τῦϑεν ὅϑεν --- ὁπόϑεν 
πῶς; πώς Tas ὡς -- ὅπως 
πῆ; πῆ τῇ 4 --ὅπη 
πηνίκα; arse τηνίκα ηνίκα ---- ὁπηνίκα 


The signification of the foregoing correlative adverbs is obvious 
from that of the corresponding adjectives in § 79. 


* Ολυμπιάσι, with short a, is the dative plural from ἡ Ολυμπιᾶς. 
+ The poets, however, have also 700¢ and 1091. 


{ The [ota subscript in this series is omitted in those forms where fio 
real nominative exists as a root. See Rem. 4 and 5, 


30 


213 


214 


> 


234 CORRELATIVE PARTICLES. [§ 116. 


Rem. 3. As the relative pronoun ὅς, besides the compound 
Gerve, is also strengthened by πὲρ (ὅςπερ, &c.) the same is_also 
found in several of the foregoing relative adverbs, as ὥςπερ; ἧπερ; 
οὗπερ. For the Ionic forms κοῦ, ὅκως, &c. see ὃ 16 Rem. 1: c. 

4. The demonstratives in this table are the original simple 
demonstratives, like 6, 7), τό among the demonstrative adjectives. 
None of them but τότε then, is in common use; the others only 
in certain phrases or in the poets. _ It is also to be remarked that, 
instead of two, we sometimes find ὡς used as a less common de- 
monstrative, and that with the acute accent, to distinguish it from 
the relative particle ὡς. 

5. With the foregoing must be reckoned two other demonstra- 
tives, which in signification belong to the questions ποῦ; πόϑεν ; 
but in form depart entirely from the preceding analogy ; viz. 

ἔνϑα here, there; ἔνϑεν thence. 
They are both, at the same time, relatives (like ov and ὅϑεν), 
and common in. prose. 

6. The, demonstratives τηνίκα, ἔνϑα, ἔνϑεν, τῇ, and ὡς, are 
eapable of the twofold, strengthening, mentioned above, ὃ 79. 4, 
from which the demonstrative particles, most used in prose, have 
their origin, e. g. 


τηνίκα, τηνικάδε, τηνικαῦτα 

ἔνϑα ἐνϑάδε ἐνθαῦτα Ἰοη.---ἐνταῦϑα Att. 
, ἔγϑεν ἐνθένδε, ἐνθεῦτεν lon—évted Per Att. 

τῇ τῇδε ταύτῃ 

ὡς ὧδε οὕτως or οὕτω." 


2. The most-of these demonstratives with others, not included 
in these analogies, take, besides this, a demonstrative +, see ὃ 80. 
2. E.g. 


οὑτωςΐ, ἐντεύϑενί, ἐνθαδὶ, ὠδὶ 
vuvi from νῦν now, δευρὶ from δεῦρο hither. 
And the relatives, (like the adjectives above § 80.) for the sake of 
strengthening the idea of ἘΡΈΨΕΙΝ, assume 
οὖν and δήποτε, 


> 


* It is very obvious, that, as τῇ and w¢are derived from the proper 
demonstrative ὁ, i, 0, the strengthened form is derived from the 
strengthened demonstrative ὅδε. οὗτος. Ξ ! 


~ 


§ 117.] MUTATION OF PARTICLES. _ 235 


as ὁπουοῦν wheresoever, ὅὁπωςοῦν (and with the Geitvania tt, ὁπ- 
ωὠςτιοῦν), ὁπουδήποτε &C. 


Rem. 4. As the corresponding adjective forms (δ 79) create 
correlatives of still wider use, in appending their characteristic 
terminations to other general ideas, a8 aAo10¢, παντοῖος, &c. (see 
§ 79 Rem. 2.)—-so also it is with the adverbs; as ἄλλοτε another 
time, ἄλλῃ (in answer to the question πῆ) in another way ; πᾶν- 
τως, πάντη (in answer to πῶς, πῇ} inevery way, wholly ; αὐτοῦ, 
αὐτύϑιε (in answer to ποῦ, 200+) inthe same place, there, &c.—Very 
commonly ; are the adverbs of this kind, derived from ἄλλος, πολύς, 
πᾶς, and ἕκαστος, lengthened by the ‘insertion of ἄχ, as 

ἀλλαχοῦ elsewhere, πανταχϑῦ, πολλαχοῦ, in every place, in 
many places, 
meee 3 from every side, ἀλλαχη, &c 
egatives of most of these relative particles are also 
found ; from OTE and πώς, as from zig, by simple composition are 
formed οὔποτε, μήποτε hever, OVNWS, μήπως by no means. 

Most commonly however, the negatives are formed from the 

ancient adjective ovdauos, undapos, none, as 
οὐδαμῶς by no means, οὐδαμῆ; οὐδαμοῦ, οὐδαμόϑεν, ἃς. 


§ 117. MUTATION OF SOME OTHER PARTICLES. 


I. In the form. 

According to fixed principles, ov, ovx, οὐχ are interchanged 
for the sake of euphony, see ὃ 30. 5. In like manner ἐξ out of, is 
allowed to stand only before a vowel, or at the end of a clause, as 

ἐξ ἐμοῦ, ἐξ οὗ, κακῶν ἐξ. 
Before consonants it is changed into ἐκ, as 
ἐκ τούτου, ἔκ ϑαλάσσης, ἐκ γῆς. 

Rem. 1. That some particles, fof the sake of eupliony, have a 
moveable ν ot ¢ at the end, has been already remarked in § 30, 
as also the changes of σύν and é év in composition, § 25. 


Rem. 2. For οὐ not, and vai yés, we find, for the sake of gréat- 
er emphasis, οὐχί, vaizs, (δ 12 Rem. 4.) 


Rem. 3. Varieties of form, without any change of signification, © 


are the following, viz- 
ἐάν, ἤν, ἄν, ἐξ 
“σήμερον, Att. τήμερον to ἫΝ --χϑὲς and ἐχϑὲς yesterday. 
our, anciently ξύν, with—ei¢, lon. ἐς, ἐπ. > 


215 


286. FORMATION OF WORDS. ὁ [§ 118. 


ἐν, Ion. ἑνί, ἐπι; 566 also below no. a 

ἀεί, Ion. and Poet. αἰεί and αἰέν, always. 

ἕνεκα or ἕνεκεν, lon. εἵνεκα, εἵνεκεν, on account of. --ἔπειτα, 
lon. ἔπειτεν afterwards. 


Il. Change tn accent. ἢ 


Several dissyllable prepositions, with the accent on the last 
syllable, as παρά, ἀπό, περί, &c. undergo an anastrophe, as it is 
called, that is, they draw the accent back, in two cases, viz. 

1. When they stand after the noun they govern, as 
τούτου nége for περὶ τούτου 
ϑεῶν ano for ἀπὸ ϑεῶν. 

216 φ, When they are used instead of the forms of thé verb εἶναι 
compounded with them, (in which case, instead of. ἐν, the lonic 
évi is used even in the common dialect,) as 

ἐγὼ πάρα for πάρειμι 
ἔπι, évt, ὕπο, for ἔπεστι &c.* 


§ 118. ΟΡ THE FORMATION OF WORDS. 


1. The doctrine of the formation of words, as a subject of 

᾿ grammar, does not extend to all words. 'This, on account of the © 

obscurity attending the origin of language, is reserved for the 

particular investigation of etymology. It belongs to us here, 

to treat only of the formation of those words, which are derived 

from other words, according to a plain analogy, embracing whole 
classes of words. 

2. In this place we have to treat only of Verbs, Substantives, 
Adjecttves, and Adverbs ; since whatever might belong here res- 
pecting the other parts of speech, has already been discussed in 
former sections. 


* To speak more exactly, in all these cases the preposition stands 


v's ἐραρρθοίου he the accent being syne eg and the verb εἶναι being under- 
stoo 


“ 


ᾧ 119.] FORMATION OF WORDS. 237 


§ 119. DERIVATION BY TERMINATIONS. . 


I. Verbs. 


1. Those verbs only are here to be considered, which are de- 
rived from nouns (substantive and adjective). This derivation com- 
monly takes place by the terminations aw, ἕω, dw, sum, ao, 
ito, ave, ὑνω. 

2. These terminations take the place of the termination of the 
nominative, if the radical word foilows the first or second declen- 
sion, and in the third also if the nominative ends in a single vowel, 
or it¢ with a vowel preceding it; as τεμή τέμάω, πτερὸν πτερόω, 
ϑαῦμα Gavuatw, ἀληϑής ἀληϑεύω. In other words of the third 
declension they take the place of the genitive og, as κόλαξ κολα- 
κεύω, πῦρ πυρόω. 


Rem. 1. The words of the third declension ending in ας ag, 
ἐς. which take a consonant in the genitive, can be directl chang- 
ed only into kindred terminations of verbs (α and ας into aw, αἰνω, 
and ἐς into ({w), as ϑαῦμα ϑαυμάζω and ϑαυμαίνω., ἐλπίς nite. 
Every other termination is attached to the consonant of the geni- 
tive, as puyas φυγαδεύω, κρῆμα κρηματίζω. 


3. With regard to the signification of these terminations, we 
can here consider only the most common usage of the language, 
and enumerate the chief signification of the majority of the verbs 
of each termination. 


a) ἕω and <vw.—These verbs are formed from almost every 
termination, and chiefly express the condition or action of that 
~ which the radical word denotes, as κοίρανος ruler, κοιρανέω rule ; 
κοινωνός partaker, κουνωνέω partake ; δοῦλος slave, δουλεύω am a 
slave, serve; x0Aaé flatterer, κολακεύω Slatter ; ἀληϑής true, adn- 
ϑεύω am true (speak truly); βασιλεύς, βασιλεύω &c. most frequent- 
ly as intransitives; yet sometimes as transitives, as φίλος friend, 
φιλέω love. 

In general these two terminations are the common derivations, 
and are therefore used still farther for a variety of significations, 
which are also in part included in the terminations which fol- 
low; thus in particular, for the exercise of that which the radical 
word denotes, as πολεμεῖν, ἀϑλεῖν, πομπεύειν, χορεύειν, φυνεύειν, 
βουλεύειν. or for that to which it most naturally refers, as αὐλός 


938 FORMATION OF WORDS. [δ 119. 


flute, αὐλεῖν to play on the flute; ἀγορά assembly, ἀγορεύειν to ad- 
dress an assembly ; ἱππεύειν to ride on horseback, &c.—In particu- 
lar, the termination ἕω, the simplest of all, is used in most of those 
derivations, which arise from composition; as εὐτυχέω, ἐπιχεερέω, 
οἰχοδομέω, ἐργολαβέω, μνησικακέω &c. But in all cases these 
terminations are most commonly intransitive. 

b) aw.—These verbs are most naturally formed from words 
of the first declension in @ and ἡ, but also from others; and imply 
chiefly the possession of a thing or quality in an eminent degree, 
and the performance of an_ action ; as κόμη hair, χολή gall,—xo- 
μᾷν to have long hair, χολᾷν to have much gall (to be angry) ; λίπος 
fat, λιπᾷν to have fat (to be fat) ; Bon outcry, γόος lamenting, βοᾷν, 
your’ τόλμα boldness, τολμᾷν to be bold) Hence, transitively, the 
exercise of a thing towards others; as τέμή honour, τιμᾷν tive. to 
honour any one. 

c) 0w.—These verbs, formed for the most part from words of 
the second declension, express (1) The making or forming to that 
which the radical word signifies, as dovdow make a slave of, en- 
slave ; δῆλος known, δηλόω make known. (2) The manufacturing 
or working with the thing denoted by the radical word ; as χρυ- 
cow gild, μιλτόω paint with ochre (μίλτος), πυρόω put into fire, 
τορνόω make with the τόρνος. (3) The providing with the thing, 
as στεφανόω crown, TTEQOW give wings (πτερον), σταυρόω crucify 
&e. 

d) ἄξω and ‘¢w.—Verbs with the first termination come most 
naturally from words in ας 7, ας, &c. and for the sake of euphony 
from nouns with other endings. Verbs with both terminations, 
however, embrace so many relations, that they cannot be reduced 
to definite classes. Yet it deserves notice that, if they are formed 
from proper names of nations and men, they denote the adoption 
of the manners, the party, or the language of the same; as μηδί- 
Ceww to incline to the side of the Medes, éddevilew to speak Greek, 
δοριάξειν to speak the Doric, φιλυππίξευν to be of the party of Phil- 
Up. ἢ 
e) αἰνω and vyw.—The latter termination comes always from 
adjectives, and expresses the imparting of the quality of the ad- 
jective ; as 70uvevy to sweeten, σεμνύνειν to make venerable. And 
here it is to be observed, that those adjectives, of which the de- 
grees of comparison (ων, oro¢) appear to presuppose an ancient 
positive in vs, form the verbs in vyw after that positive, as aso- 
χρὸς (αἰσχίων from AIZX YZ) αἰσχύνω. So also μακρός, καλός, 
--μηκύνω, καλλύνω &c. The same signification often belongs to 
verbs in αἰνω, as λευκαίνειν to make white, κοιλαίνευν to hollow 
out &c. yet several of these have a neutral signification, as καλε- 
παίνειν, δυςχεραίνειν to grow angry &c. They also sometimes 
come from substantives, especially in μα, with different modifica- 


~ ~ 
- ! 
! 


§119.] | FORMATION OF WORDS. . 239 


ΣΤ 2 


tions of meaning; 6. g. σῆμα sign, σημαίνω signify ; δεῖμα fear, 
δειμαίνω I dread. : 

4. There is a particular method of forming verbs from nouns 
by merely changing their termination into ὦ, but the preceding 
syllable, according to the nature of the consonant, is strengthened 
in one of the ways described above in § 92. 


E. g. Thus from ποικίλος ποικέλλω, ἄγγελος ἀγγέλλω, καϑα- 
οὖς καϑαίρω, μαλακός μαλάσσω, φάρμακον φαρμάσσω, πυρετός 
πυρέσσω, χαλεπὸς χαλέπτω, &c. The signification is always that, 
which is most readily suggested by the radical word. 


5. Tothese must be added the following more limited classes 
᾿ τ derived forms of verbs. 


a) Desideratives, denoting a desire, and most commonly formed 
by changing the future in ow (of the verb cognate to the thing 
desired) into a present in σεέω, as γελασείω I should like to laugh, 
πολεμησείω desire war Kc. 

Another form of desideratives is that in aw or caw, properly 
from substantives, as ϑανατᾷν long for death, στρατηγεᾷν wish to 
be @ general ; also from verbs, by first forming substantives from 
them, as ὠνεῖσϑαε (ωνητής) ὠνητεᾷν to wish to buy; κλαίω (κλαῦ- 
σις) κλαυσίᾷν to be disposed to weep. 

b) Frequentatives in Cw, as dentate (from ῥίπτειν) to throw 
from one place to another, Mid. to throw one’s self this way and 
that, to be restless ; στενάζειν (from στένειν) to sigh much and deep- 
ly; so αἐτεῖν to demand, airilesy to beg ; ἕρπεεν to creep, ἑρπύξζεεν 
to creep slowly. 

᾿ Ὁ) Inchoatives in oxw, in part intransitive, as γενείασκω to get 
a beard, ἡβάσκω to grow to manhood, (the same as χενενάζω, 7- 
few); in part transitive, as sieGvoxw to intoxicate (from μεϑύω 
am intoxicated.) 


Il. Substantives. 


6. Substantives are derived from verbs, adjectives, and other 
substantives. 


A. Substantives derived immediately from verbs. 
With respect to these, we have to premise in general the fol- 
lowing remarks, viz. 
1) Those terminations which begin with o, follow the ana- 
logy of the future ; those which begin with » and z, the analogy 


‘ 


9.0. ΒΌΒΜΑΤΙΟΝ OF WORDS. [§ 119. 


of the perfect passive ; those which begin with a vowel, the ana- 
logy of the second perfect; even if the respective tense of the 
verb in question, is not in use. 

2) The terminations which begin with a vowel (as ἢ, ος, | 
év¢), are also formed from contract verbs in ἕω and ἄω in such a. 
. manner, that ¢ and @ are omitted (as φϑονέω, pPovoc); yet the 
smaller verbs are excepted, which cannot lose their vowel, as it 
belongs to the root, but only change it, as δέω, 607. 


Rem. 2. With reference to no. 1 next above, two particular re- 
marks are to be made, viz. 

a) The o which is to be inserted before mu and τ, is retained in 
words formed from verbs which have a lingual for their charac- 
teristic. Those formed from pure verbs (verba pura), on the con- 
trary, sometimes assume it and sometimes not, uninfluenced by 
the inflection of the verb. 

. b) In regard to the vowel, when o is not inserted, the analogy 
of the future is to be followed, and 6. g. ϑεατής, Pape, Suma, 
haye the vowel long, like ϑεάσομαι, vow, with few exceptions. 


7. To express the action or effect of the verb, there are chiefly 
~ the following terminations, viz. wos, uy or ua, OG, Olu, ἢ, ας OS 
masc. o¢ neut. 


a) μος, uy or “μή, uo.—These terminations may, it is true, ΟΝ 
compared with the perfect passive ; but those in “og commonly take 
the o, when a vowel precedes in the radical word; but the other 
two do not always, even when the perfect passive does ; and those 
which do not adopt the σ᾿ preserve the long vowel of the future, 
even where it is shortened in the perfect, (yet in such a manner 
that some of them vary between 7 and ¢,) e.g. τέϑημι (τέϑειμαι) 
--ϑέσμος, ϑέμα or Pyua’ δέω (Gebeperr)—deouse, δέμα, διαάδη- 
μα" γιγνώσκω (ἐγνωσμαι)--- γνώμη" λύω (λέλυμαι)---λῦμα. ΑΞ 
to their signification ; those in HOS properly denote the abstract, 
as πάλλω παλμὸς shaking to and fro, ὀδύρομαι ὀδυρμὸς lament- 
ing, λύζω (AvEw) λυγμὸς hiccupping, σείω σεισμός quaking —The 
termination ua, on the contrary, expresses rather the effect of the 
verb as a concrete, and even the object, so that it for the most 
part accords with the neuter perfect passive participle ; ; as πρᾶ- 
γμα (τὸ πεπραγμένον) the deed, μίμημα the imitation i. 6. the like- 
Ness, σπείρω (τὸ ἐσπαρμένον) σπέρμα the seed, &c. — The termi- 
nation “7 varies between the two; as μνήμη memory, ἐπιστήμη 
knowledge, τιμή honour,—oreyun a point, γραμμή the line, which 
in their signification have only a shadow of difference from ozi- — 
YUN a puncture, γράμμα a letter. 


~ 


δ 119.] FORMATION OF WORDS. 241 


b) σις, cia.—These denote the abstract of the verb, and very sel- 
dom deviate from this signification, as μέμησες the imitating, πρᾶξις 
the action, σκῆ Wes, &c.— δοκεμασία the examining, ϑυσία the sacri- 


Of the following the signification cannot be so accurately given; 
yet the idea of the abstract, is the prevailing one. 


c) ἢ and ας for the most part oxytone, as εὐγή prayer, from éU- 
χομαι og ayn slaughter, from σφάξω, fut. σφάξω" διδαχή doctrine, 
from διδάσκω, fut. -αξω" χαρά joy, from yaiow.— So also, with a 
change into the sound ὁ (after the manner of the second perfect), 
τομὴ from τέμνω, φϑορα from φϑείρω, &c.—Some also admit of 
a reduplication, which is similar to the Attic reduplication of the 
perfect, and always has an in the second syllable, as ἀγωγὴ 
leading from ἄγω, ἐδωδὴ food from ἔδω. 

Examples of paroxytones, are βλάβη hurt, from βλάπτω, βλά- 
Bor vixn victory, from vexae. 


éta.— To the class of paroxytones, also belong those nouns in 
eta which are formed from verbs in «vw by merely changing εὖ 
into «0, as παέδεία from παεδεύω. “These nouns have always a 
long ας and therefore have the acute on the ev. 


Rem. 4. Let the following rules be observed as to the accent of 
all nouns in eva, viz. 

Properispomena, are the feminines of adjectives in vs, as 
ἡδύς, ἡδεῖα. 

Proparoxytona. 1) The abstract nouns from adjectives in 
NS, as ἀλήϑεια, see no. 10. a.— 2) The feminines of mas- 
culines in evs, as ἱέρεια priestess, see no. 12. c. 4. ᾿ 

Paroxytona, are the above mentioned abstract nouns from 
verbs in évm. 


d) ος masc. as τύπος blow, impression, from τύπτω. But by far 
the most have in the chief syllable an o, either by nature or in ex- 
change for ¢, as κρότος clapping, from κροτέω" φϑόνος envy, from 
φϑονέω" hoyos speech, from λέγω" ῥόος (6 ῥοῦς) from δέω. 

To these may be added the substantives in τος, which are com- 
monly oxytone, as ἀμητὸς mowing, reaping, κωκυτὸς wailing. 


e) ὃς neut. as τὸ ) κῆδος care, from κήδω" λάχος lot, from λαγχα- 
vo πρᾶγος, the same as πράγμα, &c. These verbals never have 
an 0 in the chief syllable; hence τὸ μέρος part, from ME/PR. 

8. The subject of the verb, as male, is designated by the fol. 
lowing terminations, viz. 


31 


͵ 


242 FORMATION OF WORDS. [§ 119. 


a) TNS, THO, τωρ. --- Of these the termination τῆς following the 
first declension is the most common, and the words are partly oxy- 
tone, partly paroxytone, as ἀϑλητής combatant from αϑλέω, μα- 
ϑητής scholar from μαϑεῖν, ϑεατής spectator from ϑεάομαι, δικα- 
στής from δικάζω, κριτής from χρένω, &c. On the other hand, 
#vBeovyrns pilot from xvBeovaw, πλάστης (from πλάττω, πέπλα- 
σται), δυνάστης, ψάλτης &e. 

‘The terminations t79 and τῶρ are less frequent forms, as ow- 
τήρ saviour, ῥήτωρ orator (from σαύω and “PL S2). 
᾿Βὴ evs, as γραφεύς writer, φϑορεύς destroyer. 

Cc) 0g, for the most part only in composition, as ζωγράφος »αϊηί- 
er, πατροχτονος a patricide, Kc. 

4) ης and ας, Gen. ov. Only in some cases of composition, as 
μυροπώλης vender of ointments, τρεηράρχης (and -0¢) captain of a 
galley, ὀρνεϑοϑήρας fowler, &e. 


9. The names of instruments and other οὔσαιν belonging to an 
action, are formed from or after the preceding names of the sub- 
ject, viz. 

a) τήριον, τρον, TEE (from the terminations of the subject τῆς 
or TYQ), as λουτήριον bathing tub, λοῦτρον. water for bathing, bath, 
ἀκροατήριον a place to hear in, auditory, ξύστρα curry-comb, 004N- 
orga place for dancing. 

b) εἴον (from the termination evs), as κουρεῖον barber's shop from 
κουρεὺς barber and this from κείρειν to shear, τροφεῖον the recom- 
pense for being educated from τροφεύς, Kc. Ὧν 


Β. Substantives derived from adjectives. 


10. This is also a principalclass of substantives, which serve 
chiefly to express the abstract of the abjective. 'To this class be- 
long the following terminations, viz. 


a)¢ ta, always with long α (Ion. ἢ)» aS σοφὸς wise, σοφία wis- 
dom ; in like manner, κακία, δειλία, &c. βλακία stupidity from 
βλάξ &c. 

From this termination arose the nouns in ᾿ 


é4a@ and ove 


by contraction ; the ἃ is here short, and the accent is on the an- 
tepenult; the former come from adjectives i in ἧς, 606, as ἀλήϑεια 
truth from ἀληϑής, the latter from adjectives in ous, as ἄνοια want 
of sense from ἄνους. 

b) της fem. G. τητος, as toorns equality from ἔσος, παχύτης 
thickness from παχύς. They are generally paroxytones. 


c) -σύνη, as δικαιοσύνη, most frequently from adjectives in 
? 


8119. ζ FORMATION OF WORDS. 243 


ων, G. ονος, as σωφροσύνη discretion from σώφρων, ονος. Those 
which have the fourth syllable from the end short, take an » in 
the antepenult, as ἀγαϑωυσύνη (compare the same rule in the com- 
parison by τέρος, τατος). 

d) o¢ neut. chiefly from adjectives in vs, as βάϑος depth from 
Badus, τάχος swiftness from ταχύς. 


Ὁ Substantives derived from other substantives. 
11. Among these, some terminations are first to be mentioned 
which are formed after the analogy of the verbals, viz. 


a) Masculines in τῆς (of which all those in ἑτῆς have long +) 
often signify a man in some relation with the subject which the 
radical word denotes, as πολίτης citizen from πόλιες city, ὁπλίτης 
an armed man from ὅπλον weapon, ἱππότης horseman from ἵππος. 
φυλέτης one of the same tribe from φυλή. 

b) In like manner those in EUS, as ἱερεύς priest from ἱερόν tem- 
ple (or τὸ ἱερά sacrifices), youneus, ἁλιεύς, Jisherman, from γρίῖπος 
net, GAG sea ; youupaters, Kc. 

c) Those in εἴον particularly denote a place devoted to an ob- 
ject, as Movosioy &c. see no. 9 above. 


12. The rest may be reduced to the following divisions, viz. 


a) Those which designate a place where certain objects exist 
in numbers; such are those in wy, G. aves, masc. and -wyvia, as 
ἀμπελών wineyard, ὁοδωνία rose bed, ἀνδρών hall for men. 

b) Amplificatives in wy, νὸς (masc.) as γάστρων he who has a 
large belly, &c. 

c) Feminine appellations, viz. 

(1) teva, τρία and revs, G. τρόδος, properly from masculines 
in ry@ and τωρ; yet also from masculines in τῆς, as owrecoa a fe- 
male deliverer, ὀρχήστρεα a dancing girl, αὐλητρίς a female player 
on the flute (masc. ὀρχηστής, αὐλητὴς.) 

(2) ἐς, G. ἐδος, is the most common termination, which takes the 
place of that of the masculine in ἧς and ας of the first declension ; as 
δεσπότης master, δεσπότις mistress ; ἱκέτης suppliant, ἱκέτις" Σκύ- 
Ons, Σκύϑις μυροπώλης vender of ointments, μυρόπωλις. 

(3) ave, chiefly from the masc. in wy, as ϑεράπων (οντος), 
ϑεράπαινα maid servant; λέων (ovros), λέαννα lioness ; τέκτων 
(ovos), τέχταινα a female artisan ; also from some nouns in 0¢, as 
06, ϑέαινα goddess. 

(4) eva, fromsome masculines in EUG, as ἱέρεια priestess from ἱε- 
θεύς, &c. 

(5) oa, from several terminations in the third declension, as 
βασίλισσα from βασιλεύς, ἄνασσα from ovat, Αἰλισσαὰ from Ki- 
ME, Θρῆσσα (Att. Θρᾷτταν) from Ooré or Θρᾷξ. 


᾿ 244 | FORMATION OF WORDS. [ὁ 119. 


d) Diminutives, as follows, viz. 

(1) voy or ἐον (zo), which is the chief termination, as eer 
a small boy, σωμάτιον a little body, δάκιον from τὸ ῥάκος rag, &¢ 
—To strengthen this diminutive form, this termination is often. 
lengthened by a syllable, especially in -ἰδέον and -agvov, as πενακί- 
dvov from πίναξ tablet, παιδάριον from παῖς. 

Rem. 4. Several words in soy have entirely lost their diminu- 
tive signification, as ϑυρίος beast from ὁ Ono, βιβλίον book from 
ἡ Blog 

2 ioxos, ioxn, as στεφανίσκος, παιδίσκη. 
(3) é¢ Gen. ἰδὸς and tdos, always feminine, as ϑεραπαινίς 
(from ϑεράπαινα), σκουνίς, dos, from σχοῖνος rope &c. 

(4) ὑλος (rather Doric) as Δρωτύλος from ” Lows. 
~ 4S) wevs used only of the young of animals, as ἀἐτεδεύς from 
aeros. 


f) Gentilia, i. 6. names designating one’s country. These are 
artly mere adjectives of three terminations, in vos, αἴος, νος, κος 
tie below), and partly substantives. 

A. Masculine, viz. 

(1) dens, warns, εὥτης, 85 ABdngirns, περῥονή εν Σπαρ- 
τιάτης, Σικελιώτης. 

(2) evs, as Atohevs, Φωκεύς Phocian, “ωριεύς, Meyagevs from 
“Μέγαρα, Ταντινεύς from “]ααντίνεια, Πλαταιεὺς from Πλάταια, 
Φωκαιεύς, better Φωκαεύς, Phocaean, from Φώκχαια, EvBoevs 
from Ev Bove. 

B. Feminine. These either do but change (see c. 2, above) 
the 7¢ of the masculine termination into ἐς, as Σπαρτιᾶτις, 2U- 
βαρῖτες &c. — or they annex the terminations ἐς and a¢ in the 
manner that the euphony of the radical word may require, as 
Aiolis, Anois, Meyavis, Φωκίς, Φωκαΐς, Anhiag (from “1ῆλος). 
All these names, according as γυνή or γῆ is understood, are used 
of a woman and of the country. 


g) Patronymics. 

A. Masculine. Here the terminations are the following, viz. 

( 1) ions, άδης, άδης, Gen. ov, the most common forms, of which 
that in tOng is derived from the greatest number of terminations, 
while that in adye¢ is used only 1 in nouns of the first declension in 
ας and 7S, as Κρόνος Kgovidns, Kexoow Kexgonions, * Ahevas - 
᾿“λευάδης, “ππότης “πποτάδης. The termination eadyg comes 
chiefly from names in tog, as Mevoizcog Mevorriadng, but is also 
attached to many other nouns which have a long syllable before 
the patronymic termination, as Φερητιάδης from Φέρης, ros, 
Tehapwrviadns, ᾿ 4βαντιαδὴς &c. 

(2) ἑων Gen. wvog (seldom ovos), commonly with a long ὁ, is a 
more rare form in use with the former, as Keovimy from Keoves, 
᾿Αἰκτορίων from” Autwe, 0006. 


* 


[5 119. FORMATION OF WORDS. 245 


Rea. 5. Patronymics from nouns in evg and κλης have origi- 
nally <’0y¢,-and hence in the common language by contraction 
eidns, as Τ]ηλείδης, Τυδείδης, from Πηλεύς, Τυδεύς" “Hoaxheidngs 
from “Hoaxing. The same is true with regard to the termina- 
tion tay, as “7]ελείων.---80 also o with ὁ is contracted in Tlav@oi- 
dns, Anroidns, from Πάνϑοος (av Sous), “ητώ, dog, Latona. 

B. Feminine. These in general correspond with the mascu- 
line terminations, and for the forms in ἰδής, ἄδης, we have the 
feminine in ἐς and ac, as Τανταλίς, ᾿“τλαντίς, Θεστιάς. For the 
masculines in {dns we have the feminines i in i$, as Nnonis. For 
those in iwy, we have others in cwvy and ivy, as ᾿Ακρισιώνη, "Au 
δρηστίνη. 


III. Adjectives. 


13. Of adjectives which clearly have the mark of analogical 
derivation, by far the most terminate in os, and here it is the 
preceding letter or letters which are to be taken into account. 


a) «0g is one of the most general terminations, of which it can 
only be said, that it comes immediately only from nouns, and that 
it signifies something belonging to the subject, having respect to 
it, or proceeding from it, &c. as οὐράνιος, ποτάμιος, φόνιος, ἕσ- 
πέριος &c.—By means of it a new adjective is also sometimes 
formed from an adjective in o¢, as ἐλεύϑερος free, ἐλευϑέριος lib- 
eralis, becoming the free ; καϑαρὸς pure, καϑάριος cleanly, &.— 
From this ἐος, by attaching the ὁ to a preceding vowel, are formed 
the new terminations 

GL0G, EL0G, O05, MOS, 


as ἀγοραῖος from ἀγορά, ‘ASnvaios from ᾿ϑῆναι, ϑέρεεος from 
ϑέρος Gen. ἐος summer ; αἰδοῖος, ἠοῷς, from αἰδὼς Gen. 00g, ἠώς 
Gen. gos. Yet usage has sometimes made one of these termina- 
tions more particular in its signification and more expressive ; as 
πάτριος relating to fathers, ancestors, country, in general; πατρῷος 
relating to the father. 

In particular, the termination ¢zo¢ is in use as a mode of deri- 
vation from such words as denote definite classes or individuals of 
living beings, as ἀνϑρώπειος human, γυναίκειος &c. next, of all 
classes of animals ; and in particular it is the most common form 
of the derivation from proper names of persons, where the termi- 
nation admits of its use, as Ὁμήρειος, ᾿Επικούρειος, ΤΠυϑαγό- 
9200s, Ευριπίδειος δες. 

b) ¢0¢ signifies for the most part only the subject, from which 
any thing is made, and is contracted into ov¢, see ὃ 60. 2. 

c) 0¢ is to be understood in a manner quite as general as 10s, 
and extends also to verbs (as yougexds ‘belonging to painting, 
ἀρχιχός governing Ὡς.) The most common form is exc, and if 


240 FORMATION OF WORDS. δ 119, 


αὐ precedes, we ‘usually find the form αἴκός, as τροχαϊκός from 
τροχαῖος. From words in ug is formed -vxos, as ϑηλυκός from 
ϑήλυς womanly. So also -απὸς from the terminations which are 
preceded by an ¢, as ᾿Ολυμπία, Ἴλιος, τ: ᾿Ολυμπιακός, ᾿]λεακός" 
σπονδεῖος, σπονδειοακύς. Yet the termination ἑφακός. (like adn) 
is often used without having an ὁ PRRCAAES as Κορινϑιακὸς from 
Koow9 os. 

d) vog is a more ancient passive termination (like τός, réos) ; 
hence δεόνός dreadful, σεμνὸς (from σέβομα,) venerable, στυγνός᾽ 
hated &c. 

ives as proparoxytone almost always denotes a material, as 
ξύλινος of wood, λίϑενος &c. A single-case is ἀνϑρώπενος, as ex- 
tensive in its meaning as ἀνϑρώπειος. —As an oxytone it forms 
adjectives from words expressing ideas of time, as jueouvos from 

ἡμέρα. χϑεσινός of yesterday, from χϑες. 

πεδινός and the words in -εινός show a fullness, or something 
prevailing throughout, as médevos entirely plain, ὀρευνὸς mountain- 
ous, εὐδεινὸς entirely serene, &c. 

10S, ἄνος, ηνός, are merely names of nations &c. as Tagen: 
τίνος, ᾿Ασιανός, Toulivavos, Κυζικηνός. &c. 

e) λος is a more ancient active termination; hence devAog he 
who fears. 'The lengthened terminations ηλὸς and whos, which sig- 
nify an inclination or habit, are the most common, as ἀπατηλὸς 
deceptive, ὁμαρτωλός he who easily errs, habitually sins, &c. 

Γ) ἐμὸς is found only in verbals, chiefly denoting fitness for 
use both actively and passively, and is attached to the radical 
word according to very different analogies, as χρήσιμος (from 
χράομαι) fit to be used, τρόφιμος nutritious, ϑανάσιμος mortal, m0- 
τόμος fit to be drank. 

8) οὖς, ἐρῦς, nods, chiefly express the idea of full of, as οἶκ- 
τοῦς full of grief, φϑονερὸς full of envy, νοσερὸς sickly. 

h) αλέος signifies nearly the same, as ϑαῤῥαλέος bold, from 
ϑάρῥος confidence, δευμαλέος fearful, ψωραλέος scabby. 

4) τὸς and réo¢, see ὃ 102. 


14. The other adjective terminations are the following, viz. 


a) ég Gen. evros, as yagiers full of grace, ὑλήεις full of woods, 
πυρόεις full of fire, EVOMELS of doubtful signification, from εὐρύς 
or evows. 

We have already seen that those in ἥξεις and εις admit of a 
contraction, § 41 Rem. 3. § 62 Rem. 2. 

b) ης, ἐς, Gen. ove, are for the most part contractions (see § 
130) ; yet there comes from them the particular termination wong, - 
odes, Gen. ovg, properly with a change in the accent from 
-οειδὴς (from εἶδος form, manner), as σφηκωδὴς wasp-like, γυναι- 
κώδης womanlike ; commonly denoting full of, especially by way 


ᾧ 119.] - FORMATION OF WORDS. 247 


of reproach, as ψαμμώδης, αἱματώδης, ἰλυώδης, full of sand, blood, 
slime. Ὶ ‘ 

~¢) wor Gen. ovos, verbals after the analogy of the substan- 
tives in we, and in part-formed from these ; for the most part sig- 
nifying the active quality suggested by the verb, as νοήμων from 
νοεῖν intelligent, πολυπράγμων from πολὺς and πρᾶγμα or πρατ- 
rewv, one who makes for himself much business &c. ἐπυλήσμων for- 


getful. 
Finally, a multitude of adjectives are formed merely by con- 
traction, of which we shall treat in the following section. 


~1V. Adverbs. 


15. Besides the simple method of forming adverbs by changing 
the termination of the declension of the adjective into ὡς (see 
§ 115), there are the following particular terminations of adverbs, 
viz. ; ἢ 

a) ¢ οὗ εἰὄ. These denote a circumstance connected with the 
action which the proposition expresses.—The verbals in particu- 
lar terminate in τί or téi, which are attached exactly after the 
manner of the termination τός, as ὀνομαστὶ by name, ἀγελαστὶί 
without laughing ; ἀνεδρωτέ without sweating, without toil ; axnov- 
“tel without announcing. — From this, and from what was said 
above (in no. 3. d) of verbs in ἐζω, comes the signification of adverbs 
in ori, viz. after the manner, custom, language of a nation, a class, 
an individual, as ἑλληνεστί after the Greek manner, in the Greek lan- 

e, γυναυχεστί after the manner of women ; so avdganodzori, βο- 
ἐστί &c. 

Those formed from nouns have merely ὦ or εἰ added to the 
termination of the declension; as éxovti willingly, mavdnusi as a 
whole nation, that is, with united force ; ἀμαχεὶ without contest, av- 
τοχειρὶ with one’s own hand. 

b) δὴν belongs to verbals of nearly the same signification as the 
preceding, the termination being attached partly after the manner 
of the termination τὸς (yet with the necessary change of the char- 

- acteristic of the verb, and never with σὴ), as συλλήβδην collectively, 
that is, on the whole, in general ; κρύβδην secretly, βάδην by steps, 
ἀνέδην loosely, without fear, (from avinue, averoc); partly in the 
form adny attached to the radical word with a change of the vow- 
el into 0, as σποράδην scattered, προτροπάδην (φεύγειν) directed 
forwards, without turning round, &c. 
_¢) dov, ἤδον, are chiefly derived from nouns, and relate for 
the most part to external form and character, as ἀγεληδὸν in herds, 
. Borovder like grapes, πλινϑηδὸν (from πλίνθος) laid like tiles, κυ- 


248 COMPOSITION OF WORDS. [Ὁ 120. 


yndov like a dog. — If they are verbals, they agree with those in 
δὴν, as πάρα before men, openly. 

d) &,a rare form, which is chiefly made by means of a pala- 
tic already in the radical word, and has a general adverbial signi- 
fication, as ἀναμέξ mixed together, sited παραλλὰξ alter- 

nately. 


Δ 120. DERIVATION BY COMPOSITION. 


1. The first part of every composition is either a noun, or a 
verb, or a particle, either changeable or inseparable. 

2. If the first word is a noun, its termination is commonly in 0, 
which, however, when the second word begins with a vowel, usu- 
ally suffers elision. E. g. 

λογοποιός, παιδοτρίβης, σωματοφύλαξ, ἰχϑυοπώλης (from 
ἰχϑύς, vos), δικογράφος (from δίκη). 
νομάρχης from νόμος and ἄρχω, παιδαγωγός from παῖς and 
ἀγωγή, καχέξία from κακὸς and ἕξις. 
Yet in most cases where v οὗ ὁ is in the termination of the noun, 
no 0 is adopted; 6. g. evdvdexos, πολυφάγος, πολέίπόρϑος, from 
εὐϑύς, πολύς, πόλις. 

The same is true after ov and av; e.g. βουφόρβος, ναμμαζία, 
from βοῦς, ναῦς. 

Frequently also after y, as μελαγχολία, μελάμπεπλος, from μέ- 
λας, ανος" naugayos, from πᾶς, παντός. 


Rem. 1. The ὁ sometimes keeps its place before vowels, as μη-- 
νοειδής, μενοεικής., ἀγαϑοεργος. Yet in words compounded with 
ἔργον or EPT'S2, the o is commonly contracted with the δ, as δη- 
peovoyos from δήμιος and HPTS. 

Rem. 2. An proceeds either from the Attic, or from the con- 
tracted forms of declension, as νεωκόρος (from 0 vEWs), ὁ ὀρεωκό- 
nos (from ὀρεύς, G. ὀρέως), χρεωφάγος (from χρέας G. αος, ws). 
—From γη the earth we have in all contractions yew-, as yewyga- 
gos, instead of °40- from the ancient form I°44, see § 26 Re- 
mark 7. 

Rem. 3. Some in wa, G. aroc, often change their a into 0, or 

Jose it by elision, as aiuoorayns, στομαλγία, from αἷμα, στόμα. 

Rem. 4. In some contractions, especially such as are poetical, 
the form of the dative singular or the dative plural in chosen for 
composition, a8 πυρίπνους, νυκτιπόρος, γαστρίμαργος, ὀρευνόμος 


ᾧ 120.] COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 249 


{from ὄρος, £0¢), ναυσιπόρος, ἐγχεσίμωρος. The very common 
form in ἐφ (from os, G. ¢0¢), is a contraction of the last form, as 
τελεςφύοος, σακξοπαλος, from τὸ τέλος, σάκος. 

3. If the first word is a verb, its termination is most common- 
ly formed in ¢ with the characteristic of the verb ne ar 2a or 
in σέ, 6. g. 

ἀρχέκακος from ἄρχειν, σι θυ ῥοῦ from δάκνω, ἔδακον. 
λυσίπονος from λύω, τρεψίχρως from τρέπω, ἐγερσίχορος 
from ἐγείρω. 

Here too the vowel is struck out before another vowel, as φέ- 
ρασπις, δίψασπις, &c. 


Rem. 5. The cases are more rare, in which ¢ is used without 
6, as in many from ayer, as ἀὐχεϑέωρος, or in which the verb 
assumes an 0, as in the case of those from λείπειν, as λειποταξιον. 


4. The indeclinable words remain unchanged in composition, 
with the exception of the changes which follow from the general 
rules, and such as in the case’of prepositions are effected by eli- . 
sion (ὃ 29. 2); as ἀγχίαλος from ἄγχε and ais" παλαιγενής from 
noha ἀναβαίνω, ἀνέρχομαι, from ave ἐξέρχομαι, ἐκβαίνω, from 
é& ἐμβαίνω from év" mooayo, περίάγω, (δ 29: 2.) 

Rem. 6. The preposition πρὸ sometimes submits to a contrac- 
tion, as προύχω, προῦπτος, for προέχω, προοπτος. Especially is 
this the case with the augment, as προυδωκα for προέδωκα. 

Rem. 7. In the preposition περί, elision does not take place. 
So also, sometimes, in augi, as ἀμφίαλος, ἀμφίετες, from ag, 
ἔτος. 

Rem. 8. In dividing the syllables, the rule is, that if the pre- 
position ends in a consonant, this consonant in the division belongs 
to the first syllable ; therefore εἰς- ἔρχομαι; προς- ἄγω, ἔν-- υδρος, 
ἐξ-- ἐρχομαι. . But if the consonant in the preposition begins the 
second syllable, it does the same even when the vowel suffers eli- 
sion in the composition, as πα-- ράγω, a- παιτεῖν. 

5. Of the inseparable particles the most important are dug-, 
which denotes difficulty, hardship, and the like, (as dug@aro¢ 
Aman to tread on, dugdatuovia contrary fate,) and the so called 

a privativum, 
which is directly negative like the English im- and wn-, and the 


32 


280 | COMPOSITION OF WORDS. __ [5 121. 


Latin in-, as ἄβατος impassable, ἄπαις. childless. Before a vowel 
this « commonly takes v, as ἀναίτιος innocent from αἰτία. 

Rem. 9. Yet several words beginning with a vowel, assume 
only an ἃ, as ἀήττητος, ἄοινος &e. Hence it is subjected to con- 
traction, as in ἄκων unwillingly for ἀέκων, ἀργὸς idle, at leisure, 
with a change in the accent from ἄεργος. 

_ 6. In all compositions, if the second word begins with @, be- 
fore which there is a short vowel, this @ according to § 21. 2, is 
usually doubled, as ἐσορῥεπής from ἔσος and genw, megup dew, a- 
πόῤῥητος, ἀῤδητος from a and ῥητός. | . 

7. We have already seen (δ 25) in what cases the v, especial- 
ly of the prepositions ἐν and σύν, remains in the composition un- 
changed, or passes into another consonant, or is dropped altogeth- 
er. 


ται 


eR aa gee 19}; 


1. The form of the last part of a compounded word decides, 
whether the whole word is a verb, a noun, or a particle. 

2. The most frequent compounded form of verbs, is that in 
which the verb remains unchanged, and preserves its own inflec- 
tion with the augment and termination. Strictly speaking this 
takes place only with the common prepositions, ἀμφί, ava, ἀντί, 
ἀπό, διά, εἰς, ἐν, ἐξ, ἐπί, κατὰ, μετά, παρά, περί, MOO, πρός, σύν, 
ὑπέρ, ὑπό. Every similar union of the unchanged verb with real 
adverbs and other parts of speech, is considered merely as juxta- 
position of words, and they are therefore commonly written sep- 
arately, aS εὖ πράττειν, κακῶς ποιεῖν. 

3. With other words besides these prepositions, and with all 
the particles which are always inseparable, verbs can be com- 
pounded only by submitting to a change in their own form; that 
is, there arise peculiar compouaier verbal forms with termina- 
tions of derivation, as ἕω, aw &c. and here a noun, compounded 
in a manner to be shown below (no. 4) usually lies at the foun- 
dation; as from ἔργον and λαμβάνω comes ἐργολάβος, and from 
this ἐργολαβεῖν. from εὖ and ἔρδω (EPI) comes εὐεργέτης ben- 


>. 


"Ὁ 191. COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 95] 


~— — 


efactor and hence εὐεργετεῖν to do good; from δὺς and ἀρέσκω 
comes δυφάρεστος dissatisfied, δυςαρεστεῖν to be displeased ὅτε. and 
when instead of φείδεσθαι to spare, the negative idea not to spare, 


_ to neglect, with a privative is required, ἀφειδεῖν is formed from 


the adjective aeons. ι 


Rem. 1. [{ in such ΤΣ ὁ words the verb appears un- 
changed, the cause lies in an accidental coincidence between the 
derived termination and that of the radical verb, as wovew make, 
pehonocos, ushonoven make songs. In like manner μυροπωλέω 
comes not from μύρον. and πωλέω, but from μυροπώλης, ἀφρονέω 
not from @- and φρονέω, but from ἄφρων Gen. ovog &c. 

Rem. 2. In the same way verbs are sometimes compounded 
with prepositions, as ἀντιβολεῖν from ἀντέβολος, compounded of 
ἀντί and βάλλω. 


4. Substantives are seldom so compounded as themselves to 
remain the leading idea unchanged; thus ξένος the guest, πρόξε- 
voc the public or the nation’s guest ; ὁδός the way, coming, σύνοδος 
the coming together. Adjectives, on the contrary, by this kind of 
composition may be simply modified in signification, as πέστος trust- 
worthy, ἄπιστος not trustworthy ; φίλος dear, ὑπέρφελος exceedingly 
dear. 

' Rem. 3. « When an abstract substantive, as t¢u7 honour for ex- 
- ample, is to, te made negative in its signification (dishonour), an ad- 
jective, as ἄτιμος, is commonly first formed, and from this a new 
substantive azzulu (see no. 7.) 

5. In most compounded nouns, of which the last word-is an 
unchanged noun or came from a noun, this indicates only the near 
or remote object of the proposition, which is contained in the 
whole, as δεισιδαίμων (from AE/R and δαίμων the divinity) one 
who fears the gods, ἄπαις he who has no child, childless, μακρόχειρ 
he who has a long hand, ἄποικος he who is removed from his own 
home, an exile &c.—So also, with the assumption of a particular 
termination of declension, τρεχέδειπνος (from τρέχω and δεῖπνον) 
he who runs after feasts, εὐθύδικος he who exercises direct right 
(δίκη), ἄτιμος he who is deprived of honour, dishonoured, κακοήϑης 
he who has a bad character (Ἶϑος), φιλοχρήματος he who loves mo- 
ney (χρῆμα, χρήματα.) &c. 


, 


252 COMPOSITION OF WORDS. [§ 121’ 


ott 


6. Yet most frequently, when a compounded noun is formed 
by the aid of a verb, the verb takes the last place, and receives 
the termination of a noun; and then the preceding word contains 
either the definite idea or the object of the action of the verb; 
as ἐργολάβος he who undertakes a work, ἱπποτρόφος he who nour- 
ashes horses. 'The simple termination o¢ is in compositions of this 
sort the most common; besides this we have for substantives the 
terminations ἧς and ἂς of the first declension (see the examples 
δ 119. 8. d); and for adjectives, 7¢ of the third, as εὐμαϑῆς he 
who learns well ; also the other terminations of nouns, mentioned 
in § 119. 8, as νομοϑέτης from νόμος and τίϑημι, το. 

7. From all such first compositions, other words are again form- 
ed by derivation, as ariuia, δεισιδαιμονία, νομοϑεσία, vomodert- 
%0¢ &c. and in like manner the compounded verbs mentioned in 
no. 3, as ἱπποτροφέω from ἱπποτρόφος, εὐπαϑέω from εὐπαϑής, 
&c. 

8. Among the changes which sometimes take place in the se- 
cond word in the composition, it is particularly to be observed, 
that the words which begin with short ας or with ¢ and 0, very fre- 
quently assume an 7 or ὦ ; yet this does not apply to verbs com- - 
pounded with prepositions in the manner described in no. 2, but 
does apply to the nouns derived from the same, and also to verbs 
compounded in the second manner (no. 3); as ὑπήκοος obedient 


from ὑπακούω" κατήγορος accuser, κατηγορέω to accuse (from 


κατὰ and ἀγορὰ, ἀγορεύων; εὐήνεμος from ἄνεμος, δυςήλατος from 
ἐλαύνω, ἀνώμοτος from ὄμνυμι, &c. Those from ὄνομα, more- 
over, change the second 0 into v, as ἀνώνυμος, εὐώνυμος &c. 
9. In relation to the accent, the general rule is, that the ac- 
cent of the simple word (according to the established analogy § 
23. 2. a.) is thrown by composition as far back as the nature of 
the accent will permit. So e. g. from τέκνον, ϑεῦς, we have 


grhotexvos, giiodeos from ὁδός, σύνοδος from παῖς παιδὸς 


comes ἄπαις ἀπαύδος" from riuy, ἄτιμος" from ἑταῖρος, παρϑέ- 
νος, come φυλέταερος, εὐπάρϑενος" from παύδευτός come ἀπαίδευ- 
τος, δυρπαίδευτος &c. 


™ 


5 121.] - COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 253 


— 
‘on 


Rem. 4. Words which are not themselves ‘hid but are 
derived from compounded words, follow in their accent the gen- 
eral analogy of their terminations ; thus the abstract verbals in 7 
and a, as συλλογή, προςφορᾶ, from συλλέγω, προςφφέρω. So too 
from ἄδικος, ἀδικεῖν. comes αδικητικός" from παροξύνω παροξυ- 
σμός" from mgosdoxev, προφδοκητός. But when compositions are 
again made from these, the accent is thrown back, as ἀπροσδό- 

« κητος. 

Rem. 5. Compounded words of which the first half is formed 
from a noun, the second from a transitive verb, with the simple 
termination ος (not τος, voc, and the like) usually have, when 
their signification is active, the accent on the verb; but when pas- 
sive, on the syllable preceding the verb. E. g. 


λιϑοβόλος throwing stones. 
λιϑόβολος thrown at with stones. 


τ 


PART IL. 


-------. 


SYNTAX. 


- § 122. 


1. The syntax teaches the use of the parts of speech, whose 
formation has been shown in the preceding part of the grammar, 
in the following order, viz. noun, verb, particle, as stated above § 31. 
2. We shall accordingly treat of, ist. The noun in itself, and 
connected with other kindred forms; 2d. The noun in connex- 
ion; 3d. The verb; 4th. Particles; 5th. Phrases and construc- 
tions of a more complicated character. , 


ᾧ 123. THE NOUN.’ 


1. Every thing joined to the substantive of the nature of an 
adjective—whether adjective, participle, pronoun, or article— 
must agree with it in gender, number, and case. | 

Remark. In the Attic dialect, however, the feminine dual com- 
monly is joined with masculine adjectives, a aS ἄμφω τούτω TH pé- 
γάλω πόλεε, for ἄμφω ταύτα τὰ μεγάλα πόλεε. 

2. I'he adjective is often found. without any substantive, with 
which it may agree, the substantive having been omitted, or being 
easy to be supplied by the mind. In this case the adjective is said 
to be used substantively. E. g. ὁ σοφός the wise man, ἡ ἄνυδρος, 
sc: γῆ the desert, ἡ 0007 sc. ὁδός the straight road, oi πολλοί the mul- 
titude, ra ἐμὰ my property. So also the pronouns οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, 
τίς, &c. 


§ 124. THE PREPOSITIVE ARTICLE. 


1. When the substantive is represented as a definite object, it 
regularly takes the prepositive article 0, 77, τό, the. 


- 


§ 125.] ARTICLE. : 255 


| 2. The indefinite article of modern languages is not expressed 

in Greek. When, however, an indefinite object is to be distinctly 
pointed out as an individual, the pronoun τὶς, ri, is made use of. 
E. g. γυνή τις ὄρνιν εἶχεν a certain woman had a hen. 

3. Proper names receive the article, as ὁ Swxgarns, ai 
᾿“ϑῆναι. At is however very often omitted, and always, when a 
more precise distinction with an article follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ 
φιλόσοφος. 

Rem. 1. The Greeks use the article in many cases where the 
modern languages do not, and also often omit it, although the ob- 
ject is definite—With possessive pronouns, however, the use is in- 
variable ; thus σὸς δοῦλος, (like δουλός cov) can mean only a 
slave of thee ; 6 σὸς δοῦλος (like 0 δοῦλός cov) means thy slave. 

Rem. 2. In the older dialect, ὁ, 7, τὸ was rather a demonstra- 
tive pronoun (see below δ 126), and the substantives for the most 
part stood without the article, where we use the, as they do al- 


ways in Latin. The more recent common dialect also frequently 
omits it. 


§ 125. 


1. The article is very often divided from its substantive, not 
only by the adjective, (as ὁ μέγας βασιλεύς the great king, οἱ 
ὑπάρχοντες νόμου the existing laws,) but also by other qualifications 
of the substantive, as ἐμέμνητο τῆς ἔν μανίᾳ διατριβῆς he remem- 
bered the time passed in insanity. Often a participle, like γενομένη 
&c. may in these phrases be supplied by the mind; e.g. Ὁ 

ἡ πρὸς Γαλάτας μάχη. 


ἢ πρὶν ἄρξαν αὐτὸν ἀρετή the virtue exhibited 


by him before he reigned. 

2. When the qualification thus interposed begins again with an 
article, two and even three articles may stand in this way togeth- 
er, if no cacophony ensue; 6. δ΄. 


τὸ τῆς “ἀρετῆς κάλλος the beauty of virtue. 
0 τὰ τῆς πόλεως πρά ματα πράττων. 
; τὸν τὸ τῆς ᾿“ϑηνᾶς ἀγαλμα ἐργασάμενον. 
ἔνοχος ἔστω τῷ τῆς τῶν ἐλευϑέρων φϑορᾶς νόμῳ. 


3. These qualifications of the substantive may for greatér 


217 


256 SYNTAX. [Ὁ 125. 


emphasis or clearness come after, in which case the article is 
usually bepeated, and with participles must be repeated; e. g. 


τὸν παῖδα τὸν σόν thy son. 

ὁ χιλίαρχος ὁ τὰς ἀγγελίας εἰρκομίξων the commander 
who is to bring the despatches. 

σύνειμι ἀνθρώποις τοῖς ἀγαϑοῖς 1 associate with good men. 


Rem. 1. The repetition of the article is necessary with the 


participle; for otherwise the phrase becomes what is called the 


218 


participial construction, which occurs very frequently in Greek, and 
‘will be explained below in ὃ 145. 

Rem. 2. When the adjective without an article stays before 
the article of the substantive, the object is thereby distinguished 
not from others, but from itself under other qualifications, as ἥδετο 
ἐπὶ πλουσίοις τοῖς πολίταις signifies, not “ he rejoiced in the rich 
citizens,’ but, he rejoiced in the citizens being rich, or inasmuch as 
they were rich. So ἐπ ἄκροις τοῖς ὄρεσιν on the mountains where 
they are highest i.e. quite up the mountains; ὅλην τὴν νύχτα the 
whole night. 


4. When the substantive is understood from the Conme mice: it 
is often omitted, and the article stands alone with the qualification, 
as 0 ἐμὸς πατὴρ καὶ ὁ τοῦ bir my father and the father of my” 
Sriend. 


Rem. 3. Here too are to be noticed certain standing omissions, 
as in the case of the adjective ὃ 123.2. E. g. 
᾿Αλέξανδρος 0 Φιλίππου (sc. υἱός son) or simply 
Ἢ “Σωὼρς οονίσκου the son of Sophroniscus, i i. 6. Socrates. 
εἰς τὴν (ιλίππου (sc χώραν.) into the land of Philip. 
τὰ τῆς πόλεως (sc. πράγματα.) as above § 123. 2 τὰ ἐμά. 
See δ΄128. 2. 
οἱ ἐν ἄστει the people τ an the crty. 
\ TO κατὰ “Παυσανίαν the affairs of Pausanias. 
τὰ εἰς τὸν πόλεμον. : 
οἱ σὺν τῷ βασιλεῖ. — aa 


. As every qualification, though indeclinable in itself, may be 
ane by aid of the article, adverbs without farther change are 
converted into adjectives by its being joined to them, as from 
μεταξύ between comes ὁ μεταξυ τόπος the intervening place; from 
πέλας near, ai πέλας κῶμαι the neighbouring ἡδιὉ Ἢ 


οἱ τῦτε ἄνϑρωποι. ξ 
οἱ nohue “σοφοὶ ἀνδρες. 
᾿ ἢ ἄγω πόλις the upper city. 
εἰς τὸν ἀνωταᾶι 0) τόπον, see δ 115. 6. 
ἐξαίφνης μεταστασες the sudden removal. : 


§ 126.] ἘΞ ARTICLE. : 257 


Or so, that the adverb with a repetition of the article follows, 


as ὅταν ἐγείρησϑε Ex τῆς ἀμελείας ταύτης τῆς ὄχον when ye awaken 
from this excessive negligence. 


Rem. 4. If in this case the substantive, which wee itself 
from the context or the idea itself,be omitted, the adverb acquires 
the character of a substantive, as from αὔριον tomorrow, by the 
omission of ἡμέρα day, is ἡ αὔριον the morrow ; η Avdvori the 
Lydian mode, (ἀρμονέα being omitted) ; οἱ rte the men of that age ; 
ἐς τοὐπίσω (for τὸ ὀπίσω) behind, backward, where μέρος part, 
may be regarded as omitted ; although in the case of a neuter 
article, it is neither necessary nor possible always to supply 8 par- 
ticular substantive. 


Rem. 5. By another peculiarity, the article τό, with whatever 
it is attached to, becomes adverbial, some word being omitted, as 
τὸ τελευταῖον finally, τανῦν (that is, ταὶ νῦν) for the present, Ta 
ano τοῦδε from henceforth. Compare § 131. 8. 

6. From all these cases, in which various parts of speech and 
even phrases acquire the character of substantives, by virtue of 
the remaining article of an omitted idea, are to be distinguished 
two cases, in which such*words and phrases become substantives, 
by virtue of an article peculiar to themselves, viz. 

1) The infinitives, as ro πράττειν the doing, τὸ κακῶς λέγειν 
the speaking ill, ἥδομαι τῷ περιπατεῖν I take pleasure in walk- 
ing. How extensive this use of the infinitive isin the Greek. 
language will appear from § [4]. ! 

2) Every word and phrase, which is itself considered as a 
subject, as τὸ λέγω the word λέγω" youtas τῷ Ivade σαυτὸν he 
uses the maxim, know thyself. 


© c ΠῚ . 7 « 
§ 126: oF 0, ἤς τὸ, AND 0; 4, 0, AS DEMONSTRATIVE. 


_ 1... Not only the prepositive article 0, ἡ, τό, but the postposi- 
_ tive ὅς, 7, 0, were in the elder dialect used as demonstrative pro- 
nouns for οὗτος or éxeivog, which usage remained particularly in 
the language of epic poetry. 

2. The same usage also remained in the common language in 
certain cases, particularly in the division and distinction of objects. 
In this case, ὁ μὲν commonly stands first, and afterwards once or 

33 


219 


208 SYNTAX. ΒΩ 


£ 


oftener ὁ δέ, this—that ; or (when speaking of indefinite objects) the 
one—the other—another, &e. ἐπ ΒΡῈ all genders and numbers, 6. g. 


τὸν μὲν ἐτίμα, τὸν δὲ οὔ, he honours this one, that one not. 
τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἀνοήτον, τὸ δὲ μανεκόν, the one action is foolish, 
the other insane. 
τῶν στρατιωτῶν Aor also οἱ στρατιῶται) οἱ μὲν ἐκύβευον, 
οἱ δὲ ἔπενον, οἱ δὲ ἐγυμνάζοντο, of the soldiers some played 
at dice, some drank, some exercised themselves. 
τῶν ζώων τὰ μὲν ἔχεν πόδας, τὰ δ᾽ éoriy ἄποδα. 
κρεῖσσον καλῶς πένεσϑαι ἢ ῆ κακῶς πλουτέϊν' τὸ μὲν γὰρ ἔλε- 
ον, τὸ δ᾽ ἐπιτίμησεν φέρει. 
Isocrates says of the Athenians, who, on. account of the ex- 
cessive population, were sent to Settle colonies, that in 
220 this way, ἔσωσαν ἀμφοτέρους, καὶ τοὺς ἀκολουϑήσαντας : 
; καὶ τοὺς ὑπομείναντας" τοῖς μὲν yay ἱκανὴν τὴν οἴκοι χο- 
θαν κατέλιπον, τοῖς δὲ πλείω τῆς ὑπαρχούσης ἐπόρισαν. 


Rem. 1. The postpositive article (ὃς μέν, ὃς δέ-- μέν, ἃ δέ, 
&c.) is thus used, but less frequently, as πόλεις ᾿βλληνίδας, ἃς μὲν 
ἀναιρῶν, εἰς ἃς δὲ τοὺς φυγαδὰας κατἄγων, destroying some of the 
cities of Greece and reinstating the exiles in others. DemosTHENES. 

ε ε 7% 9 ow 

3. In narration 0, 7, τὸς is often used only once with dé, in ref- 
erence to an object already named, as ὁ δὲ εἶπε, but he said; τὴν 
'δὲ ἀποχωρῆσαι (accusative with infinitive) but that she went away. 

Rem. 2. When persons are spoken of as the subject, such a 
clause may be connected by καί, in which case in the nominative 
the postpositive article 0, 1, οἵ, αἵ, but in the accusative (with the 
infinitive) 1 τὸν. of the prepositive, is used ; as καὶ ὃς, ἀκούσας ταῦτα, 
ἑωσὲν αὐτὸν ἐκ τῆς τάξεως he hearing this, thrust him from the rank ; 


καὶ οἵ, διαλυϑέντες, ἐφέβαινον ἐς τὰς νῆας (Heroporus) .-Οοκαὶ TOY 
κελεῦσαι δοῦναν and that he commanded to give it him. 


§ 127. PRONOUNS AND THE ADJECTIVE πᾶς, 


1. The three chief meanings of the pronoun αὐτὸς ina, ὃ 74. 
2.) are to be distinguished as follows. 

I. It signifies self. 

a) When it belongs to another noun so as to be in a sort of 
apposition with it, that is, after the noun, or before its article, 
as μᾶλλον τοῦτο φοβοῦμαι ἢ τὸν ϑάνατον αὐτὸν I fear this 
more than death itself; αὐτὸν τὸν βασιλέα κτεῖναν ἐβούλετο he 
wished to slay the king himself. 


~ 


§127.] PRONOUNS. 259 


δ) When it stands for myself, himself, &c. the personal pro- 
noun being omitted, as the context shows. In this way espe-. 
cially it is used in the nominative, as αὐτὸς ἔφη he himself has’ 
said it ; παρεγενόμην αὐτὸς I myself went ; and in the dblique 
cases only when they begin a rg as αὑτὸν ee εἶδον for 

[1 saw him myself. 

II. It is used instead of the simple prénéan of the third per- 
son only in the oblique cases; and in this signification can stand 
only after other words in the clause, as ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ πῦρ he 
gave them fire ; οὐχ ἑώρακας αὐτόν hast thou not seen him? to dé- 221 
ous Ainrn ἔδωκεν, ἐκεῖνος δὲ αὐτὸ καϑήλωσεν, he gave the skin to 
etes, and he nailed it.—See also no. 6. 

Ill. When the article immediately precedes it, it means the 
same, as ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνήρ the same man, ἐκέλευσε τὸ αὐτὸ (or ταὐτοὶ) 
ποιεῖν he commanded him to do the same thing. Compare § 133. 2. 

2. In the reflective pronouns ἐμαυτόν, σαυτόν &c. (see ὃ 74. 
3.) the pronouh αὐτός loses its peculiar power. Αὐτὸν σέ means . 
thee thyself, but σεαυτόν merely thee, as a reflected pronoun, as 
ἔϑιζε σαυτόν accustom thyself. It is also used, like the Latin se, | 
to refer back to the first subject of two connected clauses, as voui- 
ζει τοὺς πολίτας ὑπηρετεῖν ἑαυτῷ he thinks that his fellow citizens 
serve him. In this case the simple αὐτόν, as also the simple £, 
(οὗ, &c. σφεῖς, σφᾶς.) may equally be used. 

3. The indefinite pronoun τίς is used in the same sense as the 
French on and the German man, as ἄνϑρωπον ἀναιδέστερον οὐκ 
ἄν τις εὕροι. even where it is applied to a whole assembly or col- 
lection, as ἤδη τις ἐπιδεεικνύτω ἑαυτόν, that is, each one must now 


put himself forward. 

Remark. The neuter τὸ often passes into a particle of limita- Ὁ 
tion, in some degree, hence οὔτε, μήτε, not at all. 

4.” Ahdos, without the article, is equivalent to the Latin alius, 
another ; ἕτερος, without the article, has the same signification, 
but with a stronger expression of diversity ; ὁ ἕτερος, on the other 
hand, is used only when two are spoken of, and is the Latin alter, 
the other ; compare ὃ 78. In the plural, ἄλλου means others, οἱ ἄλ- 


222 


260 SYNTAX. - [§ 228. 


Aoe the others, ceteri, the rest.. Oi ἕτεροι implies a more distinct τοῖς 
erence to a division into two parts, as it were, the other party. The 


singular 6 ἄλλος expresses a whole with the exception of a certain 


part in contrast.with it, as τ ἄλλη χώρα the rest of the land. 

5. The most of the pronouns, and the adjectives πᾶς and ἅπας 
stand commonly before the article or after the substantive, as 
τούτων τῶν ἀνδρῶν of these men, ὁ ἀνηὴ οὗτος this man, δίκην ἔει-, 
ve ταύτην he suffered this punishment, πάντες οἱ “λληνες all the 
Greeks, τῷ δήμῳ ἅπαντι to the whole people.—Ilag in the singular 
without the article commonly stands for ἕκαστος, as πᾶς ἀνήρ each 
man. me 

6. The possessives of the third person (ὅς, opéregos) are but 
little used. Instead of them use is made of the genitives of the 
pronoun αὐτός, as τὰ χρήματα αὐτοῦ, αὐτῆς, αὐτῶν, his, her, their 
property. Also of the two other persons, the genitive is often used 
instead of the possessive, but in the singular number only the en- 
clitic genitive, as 0 υἱός μου my son. As soon, however, as any 
emphasis is required, the possessive alone can be used. But to 
this is sometimes added a genitive, by a sort of apposition, as dvae- 
πάζουσι τὰ ἐμὰ, τοῦ κακοδαίμονος, they plunder the property of me 
the miserable. But most commonly, the possessive is altogether 
omitted in ideas that always stand in necessary connexion, as fa- 
ther, son, friend, master, hand, foot, &c. and its place is supplied by 
the article alone. 


§ 128. OF THE NEUTER ADJECTIVE. 


1. The neuter of all words of the adjective kind stands without 
a substantive, or as such, for every object conceived or represent- 
ed as indefinite ; and particularly, as in Latin, extensive use is 
made of the neuter plural, e. g. 


εἶπε ταῦτα he said this (these things). 
τὰ καλά the. beautiful (that is, all beautiful things.) _, 


οὐδὲ τὰ ἀναγκαῖα δύνανταν πορίζεσϑαι they cannot earn even 
the necessaries ὁ life. 


Hence e. g. ra ἐμά also signifies not only my things, but in 
general, what concrens me. 


ᾧ 129.] SUBJECT ΑΝῸ PREDICATE. 961 


2. The neuter ἰδυευμων on the other hand, expresses more dis- 
tinctly the abstract idea of the objects, e. g. 
τὸ καλόν the beautiful, in the abstract. 


τὸ ϑεῖον the divinity, and also exery_divine nature indistinct- - 


ly conceived. 


τὸ τῆς γυναικὸς δοῦλον καὶ ϑεραπευτικὸν the servile and sub- 
ject nature of woman. 


Rem. 1. The neuter of the article standing alone with the gen- 
itive (δ 125 Rem. 3.) | is still more indefinite, and signifies -only a 
reference, as τὸ δὲ τῶν χρημάτων μάλεστα ποϑεῖτε ἀκοῦσαι, ποσα 
καὶ πόϑεν ἔσται, in respect to money, you are particularly desirous of 
knowing how much and whence it is; ta τῶν ϑεῶν φέρειν δεῖ it is 
_ necessary to bear what comes from the gods. 


Rem. 2. Of the neuter adjective a: as an adverb, see above in § 
115. 4, 5. 


THE NOUN IN CONNEXION. 


§ 129. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 


1, The nominative of the neuter plural is generally joined with 
a verb euler, e. g. 


τὰ ζῶα τρέχει animals run. 

ταῦτα ἐστιν ayuda this 1s. good. 

᾿““ϑηναίων ηὔξετο τὰ πράγματα the affairs of the Aikenians 
increased. 

ἔστι ταῦτα this 2s, i. 6. this ὁ as true. 


τῶν ὄντων τὰ μέν ἐστιν ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν, τὰ δ᾽ οὐκ ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν, (ἐφ᾽ 
ἡμῖν in our power). 


223 


2. When the adjective, being a predicate, is separated from 


the substantive, it is often neuter, though the substantive be mas- 
culine or feminine, and singular, though the substantive be plural ; 
the ebject, in this case, being considered as a thing in general, and 
the word thing being easily supplied. 
7 ἀρετή ἐστιν ἐπαινετὸν virtue is praiseworthy. 
ai ἡδὺ, εἴτ᾽ ἀνιαρὸν παῖδες γίγνονται, ἀγνοεῖ. 

3. As the dual is not a necessary number (§ 33. 2), every sen- 
tence which speaks of two, may not only be wholly in the plural, , 
but in the same clause a plural verb may be joined to a dual noun 
and vice versa, and different predicates or references to the sub- 
ject may, as euphony dictates, be either dual or plural. 


262 | SYNTAX, ~ [ὁ 190. 


4. The subject, as in Latin, is commonly omitted where it is 
known of course from the verb or the connexion, and no-stress is 
laid on it; and where, in the modern languages, its place is sup- 
plied by the personal pronouns. 


Rem. 1. The subject thus omitted may however be in apposi- 
tion with something else expressed, as ὁ δὲ Muiaging” Acdavtos 
διακονοῦμαι avrois,.that is, and I, the son of Maia the daughter 

. of Atlas, wait on them. 

Rem. 2. The subject is also omitted, where the verb expresses - 
an action usually performed by said subject, as σαλπίζει or σημαί- 
vee the trumpeter gives a signal. This usage also prevails where we 
‘supply 2, and mean an operation of nature or of circumstances, 6. g. 

994-9 - ὕει it rains. 
προσημαίνειν it announces itself (as in the air.) 
ἐδήλωσε δὲ and so it showed itself. 

Rem. 3. What are commonly called impersonals, that is, verbs 
that belong to no subject or person, are different from the forego- 
ing. In them the subject is not, as in the foregoing, left in obscu- 
rity, but the action, to which they refer, whether expressed by an 
infinitive or another dependent clause, is the true subject of such 
verbs, whose peculiarity therefore consists in this alone, that their 
subject is not a noun (as an infinitive with the article is also regar- 
ded), e.g. ἐξεστί woe ἀπιέναι i. e. τὸ ἀπιέναι ἔξεστί Hoe the gomg 
away is latofil to me. Of this kind are δεῖ, χρῆ, ἀπόχρη, doxer 
(see all these in the list of anomalous verbs), πρέπει tt wea oer 
ἐνδέχεται it is possible, &c. 


5. When the nominative stands without the verb, some part of 


εἶναν is commonly to be supplied, 6. g. 


Ἵδλλην ἐγώ I am a Greek. 
τὰ τῶν φίλων κοινά. 
“Σιμωνίδῃ οὐ ῥᾳδιον ἀπιστεῖν" σοφὸς yao καὶ ϑεῖος ὁ 


ἀνήρ. 
καγὼ πάσχειν ὁτιοῦν ἕτοιμος (sc. εἰμὶ), ἐὰν μὴ rave 
, Οὕτως ἔχη. 


§ 190. THE OBJECT.—OBLIQUE CASES. 


1. The object of an action, or that on which any action is 
exerted or to which it refers, must be either in the genitive, da- 
tive, or accusative case ;- and these three are called oblique ca- 
ses. 


~ 


§130.) ~ 


2. The immediate object of-a transitive verb, that on which the 
action is exerted, is usually in the accusative case, as λαμβάνω τὴν 
_ ἀσπίδα I take the shield ; the remote object which is found togeth- 
er with the accusative and also after an intransitive verb, is join- 
ed with a preposition, as λαμβάνω τὴν ἀσπίδα an ὃ τοῦ πασ- 
σάλου I take the shield from the nail; ἕστηκα ἐν τῷ ἐδάφει 

I stand on the ground. 

3. Of such relations as form a remote object, those which most 
frequently recur are usually expressed by a case only ; ,and in 
Greek, all three of the oblique cases are used in this manner. 

4. Yet languages which have a genitive and dative, differ from 

one another in this respect, and a preposition is often used in the 
one, where the other uses only a case. 


OBLIQUE CASES. 263 


Rem. 1. When in Greek a relation is expre&sed by a case mere- 
ly, without a preposition, it must by no means be inferred, that a 
preposition was ever used in such cases and afterwards omitted 
for the sake of brevity. 


5. In the ancient languages, both the near and the remote ob- 
ject, when mention of them has already been made, and the rela- 
tion of the verb to them is sufficiently clear, are very frequently 
omitted (just as in other instances the subject of the verb, or the 
possessive § 127.6); and in this manner the “excessive use of 
pronouns is ayoided. 

3 Xs Ἅ ~ ed ~ ; ι > ' > « 

ἐν ἢ δ᾽ ἂν tay φυλῶν πλεῖστοι ὥσιν ανδροικώτατοι, “ἑπαινου- 
σιν οἱ πολῖται (Βετε' ταύτην is understood before ἐπαινοῦσιν.) 

ἐπαγγειλαμένου tov dynothaou τὴν στρατείαν Agesilaus offer- 
ing to take the command of the army διδόασιν ot “«ακεδαιμονεοι 
(sc. αὐτῷ) ὅσαπερ ἤτησεν. 


Ἂ oa ~ > > 


ὃν ἢν ἴδη τὰς χεῖρας οὐκ ἀφέξεται (sc. ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ. 


Yet the pronouns may be expressed, whenever emphasis or hay- 
mony can thus be gained. 


Rem. 2. Another case of the omission of the object, is that of 
the reflective pronoun ἑαυτόν, ἐμαυτόν &c. which occurs or may 
- be assumed, wherever a verb otherwise transitive in its significa- 
tion; becomes intransitive in certain connections; as, forexample, 
several compounds of «yevy to lead, in which the intransitive idea 
to go prevails, yet with an allusion to a train or multitude, as ἐξε- 
. χώρησε τῆς ὁδοῦ, προφάγοντος τοὺ τυράννου, he went out of the 


225 


264 SYNTAX, {§ 131. 


yume 


way, as the tyrant drew near (as it were, moved himself forwards). 
Such cases are explained in the lexicon; yet it is to be observed, 
that the omission of ἑαυτόν is not always to be presumed, since it 
is frequently more correct to suppose that the verb had originally 
the immediate as well as the causative signification (according to § 
113. a Ps as in ὁρμᾷν to hasten and to impo. 


§ 191. AccUSATIVE. 


1. The most obvious use of the accusative, as designating the 
near or immediate object (§ 130. 2) needs no further explanation, 
and we therefore limit ourselves to the cases, in which the usage 
of the Greek differs from that of other languages. 

Rem. 1. The cases in which the noun appears as the near ob- 
ject of the verb in the Greek language and not in others, must be 
learnt from use and the lexicon; an example is τοὺς ϑεοὺς ὦμοσεν, 
where we say, he swore by the gods. Other verbs which in Greek 
take an accusative as the near object and in English are govern- 
ed by a preposition, are havdavew (τινα) to lie concealed from, 
ἀποδιδράσκειν (rive) to escape from. 

2. Intransitive verbs are sometimes used transiivelts and are 
joined with an accusative case, as ai πηγαὶ ῥέουσι γάλα καὶ wets 
the fountains flow milk and honey. 

3. Intransitive verbs govern an accusative of the noun, which 
expresses the abstract of the verb, e. g. 


κινδυνεύσω τοῦτον τὸν κίνδυνον I will incur this danger. 
bn βίον ἥδιστον he lives a most pleasant life. 

φανερῶς τὸν πόλεμον πολεμήσομεν. 

ἥ αδικία ἢ ἣν ἠδίκουν σέ. 

γλυκὺν ὕπνον κοιμᾶσϑαι. . 
ἐπιμελοῦνται πιᾶσαν ἐπιμέλειαν. 


- 


4. The Greeks also use the accusative in many phrases, for 
that which, according to the nature of the thought and the words, 
is the remote object. Thus the near object of ποιεῖν is the action, 
of λέγειν the words ; the remote object of each is the person to 
whom something is done or said; nevertheless, the Greeks always 
Say κακῶς ποιεῖν τινὰ to do a person evil, κακῶς λέγειν τινὰ to 
speak ill of any one, to slander him. There are some verbs which 
permit either of the two relations to be used as the near object ; 


- 


8 191. ᾿ς ACCUSATIVE. 265 


as in English to fold, 6. g. he folds himself (in the cloak), and he 
folds the cloak (round himself.) 
5. From these two cases the peculiarity of the Greek usage is 


to be explained, that ail such verbs have both these relations in ᾿ 


the accusative case. In other words: Many verbs, especially such 
as signify to do, to speak, to clothe, to deprive, to beg, to ask, &c. 
govern two accusatives, of which the one usually denotes the PEED, 
the other the thing ; ᾽ 8. δ: 


τί ποιήσω αὐτὸν ; ; what shall I do to him. 

πολλὰ ἀγαϑὰ τὴν πόλεν ἐποίησεν he has done the state much 
service. 

διδάσκουσι τοὺς παῖδας σωφροσύνην they teach the youths 
probity. 

Θηβαίους χρήματα ἥτησαν. 

ἐνδύεεν τινὰ τὸν χιτῶνα. 

ὑποδεῖν tive καρβατένας to put coarse shoes upon a person: 

Ov THY ψυχὴν ἀφείλετο Srom whom he hath taken life. 

ἕτερον mada ἐκδύσας χέτωνα, τὸν ἑαυτοῦ ἐκεῖνον ἡμφίεσεν. 

τοὺς πολεμίους τὴν ναῦν ἀπεστερήκαμεν. 

τοῦτο μὴ ἀναγκαξέ He 

οὔ σὲ ἀποχρύψω τὰς ἐμὰς δυςπραγίας. 


6. The noun signifying the part, circumstance, or object, of 
which any thing is affirmed, is put in the accusative, 6. g. 


#ohos ἐστι τὸ σῶμα he is comely in person. 

πόδας ὠκύς swift of foot. 

πονεῖν τὰ σκέλη to suffer in the legs. 

ἀλγώ τὰς γνάϑους I am affircted in the jaws. 
ϑαυμαστὸς τὰ tov πολέμου admirable in warlike affairs. 
Σύρος ἢ ἣν τὴν πατρίδα he was a Syrian as to his country. * 
“Σωκράτης τοὔνομα Socrates by name. 


Rem. 2. This is the Greek construction so familiar to the Latin 
poets, as os humerosque deo similis. Sometimes a preposition, as 
χκατας is actually expressed to govern one of the accusatives; and 
as a preposition must commonly be supplied in English, the learn- 
er is often taught tosay, that one of these accusatives is governed 
_ bya preposition understood. It is so common a construction, how- 
ever, that it ought to be taught as a principle of the language. 
Compare § 130 Rem. 1. § 134 Rem. 3. 


7. The accusative of the pronoun is found in this way with 
verbs, which would not admit a similar accusative of the nown, 


e. g. 
34 


225 


220 


266 β SYNTAX: ane [§ 182. 


τὶ χρῶμαι αὐτῷ “fora what shall I use at ? 

οὐκ οἶδα ὅ,τι oor χρώμαν I know not for what I shall employ 
thee. 

πάντα εὐδαιμονεῖν to be happy in all things. 


~ Rem. 3. To the two preceding rules are to be referred instan- 
ces /of the double accusative, like the following, ἐνίκησε τοὺς βαρ- 
βάρους τὴν ἐν ΤἩαραϑώῶνι μάχην he conquered the barbarians in 
the battle at Marathon. τὰ μέγιστα ὠφελήσετε τὴν πόλιν. πολ- 
Aa μὲ ἠδίκησεν he has injured me in many respects. 
For the accusative joined to the passive and middle, see below 
§ 134, 135. 


8. The noun expressing duration of'time or measure of dis- 


tance, is put in the accusative, e. g. 


πολὺν χρόνον παρέμεινεν he remained a long time. 

καϑῆντο ἐν Maxedovie τρεῖς ὅλους μῆνας they remained in 
‘Macedonia three whole months. 

τὸ πολλὰ. καϑεύδει he sleeps the greater part of the time. 

ἀπέχει δέκα σταδίους it is ten stadia distant. 


Riek 4. Certain adjectives and pronominals of the neuter. gen- 
der, standing in the midst of a clause and rendered in other lan- 
guages adverbially or with a preposition, are putin the accusative 
case, 6. β΄. 

τοὐναντίον (for τὸ ἐναντίον. )--οὗτος δὲ, nav τοὐναντίον, ἡ- 
βούλετο μὲν, οὐκ ἠδύνατο δέ, but he, on the contrary, wish- 
ed but could not. ὁ 

τὸ heyomevov.— add 7, τὸ λεγόμενον, κατόπιν ἑορτῆς ἥκο- 
μὲν. δὲ do we, according to the proverb, come after the 

east ! τ 

τὸ τοῦ ποιητοῦ &c.—adha γὰρ, τὸ τοῦ ποιητοῦ, ἔργον οὐδὲν 

ὄνειδος, but, as the poet saith, no labour is a reproach. 


§ 132. GENITIVE. 


1. The most familiar use of the genitive with another substan- 
tive belongs to the Greek as to other languages. Those uses of 
the genitive are accordingly given here, which are more peculiar 
to the Greek, especially those in which it is united with verbs, ad- 
jectives, and adverbs. μ 


2. The genitive includes in its leading signification, the idea 
of the prepositions of and from. ὦ “4 


Ἀ 


f 


_ § 132.] | GENITIVE. : 267 


3. The genitive is used in the following cases, viz. 
_ a) With most verbs signifying to pitti to restrain, to cease, 


to > differ 5 ee. g. 

“ἀπαλλάττειν τινε νόσου to free one from a disease. 

εἴργεεν reve τῆς ϑαλάσσης to keep one from the sea. 

παύεεν τενὰ πόνων to cause one to cease from his troubles. 

λήγειν τῆς ϑήρας to cease from the chase. 

ἁμάρτειν ὁδοῦ to fail of the way. 

διαφέρειν τῶν ἄλλων to differ from others. 

ἄρχων ἀγαϑὸς οὐδὲν διαφέρει πατρὸς ἀγαϑοῦ a good ruler 
differs in nothing Pag a good father. (With respect to 
οὐδέν see ὃ 131. 7.) 


b) The genitive is used in all expressions implying SHEA ex- 
ception, and part, viz. 

(1) With adjectives and pronouns by which the object is dis- 997 
tinguished from others, e. g- 


μόνος ἀνθρώπων alone of all men. 

οὐδεὶς ᾿ Ἑλλήνων not one of the Greeks. 

οἱ φρόνεμοι τῶν ἀνϑρώπων the prudent part of mankind. 

των ἀνδρῶν τοῖς καλοῖς καγαϑοῖς αἱρετώτερον ἐστι ϑανεῖν 
ἢ δουλεύειν. See also the above mentioned example ( 
130. 5) ἐν ἡ δ᾽ ἂν τῶν φυλῶν in which of the (different 
tribes, i. 6. in which tribe. 

Particularly with all superlatives, e. g. 

ἢ μεγίστη τῶν νόσων ἀναίδεια shamelessness is the greatest of 
maladies. 

κτημάτων πάντων τιμιὠώτατὸν EOTLY ἀνὴρ φίλος συνετὸς TE 
καὶ εὔνους. 


(2) In statements of time and place, given as parts of a larger 
duration or extention, e.g 


τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας thrice daily. 

ὁπότε του ἕτους at what time in the year : ? 

κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνο καιροῦ at that point of time. 

noi γῆς ἀφικόμην to what part of the earth have I come ?. (like 
ubi terrarum ?) 

πανταχοῦ τῆς ἀγορᾶς every where in the market. 

πόῤῥω τῆς ἡλικίας advanced in years. 


(3) Wherever any thing is limited to a part, as μέτεστέ woe τῶν 
πραγμάτων Ihave a part in the business ; and hence wherever the 
idea of somewhat or a part can be supplied, e. g. 


“ 


268 SYNTAX. [§ 132. 


ἔδωκά σου τῶν χϑημάτων I have given thee of my wealth. 
(4) The noun expressive of the thing euten, drunken, enjoyed, 
profited of, in the most general sense, e. g. a 


ἐσϑίειν κρεών, ThvELy ὕδατος, (ἐσϑίειν τὰ “xo ἕα would sig- 
nify to devour the flesh, viz. all of it; and πένειν ὕδωρ - 
may mean, to be a water-drinker.) 

ἀπολαύειν τόνος to enjoy a thing. 


ὀνίνασϑαί τίνος to profit of any thing. 
c) The material of which any thing is made, is in the genitive, 


even if the idea of to make is expressed ; e. g. 


στέφανος ὑακίνϑων α wreath of hyacinths. 
ἑνὸς λίϑου πᾶν πεποίηται it is all made of one stone. 


998 - d) Quality or circumstance is put in the genitive, e. g. 
δένδρον πολλῶν ἐτῶν a tree of many years. 
qv yao ἀξιώματος μεγάλου for he was of greatest esteem. 
4. The following classes of words also take the genitive, viz. 
a) Adjectives derived from verbs take the object of the verb 
in the genitive; e. g. 
from ἐπίστασϑαὲ te to understand a thing, comes ἐπιστήμων 
τύνος understanding in a thing. 
from ἐξετάζειν te to investigate «a thing, comes ἐξεταστικός. 


Twos fit for the investigation of a thang. 
οἱ πραχτικοὶ τῶν δικαίων (from τὰ δίκαια). 


b) Words expressive of abundance or want, value or worthless- 
ness, 6. &. 


μεστὸς ϑορύβου full of confusion. 

μεστόν ἐστι τὸ ζὴν φροντίδων life is full of cares. 

δεῖσϑαν χρημάτων to be in want of money. Hence, also, 
when δεῖσθαι means beg, it governs the genitive of the 
person, as δεῖσϑαι τινὸς to beg any one that— 

ἄξιος τιμῆς worthy of honour. 


c) Verbs of the following: significations, viz. 
remember and forget, as μέμνημαι τοῦ χρόνου, τῆς ἀλκῆς ἐπι- 
λανϑάνεται. 
care for, admire, and ‘despise, as κηδεσϑαὶ revog to care for some 
one, θλιγωρεῖν, καταφρονεῖν, ϑαυμάζξειν, &c. 
spare, φείδεσϑαί Tivos. 
desire, παιδεύσεως ἐπυϑυμεῖν. ’To this class belongs the verb 


5 


~ 


§ 132.] pee GENITIVE. 3 269 


ἐρᾷν reves to love, with the primitive idea of desire ; but 
φιλεῖν two denotes the idea of an inclination. 

rule, excel, ἀνθρώπων ἄρχειν, ἡδονῆς χρατεῖν, περιξίναι τοῦ 

ἐχϑροῦ. ι 
accuse, condemn, κατηγορεῖν, καταγιγνώσκειν. 

All this, however, is not without various exceptions and limi- 
tations, since several of these verbs may have the accusative even 
in the same relation. 

d) Most verbs expressive of the senses (except of sight), e. g. 

ὄξεεν μύρων to smell of ointment. 
ψέκρου μὴ ἄπτεσϑαι not to touch a corpse. 
τοὺς δούλους ἔγευσε τῆς ἐλευϑερίας. 
ἀκούω παιδίου κλαΐοντος ἴ hear a weeping child.* 
6) Especially is the genitive governed by the comparative de- 
e. Ε. 

i μείξων ἑ ἐμοῦ, greater than I. 229 
σοφώτερος ἐστε τοῦ διδασκάλου he is wiser than his master. 
κάλλιον ἐμοῦ ἄδεις thou singest more sweetly than I. 
ἀρετῆς οὐδὲν κτῆμα ἔστε σεμνότερον. 

Ἔ Rem. 2. The more full construction of the comparative is that 

with 7, the Latin quam (see ὃ 150), which, however, is only used 
where the genitive cannot stand. 

5. In the following and other more remote references like 
them, the genitive case is used, although it is common to say that 


it is governed by a preposition, or other part of speech, under- 
stood. . 
a) The more particular qualification of a general expression, 
made in English by the phrase in respect of, e. g. 
ἐγγύτατα αὐτῷ εἶμε γένους I am very near him, in respect of 
kon. 
ἄπαις “ἀῤῥένων παίδων childless in respect to male offspring. 
παρϑένος ἀραία γάμου. 
δασὺς δένδρων. 

Under this head should be reckoned the genitives for which 
ἕνεκα on account of, is usually supplied, as εὐδαιμονίζω os τοῦ 
τρόπου I esteem thee happy on account of thy disposition. 

b) The price of a thing, where evzi may be supplied, 6. g. 


δραχμῆς ἀγοράξειν te to buy a thing For a drachm. 


* ἀκούεεν most commonly governs the accusative of the sound, and the 
genitive of that which produces it; but neither without exception, 


‘ 


270 3 SYNTAX. [Ὁ 133. 


c) The time when, if indefinite and protracted, e. g. 
γυκτὸς, ἡμέρας ποιεῖν τις to do any thing by night, by day. 
πολλῶν ἡμερῶν οὐ μεμελέτηκα I have not exercised myself or 
many days. 
ἐχεῖσε οὐκ ἀφικνεῖται ἐτῶν μυρίων he comes not hacia in 
ten thousand years. 
Rem. 3. Verbs signifying to take hold of, govern the genitive of 
that part by which the whole is taken hold of, e. g. 
λαβεῖν com. λαβέσϑανι τινὰ ποδός, χειρὸς, to take any one by 
the foot, the hand. 
τῆς χείρος ἄγε lead him by the (his) hand. 
τὸν λύκον τῶν ὦτων κρατῶ I hold the wolf by the ears. 
This, therefore, must not be confounded with λαβεῖν trove χειρί to 


seize one with the hand. 
Rem. 4. Sometimes the omission of the idea on which the gen- 


itive depends, is very obvious, as in the following phrases. 
230 τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστιν ἀνδρὸς σοφοῦ this is not the part of a wise 
man. 
ov παντὸς εἶναι not to be the part of every one. 
τῶν ἀδίκων ἐστίν it is one of the unjust acts, i, 6. ἠὲ 18. unjust. 


§ 133. DATIVE. 


The dative case, the idea of which is properly the reverse of 
the genitive, is regularly used in all expressions where the idea of 
approach lies at the foundation, and in consequence, in most of 
those where we supply the prepositions to and for. E. g. δοῦναι 
tive to give to any one, ἐχϑρὸς reve hostile to any one, πείϑεσϑαι 
τοῖς νόμοις to be obedient to the laws, &c. 

2. The dative case is also used in expressions like the follow- 
ing, viz. ’ 

a) Of uniting or meeting, e. g. 


ὁμιλεῖν τίνι to associate with any one. 
μαχεσϑαί τύνε to fight with any one. i 


b) Of equality, e. g. 
ὅμοιος tive like any one. 


Hence, 0 αὐτὸς the same, governs the dative, e. g. . 
οὗτος ἔστιν 0 αὐτὸς ἐχείνῳ this one is the same as that. 


And this e even when the reference is direct, as 
τὰ αὐτὰ πάσχω σου I suffer the same the same things as thou. 


~ 


$134.) DATIVE. . . . PASSIVE VOICE. 271 


Θησεὺς κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν ᾿Πίρακλεῖ γενόμενος. 
c) Of benefit or injury, e. g. 
ete τόνδε πλοῦν PB omcils, we undertook this voyage 
for the advantage of Menelaus. 
3. The dative is also used to express 1) the instrument, 2) 
the manner, 3) the cause, and 4) the fixed time, ὃ. g. 
1) χρῆσϑαί teve to make use of a thing. 
ve πατάσσειν ῥάβδῳ to strike with a stick. 
σμίλῃ πεποιημένον. made with a knife. 
τιτρωσκέται βέλεε ἐς τὸν ὦμον. 
2) ταῦτα ἐγένετο τῷδε τῷ τρόπῳ this happened thus. 
δρόμῳ παρῆλϑεν he came running. 
μεγάλῃ σπουδῇ πάντα ἐπράττετο. Ξ 
3) φόβῳ ἔπραττον 1 did τε from fear. 6. , 
Seater νόσῳ tuvi to labour with a disease. 
ἀλγεῖν. τινί to suffer pain at any thing. 
τέϑνηκεν ἀποπληξίᾳ he died of apoplexy. 
οὐ γὰρ ἀγροικίᾳ πράττω τοῦτο. 
4) παρῆν τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ he arrived the third ἄαψ. Ό΄. 991 
τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ τὴν βουλὴν ἐκάλουν the following day they called 
the council. 


OF THE VERB. 
§ 194. THE PASSIVE VOICE. 


1. As in treating of the notn in connexion, the influence of the 
yerb in its first and simple form, that is, in the active voice, was  * 
sufficiently explained ; it remains here only to investigate the use 
of the passive and middle. 

2. The passive, from its nature, has as its subject in the nomi- 

- native, that which followed the active voice as the near object in 
the accusative. The subject or nominative of the active voice 
now becomes that from which I suffer; and hence if it is express- 
ed, the passive voice is followed by the genitive (with the pre- 
position ὑπό) of what was the subject of the active voice, e. g. 


- Act. ὁ ᾿Αχιλλεὺς : κτείνειν τὸν Extoga. Pass. 0” χτωρ κτεί- 
VETUL ὑπὸ TOU “Ayedlens. 


Rem. 1. Often instead of ὑπό, the preposition πρὸς is used 


21 SYNTAX. [§ 134. 


with the genitive, as πρὸς ἁπάντων ἀϊξδονευνύθωι to be served by 
all. ἸΠαρά is.also sometimes used in the same sense. 
Rem. 2, The dative also not unfrequently stands after the 
passive voice, without any preposition; 6. g. 
οὐ γὰρ εἰς περιουσίαν ἐπράττετο αὐτοῖς τὰ τῆς πόλεως the 
‘affairs of the city were not conducted by them for their own 
advantage. DemosTHENES. 
μάτην ἡμῖν πάντα ποιξῖταν all has been done by us in vain. 


Most commonly this takes place with the Perf. Pass. as κα- 
hos λελεκταὶί oot it has been well spoken by thee. 


3. When the active ‘(according to § 131. 5) governs twa accu- 
satives, the one ‘of the person and the other of the thing, the pas- 
sive often governs the accusative of the thing; e. g. 


οἱ παῖδες OwWaonovtas σωφροσύνην the children are taught Ὁ 
discretion. 


ἀφαιφεϑεὶς τὴν ἀρχήν deprived of the sovereignty. 


4. In such instances, the accusative of the person in the active 
voice becomes the subject of the passive, and the accusative of the 
thing remains as the object of the passive. Further, the remote 
object of the active, expressed in the dative, often becomes the nomina- 
᾿ tive of the passive, and the accusative of the active remains as the ob- 
ject of the passive; as from ἐπιτρέπειν τῷ Σωκράτει τὴν δίαντιαν 
to entrust to Socrates the decision, we have in the passive, 


ὁ Σωκράτης ἐπιτρέπεται τὴν δίαυταν Socrates is entrusted 
with the decision. 

τὴν δ᾽ ἐκ χειρῶν ὡρπάζομαν she is torn from my hands. 

δέλτος ἐγγεγυαμμένη ξυνϑήματα. 

ὑπὸ πόλεως τὴν ,ἡχεμονίαν πεπίστευτο. 

Προμηϑεὺς un ἀετοῦ ἐχείρετο τὸ ἧπαρ (where κείρειν 
‘means fo tear out.) 


Rem. 3, The accusative with the passive in no. 4, may often 
be referred to xara understood, in the manner mentioned in 
§ 151.6, as πλήττομαι τὴν κεφαλήν. —lIn other instances, the verb, 
even in the passive voice (as in the active, according to § 131. 3,) 
governs an accusative containing as a noun the idea of the verb, 
so that something more definite, as an adjective, may be added to 
it, as τύπτεταν πληγὰς πολλᾶς, i. 6. he receives many blows. 

Rem. 4. As the verbal adjectives in τὸς and réo¢ are of the na- 
ture of the passive voice (δ 102), they commonly have the sub- 


ject of the active voice in the dative case, according to Rem. 2 
mes e. δ. 


ᾧ 185.] MIDDLE VOICE. 273 


τοῦτο οὐ ῥητόν ἐστί oe, this ts not to be spoken by me. 
ἡ πόλιες ὠφελητέα σοί ἐστε, the city ought to be served by thee. 


Yet very commonly the dative, when it is gate) in its na- 
ture, is 0 omitted ; e. g. 


“λυτέος 0 τοιοῦτος νόμος καὶ οὐχ ξατέος κύρεος εἶναι. 


“The neuter of the verbal in τέος, both with and without ἐστίν, 
comrespons to the Latin gerund i in dum, (faciendum est,) e. 8. 
οἱ ὑλῶν. ταῦτα πᾶντα ποίητξον μους all this must I do. 
_ τοῖς λόγοις προφεκτέον τὸν νοῦν ἐστεν. 
᾿ ἀρετὴν ἔχειν πειρατέον. 


| i. ἀρὸν § 135. , \NDDLE VOICE. εἰ 

‘1. In Sr phaining ihe’ use of the Middle Voice, it is necessary 
to distinguish between Middle in form and Middle in signification ; 
for the usage of the Greek language is by no means regular, in 
discriminating between the significations of the Passive and Mid- 
dle Voices, even in those tenses, which have a separate form for 
each voice ; so that under the name Middle, we cannot always con- 
sider both form and signification at the same time. In the syntax, ἃ 
true middle has always a middle signification with a passive form. 

Rem. 1. This statement includes of course also the passive 


aorist of all those verbs, where it has a middle signification. See 
below. 


2. That the Εν: signification of the Middle Voice is the 


232 


reflective, and that this arises naturally from the signification of the : 


passive, has been shown above in § 89.1. The proper reflective 
signification, moreover, is that in which the subject of the verb is 
also its nearest object, and stands in the accusative with the active 
voice, as Aovw teva I wash any one, λοῦμαν Pass. I am washed, 
Mid. I wash myself, that is, I bathe. So also anayyew, ἀπάγξαι 
τινά to strangle any one, to hang, Mid. ἀπάγχεσϑαι, ἀπάγξασϑαι to 
hang one’s self. So ἀπέχειν, ἀποσχεῖν, to restrain, Mid. ἀπέχεσθαι, 
- ἀποσχέσϑαι, to restrain one’s self, i. 6. refrain. ‘This true reflec- 
tive meaning of the Middle Voice prevails, however, in but very 
few verbs; principally in those which express some familiar cor- 
poreal actions like dress, sheer, crown, &c. All other verbs, when 
35 


- middle voice of many, verbs becomes an intransitive ; as στέλλειν 


299 


3214 : SYNTAX.) [§ 135. 


as id, 


the ταν sense is to be pares require {πθ΄ — 
éudurov, ἑαυτοῦ &e. 3 

3. The reflective sense of a verb may often more convenient- 
ly be stated as a new simple intransitive signification, so that the 


to send, στέλλεσϑαν to. send. one’s self 1. Θ. to Journey ; παύξεν to, put 
to rest, παύεσϑαι to put one’s self to rest'i. 8. to cease ; πλάξειν to 
drive about (any one), πλαάζεσϑαι to wander ; εὐωχεῖν to regale 
any one, ἑὐωχεῖσϑαν to revel. 

4. But, on the other hand, the middle often becomes a true 
transitive verb. ‘This is particularly ‘the case where the active 
voice has two objects ; as ἐνδύειν τινὰ χιτῶνα to clothe one in ἃ 
robe, Mid. ἐνδύσᾳσϑαει χιτῶνα to put on a robe (on one’s pelt ) 
Hence the following rule, viz. 

The middle voice often governs the accusative preceery as 
the active voice governs it; 6. g. ΄ ; 


περαιοῦν, τίνα to carry one over (ariver.) Mid. περαεοῦσϑαι 
to carry one’s self over, i. 6. to pass, which middle verb, thus 
signifying actively to pass, governs its accusative, as περαιοῦ- 
ota, τον Tiyeer to pass the Tigris, 

. φοβεῖν rive to affright any one, φοβεῖσϑαι (to affright one’s 
self), that is, to fear. Accordingly φοβεῖσϑαιν TOUS ϑεούς ίο 
fear the gods. 

τίλλειν to pluck, τίλλεσϑαν to pluck one’s self, i. 6. to “pull out 
one’s own hair; and, since this is an action of mourning, τίλ- 
λεσϑαί τινὰ signifies to mourn for any one by tearing the hair. 


5. When the active governs two objects, the middle often re- 


tains one in the accusative; 8. 5. 


λύσασϑαι τὴν ζώνην to unfasten one’ 3 girdle. 
λούσασϑο: τὴν κεφαλήν to wash one’ s head. 
ἀχενάχην πάλαι παρεσχευασμένη σφάττει ἑαυτήν. 


Among middle verbs of this class also, there are many from 
which a new simple and transitive sense arises, as πορίζεσϑαέ re 
to. procure something for one’s self, i. 6. to acquire. 

6. Sometimes, when the active governs two accusatives, the 
middle retains both, with the addition of the reflective sense ; 6. g. 


aire σὲ τοῦτο I ask thee this (without its being defined 
whether for my own sake or another’s. 
ΔΈΟΜΑΙ σὲ τοῦτο I ask thee this for myself. 


Ι 


8135. MIDDLE VOICE. 275 


7. In general any remote reference of the action to the sub- 


ject may be expressed by the middle voice; e. δ. τι τὰ 
éxoyetevo I lead through pipes upon or into, ἐποχετεύομαι I 
Hebe ch μενον, ; 


 \uhatsvd τὰ πάϑη τινός to weep For any one’s sufferings, ἔκλαυ- 
48 bu nM τῶ, enn ἢ weep Son any, ommmcsulforings. 3 >: 
σύμμαχον ποιεῖσϑαΐ τενὰ to make some person one’s ally. 
χαταστήσασϑαι φύλακας to place guards for one’s own sake. ὦ 
τον φἴρευν tt to raise any thing, oiosodai τὸ the same, but only 
when it is raised for one’s own use. 


εὐρίσκω I find, εὑρίσκομαι I find for my own use, i.e. 1 obtain, 
nee ee 
ieteteaphivos τὴν πονηρίαν he who has shown his own malice. 
8. The middle Voice governs the accusative actively, signify- 
ing causation; thus κείρομαν I shave myself, but also I let myself 
be shaved ; (the passive καρῆναν has only a passive meaning).— 
This too implies a more remote relation; e. g. 


παρατίϑεμαι τράπεζαν I cause a table to be set before me. 

μεσϑόω I let, μισϑοῦμαι τὸ I cause let it to me i.e. 1 hire it. 

διδαάξασϑαι tov υἱὸν to cause to teach one’s son.* 

καταδικάσαε tive to condemn any one, κατεδικασάμην αὐτὸν 
I have caused him to be condemned i.e. I have gained a law- 
suit against him. 

Rem. 2. The middle voice is often entirely active in its use 
and signification, without any trace of the reflective meaning ; 6. δ. 

anopalvery and ἀποφαίνεσϑὰν to show, to make evident. 

“παρέχειν ahd παρέχεσϑαι to furnish, afford. 

Of two or more meanings belonging to a verb, one, though 
equally active, is often appropriated only to the middle voice ; 
in which case great care ought to be taken to avoid confusion ; e. g. 

| aigety to take, αἱρεῖσϑαν to choose. 

Rem. 2. The middle voice often expresses a reciprocal or 
mutual action, as βουλεύειν to counsel, contrive, βουλεύυεσϑαι to 
take counsel with one another ; διαλύειν to reconcile (others), διαλύε- 
σϑαι to be reconciled with each other. 


~~ ἃ, seuss Te! 


* This is perhaps rather a rhetorical than a srammatical use. We 
say in English he. cultivates a large farm, meaning he causes to cultivate ; 
or applying the verb not to the instrumental but to the remote perform- 
ance of the action. : 


294 


276 3 SYNTAXSC OK. [§ 136. 


: 91 §s0mS2 ἜΣ δ 
§ 136. THE MEDIAL USE OF. ‘THE AORIST PASSIVE, cui 
2 

1. It was observed above (§ 89) that ‘the forms, which com- 
pose the middle voice, are generally the present and imperfect, 
the perfect. and pluperfect of the steaks and an aorist and fu- 
ture peculiar to the middle... 

2. The aorist middle accordingly has ulin in form nor 
meaning any connexion with the passive. Nevertheless in many 
verbs the aorist passive has also a middle signification; 8. g. 

, κατακλίνεσϑαν Mid. to lay one’s self down. Aor. pass: κατε- 
κλίϑην I lay myself down. 


ἀπαλλάττεσϑαι Mid. to depart (take its self away) Aor. 
pass. ἀπηλλάγην I departed. 


The same holds in περαιοῦν, mo εἴν. πείθειν, κοὶ ἄν, ὀρέγειν... 
Ἵ 9 3 τ ἢ 3 
ἀσκεῖν, &C. 6. 


λύσας τὴν soaps ἀπηλλάγη having given up the stege he 
departed. 

κοιμήϑητι lie down to sleep. 

κατεπλάγη τὸν Φίλιππον he was afraid of Philip. 

noun ony τέχνην I exercised myself ὁ ain the art. 


Rem. 1... In such verbs the aorist middle is generally obso- 
lete or rare.—Sometimes it has one of the significations of the 
verb appropriated to itself. 'Thus the aorist pass. σταλήναι i is at- ' 
tached with the medial signification to oreAdeoOae to journey ;— 
whereas στείλασϑαι, the proper aorist middle, belongs only to 
στέλλεσϑαν to clothe one’s self or send for. 

Rem. 2. These verbs, even where the signification is ἃ pas- 
sive one, cannot be explained (by § 134. 4) as of the passive voice 
followed by an accusative ; for they have the subject of the ac- 
tive in the accusative ; in one of the above examples were κατέ- 
πλάγην i in the passive, it would be κατεπλάγη uno τοῦ Didinnov. 


3. With the future middle the contrary usage holds; for while 
it is rare that the future passive has the medial signification, the 
future middle is used passively in many verbs, as in ὠφελεῖν, ὁμα- 
λόγειν, ἀμφισβητεῖν, γυμνάζειν, φυλάττειν, ἀπαλλάττειν, τοέφεῖν. 
τιμᾷν, δηλοῦν, &c. part of which have also a passive future. 


§ 138.] ese TENSES. 277 


Δ 137. | THE SECOND PERFECT AS INTRANSITIVE. 


The Second Perfect, or Perfect Middle as it is commonly’ cal- 
led, vibrates in its acceptation between all three voices; a cir- 
cumstance to be ascribed to the intransitive signification, which is 
peculiar to it—If the verb be an intransitive verb, the Sécond 
Perfect bears the same relation to it as any other perfect, (as may 
be seen in the catalogue of regular verbs, in the verbs ϑάλλω, 
χράξω; φρίσσω.) If the verb possess both significations, the Se- 
cond Perfect prefers the intransitive, as in πράσσω.---ἴη many 
| verbs, however, the original intransitive signification has passed 
over into the passive and middle voice (see § 113. 5,) and to this 


2 ΓΙ 
ey) 


sigbification the Second Perfect’ therefore attaches itself where 


the verbs in question have the Second Perfect. —See’ the follow- 


ing words in the catalogue, viz. sy 


οὐ ἄγνυμε (break krathell Sap veaae (break A) 2 Perf. 
Ῥω ἔαγα am broken. 
vr} ἀνοίγω, ἀνέωχα.---ἀνοίγομαι I open, ἀνέῳγα I stand open. 
_ éysiom, ἐγήγερκα,---ἐγρήγορα I wake intransit. 
ἔλπω cause to hope,—éhnouas, ἔολπα hope. 
ὄλλυμε, ὁλώλεκα νπούλλυμαι I perish, Perf. ὄλωλα. 
ὶ ὄρνυμε, ὄρνυμαι I originate intransit. Perf. ὄρωρα. 
πείϑω, πέπεικα, ---- πείϑομαι, πέποιθα trust, and as a near 
transitive, believe. 
: πήγνυμει;---πήγνυμαν stand fixed, Perf. πέπηγα. ᾿ 
ῥήγνυμε,τ--(ήγνυμαε, (tear intransit.) Perf. ἐρόωγα am torn. 
᾿ σἥπω rot transit.—onnouee rot intransit. Perf. σέσηπα. 
τήχω melt transit.—r7xouce melt intransit. Perf. τέτηκα. 


Rem. 1. In the same way are to be explained the perfects of 
some deponents, as γίγνομαι γέγονα, μαίνομαι μέμηνα. 

Rem. 2. In a few verbs, the ist Perfect is similarly situated ; 
see in ἵστημι and φύω. 


yout : ΠΟ 198. THE TENSES. 


Le Ae the present, the imperfect, the ay the pluperfect, 
ad the future, agree in the main with the corresponding tenses 
of other languages, it is necessary only to speak briefly of the 
Aorist and she 3d Future of the Passive voice. 


23 


Ὁ 


290 


278 SYNTAX. | [§ 138. 


2. The ist and 2d Aorist are of course different forms of the 
same tenses, and differ not in signification. Few verbs have them 
both, and the 1st Aorist is found much oftener than the second. In 
order to understand the Aorist, it is necessary to have an accurate 
idea of the other preterite tenses. The perfect tense, then, is 


‘properly speaking not an historical tense. It does not relate the 


past as it happened, but brings the past into connexion with the 
present (as I know it, ror I have seen tt) ; although this connexion 
is not always expressed, but it is of itself implied in the mind; I 
have seen it, i. 6. 1 am one who saw it—now, at this time, it thes 
already happened.* The pluperfect removes this connected past 
and present time. into the past time, connecting a more remote 
with a less remote past time, I had seen it. 'The imperfect relates 
the. circumstances accompanying or attending the past action, J 
was seeing wt. The aorist differs from all these, in expressing sim- 
ply.a past action without any connexion in idea, with present or 
any other past time, J saw it. The past or imperfect tense in En- 
glish, therefore, is an aorist. In Latin the perfect, and in other 
languages the imperfect, is used to express the Greek aorist. E. g. 
Πύῤῥος 0 βασιλεὺς ὁδεύων ἐν ἔτυχε κυνὶ φρουροῦντε νεκρὸν 
---καὶ ἐκέλευσε ped ἑαυτοῦ κομίζειν, Pyrrhus the king, jour- 


neying, MET WITH a dog watching a dead body, and comMaNDED him 


to be brought along with him. By substituting has met, had met, or 
was meeting, for met, the difference between the Aorist and the 
other past tenses will be felt—So ὀλίγαις δὲ ὕστερον ἡμέραις 
ἐξέτασις ἦν, καὶ παρὴν ὃ κύων ἰδὼν δὲ τοὺς φονέας, ἐξέδραμε 
καὶ καϑυλάκτει αὐτούς, afew days after THEY WERE HOLD 


~ 


* The pure perfect, especially in the Greek, always implies that the ac; 
tion is terminated or has ceased. He who says in Greek, ‘I have known 
it,’ says that now he knows it no longer. He who says, οἶκον ῳχοδό-- 
μημοα, considers the house as yet standing; if he says, @xodounca., 


be leaves it undecided, yet uses the same form if he actually knows that 
_ itstands no longer\ hi 


Ἂς 


Ὁ 158.) ss PENSES: 279 


ING α review, and the dog was atTENDING. nd HE saw* the mur- 
derers, and RAN FORTH and REMAINED BARKING at them. 

3. ‘The aorist may be used for the perfect, and even for the 
pluperfect, where the circumstance of time is otherwise sufficient- 
ly clear from the connexion. It occurs most frequently, for the 
perfect ; x 8. δ’ Xenoph. Memor. I. 6. 14, Socrates says, τοὺς. ϑη- 
σαυροὺς τῶν πάλαι σοφῶν, ous ἐκεῖνοι κατέλεπον, ἐν βιβλί- 
aug. γράψαντες---διέρχομαι, where the sense obviously requires 
the perfect, ‘which they have left us in books. 


Rem. 1. Examples of the aorist instead of the pluperfect, 
-Xenorn. “her husband was in Bactria as ambassador, ἔπεμι- 
‘ape δὲ αὐτὸν 0 ᾿““σσύριος περὶ συμμαχίας, that is, had 
sent him. 
‘Tuucyp. οἱ ᾿““ϑηναῖοι εὐθὺς ἐπειδὴ ἀγεχώρησανπτξύμμος 
you ἐγένοντο. 


4. As the imperfect tense is used to express the limitation of 
circumstances under which the thing related happened, a greater 
or less duration or continuance, of course, is suggested by it. 
Hence the imperfect, as in καϑυλάκτει of the example in no. 2, is 
used to express a continued action, whilst the Aorist expresses a 
momentary action. In consequence of this difference of significa- 

tion, the imperfect and aorist are sometimes used alternately in a 
narration, the imperfect being introduced so often as the action is 
of a more continued nature, as: TOUS μὲν οὖν πελταστὰς ἐδέξαντο 
οἱ βάρβαροι (received, a momentary ue καὶ ἐμάχοντο (and 

fought with them, a continutd action) ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ἦσαν οἱ ὁπλῖται . 
(when the heavy armed ‘were near, a regular imperfect, according 
to the rule at the end of no. 2) ἐσράποντο (they turned, a momen- 
tary action), xa? οἱ πελτασταὶ εὐθὺς εἵποντο (and the peltastae im- 
mediately pursued them, a continued action.) : 

In this way the imperfect came to be used wherever an habitu- 
al or efien repeated action was to be expressed in past time, as Mi- | 
λων ὁ Κροτωνιάτης ἤσϑιε μνᾶς κρεῶν sixoot Milo the Crotonian 
was aceustomed to eat twenty minas of flesh. 


* δωνὶ is here rendered by a verb, because the English language has . 
. no Aorist participle. ‘ Remained barking, δ because duration of action is 
_ expressed by the Imperfect. 


291 


280 as SYNTAX. | τς 3,88. 


‘Rem. 2. This difference of the aorist from the imperfect often 
suggests a difference in the clauses, which is easily overlooked. — 
Thus. the imperfect in ο κύων ἐξεδραμε καὶ χαϑυλάκτει αὐτοὺς 
implies a continued barking ; if it were καϑυλάκτησε, it would be 
as momentary as ἐξέδραμεν. 


5. It appears from the foregoing, that the aorist inclines to the 


expression of momentary action, or such as it is intended so to re- 


present, in contrast with some more continued action, in the pro- 


gress of the narrative. ‘This distinction between continued and mo- 


mentary action exists also both in the present and future. I exhort 
and I am exhorting ; I will exhort, and I will be exhorting, differ in the 
same way as J exhoried and J was exhorting. ἴῃ the indicative mode 
there are no separate forms for this distinction, but in the other 
modes they are discriminated. There are in fact two views to be 
taken of the other modes, in respect to time. (1) Each has the 
definite time of its own indicative. —(2) They are also aoristical 
as well in the present tense as the aorist, containing (like the En- 
glish infinitive) no exact expression of time, and corresponding 
in time as far as it is necessary, with the indicative on which they 
depend in the construction. In this case, therefore, we have a dou- 
ble form, without any distinction of time. Thus cumzecy and τύ- 
woe are equally to strike, φίλης and φιλήσης equally the subjunc- 
tive thou lovest ; with the difference that the present tense of these — 
modes is usually employed for a continued, and the aorist for a 
ihomentary action. ‘Thus when Demosthenes says, 


τριήρεις πεντήκοντα παρασκεὺυ ἀσασϑαί φημι δεῖν, 
εἶτ αὐτοὺς οὕτω τὰς γνῶμας ἔχ εν, 


he would say that they should immediately fit out the ships, and 


therefore uses the aorist infinitive ; but the state of opinion which 


he recommends by γνώμας ἔχειν, is to be permanent, and there- 
fore he uses the present infinitive. He continues 
iv ἢ διὰ τὸν φόβον---ἡσυχίαν ἔχη ἢ παριδὼν ταῦτα ἀφύ- 
"λαχτος Ang oH that either through fear he will remain quiet 
(a continued action), or overlooking these measures, be taken 
(momentary) unprepared. 
So, too, in the imperative, 


§ 198.] TENSES. | 281 


énetdgy ἅπαντα ἀκούσητε, κρίνατε, καὶ μὴ πρότερον 
π ροολαμβάνετε, ἱ. 6. judge (momentary), while the state of 
mind expressed in the last clause is necessarily gradual in its 
formation, and therefore προλαμβάνετε. 


Rem. 3. It is to be observed, however, that this distinction is 
often very slight, conveying only a trifling modification of idea, 
and that therefore there is often no choice between the present 
and the aorist, and we may say indifferently A¢yecv and λέξαι, λέ- 
ye and λέξον. For want of a distinction corresponding to it in our 
. own language, it is often altogether impossible to retain it in the 
English. | 

6. The participle of the aorist always expresses past time, to 
be rendered either by the phrase after that, or by the participle 
of the perfect tense having ; though in consequence of the latter, 
it is often equivalent to the present; 6. g- ἀποβαλών who has lost, 
i.e. no longer possesses; μαϑὼν who has learned, i. ὃ. who knows ; 
ϑανὼν having died, dead ; οἱ πεσόντες the fallen, the slain, &c. 


238 


Demosthenes says, the true author of an oration full of just - 


᾿ reproaches is ὁ παρεσχηκωὺς ta ἔργα, --οὐχ ὁ ἐσχεμμένος, οὐδ᾽ ὁ 
μεριμνήσας τὰ δίκαια λέγειν, i.e. one who has furnished actions, 
᾿ not he who has carefully prepared himself and endeavoured to speak 
what is right. 


Rem. 4. Some verbs in their very signification destroy the na- 
tural import of the tenses, as ἥκω I come ,is always to be consid- 
ered as a praeter tense, [ havo arrived ; ἄρτι ἥκεις ἢ πάλαι hast 
‘thou just arrived, or long since? So οἵ ἔχομαι I depart often signities 
I have gone, whereby the imperfect ᾧχετο attains the character of 
the pluperfect. Thus also rixzecy reve, besides the signification 
of beget or bear, has also that of to be father or mother to any one ; 
and of consequence, this, in the present tense, may have the mean- 
ing of the perfect, as πολλοῦ σὲ ϑνητοῖς ἄξιον τίκτει πατήρ. 

Rem. 5. The perfect has also a subjunctive and optative, and 
the future an optative, which are really used, when the kind of 
uncertainty, peculiar to these modes (§ 140), ‘falls in with these 
tenses, as εἶϑε 0 υἱὸς νενεκήχοι O that my son may have conquer- 
ed. As in most of such cases the modes of the present and aorist 
are sufficient, those tenses are used only where distinctness re- 
guires it; and even then it is more common to use the pertphras- 
tical form, as πεφιληκῶς ὦ and einv.— The imperative of the per- 
fect occurs in the second person only in those verbs of which the 
perfect has a present signification, as χέχραχϑε, μέμνησο. But 
the third person often serves as an emphatic expression, 6. g. 


36 


282 SYNTAX. [S§ 139, 140. 


᾿ ψῦν δὲ τοῦτο τετολμήσϑω εἰπεῖν be it ventured, i.e. J will 
venture. 
πεπείράσϑω be it attempted, i. e. do but attempt. 


§ 139. THIRD FUTURE. 


1. The third or paulo-post future is properly, both in form 
and jignification, compounded from the perfect and future. It 
places what is passed or concluded, in the future, e. g. 
7 πολιτεία τελέως κεχοσμήσεται, ἐὰν 6 τοιοῦτος αὐτὴν ἐπι- 
σκοπῇ φύλαξ, the city will have been perfectly organized, if 
_ such a watchman oversee it; i. 6. disponita erit not dispo- 
netur. 
μάτην ἐμοὶ κεχλαύσεται I shall have wept in vain. Compare 
§ 134 Rem. 2. | 
“ Now as the perfect often ‘signifies a continued state, (as e. g. 
ἐγγέγραμμαν signifies not merely 1 have been inscribed, but I stand 
on the list,) this Beelication remains in the third future, e. 8: 
οὐδεὶς. κατοὶ σπουδὰς μετεγγραφήσεται, "ALN ὥςπερ ἦν τὸ 
ες πρῶτον, ἐγγεγράψεται, no one’s inscription shall be altered 
From favour, but as each was from the first, so he shall stand 
inscribed. ARISTOPH. 

2. Consequently this is the natural future of those perfects, which 
have acquired a separate meaning of the nature of the present ; 
as λέλειπται has been left, i. 6. remains; Aehelweras shall have been 
left, i. 6. shall remain ; λειῳϑήσεταν will be left or deserted. So xé- 
xtnwot 1 possess, μέμνημαν I remember, KERTNOOM Mb MEMY HOO MEL. 


Rem. 1. Besides this, the Attics employ the 3d future of seve- 
ral verbs in the passive, as a simple future passive. See the ano- 
malous δέω bind ; so too memavoouat, κεκόψομαι, &c. 

239 Rem. 2. In some verbs the third future has a peculiar import, 
either (1) Jt shall, Iwill, as τεϑαψεται he shall (not he will) be 
buried; or (2) a hastening of the action, as φράζε καὶ πὲπράξε- 
TOL, speak, and it shall be accomplished immediately. — It is on this 
acceptation that the name of paulo-post future rests. 


δ 140. Mmopes. 


_1. The Greek language appears to have the advantage of the 
Latin and of the modern languages, in the optative mode. On 


§ 140.] | MODES. 283 


᾿ “4 


comparing, however, the use of this mode with the rule given § 
88. 3, it will appear that the optative mode is nearly equivalent 
to the subjunctive mode imperfect and pluperfect tenses, which 
accordingly are wanting in Greek. For instance, in the expres- 
sion of a wish, we say, “had I but that;” this is equivalent to if 
I had, the subjunctive imperfect of our language, although the 
time in reality is present. Hence the following rule is establish- 
ed. : 
2. The relatives and particles (except the compounds of ἂν, 
which in connexion with the present and future require the sub- 


junctive), take the optative, in connexion with the historical ten- ; 


ses, 6. g. 

οὐχ. ἔχω or οὐκ οἶδα, ὅποι τράπωμαι non habeo quo me ver- 
tam, I know not whither I may turn myself. 

οὐχ εἶχον, οὐκ ἤδειν, ὅποι τραποίμην quo me verterem non 

habebam, I knew not whither I should turn myself. 
πάρειμι, ἵνα ἴδω, I am present that I may see. 
παρῆν, ἵνα ἴδοιμε, I was present that I might see. 
3. In consequence of this, the particles and pronouns which 

trike the indicative mode in sermone directo, require the optative 
an sermone obliquo, e. g. 


ἤρετο; εἰ οὕτως ἔ ov, he asked, of it were thus. 
ἐλεξέ μοι, OTL ἡ ὁδὸς φέροι εἰς τὴν πόλεν, ἥνπερ ὁρῴην. 


Use εἰ and ay. 
4. For the further use of the modes, it is necessary to under- 
stand particularly the force of the particles εἰ and ἄν, which alone 
_and in composition are variously employed. 


5. The conjunction εἰ signifies if and whether. In either ac- 
ceptation it is joined by correct writers with the indicative or op- 
tative, never with the subjunctive mode. 


6. The particle ἀν can seldom be rendered by a correspond- 
ing English word. It adds an expression ef uncertainty or possi- 
bility, which not only strengthens or modifies the natural meaning 


ΤῺ the epic poets xe, xév. 


240 


24] 


284 SYNTAX. | [5 140. 


= 


5 δὲ 


of the subjunctive and optative, but communicates itself (though 
with the exception, for the most part, of the present and perfect) 
to the indicative and to other verbal forms. It always stands af- 
ter one or more words of the clause, and is thereby distingeiehed 
from the ἄν which is abbreviated from ἐάν. 

7. The particle ἄν is attached to all relatives, and to certain 
particles, with some of which it coalesces into one word, as par- 
ticularly ove — ὅταν, ἐπειδή --- éneday. With εἰ it forms ἐάν, 
and is abbreviated into the wholly synonymous forms ἤν and 
av, which is distinguishable from the av treated of in the forego- 
ing paragraph, inasmuch as like ἐάν it regularly begins a clause. 
All words of this class attain by the addition of ἄν an expression 
of possibility, and consequently take the subjunctive mode. When 
the clause which contains them comes in connexion with past time 
or the sermo obliquus, it either remains unaltered—in the manner 
of words quoted; or the simple particles (εἰ, ὅτε, ἐπειδή, ὃς, 09- 
τις, ὅσος, &c.) with the optative mode take its place, e. g. 

παρέσομαι, ἐὰν τι δέῃ. 
ἔφη παρεῖναι, εἴ τι δέοι or δέησοιυ. 

8. The Greek language is particularly rich in the expression 
of hypothetical or conditional propositions. The most important 
principles, in this respect, are the following, viz. 

In every conditional proposition, the condition is either possi- 
ble or impossible. “The possible cases either do or do not con- 
tain an expression of certainty ; and in the case of uncertainty, I 
either do or do not hold out a prospect of a decision: hence the 
following cases. - 

1) Possibility, without the idea of uncertainty, is expressed by 
εἰ with the indicative, e. g. | 

εἰ ἐβρόντησε καὶ ἤστραψεν if it has thundered, it has also 
_ lightened. 
εἴ τι ἔχεις; δὸς, if thou hast any thing, give it. 

2) Uncertainty with prospect of decision is expressed by ἐὰν 

with the subjunctive, 6. δ. 


ἐάν τι ἔχωμεν, δώσομεν, should we a heros any thing, we will 
give it. | 


§ 140.] mops. ᾿ 286 


‘ 


ἐὰν τίς τινα τῶν ὑπαρχόντων νόμων μὴ καλῶς ἔχειν igh 
Tats γραφέσϑω, should any one esteem any of the existing 
laws inexpedient, let him enter a complaint. 


Here there is understood in the protasis of the sentence, “ and 
that will appear,” &c. 

3) Uncertainty, without any such iyualification, ἢ is expressed by 
εἶ with the optative mood, and in the apodosis the optative with 
ay, 6. g. , 

εἴ τις ταῦτα πράττοι, μέγα μ᾽ ἂν ὠφελήσειε, should any one 
do this, he would render me a great service. 


εἴ τις ταῦτα “zat αὐτὰ ἐξετάσειεν, εὕρουν av, should any one 
investigate this for itself, he would find— 


Here there is nothing supplied by the understanding, but “ it 
is problematical whether this be done.” 

4) Impossibility or disbelief, or an assertion in general that a 
thing is not so, is invariably expressed, in the Attic writers, by the 
imperfect tense, either for present or indefinite time, with ἄν at- 
tached to it in the apodosis, e. g. 

éé tt εἶχεν, ἐδίδου av, had he-any thing, he would give it. 
Here there is a necessary reservation of “ but he has not.” 


: 


9. When in this last case both clauses are in past time, the ao- 
rist is necessarily used instead of the imperfect, at least in the apo- 
dosis, e. g. 


εἴ Tt ἔσχεν, ἔδωκεν av, had he had any thing, he would have 
given tt. 


In like manner, the clauses may be of different times, e.g. * 
εἰ ἐπείσϑην, οὐκ av nOdworovr, had I obeyed, I were not (now) 
sick. : | 
Rem. 1. All these cases are frequently modified by their con- 
_ nexion with the preteritey according to the foregoing principles, 
as observation, i in the single cases, will show, e 
nal, εἴ τε ἔχοι, ἐκέλευσε δοῦναι, and if he had any thing, he 
commanded him to give it. 
Here ἐχέλευσε belongs not to the apodosis, but to the previous 242 
context; the optative is used, in consequence of being preceded 


by a preterite, see above no. 8.2, and δοῦναι constitutes the apo- ~ 
dosis. 


10. When the phrases and particles compounded with ἄν have 
the aorist subjunctive, they constitute a conditional preterite, and 


243 


286 ‘SYNTAX. [§ 140. 


(if the context regard the future) a future preterit Latin 
Futurum exactum, 6. g. 


yon δὲ ὅταν μὲν τίϑησϑε τοὺς νόμους, ὅποιοὶ τινές εἶσι OX0- 
πεῖν" ἐπειδὰν δὲ ὃ ἢ σϑ' ε, φυλάττειν καὶ χρῆσϑαι, when 
you shall have passed them. 

ἐπειδὰν ἅπαντα ἀκούσητε, κρίνατε, when you shall have 
heard all, then judge 

αὕτη ἡ παρασχευή, ΠΡ δυνήσεται, ἕως av περιγενώ- 
peda. τῶν ἐχϑρῶν till we shall have conquered the enemy. 


The future lies at the bottom of these constructions, and the 
aorist only has its own preterite. 


11. The optative with ἂν is, according to no. 8. 3 above, only 
the apodosis of a supposition, with the suppression of which sup- 
position the optative often remains. In consequence, the optative 
is often used in any simple proposition, intended to be represent- 
ed merely as a wish, and where in English might, could &c. is 
made use of, 6. g. 3 


τὸ σωματοειδὲς éotw, οὗ τις ἂν ἅψαιτο, the corporeal is that 
‘which [1 he will | a man may touch. 

γένοιτο 0 ἂν πᾶν ἐν τῷ μακρῷ χρόνῳ in the lapse of time 
all things may happen. 

ἠδέως ὁ ἂν ϑεασαίμην ταῦτα gladly would I see this. 

αλλ᾽ οὖν, εἴπου TLS av—but, some one perhaps. may say— 

ἴσως ἂν οὖν τινὲς ἐπιτιμήσείαν τοῖς εἰρημένοις perhaps now 
some may blame what has been said. 


And hence comes it, that this phraseology, by the moderation 
of language conspicuous in the Attic writers, became used in the 
place: of the most confudent assertions and predictions, e. g. 

οὐ γὰρ ἂν Taye ἤδη γεγενημένα τῇ νυνὶ βοηϑείᾳ κωλῦσαι 
δυνηθϑείημεν for what has already happened, we could not 
swith the present forces prevent. 
οὐκ ἂν φεύγοες thou canst not escape. 
This mode of expression is often used for the simple future. So 
too for the imperative ; e. g. λέγοις av for λέγε. 


Rem. 2. Every conditional or uncertain proposition may be 
converted in Greek into an infinitive or a participle, retaining av, 
wherein this language possesses an advantage, which others want, 
of imparting the expression of the Optative and Subjunctive to the 
Infinitive and Participle ; e. g. 

οἴονται ἀναμαχέσασϑαν ἂν συμμάχους προφλαβόντες, they 


™ 


§140.} | MODES. 2587. 


think, they might recover themselves by acquiring allies ; (for 
; ᾿ἀναμαχέσαιντ᾽ ἂν, εἰ I λάβοιεν.) 
τἄλλα σιωπῶ, πόλλ᾽ av ἔχων εἰπεῖν, though I have much that I 

a, say. 

δίως ἀποκτιννύντες καὶ ἀναβιωσκόμενοί γ᾽ ἄν, εἰ oloir 
αν: who would readily kill and bring to life again, af they 
were able ; (for aveBewoxovt ἄν.) Prato. 
‘ The sense of the Infinitive and Participle of the future is often 
also thus expressed ; e. g. 
οὐκ ἔστιν ἕνα ἄνδρα ἂν δυνηϑῆναί ποτὲ ἅπαντα ταῦτα πρᾶ- 
ac, it 1s not, possible, that one man should be able ever to do 
all those things. «υνηϑῆναί note without ἄν must have 
referred to the past- See also the example below § 145. 
7 4, a. 

After οἴεσϑαι, ἐλπίζειν, &c. this is the common way to express 
the future. 

Rem. 3. The position of ἄν is wholly decided by euphony. 
This is to be remarked, in order that, by observing the connex- 
ion, it may always be brought to the ‘verb to which it belongs; 
e. ‘ 

Ξ ἐδόκει ἂν ἡμῖν ἡδέως πάντα διαπρᾶξαι. 

Here ἄν is to be separated from the verb near which it stands, 
and to be joined to διαπράξαι, he appeared to us, as tf he would 

orm every thing willingly (or διαπράξειεν av.) Thus τούτου 
τοῦ ψηφίσματος τον bhai av, εἰ μὴ Ov ἡμᾶς ἡδίκηντο οἱ βα- 
σιλεῖς, i. 6. εἰ τὸ ψηφίσμα ἐκυρώϑη (without Gv), οἱ βασιλεῖς ἡ- 
'δίχηντ᾽ av (would have been offended), εἰ un Oe ἡμᾶς (i. 6. had 
we not been.) 

νῦν δέ μοι δοκεῖ, κἂν ἀσέβειαν εἰ καταγιγνωσκοὶ τις τὰ προς- 

ἥκοντα ποιξῖν, here the ὦ αν contained in κἄν belongs to the 
Inf. ποιεῖν, 1.6. δοκεῖ wor, καὶ, εἴτις ἀσέβειαν καταγιγνώσκοι, 
τὰ προςήκοντα ποιεῖν ἂν, at seems to me also that, if any one 
should accuse him of i am prety, he would do right. 

‘Rem. 4. The particle ἄν often gives to the Indicative the sig- 
nification of habitual performance of the action; e. g. 

Demosthenes says, no one of the former orators has had 50 
great influence am 80 many respects at the same time, ahh ὁ 
μὲν γράφων οὐκ ἂν ἐπρέσβευεν, ὁ δὲ πρεσβεύων οὐχ ἂν 
ἔγραφε, but he who proposed laws was not commonly an ambas- 
sador, and he. who went on embassies did not commonly pro- 
pose laws. 

Rem. 5. It isa peculiar use of the Optative, when it stands in 
the protasis instead of a preterite indicative, to signify the repeti- 
ton of an action ; 3&8 

οὕς μὲν ἴδοι εὐτάκτως καὶ σιωπῇ ἰόντας, προρελαύνων av- 
τοῖς οἵτινες εἶεν ἤρῶτα, καὶ ἐπεὶ πύϑοιτο,---ἐπήνει. " whom 


244 


288. SYNTAX. [§ 141. 


= Saw,’ that j is, ‘ so often as he saw any,’ with which the ἐπεὶ 
πύϑοιτο, connects itself. 
| ἔπραττεν ἃ δόξειεν αὐτῷ he did what [in each case] seemed 
> right to him, 
ὅσα ἐπερωτῷτο, ταχὺ ἀπεκρίνατο, what he was asked, he an- 
swered ammedately. 
In such constructions, care must be had not to attribute to the Op- 
tative any expression of uncertainty. 
Rem. 6. The Subjunctive is not used alone except for exhorta- 
tions in the Ist person, as comer let us go (where in the 2d and 3d 
person the Optative would be used), and in dubious questions, part- 


~ ly with and partly without βούλει or ϑέλεις preceding; 6. g. 


πόϑεν βούλει ἄρξωμαι; whence wilt thou that I begin? 

βούλει. οὖν σκοπῶμεν ; dost thou wish then that.we examine ? 

τί ποιῶ; what shall I do ? 

πὴ BO; moi τράπωμαι; whither shall I go? whither shall I 
turn myself ? 

εἴπω οὖν σοι τὸ αἴτιον ; shall I tell thee the cause ? 

νῦν ἀκούσω αὖϑεξ ; shall I hear again. 7 


§ 141. INFINITIVE. ϊ 


1. The infinitive mode is used in Greek in the same cases as 
in the Latin and modern languages, and in various others, particu- 
larly after verbs of saying, believing, promising, permitting, beg- 
ging, &c. 


2, The infinitive. is often used to express what is expressed in 
Latin by ad and the sd, or by the participle in dus, viz. end 
or r destination ; 3 e.g. 

ἔδωκεν αὐτὸ δούλῳ φορῆσαι he gave it to a slave to carry. 


ὃ ἄνϑρωπος πέφυκε φελεῖν man was formed to love. 


παρέχω ἐμαυτὸν ἐρωτᾷν I present myself to be questioned. 
ἵππον παρεῖχε τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἀναβῆναι. 
ἦλθον ἰδεῖν σε. 


3. The infinitive is governed by an adjective (or substantive) 
expressing fitness or qualification, 6. σ΄. 


ἐπιτήδειος, ποιεῖν τι fit to do any thing. 

οὐ δεινός ἐστε λέγευν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀδύνατος σιγᾷν, he is not powerful 

‘> ἧπ speaking, but her as imeapable of keeping silence. 

δειναὶ γυναῖκες εὑρίσκειν τέχνας women are skilful in invent-— 
ing devices. 


, 


ὁ Μ41.} INFINITIVE. 289 


It is also thus employed in a passive sense, where, neverthe- 
less, the form of the active voice is commonly used, (in Latin the 
supine in u,) 6. g. \ 

ὁᾷδιος νοῆσαι easy to observe (to be observed). 


Ov ἀκούειν pleasant to hear (suave auditu). 
πόλις χάλεπη λαβεῖν. : in 


The form of the infinitive passive, however, is not wholly un- 
used ; e. 5. ϑηλυφανὴς ὀφϑῆναι Feminine + in aspect, aS in Horace 
niveus videri. 


4. Whenever an infinitive thus qualifying the preceding phrase 245 


or clause, does not admit of a sufficiently obvious connexion, par- 
ticularly in consequence of other words being interposed, it is 


_ commonly introduced by were, (more rarely οἷς.) which also, in” 


an entire construction, will be found to refer toa preceding de- 
Sere, e. g. 


ἦν δὲ πεπαιδευμένος οὕτως, ὥςτε πάνυ ῥᾳδίως ἔχειν ἀρ- 
κοῦντα, he was so bronght up, as very easily to have what 
sufficed him. 

φιλοτιμότατος ἦν, ὥςτε πάντα ὑπομεῖναι τοῦ ἐπαινεῖσϑαι 
ἕνεκα, he was very ambitious, so as to bedr every thing for 
the sake of being praised. 

γεώτεροί ELGLY ἢ ὥςτε εἰδέναι οἵων πατέρων ἐστέρηνταν they 
are too young to know of what fathers they are deprived. 

ὡς μικρὸν μεγάλῳ εἰκάσαι, (parenthetically,) to © cas con 

~ small things with great. 


5. The infinitive is used as a neuter substantive (§ 125. 6. 1) 
not only singly, but in connexion with phrases provided with an ar- 
ticle, which are thus subject to all the constructions of nouns, 6. δὶ 


τὸ φυλάξαι ταγαϑὰ τοῦ χτήσασϑαι χαλεπώτερον to preserve 
property as harder than to acquire it. 

τὸ μὲν οὖν ἐπίορκον καλεῖν τίνα, ἄνευ τοῦ τὰ πεπραγμένα 
δεικνύναι, λοιδορία ἐστίν, 1ο call one perjured, without show- 
ing his deeds, ἐς calumny. 

τὸ λέγειν ὡς δεῖ, μέγιστόν é ἐστι σημεῖον τοῦ φρονεῖν εὖ. 

τὸ πλουτεῖν ἐστιν ἐν τῷ χρῆσϑαε μᾶλλον ἢ ἐν τῷ κεκτῆσϑαι. 


Rem. 1. In this way, a preposition may be used, where other- 
wise only a conjunction would be admitted, 6. g. 
᾿“ϑηνὰ ἔρῥευψε τοὺς αὐλοὺς δεὰ τὸ τὴν ὄψεν αὐτῆς ποε- 
εῖν ἄμορφον Minerva cast away the pipes, because they 
disfigured her countenance. 


37 


- 


~ 


246 


290 _ - SYNTAX, — [§ 142, 143. 


; 


Other jebialivate clauses also ὍΣ be interposed between the ar- 
ticle and its infinitive, 6. g.. : 


τὸ δὲ, ὃ ὅσα γ᾽ ἡδέως ἡ ψυχὴ δέχεται, ταῦτα ἱκανῶς ἐχπονεῖν 
ἐδοκίμαξε, he recommended properly to digest as much as na- 
ture recetves with pleasure. 

Rem. 2. The infinitive of some short parenthetical phrases ad- 
mits of explanation from the foregoing constructions ; as from no. 
2, the phrase ἁπλὼς εἰπεῖν in short. Thus too ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν means 
as I think, which infinitive, though without zo, takes the anid of 
the accusative ; see § 131. 6 and Rem. 4. 


: § 142. INFINITIVE WITH A SUBJECT. 


1. When the infinitive has a subject, it is regularly put in the 
accusative case. Thus in the infinitive introduced by τό, e. g. 


ε , 3 
τὸ ἀμαρτανευν ἀνθρώπους ἂν ϑαυμαστόν that men should 
err is not surprising. 


οὐδὲν éxoaxdn, διὰ τὸ ἐκεῖνον μὴ παρεῖναι nothing was done, 
because he was not there. 
2..The infinitive is thus construed with the accusative, when, 
after verbs on which another clause directly depends, especially 
verbs of saying and believing, the subject of the dependent clause 
passes into the accusative, and its verb into the infinitive, δ, δ: 


οἱ μυϑολόγου φασὶ, τὸν Οὐρανὸν δυναστεῦσαι πρῶτον ᾿ 


τοῦ παντὸς, mythologists say, that.Uranus first ruled. ἢ, uni- 
\ verse. 


9. The subject of the infinitive is often omitted, if it is in any 
degree already expressed in the preceding verb, as δέομαί σου 
παραμένειν I pray thee to stay, συνειπεῖν ὁμολογῶ I confess that I 
assented, ἔφη σπουδάζειν he said that he was in haste. In a case 
like the latter, the Latin language, though addicted to this con- 
struction, would prefer the repetition of the subject, dixit sz_festi- 
nore. 


ᾧ 149. INFINITIVE WITH CASES. | 


1. If an adjective or substantive &c. be attached to the above 
mentioned subject of the infinitive, as a farther qualification of 


§ 143.] INFINITIVE WITH CASES. 291 


the idea, in the way of a predicate or attribute, such adjective or 
substantive is of course put in the accusative, if the subject-accu- 
sative of the infinitive be expressed, e. g. ἤμην σὲ παρεῖναι μ O- 
νον" ἅπαντες νομίζομεν, τὴν γῆν σφαῖραν εἶναι. 

2. If the subject of the infinitive be not thus expressed, an ατ- 
TRACTION, as it is called, takes place, whereby the aforesaid words 
of qualification are placed, not in the accusative, but in the same 
case as the object to which they refer in the preceding clause. 


Of this attraction there are two cases, viz. 

1) If the subject omitted with the infinitive is likewise nomi- 
native to the preceding finite verb on which the infinitive depends, 
the qualification must also be in the nominative, as ὁ ᾿“λέξανδρος 
ἔφασκεν εἶναι Διὸς υἱός, Lat. dicebat se esse Jovis rium ; which 
is also done, though the subject of the first verb is not express- 
‘edje.g. 
ἐνόμιζον οὐδ᾽ αὐτοὶ σωϑήσεσϑαι they thought that they them- 

selves would not be saved. 


ἔφασκες εἶναι δεσπότης. 
s 
ἔπεισα αὐτοὺς εἶναι ϑεός. 


2) If the omitted subject of the infinitive is the immediate or 
more remote object of the preceding verb, those qualifications are 
attached to the infinitive in that oblique case in which their sub- 
ject is governed by the foregoing verb as its object; e. g. 


In the genitive, 
ἐδέοντο αὐτοῦ. εἶναι προϑύμου, they begged him to be zealous: 


Or in the dative, 
ἔξεστι mor, γενέσϑαι εὐδαίμονε, which may also be express- 
edi in Latin, licet illis esse beatis. 
ἀπεῖπεν αὐτοῖς ναύταις εἶναν he forbade them to be navi- 


gators. 
ταῖς πόλεσι τοῦτο μᾶλλον λυσιτελεῖ, ἢ δούλαις ὀφϑῆναι γι- 


γνομέναις. 
Or, finally, in the accusative, in which case it coincides with the 
principal rule, as χελέύω σὲ εἶναι πρόϑυμον. 
Rem. 1. The same attraction holds, where the clause which 
contains the infinitive, has the article τὸ before it, e. g. 
πρὸς TO συμφέρον ζῶσι διὰ τὸ φίλαυτοι εἶναν they live mere- 
ly for profit, because they are selfish. 


247 


292 ) SYNTAX. [ὁ 144. 


Anpoodevns σεμνύνεται τῷ γραφεὶς ἀποφυγεῖν Demosthe- 
snes 18 proud im having escaped. when accused. 

οὐ γὰρ ἐχπέμπονται ἐπὶ τῷ δοῦλοι, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ τῷ ὅμοιοι τοῖς 
λειπομένοις εἶναν they (colonists) are not sent out as being 
like slaves, but as being like those which remain behind. 

ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν ἔστι τὸ ἐπιεικέσι καὶ φαύλοις εἶναι it depends up- 
on us to be reasonable or corrupt. ) 

If, however, the subject of the infinitive is included in the pre- 
ceding clause as accusative, the infinitive has as usual the accu- 
sative with it, as ἐπέδειξε τὰς πολιτείας προεχούσας τῷ δικαιοτέ- 
eas ξἰναν he showed that states had the advantage by being more just. 

Rem. 2. Also in the construction with were (see ὃ 141. 4) the 
nominative is joined with the infinitive, if the first clause require 

” it, as οὐδεὶς τηλικοῦτος ἔστω παρ᾽ ὑμῖν, ὥςτε τοὺς νόμουρ παρα- 
βὰς μὴ δοῦναι δίκην let no one be so great among you, that, break- 
ing the laws he ean go unpunished. 

Rem. 3. The-infinitive is sometimes used quite absolutely, in- 
stead of wish, request, order ; and this, in the third person, either 
with the subject } in the accusative, as γυμνὸν σπείρειν, γυμνὸν δὲ 

248 βοωτεῖν (where the subject is to be assumed to be the indefinite , 
third person, zig, though Virgil has rendered it in the second, nu- 
dus ard, sere nudus). —or impersonally, as ὦ Ζεῦ, ἐχγενέσϑαι. “μού 
᾿“΄ϑηναίους τίσασϑαι, may it be conceded to me. Still more fre- 
quently the infinitive is used instead of the imperative of the sec- 
ond person, and in this case the subject and all that belongs to it, 
if expressed at all, are expressed in the nominative, 8. g. 

= Aha ovy aip “Ay dgi, ϑέων ἐπὶ νῆας ᾿Αχαιῶν, Εἰπεῖν. 

Homer. 
ἂν δ᾽ ἄρα τι τῷ μήκει πονῶν ἄχϑη, μὴ ἐμὲ αἰτιᾶσϑαι TOU- 
TOY, “blame me not therefor. 


§ 144. CONSTRUCTION WITH THE RELATIVE. 


1. The construction with the relatives ὅς, ὅσος, οἷος, &c. (of 
which the construction with the participle is only an abridged 
form,) is not used to express connexion alone, but also expresses 
the ground, cause, or other circumstance usually denoted by a 
conjunction, e. g. 

ϑαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, ὃς ἡμῖν οὐδὲν δίδως, thou doest strangely, 
in that thou gtvest us nothing. 

αἱ ᾿“ργεῖαι ἐμακάριζον τὴν μητέρα, οἵων τέκνων ἐκύρησε, 
i.e. ὅτε τοιούτων Tex. ἔκυρ. the Argive dames blessed the 
mother that she had such children. 


§ 44“ ᾿ς CONSTRUCTION WITH THE RELATIVE. ὦ 293 


So, particularly with the > oa to express design or ad- 
vantage; 6. δ. 


εἰς τ ἡμῖν αὐτὸς ὅδε παρεκαϑέζετο, ᾧ μεταδῶμεν τῆς 
 σχέψεως opportunely has he sat down by us with whom we 
can share the inquiry. 


2. The nature of the relative construction properly requires, 
that the first verb have a noun, and the second a relative refer- 
_ Ting to it, and each in the case demanded by the\clause in which 
_ it stands; e. g. 


᾿ οὗτος ἐστον δ ἀνὴρ ὃν εἶδες. 
μετέδωκεν ἡμῖν πάντων, ὅσα παρῆν. 
φίλον οὐκ ἔχω, ᾧτινε πιστεῦσαε ἂν δυναίμην. 


But the substantive of the first verb is often omitted, and attach- 
ed to the relative in the second clause, and in the same case, e. g. 


οὗτός ἐστιν, ὃν εἶδες ἄνδρα. 
οὐκ ἔστιν, ἥντινα οὐκ ἦρξεν ἀρχήν, there is no fice which he 
hath not held. , 


Often, when emphasis requires it, the clause so constructed 
precedes, as ὃν εἶδες ἄνδρα, οὗτός ἐστιν. 


3. When the noun (either in the genitive or dative) to which 249 


the relative refers, is without a demonstrative, like οὗτος or éxei- 
vos, the relative, otherwise in the accusative, is put in the same \ 
case with the noun by atrracTion; 6. g- 
μεταδίδως αὐτῷ τοῦ σίτου, οὗπερ αὐτὸς ἔχεις thou impartest 
to him of the food, which thou thyself hast. 

Here οὗπερ, on account of the genitive σίτου. to which it re- 
fers, is in the genitive instead of being in the accusative ὅνπερ, 
which the verb ἔχεις requires. In like manner the following. 


εὖ προςφέρεται τοῖς φίλοις. οἷς ἔχει, he treats well the friends 
whom he has. 

τῷ ἡγεμόνι πιστεύσομεν, ᾧ ἂν Αὔρος δῷ, for ὃν ἂν ᾿Αὔρος δῷ: 

κρατήσας μεγάλων χρημάτων, ὧν ὁ ᾿Τέλων ἐπετράπετο 
αὐτῷ. « 


Rem. 1. This construction became so prevalent as sometimes 
to remain, though the first noun had a demonstrative expressed ; 
as οἱ δημιουργοὶ τούτων, ὧν ἐπήνεσας. 

_ 4. The noun, by which the relative is thus attracted, is often 
transported into the clause with the relative; where, together 


250 


294 SYNTAX. [§ 144. 


with the relative, it stands in the case governed by ~~ verb on 


| which it depends ; ; 8. δ. 


μεταδίδως αὐτῷ, οὗπερ αὐτὸς ἔχεις σίτου. 

εὖ προςφέρεται, οἷς ἔχει. φίλοις. 

ἀπολαύω ὧν ἔχω ἀγαϑώῶν. 

χρώμενοι οἷς εἶπον προστάταις, εὐδαίμονες ἦσαν (from χρῆ- 
σϑαι προστάτῃ to have a magistrate) having those magis- 
trates, which I have named they were prosperous: 


Sometimes there is at the same time an inversion, which sounds 
very strange, as οἷς ἔχει φίλοις, εὖ προςφέρεται, the friends whom he 
hath, he treats well. 


5. The noun is sometimes wholly omitted, giving to the rela- 


tive the appearance of belonging directly to the preceding clause, 
6. g. 
μεμνημένος ov ἔπραξε, for μεμνημένος ‘TOY πραγμάτων, ὧν 
ἔπραξεν, and this for ἃ ἔπραξεν. 
μετεπέμπετο ἄλλο στράτευμα πρὸς ὦ προσϑὲν εἶχε (for πρὸς 
τῷ στρατεύματι, O πρόσθεν εἶχε! 7 
And with the inversion, οἷς ἔχω χρώμαι, for ἃ ἔχω, τούτοις χρώ- 
μαι.. 

Rem. 2. In one case the nominative of the relative undergoes 
this attraction. When in an entire clause ihe nominative of the 
relative οἷος would stand with the verb εἶναι (as πάνυ ἡδέως χα- 
οἰξονται ἀνδρὶ τοιούτῳ, οἷος σὺ εἶ, they would gladly please such 
a man as thou art,) not only the demonstrative but the verb εἶναι 
is omitted, and the relative is then so attracted by the leading 
clause, that together with all the nominatives connected with it, 
it assumes the case of the noun, to which it refers, and is even in- 
serted before it, as πάνυ ἡδέως χαρίζονται οἵῳ σοὶ ἀνδρί. — 

Rem. 3. When the relative, by means of a verb like to be, to 
name, to believe, &c. is joined with a noun, in the same case, it 
conforms itself, in gender and number, to this noun, and not to 
that, which is its proper antecedent; 6. g. 

πάρεστιν αὐτῷ φόβος, ἣν αἰδῶ καλοῦμεν, he has a fear, which 
we call modesty. 
τὸν οὐρανὸν, OVE δὴ πόλους καλοῦσιν. 
Or with omission of the first noun, 6. g. 
εἰσὶν ἐν ἡμῖν, ἃς ἐλπίδας ὀνομάζομεν, there are omen) s an 
us, which we call hopes. 


~ 


§145.]' CONSTRUCTION WITH THE PARTICIPLE. 295 


§ 145. CONSTRUCTION WITH THE PARTICIPLE. 


1. The Greek language, having participles for most of the 
tenses, makes a far more extensive use of them, than other lan- 
guages. By combining their use with that of the relative and in- 
finitive, many clauses can be interwoven with each other, without 
confusion ; e. g. - 

ἐχεῖνα μόνον διεξήει, ἃ τοὺς ἰδόντας ἡγεῖτο τεϑνηκέναι. 
Here ἃ is the object of ἐδόντας, this the subject of τεϑνηκέναι, 
and this dependent on ἡγεῖτο : he related only those things, of which 
he believed, that they had died, who saw them. 

2. Not only those verbs, which are connected with other verbs 
by relatives, but almost every verb introduced in English with as, 
because, after that, so that, although, (whose subject has been already 
named with the preceding verb) is, with the omission of those par- 


ticles, converted into a participle of the same case as its subject- - 


‘ « om aed , ᾿ . 
verb ; as ἐπεσχεπτόμην τὸν ἑταῖρον νοσοῦντα, which may signify, 
according to the context, either, I visited my comrade, who was 
sick, or when or because he was sick. 


, τῷ μεγάλῳ βασιλεῖ ov πάτριόν ἐστεν ἀνδρὸς ἀκροᾶσϑαι μὴ 
προςφχκυνήσαντος, tt rs not the hereditary custom of the great 
king, to hear a person who, does not (or, if he do not) fall 

down before him. 

_ τὸ σῶμα συνήρμοσταί GOL, μικρὸν μέρος λαβόντι ἑκάστου, thy 
body has been composed by taking a small part from every 
thing. 

Rem. 1. The participles, which express the ideas of after that 
or in that, in translating both from Greek and Latin, may often with 
advantage be made to precede the verb, with which they are ‘con- 
nected, with the conjunction and between; e. g. : 


οὕτω δεῖ τὰς γνώμας ἔχειν, ὡς, ἐάν Te δέῃ, πλευστέον εἰς τὰς 
ναὺς αὐτοῖς ἐμβᾶσιν. Ν 
Here, as usual, the personal pronoun ἡμῖν is omitted with πλευ- 
στέον (for αὐτοῖς here means selves agreeing with ἐμιβᾶσε, and that 
with ἡμῖν understood,) and the whole is to be rendered we must 
make up our minds, that we ourselves, if necessary, WILL EMBARK on 
board the vessels anp sail. 


3. The participle of the future is used to express the force of 
im order to in English; e. g. 


251 


2060 SYNTAX. | [ὁ 145. 


ταῦτα μαϑὼν ὁ Κῦρος ἔπεμψε τὸν Γωβρύαν ἐποψόμενον--- 
Cyrus, having learned this, sent Gobryas in order to see— 

τὸν ἀδικοῦντα παρὰ TOUS δικαστὰς ἄγειν δεῖ δίκην δώσοντα, 
in order that he be punished. 

τοὺς συμμάχους δεῖ σώζειν, καὶ τοὺς τοῦτο ποιήσοντας στρα- 
τιώτας ἐκπέμπειν, and to send forth troops in ὍΠΗ to effect 
this. 


4. Certain.verbs (which will appear in the examples) govern 
a participle, in cases where we should use a verb with that. As 
in other participial constructions, such a participle (regarded as a 
verb) has either the same subject as the preceding verb, and in 
that case is in the nominative,—or it has a different subject, and 
stands with the same in aa oblique case, as an object more or less 


direct of the preceding verb. 
a) Examples of the nominative, where, as usual, the proper 


subject word may be omitted. 


αἰσχύνομαι ταῦτα ποιῶν OF ποιήσας I am ashamed, that I do, 
or have done this. Whereas αἰσχύνομαι ποιεῖν would mean 
ul am ashamed to do this. 

μέμνησο ἄνϑρωπος ὧν remember that thou art a man. 

οὐ συνίεσαν μάτην πονοῦντες they understood not that they 
laboured in vain. 

διαβεβλημένος ov μανϑάνεις ; discernest thou not that thou 
hast been deceived ? 

952 . ἐν ἡ γὰρ αὐτὸς εὐδαίμων ἤδει γεγονὼς πολιτείᾳ, an which 
city he was conscious of fia κα become happy,—oida γεγονὼς 
meaning I know that I have become, 

σκοπούμενος εὕρισκον οὐδαμῶς ἂν ἄλλως τοῦτο διαπραξάμε- 
νος on reflection I found that I could not do this otherwise. 

Isocr. (δ. 140 Rem. 2.) 
Hence too with a passive verb, e. g. 
ia Laat ἡμᾶς ἀπατῶν he is convicted of having deceived 


~ 


0 ae ὃ Φίλιππος τὴν "Olu Gor πολιορκῶν, it was an- 
nounced, that Philip besieged Olynthus. 


b) Examples of the accusative. 
οἱ ἸΤέρσαι διαμνημονεύουσι tov Κῦρον ἔχοντα gvow—the 
Persians relate that Cyrus had—, from which passively 0 
Kugos διαμνημονεύεται ἔχων. . 
οἶδα συνοῖσον τῷ τὰ βέλτιστα εἰπόντι I know that it will re- 
dound to his advantage, who shall give the best counsel, (im- 
personal construction of συμφέρει.) 


ee ἜΑΡ - 
ὁ 145.] CONSTRUCTION WITH THE PARTICIPLE. 297 


c) Examples of the genitive and dative. 


ησϑόμην αὐτῶν οἰομένων εἶναι σοφωτάτων I percewved, that 
they thought themselves very wise. Sogutarwy is for σοφω- 
τάτους by the attraction mentioned § 143. 2. 2. 

μηδέποτε μετεμελησέ μοι σιγήσαντε, φϑεγξαμένῳ δὲ πολλάκις, 
it has never repented me, that I kept silence, but often that I 
spoke, (from μεταμέλει poe it repents me.) Simontves. 

οὐδὲν διαφέρει τῷ κλέπτοντι, μέγα ἢ σμικρὸν ὑφέλομένῳ, 

a it differs not to the thief (in his punishment), whether he have 

stolen little or much. % 

Rem. 2. In such-verbs as have the reflective pronoun, as σύν- 
οἶδα ἐμαυτῷ I am conscious, this participle may be in a twofold 
case; e.g. 

σύνοιδα & ἐμαυτῷ σοφὸς ὦν. Prato. 

σαυτῷ συνήδεις ἀδικοῦντι. ῬΈΜΟΞΤΗΕΝΕΒ. 

ἑαυτὸν οὐδεὶς ὁμολογεῖ κακοῦργος ὦν. Grom. We might also 
Say κακοῦργον ὄντα. 

Rem. 3. Also the verbs, which signify the cessation of an ac- 

tion, have a participle, where we employ the infinitive ; e. g- 
ἐπαύσατε αὐτὸν στρατηγοῦντα ye have made him cease to be 
general. 
~ - ov λήξω χαίρων, I will not cease to rejoice. 
Rem. 4. The participles of the verbs, from which a nominative 253 
depends, as εἶναι, καλεῖίσϑαι, change this nominative commonly 
% into the case in which they stand; 6. g. 
ὑμῖν δὲ οὖσιν ᾿ϑηναίοις οὐ πρέπειν to you, being Athenians, 
at is not becoming. 
ἐπορεύοντο διὰ τῶν ]ελινοφάγων καλουμένων Θρῴκων, 
where, in resolving the phrase, Θρᾷκες is the subject of 
καλεῖσϑαι." 
Rem. 5. Sometimes that which in signification would be the 
chief verb, is made a participle, and depends on another verb," 
‘which itself takes the place of an adverb; e. g. 
tuyzaverv (happen) ; οἷς δὲ ἤλϑον, ἔτυχεν ἀπιών, as I cqme, 
he happened to be going. 
λανϑάνεεν (to be concealed) ; ταῦτα ποιήσας ἔλαϑεν ὑπεχφυ- 
yorv having done this, he escaped unperceived ; or in respect 
to the subject itself, τὸν gover λανϑάνει βόσκων he feeds un- 
consciously his murderer ; ; ἔλαϑε πεσὼν he fell unobserved. 
φϑάνειν (to anticipate); ἔφϑην ἀφελὼν I took it away just 
before. 
si (remain) ; διατελεῖ παρών he continues to be present. 
χαίρειν (rejoice) ; χαίρουσιν ἐπαινοῦντες they gladly praise. 


38 ‘ 


~ 


’ 


298 SYNTAX.  -[§ 146. 


§ 146. CASE ABSOLUTE. 


1. In the foregoing rules, the participle has depended on some 
of the nouns belonging to the leading verb of the sentence, and 
has been, of consequence, in the same case as those nouns. If a 
new noun be introduced as a subject, it is put with the participle 
ina case independent of the verb, = called absolute. 


2. The most common instance is ‘that, where a noun and part- 
ticiple are put absolute in the genitive. The original force of the 
genitive absolute was an expression of time, according to § 132. 
δ. ὦ. ἽΝ ΟΥ̓, 88 νυχτὸς means by night time, so also 


ἐμοῦ καϑεύδοντος ταῦτα ἐγένετο means at the time that I slept, 
this happened. 

πάντων οὖν σιωπώντων εἶπε τοιαδὲ while all men were silent, 
he spake as follows. 

μετὰ ταῦτα κυμαίνοντος ἤδη τοῦ πρλοπ νήσωι θε πολέμου 
ἔπεισε τὸν δῆμον, Κερκυραίοις ἀποστεῖλαι βοήϑειαν. 


Rem. 1. If this duration of time is ascértained by a historical 
person, the preposition ἐπί is often used with these genitives. 
Thus ἐπὶ Κύρου βασιλεύοντος, Cyro regnante, in the reign of Cy- 
rus. 


3. This construction is adopted not only to express time, but 
every idea expressed in English by 7f, since, because, in that, &c. 


6. 
254 if ἐπικειμένων δὲ τῶν πολεμίων τῇ πόλει, λιμὸς ἥπτετο τῶν 
» . Ῥωμαίων while the enemies besveged the city, famine assailed 
the Romans. 
τεϑνηκότος TOV βασιλέως τῷ υἱῷ αὐτοῦ ἐνέτυχε inasmuch as 
the king was dead, he applied to his son. 
ϑεοῦ διδόντος, οὐδὲν ὦ ἰσχύει φϑόνος, if a god σταπέα gift, en- 
vy prevarleth not. 
τούτων οὕτως ἐχόντων, βέλτιον ἕσται περιμένειν, since things 
are thus circumstanced, it will be better to wait. 


Rem. 2. If the noun be obvious from the context, the partici- 
ple may stand by itself, in the genitive, as παρόντα τὸν ἡγεμόνα 
ηἠδοῦντο, & ἀπ ὄντος δὲ ἡσέλγαινον, where there is δὴ omission of av- 
τοῦ with ἀπόντος. when he was absent. The same holds οἵ imper- 
sonals, as vee it rains, ὕοντος as it rained. 

Rem. 3. In certain cases, nominatives and accusatives absolute 
are used. With such impersonals as é€soruy it is permitted, πρέ- 


ὗ | 
ἘΦ 44). ADVERBS. 7 299 


- 


met it is becoming (see § 129 Rem. 3), the absolute case is always 
the nominative or accusative of the neuter ‘participle, e. g. 
διὰ τί μένεις, ἐξὸν ἀπιέναι, why dost thou remain, when it is 
lawful to depart ? 
Rem. 4. Datives absolute are also used, particularly in state- 
ments of time, 6. 5. 
περιιόντι τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ πάλεν φαίνουσι φρουρὰν ἐπὶ τὴν λιν 
as the YEAR elupsed, they make another demonstration agawmst 


To this rule may be reduced. such datives joined to the verbs 
sina or γίγνεσϑαι, as these, viz. 
εἴ σοι ἡδομένῳ ἐστί of it be agreeable to thee. 
εἴ Got βουλομένῳ ἐστί if it be according to thy wish. 
_.. Rem. 5. When an expression indicates a reason in the mind of 
a third person, why he does a thing, this is commonly done with 
the conjunction οἷς or ὥςπερ, and accusatives or genitives abso- 
tute; 6. g. 
ἐσιώπα, ὡς πάντας εἰδότας or πάντων εἰδότων, he held his 
_ peace, because all knew &c. 
οἱ πατέρες εἴργουσε τοὺς υἱεῖς ane τῶν πονηρῶν ἀνθρώπων, 
οἷς τὴν τουτῶν ὁμιλίαν διάλυσιν οὖσαν ἀρετῆς, fathers re- 
strain their children from bad men, as intercourse with them 
ἐς the destruction of virtue. 
ἐπικελεύει μουσικὴν ποιεῖν, WS φιλοσοφίας μεγίστης οὔσης 
υσικῆς. 
τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἀμελοῦσιν, ὥςπερ ἔκ τούτων οὐ γιγνομένους 
φίλους, they neglect their brothers, as if no friends could: be 
formed from them. 


THE PARTICLES. 
§ 147. ADVERBs. 


1. Adverbs derived from adjectives, especially comparatives 
and superlatives, govern the same case as their adjectives; as 
ἀξίως ἡμῶν πολεμήσομεν we will wage Bar worthily of ourselves ; 
μάλιστα πάντων most of all; οἱ πένητες τῶν εὐδαιμόνων μᾶλλον 
δύναται ἐσϑίειν τὲ καὶ καϑεύδειν betier than the rich.’ See § 132. 
4. 6. 

"9, Adverbs approaching the nature of prepositions, govern the 
casé of the preposition which they resemble, as ὁμοῦ and ἅμα to- 
gether govern a dative, (like σύν with,) and are sometimes used as 
adverbs, sometimes as prepositions! Thus all prepositions may 
properly be called adverbs. 


255 


: 3 3 
300 eo SYNTAX. - [§ 148. 


Adverbs of time.and place in like manner govern the genitive ; 
as ἐγγύς near (ἐγγὺς twos), χωρίς apart, without, diya twofold, se- 
parate, without, εὐϑύ obviam, towards. 

3. Other adverbs are related to verbs and whole sentences, and 
in this way connect two sentences; especially the relative adverbs, . 
aS παρέσομαι ὁπότε κελεύσεις I shall be present, wHEN you command 
it. This is the origin of conjunctions, and. strictly speaking, ey- 
ery particle connecting in this manner, should be called a con- 
junction, especially if it has an influence on the verb (like that of 
the preposition on the noun), and according to circumstances gov- 
erns a mode depending upon it. Thus ἄχρι or μέχρι and ἕως gov- 
ern the subjunctive or optative mode, when uncertainty is express- 
ed, as περιμενῶ ἕως or μέχρις ἂν ἔλϑη till he come; but when 
certainty is expressed, the indicative, as ποίησον τοῦτο ἕως ἔτι 
ἔξεστι do this so long as it is still lawful. 

Remark. Πλην ΤΑ. except, and may be connected with 
phrases, as πλὴν εἰ except if. It also governs the genitive, as πλὴν 
πάνυ ολίγων with the exception of very few. 

4. It has already been observed, § 125. 5, that particles joined , 
with the article become nouns. 


§ 148. PREPOSITIONS. 


1. The following are the most common prepositions, express- 
ing the most general notions of place, viz. 
ἀντί, ἀπό, ἐξ (éx), πρὸ governing the genitive 
ἐν, σύν (Suv) the dative 
ava, εἰς, wo the accusative 
δια, κατά, ὑπέρ the genitive and accusative 
ἀμφί, ἐπί; μετά, παρά, περί, πρός, ὑπὸ the genitive, dative, 


as 


and accusative. 


2. Those prepositions. which govern different cases, answer, 
for the most part, to the question whither with the accusative, and 
to the question where with the dative. The genitive admits of 
various significations, though more or less connected with the idea 
out of, from. 


- ? : sh AGES 
ᾧ 148.] « PREPOSITIONS. 3 301 


Ren. 1. Of the foregoing. prepositions, the easiest and simplest, 
‘ih respect 1 to meaning, are these, viz. 
ἀπό, From, ἐξ out of 
εἰς to or into, in answer to the question whither ? 
ἐν in, in answer to the question where ? 
πρὸ before, σύν e 
For most of the significations which these prepositions bear, 256 
(with the exception of some peculiarities which the course of 
study will teach,) admit of being reduced to the leading idea here 
assigned to them een ; as when ἐξ implies the reason and 
is rendered on account of, 6. g. 
é% τούτου on account of that, (therefore). 
Or when it signifies mere sequence of time, e. g. 
νῦν γελῶμεν" ἐκ τῶν πρόσϑεν δακρύων. 
So when εἰς, like the Latin in, has the force of against, or merely 
indicates reference or relation, e. g. 
τῶν εἰς πόλεμον ἐπιστήμων ἐστίν. 
Or finally, when πρὸ has the force of the Latin pro or the English 
+ ἄπ behalf of, e. g. 
διακενδυνεύειν πρὸ TOU βασιλέως. . 
In all these cases the connexion of the modified meaning of 
.the preposition with its original signification is obvious. 

Rem. 2. On the other hand, the following are more arbitrary 
and difficult to remember. 

* Ave signified at first on, (comp. avo) and its compounds.) Rut 
its most common signification in prose is in, upon, through, under- 
stood of some large space or time; 6. g. 

ἀνὰ πᾶσαν τὴν γὴν in the whdle earth. 

7 φήμη ἦλϑεν ἀνὰ τὴν πόλεν the report prevailed through the 

whole city. 

οἱ ανὰ τὸ πεδίον those throughout the plain. 

ἀνὰ πᾶσαν τὴν ἡμέραν throughout the whole day. 

‘Arti, as a single preposition, has Jost its original signification 
_ of against (see Rem. 8 below), and most frequently signifies in- 

stead fOr ἢ in the ideas of change, exchange, purchase, value, &c. 
Ave τοῦς through, spoken of space and the means ; des TOV, on 
account of ; 6. δ. 
διὰ “ακεδαιμονίους ἔφυγον they were banished on account of 
the Lacedemonians. 
διὰ σὲ ἤἦλϑον I came on thy account. 
Ave with the accusative also expresses through, when it signifies 
cause ; 6. 8. 
διὰ τοὺς ϑεοὺς εὖ πράττω through the gods I am | Prosperous. 

Mere τόν, after ( post)— μετὰ tov, with — wera: τῷ, only in the 
poets, among inter), 

“Augi and περὶ τὸν signify about ; which lies at the bottom of 
all merely approximating specifications, 6, δ᾽: 


: κυ 
902 | “SYNTAX: τ «ἘΠ᾿ 148. 


ἀμφὶ τὰ ὄρη ἐγένετο, he was about the mountains. 
For the idea ἀμφὲ or περὲ τὲ or reve ἔχειν or εἶναι, to belong to on 
to be occupied about something, see below § 151. 

Περὶ τῷ, with the idea of care for something, is attached to 
verbs of fear, anxiety, confidence, or contention. “Augi and περὶ 
τοὺ signify of (de), concerning, (as to speak of.) So too φοβεῖσϑαι, 
φιλονεικεῖν περὶ τινος. “Angi, however, is far less common than 
περὶ in this sense. 

᾿Ὑπὲρ cov, over, Farther, beyond, (supra, ultra,)—vn20 τοῦ, over, 
above. ‘This last receives the modified meaning of instead, in be- 
half of, particularly ina sense of defence, care, 6. g. 

ee ee ὑπὲρ TOU κοινοῦ, to act, to speak i in behalf of 

the publec 

ἀποϑανεῖν ὑπὲρ τοῦ φίλου to die for his friend, 

257 Rem. 3. That the genitive inclines to the idea of from, depar- 
ture, &c. is plain from’ maga, πρὸς and ὑπό. These prepositions 
with the dative and accusative retain their peculiar significations, 
but with the genitive, they are all three most commonly to be 
translated by from. 'The following instances of their use deserve 
particular remark, viz. 

παρὰ tov, to; but in answer to the question ‘where, near or 


next to. 
Besides this it has the signification of the Latin praeter, besides, be- 
yond ; 6. g. 


ἔχειν ὔὕὔψον παρὰ τὸν ἄρτον besides the bread to have meat. 

ἐπόνει παρὰ τοὺς ἄλλους he laboured more than others. 

ταῦτά ἔστι παρὰ τοὺς τῶν ϑεῶν ϑεσμούς this is against the 

divine laws. 

παρὰ δόξαν against πϑρϑο μένῃ (praeter opinionem.) 

Παρὰ τῷ means simply with ;---παρὰ τοῦ means from, after 

verbs signifying come, bring, receive, learn, &c. and sometimes af- 
ter the passive. 

ΤΙρος, to, with, has the accusative rather in answer to the ques- 
tion whither, and the dative in answer to where ; πρὸς τὸν more- 
over, means against in every signification ; πρὸς τοῦ on the part of, 
after verbs signifying hear, receive praise or censure, and often after 
the passive. It is also used in obtestation, as πρὸς τῶν ᾿ϑεῶν by 
the gods. 

Ὑπὸ τὸν under, both to ἃ place and in it; ὑπὸ τῷ under, in a 
place ; ὑπὸ τοῦ from, after passives, and actives involving a passive 
sense, as πάσχειν. So also 

ϑανεῖν ὑπὸ twos to die by means of. 
ει μαϑεῖν ὑπ ἀνάγκης to be taught by necessity. 

Even actions may in this way assume a passive Gino. 2 as ἐποίησε 
τοῦτο ὑπὸ δέους from fear. 

Rem. 4. The greatest attention is due to the prepositions ἐπέ 
and xara, with respect to which, eet observation of the bases 


~ 


ia (ἐ , 
2 = ἢ 449} Bika, PREPOSITIONS. : 303 
i ἈΒ 


case of of their use must be resorted to, the follgwring principles 


Ψ it tas for its leading idea on ; and in answer to the question 
where most commonly governs the genitive, though sometimes 
the dative, (as ἐφ᾽ ἵππον ὑχεῖσϑαι and Αὔρος ἐφ᾽ ἵππῳ ἐπορεύε- 
το); in answer to the question whither, the accusative, (as 2 ἐπὶ ho- 
gor τινὰ καταφεύγει he flies to a certain hill.) But at the same 
time it is applied in a more general sense for at or in, and, in an- 
swer to the question whither, for towurds or to, whenever the con- 
nexion of the sentence sufficiently indicates the more exact idea 
of these expressions ; and with the accusative it particularly de- 
notes a certain direction to or towards. But besides this, it σογ- 
erns the genitive after the question whither, meaning towards, to, 
e. g. δι ἧς 
"ἀπ y ἐπὶ “Σάρδεων. 
ἀνήγοντο (they sailed) ἐπὶ τῆς Χίου. 
ἀπέπλευσεν ἐπ οἴκου. 
‘Eni τοῦ often fixes a time by a cotémporaneous person or thing, 
6. 
εν ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν. tm our days. 
- ἐπὶ των ἡμετέρων προγόνων. 
᾿Επὶ τῷ, in denoting place, signifies hard by, 6. g. 
ἐπὶ τῇ τάφρῳ on the verge of the ditch. 
πύργους ἐπὶ τῷ ποταμῷ ῳκοδόμει. 
It also expresses in ‘addition to, like πρός, 6. g. 
τς ἐπὶ πᾶσι τούτοις πληγὰς ἐνέτεινέ μοι. 
Very often it expresses design and condition, Ε. g. 
oui παρασκευάξεσϑαι ἐ ἐπί Tive to prepare one’s self for any thing. 
ἐπ᾽ ᾿ ἐπαίνῳ πόνον ὑπεδύετο. 
ἐπὶ τούτοις εἰρήνην ἐποιήσαντο on these conditions they made 
‘peace. Compare below § 151, ἐφ᾽ ὦ. 
Finally ἐπὶ τῷ expresses power, in such phrases as 
ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν ἔστε it is in our power. See ὃ 143 Rem. 1. 
The accusative also often expresses the design, the end, but 
with a distinction like the following, viz. 
ἐλϑεῖν ἐπὶ τούτῳ to come to effect this. 
ἐλϑεῖν ἐπὶ τοῦτο to come afier this (i. e. to take this). 


Kata. The leading signification of this preposition, (as appears 
from the comparison of κάτω and the compounds.) is from ; with 
the genitive down from ; e. g. 

κατὰ τῶν TETOWY ῥίπτειν teva to cast one down from the rocks. 
ἤλλοντο κατὰ τοῦ τείχους. 
More frequently xara τοῦ occurs in the sense of to, against, chief- 
ly with verbs signifying speak, think, &c. 6. g. 
. εἰπεῖν τὸ ἀληϑὲς κατά τινος to speak the truth against any one. 


Κατὰ tov, spoken of a place, expresses the being in a place, in the 


most general sense, without more particular specification, 6. g. 


904 SYNTAX. iS 148. 
era ι 


κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ ϑαάλατταν by land and sea. 
οἱ κατὰ τὴν ᾿Ασίαν ὑπὸ βασιλεῖ ὄντες those in Asia sii to 
the king. 
Κατὰ tov LETS therefore every modification of time, place, 
and relation, resulting from the ideas themselves, e. g. 

οἰκοῦσι nara κώμας they dwell in villages (vicatim) 

ἐσκήνουν κατὰ τάξεις they encamped in divisions. 

“ταῦτα μὲν ἐγένετο κατὰ τὴν νόσον this happened during the 

disease. 

κατὰ ταύτην τὴν διαφορὰν ὄντων “ακεδαιμονίων πρὸς τοὺς 

᾿““ϑηναίους the Lacedemonians being at this variance ἐμὰ 
the Athenians. 

αἱ κατὰ τὸ σῶμα ἡδοναί corporeal pleasures. ; 

κατὰ πάντα TEL ρύχωνται they are in every thing: exhausted. 

Very often is xata@ used to express the Latin secundum, accord- 
ang fo, 6. g. 

κατὰ τοῦτον τὸν λόγον ἄμεινόν ἐστιν οὕτως according to this 

discourse u ts better thus. 

κατὰ: "Πλάτωνα according to Plato. 

κατὰ τὴν χκάϑετον according to the plumb-line. 

ποιήσω κατὰ τὰ τοῦ βασιλέως γράμματα I will act according 

to the rescript of the ang. 

δέομαι αὐτοῦ κατὰ πᾶντα τρύπον I have need of him in every 

way. 

Rem. 5. The preposition ὡς must not be confounded with the 
adverb or conjunction ws. It signifies to, in reply to whither ? and 
always refers to persons ; 6. 8. 

εἰφῆλϑεν ὡς με he came in to me. 

259 ἀνήχϑησαν ὡς βασιλέα they travelled to the king. 
This preposition never enters into composition with a verb. 

Rem. 6. The case after the preposition is sometimes omitted, 
when it would require to be repeated from what precedes; the 
' preposition thus used stands adverbially. In prose the Greek lan- 
guage permits this only with πρός, as*xal πρός, πρὸς δὲ, moreo- 
ver, and further, besides. 

Rem. 7. That prepositions in the anastrophe, that is, with 
change of accent, sometimes follow’ their case, and sometimes 

. stand for the compounds with εἶναν has alyeady, been observed 
above in ὃ 117. 2. 

Rem. 8. Prepositions in composition have i in μα their orig- 
inal signification. ‘The compounds of avi i, however, have mostly 
the signification against, as ἀντέταττειν to array against, ἀντιλέγειν 
contradict ; those of ave to ascend, and those of κατὰ to descend, as ~ 
ἀναβαίνειν, καταβαίνειν. ; 

Of significations more or less remote from the primitive mean- 
ing of the word, the following deserve remark, viz. 


§ 149.] ὃ NEGATIVES. _ 305 


augi- with the idea of two sides, as ἀμφίβολος equivocal, augi- 
_ στοόμος opening on both sides. . 
ἄνα-- means often back, as ἀναπλεῖν to sail back. 
dva- acquires the idea of the Latin dis, apart, as διασπᾷν to 
sunder, Otalevyvivae disjuagere, to separate. 
᾿Ἀατα- most frequently has the idea of completion, a8 κατα- — 
πράττειν perficere, to accomplish, to fulfil ; στρέφειν to turn, 
καταστρέφειν to turn around ; πιμπράναν to burn, καταπεμ- 
πράναι to consume. Hence it has come to express the idea 
of destruction, as xaraxuBevery τὴν οὐσίαν to waste a for- 
tune at dice. In both cases it corresponds to the Latin per 
in composition. 
μεέτα- is used to express the idea of change and transposition, 
(the Latin trans), as μεταβιβάζειν to bring to another place, 
μετανοεῖν to change opinion, to repent. 
maoa- from its signification of praeter in some compounds im- 
plies failure, and falsity, as παραβαίνειν τοὺς νόμους to 
break the laws, παρορᾷν to overlook, παράσπονδος a violator 
of truce, (σπονδαί. ) 


§ 1490. NEGATIVES. 


i. The Greek language has two simple negatives, οὐ and μή, 
from which all the more qualified negatives are formed by com- 
position. Every proposition, however, containing one or more of 
these qualified negatives is, in general, affected in the same way 
as if the simple negatives only, of which it is compounded, -occur- 
red in it. Every thing therefore, about to be affirmed of ov, holds © 
equally of οὐδέ, οὐδείς, οὐδαμῶς, &c. and the same with respect 
to μη, μηδείς, &c. 

2. But between ov and μη and their respective compovtides 
there is a total difference of use, which requires for its compre- 
hension an exact observation of the classical writers ; but of which 
the foundation is as follows. 


a) Ou is the direct independent negation, which utters, without 
reference to any thing else, the judgment or decision of denial ; 
as οὐκ ἐϑέλω I will not, οὐ φιλῶ I love not, οὐκ ἀγαϑόν ἔστιν, ου- 
δεὶς παρῆν &c. A direct negation of this kind can never be ex- 
pressed by μή or its compounds. Such a denial may, however, be 260 
expressed as uncertain, as οὐχ ἂν βουλοίμην I would not wish; or 


39 


20] 


‘ 


306 | SYNTAX. [ὁ 149. 


ἣν > 


it may be interrogatively expressed, as διά τὸ yao οὐ πάρεστε; 


why is he not present ? 
b) J, on the other hand, is siskfostnl a dependent negative. 


At is therefore used in all propositions where the negation is repre- 


sented not as a fact, but as something dependent on the concep- 
tion of a subject. It is accordingly the necessary particle in neg- 
ative conditions and premises, as οὐ λήψομαι, εἰ μὴ σὺ κελεύεις. 
And thus μή is always used with εἰ, ἐάν, ἤν, ὅταν, ἐπειδάν, ἕως, 
ἄν, &c. since all these represent a fact, not as such, but as a sup- 
position or assumption. On the other hand ἐπεί, "éneed, (since, 
after that), take οὐ, because they always refer to actual facts, as 
μή μὲ κτεῖν,, ἐπεὶ οὐχ Omoyaotovos” Exrogos εἶμες kill me not, as 
I am not the ‘brother of Hector. Homer. Dependent also is every 
proposition implying design ; and hence μη is used after ἵνα, ὡς, 
ὅπως, ὥςτε, whenever these particles have that import. 

c) My, without any such particle, and standing by itself, ex- 
presses design, wish, prayer, prohibition, in cases, where the Latins 
use ne and not non. 

4) In the multitude of cases, in which μή is used after relatives, 
with infinitives, and participles, it is commonly easy to point out 
the dependent or conditional character of the negation. 


3. When “7 expresses a wish, it has always the optative, as 
μὴ γένοιτο, μὴ ἴδοις τοῦτο. In negative prayers and commands, it 
takes the present tense or the aorist, according as the action is 
conceived of as permanent or momentary, (which however is often 
arbitrary, according to § 138. 5.) with this rule, viz That with 
the present it takes only the imperative mode, with the aorist only 
the subjunctive, as μή μὲ βάλλε, or μή μὲ βάλης. 

4, The expression of a fear, which is positive in English, is 
made negatively in Greek as in Latin, δέδοικα μὴ te madn, vereor 


ne quid accidat illi, I fear lest somewhat befal him. 


It is obvious from § 140. 2, 3, that this subjunctive in connec- 
tion with the past time and in dependent clauses passes into the 
optative. 


Rem. 1.) Sometimes the verb, which expresses the fear or the 
warning, remains in the idea, and μή in this case makes of itself a 
proposition, 6. ρ΄. τ 


μὴ τοῦτο ἄϊλως éyy I fear lest this be otherwise. 
5. Mr, ia often only an emphatic particle of interrogation (whose 
negative quality is extinguished), somewhat stronger than μῶν, 
as μὴ δοκεῖ σοι τοῦτο εἶναι εὔηϑες ; does this seem to thee foolish ? — 


§ 150.] VARIOUS PARTICLES. , 901 


On the other hand, ov is the negative question, when the asker 
wishes to be «understood as affirming the proposition; as ov xai 
καλόν ἐστι τὸ ayadOr ; is not the good also fair? This question ex- 


pects yes in reply ; while the question by μή commonly expects 
no. 


6. When toa proposition already negatived, other conditions 
of a general nature are to be attached, such as ever, any body, any 
where, it is usual to do this by compounds of the same negative 
term, 6. g- 

on ἐποίησε τοῦτο οὐδαμοῦ οὐδείς no man has any where done 
rddu τῶν “μὴ ὄντων οὐδενὶ ovdauy οὐδαμῶς μῶν κοι- 
νωνίαν ἔχει. Pato. 

Thus also to the negation of the whole is attached, in the samé 
sentence, the negation of the parts, e. g. 

οὐ δύναται ovr εὖ λέγειν οὔτ᾽ εὖ ποιεῖν τοὺς φίλους. 

So that two negatives do not (as in Latin) cancel each other. 

On the contrary they strengthen each other. 


Rem. 2. To this last principle there are some exceptions de- 
serving of note, as the phrase οὐδεὶς ὅςτες ov (nemo non); 6. g. 
οὐδεὶς ὅςτες οὐ ποιήσει nemo non faciet, there is no one who 
will not do this. 
οὐδενὶ ὅτῳ οὐκ ἀρέσκει nemini non placet. 


§ 150. OF SOME OTHER PARTICLES. 


i. The use of the particles in Greek is so various and in part 
80 ἀϊίοαι, that the most important will here be given.. 


εἷς, as a relative adverb, has the following significations, viz. 
1) as, so as, as if; hence 2) of time, as ὡς δὲ ἦλθον, ov 
παρὴν as I came, he was not present. 3) It strengthens the 
superlative, particularly in adverbs, as ὡς τάχιστα, as quick ας 
possible, and of some adverbs, the positive, as we ἀληϑῶς cer- 
tainly. 4) about, as wc πεντήκοντα about fi 
As a conjunction, it signifies 1) that, as πάντες ὁμολογοῦ- 
μὲν, OS ἡ ἀρετὴ κράτιστόν ἔστι. 2) in order that, with the 
subjunctive, optative, or future indicative. 3) so that, with 
the infinitive, (commonly ὥςτε.) see ὃ 141. 4, 4) inasmuch 


as, (see § 146 Rem. 5.) 5) quippe, for, as κράτιστον ἔσταν 262 


209 


\ 


ee SYNTAX. " [Ὁ 150. 


συγχωρῆσαι, οἷς ov δοκεῖς οὐκ ἀφήσεεν us, it will be best for 
me to yield, for it appears that thou wilt not give me up. 
For the preposition ὡς see ὃ 148 Rem. 5. x. 


ὡς with the accent (see ὃ 116. 4) for οὕτως, is very common - 
with the poets, particularly the lonics. In prose it is chiefly 
cused only in the phrases xu ὡς and even thus, and its oppo- 
site οὐδ᾽ ὡς nor thus. 

ὅπως, as an adverb, means as; as a conjunction, ἐπ order that. 

iva, as an adverb, where ; as a conjunction (§ 140. 2) also im 
order that, as ἵνα τί wherefore? as it were ‘ in order that 
what ? [ should happen}.’ . 

ὥςτε so that, commonly with the infinitive (ὃ 141. 4 and §133 
Rem. 2.) _ With the other modes it means the same, but may 
be rendered therefore, itaque. 

Ore that, used before words quoted without change, as ἀπεκρί- 
vad, Ore βασιλείαν οὐκ ἂν δεξαίμην, he answered—I will not 
&e. 


ὅτι also signifies because, elliptically for de TOUTO ὅτι, or the 


abbreviation of this phrase, diore. It strengthens all superla- 
tives, like wg, as ὅτε μέγιστος as great as possible, ὅτι μάλε- 
ora, &c. 
τούνεκα (this is ‘an epic form) therefore. Οὕνεκα 1) where- 
ore. 2) as a conjunction, because, (for τοῦ ἕνεκα, οὗ ἕνεκα.) 
εἰ if; in the indirect question, whether, (see ὃ 140. 5.) 

After ϑαυμάξζω and some other verbs of the affections, εἰ 
should properly signify 2f, and be used of doubtful things; but 
Attic caution, unwilling to assert too positively, uses this con- 
junction, not for probable things only, but even for those 
which are entirely certain, and so it stands. for ¢ ὅτι, 6. g. 

“Σωκράτης ἐθαύμαζεν, εἰ μὴ φανερὸν αὐτοῖς ἔστιν, ὅτε οὐ 

δυνατὸν ἐστι τοῦτο (he wondered that—). 

εἰ καὶ with the indicative, although. On the other hand, καὶ εἰ 
and xav εἰς unless, even if. 

εἴτις, εἴτι; properly if any one, if any thing. This word, how- 
ever, is used as wholly synonymous with the pronoun ὅςτις, 
for great emphasis, as ἔφϑεερον ite χρήσιμον ἦν ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ. 

ei γάρ is an optative ‘exclamation, for which we otherwise find 
aide, ‘O that ! 

ἐπεὶ after, then. 2) quoniam, since, Fr. puisque. Before ques- 
tions and imperatives, it has the force of for, as ἐπεὶ πῶς ἂν Ν 
διακρίνοιμεν αὐτὸ for how then could we distinguish it 29 ἐπεὶ 
Peaout αὐτὸς for see yourself &c. 

ὅπου where. 2) as ἃ conjunction, siquidem, since. 

ay (poetically κέ, nev) see § 140. 7 seq. 

ἐὰν, ἤν, ἄν---ὅταν, ἐπειδάν, see ibid. 
ἐάν, particularly after verbs that signify to lavestizate, to see, 


ᾧ 150.]. VARIOUS PARTICLES. 309 


has the force ‘of the Latin an ; as oxdmee ἐὰν ἱκανὸν ἢ see if 
at be adequate. 
H or, which signification it always retains in questions, 6. ο΄. 
οὕτως éoviv’ ῆ ουκ, οἵξε; ; is τ 0 32 or thinkest thou not ? 
τί τοῦτ᾽ ἐρωτᾷς 5 ἢ οὐ δῆλον, Orv—why dost thou ask this ? 
_or is at not plain, that— ? 
In comparisons it signifies than, quam, e. g. 
σοὶ τοῦτο μᾶάλλῳων ἀρέσκει, ἢ ἐμοί, this pleases thee better than me. 
Wholly different is 
ἢ whose original signification is certainly, but which is common- 
ly only a sign of interrogation num ? 
καί and τέ have the same significations in reference to each 
other, as ef and gue. When τέ precedes καί, the former sig- 
nifies not only, the latter but also ; 3 @& δ. 
αὐτός TE τύραννος ἐγένετο, καὶ τοῖς maior τὴν τυραννίδα 
κατέλειπεν. - 
᾿ καὶ and δέ in one clause (but separated from each other in prose) 
signify and also ; 6. g-. 
γὺν περὶ ψυχῶν τῶν ὑμετέρων ἐστὶν ὁ ἀγὼν καὶ περὲ γυναυ- 
nov δὲ καὶ τέχνων the contest is now for your own lives and al- 
so for your wives and children. 
δέ but, has by no means always a disjunctive signification. In 
most cases it is merely a particle of transition to something 
‘else, where in English either simply and, or nothing whatever 
is used. For the Greeks use if, where no other particle could 
be used, to avoid the entire want of connexion between two 
sentences. 
μὲν and δέ are two particles referring to each other, of which 
the same may be observed as of δὲ alone. They form a con- 
nexion like that of indeed—but, but are continually employed 
in-Greek, where no such opposition of ideas is intended, as 
would be expressed in English by indeed in the protasis and 
but in the apodosis of a sentence. Nay, it is not unusual in 
the Greek, for a section or even a book to end itself thus, xa? 
ταῦτα μὲν οὕτως ἐγένετο. In which case, the following sec- 
tion or book would begin τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ on the next day. 

The mode of division by ὁ wév—o δὲ, or ὃς μὲν---ὗὖς δέ, 264 
which has its origin in this opposition of ‘particles, has been 
treated above, ὃ 126.- Similar modes of division are formed 
by aid of the adverbs united with the same particles ; and not 
only are the demonstrative and relative forms, but even the 
indefinite, thus used ; ποτὲ μὲν---ποτὲ δὲ, now—now, or at this 
time—at that. So also τοτέ or ὑτέ (for τότε and ὅτε) and τῇ 
μὲν---τῇ δέ, or πὴ μὲν---πὴ δέ, ἔνϑα μὲν---ἔνϑα δέ Ke. With 
respect to all such constructions, it may be observed, that 
ὁ μέν, ὁ δ᾽ ov, sometimes stands alone without a verb, with 


4 
4 


265 


310 - | | SYNTAX. : [ὁ 150. 


reference to a preceding proposition, in which case the μέν 
contains a kind of affirmation in itself; e. 
πάντας φιλητέον, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ τὸν μὲν, τὸν δ᾽ οὔ, all are to be lov- 
ed, and not this one, indeed, but that one not. 
"παρῆσαν οὐχ ὦ μὲν ὁ δ᾽ οὔ ἀλλὰ πάντες, they were present, 
not thas one to be sure, and that one not, but all. 
οὔτε and μήτε, 
οὐδὲ and μηδέ. Both these forms express negation in connexion, 
and correspond to the Latin neque. They signify 1) and not. 
2) οὔτε or μήτε repeated netther—nor. 

The forms οὐδὲ μήδε signify also 1) nor, 2) not even, 
which last signification they dniformly have, in the middle of 
a clause. i? 

ἀλλά is δὲ strengthened. It is often used emphatically where 
no single corresponding word in English can be given. 

yao for, always follows other words, like the Latin enim. It 

~ has an extensive elliptical use requiring a reference in idea 
to small phrases, such as “1 believe,” or “no wonder,” un- 
_ferstood. & 

οὖν therefore, follows other words. Of οὖν appended (as ὅςτις- 
ouvv, &c.) see § 80. 1. and § 116.7. Here are to be remark- 
ed the following, viz. 

1) οὐκοῦν properly an interrogative of inference, as οὐκοῦν 
εὔηϑες τοῦτο; is not this then foolish? Often, however, the 
interrogative force and with it the negation vanishes, and 
ουχοῦν. is to be translated simply therefore, and begins ἃ clause. 

2) οὔχουν is the strengthened negation. In the significa- 
tion therefore not (without a question) it is better to write 
οὐκ οὖν. 

αὖ again. 2) on the other side, vice versd. 3) farther, then too. 

πρίν before, is a comparative in signification, and therefore, 
when it refers to another proposition, | takes the particle ἧς 
commonly with an infinitive, as πρὶν ἢ ἐλϑεῖν ἐμέ before I 
came. The 7 however is often omitted, and πρίν becomes 
itself a conjunction, πρὲν ἐλϑεῖν ἐμέ. But πρὶν ἄν ἔλϑω re- 
_fers to the future. 

νῦν δὴ just now, and with preterites just before: 

nw and πώποτε glance at past time, and commonly stand with 
negatives ; οὔπω, nme not yet ; οὐδεπώποτε, μηδεπώποτε, 
never yet; from which negatives, however, they may be 
disjoined by other intervening words. The idea thus far, 
hitherto, prevails in all these phrases. Thence οὐδέποτε 
means never in general, and in reference also to the future ; 
οὐδεπώποτε never, only in reference to the past. 

ἔτι alone signifies yet, farther ; and with the negatives οὐκέτι, 
μηκέτι, no more, No longer. 


§ 150.] VARIOUS PARTICLES. 311 


μά and v7 are particles of obtestation, always governing the ac- 
cusative of the object sworn by, as νὴ Ala by Jupiter. Ny is 
always an affirmative oath; μά, on the contrary, is attached 
both to affirmative and negative obtestations, as ναὶ μὰ Ala, 
and ov μὰ Alia. When, however, it stands alone, it is nega- 
tive, ue Ala, no, by no means. 


2. These and other particles have an extensive use, which 
must be learned by individual observation. The older gramma- 
riahs speak of expletive particles ; but an expletive use of particles 
is the most that should be assumed. There are, in all languages, 
particles conveying shades of meaning so delicate as to prevent a 
translation, but not imperceptible to the skilful reader. The 
Greek language is preeminent for particles of this kind; and 
though their force must be left to be learned by careful study, the 
following observations may be of use. 


γέ (enclitic) properly signifies at least, in which sense your is 
more commmon. Besides this, it is almost always used when- 
ever a single object ora part is named with reference to the 
whole ora greater number. For this reason it is often ape 
pended to ἐγώ (éywye,) whereby the individual thinks of 
himself in distinction from the mass, as it were, I for my 
part. It may often be translated by certainly. ὁ. 

ἄρα never stands at the beginning of the clause. It means, 1) 
and most frequently therefore ; 2) where it appears exple- 
tive, it has a shade of meaning like in the nature of things, of 
course, ex ordine, rite. Hence it serves to mark the transition 
to an expected proposition. 3) After εἰ, ἐὰν, it signifies some- 
thing like perhaps. 

The interrogative aoa, always placed at the beginning of 

the clause, signifies num ? 


266 


roi (enclitic) is properly an ancient form of the dative for τῷ, 


and means in consequence of, which signification, though it has 
vanished in the single word, remains in composition, as τούς 
γάρ, τοιγάρτοι, τοιγαροῦν. Τοίνυν is used when in.a con- 
clusion or inference an idea like and now I say further, but 
now, is introduced. The τοί, which stands alone, retains the 
power of strengthening or rendering emphatic. 

καίτοι and certainly: 2) and doubtless, and yet, indeed. 3) al- 

: though. 


μέντοι certainly ; hence 2) but, however, a stronger expression 


of δέ. 
_ δή properly now, for which ἤδη is commonly used; whence it 
is used in various ways to strengthen the power of a phrase, 


912. an SYNTAX. [δ 151. 


as ἄγε δή ς come on then, τί δή what then? After relatives, as 
ὅςτις On, ὅπου δή," it adds generality to the ever ; 3 whosoever, 
wheresoever. 

μὴν a confirmative particle truly. 2) But certainly, however, and 
γὲ μήν͵ certainly but. It is therefore also a strengthened δέ. 
Kai μήν immo, yea, and in contradiction atgui, and yet. 

After interrogatives, which follow a negative of the inter- 
locutor, μήν is used to signify then, as πότε μήν ; when then? 
τίς μήν; ; who then? (that is, who else?) τί μήν; why not ἢ 

ἢ μήν isthe common form of swearing or asseveration, some- 
times with the indicative, e. g. 

ἢ μὴν ἐγὼ ἔπαϑον τοῦτο I protest that I suffered this. 

267 Sometimes with the infinitive, depending on other verbs; e. g. 
ὄμνυμι, ἢ μὴν δωσειν I promise solemnly to give. 

ὑπεδέξατο ἢ μὴν μὴ ᾿ἀπορεῖν αὐτοὺς τροφῆς he promised 

solemnly that they should not want food. 

οὐ μὴν but not ; _ 2) a negative asseveration corresponding to the 

Ἷ affirmative ἢ μήν. 

vv, νύν (short and enclitical, except in the Tonic dialect used 
only in the poets,) properly synonymous with νῦν, more 
commonly, however, equivalent to οὖν now, therefore. 

πέρ (enclitic) altogether ; hence ὥςπερ properly means altogether 
as; καίπερ although indeed, in which sense πέρ alone often 
stands. 

ποτέ (enclitic) ever ; in questions it has an expression of admi- 
ration, as τές mote ἔστιν οὗτος who may this be ? 

mov (enclitic) any where; 2) perhaps. 


§ 151. VARIOUS PHRASES. 
Ἃ 


ἀλλ᾽ ἤ͵ nisi, except, but. 
ὅτε μή after a negation except, but. 
unre 7ὲ nedum. 
οὐχ Ore and μὴ ὅτι, οὐχ οἷον, οὐχ ὅσον and οὐχ ὅπως. ΑΙ! 
these phrases have, in the main, the same signification. Orig- 
inally a verb was omitted with the negation, as ov λέγω 1 say 
not that, &c. or μὴ ὑπολάβης think not that, &c. “- 
‘a) If another proposition follow with ἀλλά, all the phrases 
just given signify not only. 
b) If ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ (but not even), they all mean not only not. 
c) If the other proposition precedes, and οὐχ ὅτι, &c. fol- 
low, it means not to mention, nedum. 


* Usually written separate; but, when πότε is added, more commonly 
as one word. See § 80 Rem. 1. and § 116.7. 


͵ 


ὃ ὡ Ψ | VARIOUS PHRASES. 313 


ὅσον οὐ οἵ ὁσονού, tantuin non, nearly, alii, as τὸν μέλλοντα 
καὶ ὁσονοὺ παρόντα πόλεμον the Bide wig: δ ond only not ex- 
isting war. 

ὅσος, in ϑαυμαστὸν ὅσον, resembles the Latin mirum quantum, 
i. 6. so much that it is to be wondered at, i. e. very much. In like 
manner, it precedes or follows superlatives of quantity, as 

᾿ πλεῖστα ὅσα or 000 πλεῖστα, quamplurima, as many as pos- 


Pe, ὧν ‘tends (according to the rule in § 144. 5) for ἀντὶ éxei- 
vo &, as λαβὲ τοῦτο, av ὧν ἔδωκάς μου, take this 2 in return 
for what you gave me. It is also used for ἀντὶ τούτου ὅτε for 
that, as χάρεν σοι οἶδα, av® ὧν ἦλθες I thank thee for that 
thou camest-. In like manner, 

ne oO roperly stands for ἐπὶ τούτῳ 0, commonly, however, 

“τούτῳ oc, and since ἐπέ with the dative carries an 
HntiBation of connexion (§ 148 Rem. 4. γέφ᾽ ᾧ signifies under the 
condition that ; as λέξω cor, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ σιγήσεις 1 will tell thee, on 
condition thou keep τὲ secret. 

-ég ᾧτε is, in like manner, used for ἐπὶ τούτῳ were. It has, how- 
ever, commonly an infinitive with it; e. g. 
ἠρέϑησαν ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε Ovyygawat νόμους they were chosen on 
- the condition that they should make laws. 
éore (not ἔς τε, for it stands for ἐς ὅτε). εἶ], so long as 
οἷος, before an infinitive, so constructed that, &e. 6. σ΄. 
οἱ πρόσϑεν ὀδόντες mace ζώοις οἷοε τέμνεεν εἰσίν, οἱ δὲ 
γόμφιοι οἷοι παρὰ τούτων δεξάμενοι λεαίνειν, so con- 
structed as to cut—as recewving from them to grind. 
οὐ yao ἣν οἷος ἀπὸ παντὸς κερδοΐνεεν he was not one cal- 
culated to profit by any thing. 


268 


οἷός te (or οἵόςτε, οἱόςτε) ἐφακεὶ of persons, able; of things, © 


possible, e. g. 
οἷοόςτέ ἐστε πάντ ᾿ἀποδεῖξαι he ts able to manifest every thing. 
ἀλλ᾽ οὐχ οἷόντε τοῦτο but this is not possible. 
τἄλλα, for τὰ ἄλλα, ἡ in other respects, i. 6. for the rest, else, as éo- 
τ tiv ἄπαις, τἄλλα εὐδαιμονεῖ he is childless, but, in other re- 
spects, happy ; hence 
τά τε ἄλλα-"- with καί in the following clause, as in other things 
—80, particularly, an this ; e. 8- 
τά τὲ ἄλλα εὐδαιμονεῖ, καὶ παῖδας ἔγει κατηκόους αὑτῷ as 
in other things he is prosperous, so particularly in having 
dutiful children. (Compare καί and τέ in the preceding 
section.) 
| Hence i is formed the elliptical phrase ta te ἄλλα καὶ, which 
means strictly @mong other things also; but which is to be 
translated, in an especial manner. 
40 ; 


: 


, 


815 sto, SUNPAME τὰ | [5101 


κἄλλως τὲ καὶ — signifies, also. RS τ 
. τουναντίην, τὸ Asyousvov, and other ee tua phrases, see 
269 in ὃ 131 Rem. 4. 
καὶ ταῦτα and in addition to this, as τηλικαύτην ον μὰ ἐν 
κεφαλῇ ἔϑρεψας, καὶ ταῦτα ἔνοπλον hast thou had such a vir- 
gin in thy head, and that armed ? sha 
αὐτῷ, arn, ὅτο. with the omission of σύν, signify lesethien with ; 
6. g. ἀπώλοντο ut νῆξς αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν the ships were destroy- 
, ας with their crews. 
ἃ πρὸ τοῦ, better προτοῦ hefate, ὌΝΝ for πρὸ τούτφυ τοῦ 
oovou. 
van λοιποῦ (sc. χρόνου) henceforth, τὸ λοιπόν, or lave from 
this time forward. (Compare ᾧ 132. 5. c,) 
πολλοῦ δεῖς impersonal, ἐξ wants much thereto ; for.which i is found 
‘also πολλοῦ δέω. I am far from e. λέχειμ τοῦτο saying this. 
Very often the infinitive absolute δι § 141 Rem. 2) is used, 
᾿πολλοὺ δεῖν as it were so that w is fur from, i. e. certainly not, 
as τοῦτο yao πολλοῦ δεῖν εἴποι τὶς ἄν for no ane certainly 
would say that. 

So too, for the opposite idea, use is made: of μεκροῦ or 
ὀλίγου δεῖ, δέω, δεῖν, to express non multum abest quin, nearly ; 
as odiyov δέω εἰπεῖν ] could almost say. Ολίγου or μικροῦ is 
often found alone i in this sense. 

περὶ πολλοῦ ἐστὶ μου or περὶ πολλοῦ ποιοῦμαι or ἡγοῦμαι ! 
greatly prize, at as highly unportant to me that ; so also περὶ 
πλείονος, τεερὶ πλείστου, and, for the opposite idea, a μέ-᾿ 
κροὺυ ἃς. 
᾿ μᾶλλον δέ standing alone must always be translated or rather. 
μάλιστα μέν (in reference to the following εἰ δὲ μη) at were best 
if possible, as καταγιγνιάσκετε αὐτοῦ μάλιστα μὲν ϑάνατον, 
εἰ δὲ UN, ἀειφυγίαν, condemn him, it were best tor death, if not, 
to perpetual exile. 
ὄφελον (in writers not Attic ὄφελον) I should have ; hence it ac- 
quires an optative sense, partly alone, as μήποτ "gel ov TOLELY 
O that [ had’néver done it! partly with ὡς or with εἴϑε, εἰ γάρ, 
O that, _utinam, 6. 5. 
εἰς ἀφέλες magewet O hadst thou been present. 
εἰ yao ὥφελον ϑανεῖν O that I had died. 
ᾳμέλει heed not.; hence doubtless, certainly. 
ἔστι stands before. relatives of all kinds; thus ἔστιν ὅτε est cum 
i. 6. sometimes, amet ὃς est gut, some casi It even stands thus 
before a plural ; 6. g. 
270 καὶ ἔστεν OL αὐτῶν ἐτιτρώσκοντο and some of them were 
wounded. 
ἔστιν οἷς οὐχ οὕτως ἔδοξεν there are some, to whom it seemed 
not thus. 
, This phrase was then regarded altogether as one word, as 


‘ 


§ 151. : VARIOUS PHRASES. ὁ 315 


εἰ γὰρ ὦ τρόπος ἔστεν οἷς δυςαρεστεῖ for if the manner dis- 
please some. 


κλέπτειν δὲ ἐφῆκεν ἔστεν ἅ he permitted to steal certain things. 


οὕὔςπερ εἶδον ἔστεν ὅπου which I have somewhere seen. 
ἔστιν οὕςτινας ἀνθρώπους τεϑαυμὰκᾶς ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ : hast 
thou admired some men for their wisdom ? 
ἔστιν, ELEGTLY, ἔνεστι, πάρεστι πράττειν (with the dative of the 
person or universally) all signify a ts lawful.‘ More accu- 
rately considered, however, éveotiy refers to the physical 
possibility, τὲ is possible ; ; ἔξεστιν to the moral possibility, τέ 
5 lawful ; ἔστε is both ‘the one and the other, as is also παρ- 
_ ἔστεν, with an expression, however, of ease. 
ὡς ἔνε, in this phrase ἔνε according to ὃ 113. 2, stands for, EVEO- 


tiv it is possible ; hence with superlatives Oo ἔνε μάλιστα 
_ as much as possible. 


ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν 80 ἴο say. 
ἐν τοῖς, when these words precede a superlative, they signify 
omnium, among all, before all, &c. 
ἐν τοῖς πρώτοι παρῆσαν vi "AO nvaior the Athenians were pres- 
ent before all others. 
τοῦτο ἐγὼ ἐν τοῖς βαρύτατα av ἐνέγκαιμε 1 should feel thes 
more severely than all others. 
ἐν τὸϊς πρώτη παρεγένετο she arrived before all the others. 


‘These phrases are to be supplied by a participle, as ἐν τοῖς 


παροῦσιν" ἐν τοῖς βαρέως φέρουσιν αὐτό. 
οἱ ἀμφί or οἱ περὶ with an accusative, as οἱ ἀμφὶ" Ἄνυτον, com- 
_ monly signifies not only those with or about Anytus, but Anytis 
and his company ; οἱ ἀμφὶ Θαλῆν Thales and his school. The 
Attic writers even use this phraseology in some cases, when 
a single person only is spoken of ; but always with some un- 
certainty, whether it be one or more. 
μεταξύ among, between. This particle is placed as an adverb 
before a participle, as follows. 
μέταξυ περίπατῶν while he was walki 
μεταξὺ δειπνοῦντα ἐφόνευσεν αὐτὸν ‘he killed him while at 


ἔχειν, with an yadverb, means:-toe be ; 6. g. 

καλῶς ἔχει it is well. 
wo εἶχε as he was. 

ὑκεν τῶν oop with a genitive specification; ὃ. g. 
wg εἶχε μορφῆς Cin m person). 
mS ταχοῦσ εἶχον, εἵποντο they followed, with what swiftness 

their nature admitted. 

So too before prepositions ; e. g. 
ἀμφὶ τὴν κάμινον ἔχω τὰ πολλά Iam commonly at the stove. 
οἱ ἀμφὶ γῆν ἔχοντες husbandmen. 


211 


APPENDIX ΟΝ VERSIFICATION. 


272 1. To the full understanding of what follows, it is necessary 
to make a remark on the different sorts of verse iy their con- 
_ nexion with the dialects. 
All the varieties of Greek verse δενωμεῖν, originally from ‘ase 
‘three sorts, viz. 
The Epic or narrative. ᾿ 
The Lyric adapted to singing. 
The Dramatic. 

3. Each of these different sorts of poetry appropriated to itself 
in its perfection, one of the Grecian tribes. The Epic. attained 
its highest ‘cultivation among the lonians, the Lyric among the 
Dorians and Eolians, the Dramatic among the Attics. Hence it 
was, that each of these sorts of verse, in language, metre, and mu- 
sical character, united the character and more or less of the dia- 

_lect of the tribe to which it belonged, with the peculiarities which 
it possessed in its own nature. See ὃ 1. 9 seq.* 

3-. What ‘particularly deserves notice in respect to the metre 
and poetical quantity, is, that the epic dialect inclines more to 
softness, and, in order to bring the narration more easily under the 
restraints of verse, to freedom in the forms and pronunciation of 
words. On the other hand, dramatic poetry, particularly the com- 
edy, having its origin in the language of real life, confines itself 

273 more closely to received forms, and of consequence to the lan- 
| guage and pronunciation of the Attic tribe, of which few sacrifices 


* It is here to be remarked, that when we speak of dramatic and Attic 
poetry, we allude principally to the lambic and Trochaic portions of the 
drama, in which the proper dramatic dialogue is contained. ‘The remain- > 
ing portions belong more or less—the chiral songs wholly—to lyric poetry. 


- VERSIFICATION. Bee 317 


are made tothe metre. The lyric poetry in this respect ap- 
proaches nearer to the epic, from-which, as the mother of all — 
Greek poetry, it derived a considerable part of its poetical lan- 
_ guage and phraseology, uniting them, however, with the rougher 
and harsher peculiarities of the Doric dialect, and thus exempting 
the melody of the song from the monotony of narrative poetry. 


Vi erstfication. 


‘ 
4. The alternation of long and short syllables is called Rhythm. . 


Inasmuch as this alternation is ascertained by certain laws regu- 
lating it by measure, it is called Metre. And asingle portion, which 
can be embraced at once by the ear, as a metrical whole, is call- 
eda Verse. 
5. Verses are divided into smaller metrical i debian called 
Feet, of which the following are the most common. 
Spondee (— —) δούλους. 
Trochee (— wv) δοῦλος 
τ fambus' 53} Joyous | 
Pyrrhic) (υ uv) λόγος ὁ 
Dactyle  (—vv) τύπτετε 
Anapest ~ (vu —) λέγεται 
Tribrachys (uuv) λέγετε. 
Rem. 1. In the examples here used, each word constitutes a 


foot ; but verses are measured by feet, of which the poaning and 
end may be in the middle of words. 


6. In measuring feet and verses, the short syllable is assumed 
as the unit, and the long syllable is regarded as double the short. 
| Every such unit is called a time or mora; so that the Tribrachys 
_ is equally long with the Trochee and Iambus, and the Spondee 
equally long with the Dactyle and Anapest. 

_ “7. The length and shortness of the syllables is ascertained by 
the rules given in the grammar under the head of Prosody (§ 7), 
to which may be added, for metrical use, the following princi- 
ples. 

a) Position takes place even between two syllables belonging 
_ to words in immediate succession; and this without exception, 


274 


318 . ~ APPENDIX. 


when the two consonants are also divided between the words, the 
one belonging to the former and the other to the latter; as in 
λόγος καλός, γος is long by position in consequence of the #, which 


follows it. In respect, however, to that position, where a short 


vowel closes a word, and the two consonants or a double conso- 
nant begin the next word, the usage fluctuates. 

b) Mutes before liquids (see under Prosody § 7. 9, 10,) pro- 
duce position in the Ionic dialect. This position, therefore, gene- 
rally lengthens the syllable in the epic language; while, on the 
other hand, a short vowel before the mute and liquid is always 
short in dramatic poetry. ; 

c) The long vowel and diphthong at the end of a word, when 
the next begins with a vowel, lose their natural length, for the 
most part, in the epic and lyric languages, and become short, ex- 
cept when the stress falls upon them, as ; 

EnAEV ἀρίστος ἐσσέταὶϊ adyos 

σοφωτξερὴ αλλων. 
In Attic poetry this case could not occur, see below, no. 8. 
Rem. 2. Ina few words, particularly i in ποιεῖν, the diphthong 


in the middle of a word before a vowel is short. See the exam- 
ple below, no. 17. | 


d) In most species of poetry the last syllable of the verse is 
common ; that is, the long syllable may be used, ‘though the foot 
require a short one, and the reverse. . 

8. With one or two exceptions, the Hiatus is wholly forbidden 


in Attic poetry.* In the other dialects, it oftener occurs, particu- 


larly before certain words.|. The long vowel, at the end of a 
word, does not constitute a hiatus in the epic language, but is 
merely made short, according to no. 7. c. 

9. In all kinds of poetry, it is common for two vowels to be 
written at length, which in scanning are to be read in one sylla- 


rT 


* See Hiatus and Crasis, § 28. 2. 

t This is particularly the case with the pronoun é, ‘ees with ἰδεῖν, & éQ-— 
γον, ἄναξ, &c. from which has been inferred, that in the ancient lan- 
guage they had a stronger breathing at the commencement, probably @ 
digamina, see ἡ 6 Rem. 2. and the appendix on the Digamma below. 


~ 


2 : : VERSIFICATION. 319 


ble, asa crasis, a contraction, or an elision ; as μὴ οὐ, and the last . 


syllables of τείχεα, πόλεως, ἸΠηληϊάδεω, &c: This is called by 
the Greek grammarians a «Συνίζησες or Συνεκᾳώνησις. 

10. In some sorts of verse, ἃ syllable sometimes remains at the 
end, when the verses haye been diyided into feet. Such a sylla- 
ble is called Catalectic. A yerse whose laws require such a sylla- 
ble 5 instead of a full foot at the end, is called a catalectic verse. If 
the syllable be regarded as superfluous, the verse is. called hyper; 
catalectic. 


The kinds of Verse. 


11. The most common kinds of verse are those which consist 
of the frequent repetition of one and the same foot ; and amohg 
these the dactylic, the iambic, the trochaic, and the anapestic 
verse are the most familiar. 

12. The best known among the dactylic verses is ‘the hexan- 
eter, of which epic or heroic poetry avails itself in unbroken suc- 
cession to the exclusion of every other kind of verse. It consists 
of five dactyles and a spondee. 

ἘΐΠῚ vt bee vei καὶ τονβηλτινο Lesa 

. Instead of either of the four first feet a spondee may be used, 
and in consequence of the last syllable of every verse being com- 
mon (agreeably to no. 7.d) a trochee may stand instead of the last 
foot; e. g. 

1 KiAv9i μευ, ᾿ “ργυροότοξ᾽, ὃς Χρύσην ἀμφιβέβηκας 
9 Kidhav ce ζαϑέην, Τενέδοιό te ige ἀνάσσεις, 

3 Σμινϑεῦ, εἴποτέ roe χαρίεντ᾽ ἐπὶ νηὸν ἔρεψα., 

4 Ἢ εἰ δὴ ποτέ τοι κατὰ πίονα μηρί ἔκηα 

5 Ταύρων 740 αἰγῶν, τόδε woe κρήηνον ἐέλδωρ' 

6 Τίσειαν “Ιαναοὶ ἐμὰ δάκρυα σοῖσι βέλεσσιν. 


tee fiat aap ape poss ἡ νοις 
" 

2 — — | — wo | — vw | — υὐ | — vo | — — 

3 — — | — οὐ | — wo | — we | — υὐ [ — 

4 — — | — οὐ] — vv | — w | — ws | — 


- 


275 


‘ 


620... APPENDIX. 


. Rem. 3. Sometimes, instead of the dactyle in the fifth place, a 
spondee is admitted, and such a verse is called Spondaic ; e/g. 
᾿ς ᾿ἰκροτάτῃ κορυφὴ πολυδείραδος Οὐλύμποιο 
276 — vv | — vv | — w | —w | —— |] — v 
or ~ > 2, 2 : ΣῊ ἃ ᾽ 
By δὲ κατ Ουλύμποιο καρηνὼν αἴξασα 


τὶ του -- --ἴ-τὐ]-- --Ἰ-- --Ἰτοῦ 
13. The dactylic. pentameter consists of two halves united by a 
. final syllable, each of which halves contains two dactyles and a 
catalectic syllable, e. g. 3 
— vv | vw | — || — ow | — ve | — 

The two first dactyles alone. may be supplied by spondees. 
The middle syllable is always long; the last, as the final sylla- 
ble, may be long or short. This sort of verse is commonly found 
in connexion with hexameter, the two sorts being used in alter- 
nately succeeding lines. A poem in this sort of verse, is called 
Ἴβλεγοι, Elegi, for which, at a later period, the name Elezia was 
used; and a maxim or inscription consisting of one such couplet 
(δίστεχον), or ἃ few, was called “Hieyeior ; 6. g. 

"Elnic ἐν ἀνθρώποισι μόνη ϑεὸς ἐσϑλὴ ἔνεστιν, 
” Ἄλλοι δ᾽ Οὐλυμπόνδ᾽ ἐκπρολιπόντες ἔβαν. 
"RQoyero μὲν Πίστις, μεγάλη ϑεὸς, ὥχετο δ᾽ ἀνδρῶν 
“Σωφροσύνη, Χαριτές τ΄, οὗ gihe, γῆν ἔλιπον. 
ἽὍρκοι δ᾽ οὐκέτι πιστοὶ ἐν ἀνθρώποισι δίκαιοι, 
Οὐδὲ ϑεοὺς οὐδεὶς ἄξεται ἀϑανάτους. 
ΐ Εὐσεβέων δ᾽ δνόῤῥῶν γένος ἔφϑιτο, οὐδὲ θέμιστας 
Οὐκέτι γιγνωσκουο᾽ οὐδὲ μὲν εὐσεβίας. 


--υὺυ] -- - Ἰ-π υυ[-τυὺυ [ἰ--πυυ[-πὸ 
- ----ἴ- τοῦ τι τουυτπουυ}ὺ 
πτπυὺυ! ——|—vv] -πουυ[ ππυὺυ | — — 
—vv]|+vvf —||— vel] —vvle 
wn et Pie i oy J 1 οἷν fee 
prod (k Revatirwag τα σευ σε f= 
—vv |—— | — vv J—vsl—vel—s 


salty lpreeee 


ἊὋ 


VERSIFICATION. , 32] 


14. The iambic, trochaic, and anapaestic verse is measured by 
 dipodes or pairs of feet, in consequence of which, those consist- 
ing of four feet, are called dimeters, and those consisting of six feet ὁ. 
are called trimeters, &c.’ On the other hand, the Latin names of 
_ quaternarius, senarius, &c. refer to the number of feet. 


15. Every iambic dipode, instead of the first Jambus, may have 277 
a Spondee ; accordingly we find, : 
tgs ee OF se gr 5 
Hence it follows, that in every iambic verse in the odd place, (in 
sede impari, 1, 3, 5, 7.) a Spondee may be found. 
16. In every foot, moreover, a long syllable may be resolved 
_ into-two short ones. Hence the Tribrachys may be used in all 
places instead of the lambus, with the exception of the last lambus 
in the verse; in the place of which only the Pyrrhich, and that in - 
virtue of the final syllable being common, is admitted. In the odd 
. places, a Dactyle or an Anapest may be used instead of the Spon- 
. dee. 
Rem. 1. In feet of four times, the Anapest may also stand in 
the even places. 


- 


. 17. Hence follows for the zambic trimeter the following scheme. 


υυυ υυῦ | uuu, υυῦ | vuu, Uv Ἂ 
vu, vu vu —, vu | vu Oe 


_The irregular feet, however, particularly the trisyllables, must _ 
not be so common, that the iambic character of the verse is ob- 
_ secured. 
‘ ΤΓλώσσης μάλεστα πανταχοῦ πειρῶ κρατεῖν" 
Ὃ καὶ γέροντε καὶ νέῳ τιμὴν φέρει, | 
Ἢ γλώσσα σιγὴν καιρίαν κεκτημένη. , 


41 


278 


800 - APPENDIX. 


Et τὸ συνεχῶς καὶ πολλὰ καὶ ταχέως λαλεῖν 
*HHy τοῦ φρονεῖν παράσημον, αἱ χελιδόνες 
᾿Αλέγοντ᾽ ἂν ἡμῶν σωφρονέστεραν πάνυ. 


SIRES COE REY, ΗΒ ἐς 


~ >? - ’ 
Πλοῦτος δὲ βάσανός ἐστὸν ἀνθρώπου τρόπων. 
- 3 Ne x > Ἁ ͵ ee a 
Ὸς ἂν εὐπορῶν γὰρ αἰσχρὰ πράττῃ πράγματας | 
Ti τοῦτον ἀπορήσαντ᾽ ἂν οὐκ οἴει ποιεῖν ; 


, > a > ’ eo 
Aono , οταν TLS OMYLOYTOS καταφρονή, 
ΕΣ 4 ’ ͵ 9 ͵ 

§2¢ ur ξυνοιδὲ πρότερον ἐπεωρκηκοτι 
Οὗτος καταφρονεῖν τῶν ϑεῶν ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ, 
Kai πρότερον ὁμόσας αὐτὸς ἐπιωρκηκέναι. 


saint, secre ἀν coronas | Op aver a ἂν min | et OP Somat 
opmace, Ὁ. me | UUU, YUU | vance τὰς Ὁ... 

onne tines ἤν. μι ῳ ὁ ᾿ sree nets pe υ --Ὁ TT pes 
— Uv, υυν | ——, vvv | Sone <ybtg hh eae 


18. Besides the senarius, the most common iambic verse, is the 


tetrameter catalecticus ; e. g. 


Ei μον γένοιτο παρϑένος καλή τε καὶ τέρεινα 
ea ee | eae | ob cara Ἀν, ἀγα | συ 
The rules and licences of this verse are in the main the same 
as those of the senarius, and the catalectic syllable is common. 
19. The trochaic dipode may have a spondee in the place of 
the second trochee, 6. ¢. 
,πτὺ, ποῦ or—u— — 
Hence it follows that in every trochaic verse, the Spondee may be 
admitted in the even places (in sede pari 2, 4, 6,8-) Besides this 
the rule also prevails here, that every long syllable may be resolv- 
ed into two short ones. The Tribrachys accordingly may stand 
: ; 


~ 


VERSIFICATION. 323 


in all places, and the Dactyle and Anapest (instead of the igus 
in the even places. 

Rem. 5. Of the four timed feet the Dactyle is also found in the 
odd places. 

20. The most common tiaaBale verse is the tetrameter catalec- 
ticus ; 6. g- | : 

ες Ἰοῦς ὁρᾷ, καὶ νοῦς anover τἄλλα κωφὰ καὶ τυφλά 


ΒΤ τυ ny eigen 3 plese 
‘fréov’ ὡς ἄνανδρον ἀκλεῶς κατϑανεῖν. diva τάδε. 979 
vuvw— vv] πο υύυυ - [|[ποὺ, -τ- πτ [ἰ| πσπτυρὺ 


21. In anapaestic verse, by uniting the shorts into a long, the 
Spondee may stand instead of the Anapaest, and by resolving the 
long again into shorts, the Dactyle may be introduced.* As an ex- 
ample, may be quoted a specimen of the tetrameter catalecticus, so 

- common in the comedians, as follows. 
"Or ἐγὼ τὰ δίκαια λέγων ἤνϑουν καὶ σωφροσύνη νενόμιεστο. 


ρου "fe ::Ξ:-: -π- σππίυὺ -- | vue 


‘ \ » - ies ~ ~>o » ~ ε ᾿ 
Φανερον μὲν ἔγωγ οἰμαν yywvar τοὺτ εἶναι πᾶσιν ὁμοίως 
- ‘ ‘ φῇ 2 μ 5 μ 3 
Ore τοὺς χρηστους τῶν ανϑρώπων εὖ πράττειν ἐστὲ δίκαιον, 
᾿᾽ 1 pac vd ΝΥ ‘ ἔν» , ’ ? uv 7 
Tous δὲ πονηροὺς καὶ τους αϑέους τουτων tavavtia δήπου. 


συ κν" | A EI το | δ τ μι ἢ, i a | ΕΣ τὸν DP 


ΠΤ te yy | Pee Der Ts | vu—,e 
SE Sal τον ἘΝ UE a i 


“Χαίρετε, δαίμονες, of AsBadevar, Βοιώτιον οὔϑαρ͵ ἀρούρας. 


ΝΣ ιν νου a4 beer 


22. That part of a foot, which receives the ictus, the.stress of 
the rhythm (the beat of the time) is called arsis or elevation. To 
denote it, the common acute accent is used (). The rest of the 
foot is called thesis or depression. The natural arszs is the long 
syllable of the foot, so that the Spondee (— —-) and the Tribra-' 
chys (u ὁ v) leave it alike uncertain where the arsis falls. The 
fundamental foot of a verse, however, (that is, the Jambus in iam- 
bic, the Dactyle in dactylic verse,) determines the grsis for all 


324 © ᾿Ξ APPENDIX. 


the other feet, which may be used as substitutes for it. The 
Spondee, accordingly, in cambic and anapaestic verse, is accented 
thus -- ++, in trechate and in dactylic, thus — --. Hence τούτου 
(without any respect to its prosaic accent),—-when it stands instead 
of an Jambus or Anapaest, must be read rovrev, when it stands 
instead of a Trochee or Dactyle, τούτου. Inasmuch, too, as the 
stress or ictus of a long syllable, in consequence of the two morae 
or times which it contains, falls on the first of them, it is to be pla- 

: ced when the said long syllable is actually resolved into two short 

ones, necessarily on the first. - : 

280 Therefore, when the Tribrachys stands for the Iambus, it is 
pronounced ως when it stands for the Trochee it is pronoun- 
ced »~ uv. The Dactyle, instead of a Spondee, with the stress 
‘on the last syllable (—- —), is to be read 4 ὦ; but the Ana- 
paest, which is substituted for the Spondee with the opposite stress 
—. --, is accented 4 u--. It is therefore necessary to read λέ- 
yevé, λέγεται, when these words stand as trochaic or dactylic 
feet, and Aeyete, λεγέται when they stand as iambic or anapaestic. 
Yet in reading, care must be taken not to consume more time in 
pronouncing the short syllable on account of the arsis, for this 
would make long syllables and so destroy the metre. 

The following are intended for examples inlaying the metri- | 
cal stress; in doing which, of course, no regard is to be had to the 
natural or grammatical accent. 


Ἂ 


Hexameter.* 

Example. 
f hai ὃ a) 
ἐργα νέων, Bovdat δὲ μέσων, ευχαὶ δὲ γερόντων 


: : ' ' 1 4 


* All the following examples of the various kinds of verse are of the 
leading or most regular scheme. 


VERSIFICATION. | 325 . 


Pentameter. . 
— vo | — vv | - |] — oe [= w | — 
. ᾿ Example. , 
μή μετρείν σχοινῳ Πέρσιδι τήν σοφεήν 


eft ft te [eu] + 


Senarius. 
' : ᾿: : - ᾿ - 
υ- υ-π-]υ-ν,ὺ-- vy, ve 
Example. 
φυσὶν ἜΝ abi por ou uae 
᾿ ᾿ Ἵ 


ταμιείον ὀνείης ἔστι βυνροτε μονή 
. ε ε ‘ 4 ᾿ 


Tambic tetrameier catalect. 


a 
a ' e i ᾽ ῃ ' 
. 


Examples. 
αλλ αὐτο πέρε του TQOTEQOS siteLy πρώτα, δίιαμαχούμαι 
' 4 


' ' 


ϑυννεία ϑέρμα κἀταφαγών καὶ ἐπιπεών αχράτον 


' ᾿ 
ματι ον 7 Soar cole γερυσῇ σεν aes 
Trochatc tetrameter catalect. 

ε ' : ! ' ’ ' ᾿ ’ 
τευ, -Ἐυ[- νυ, -Ἐυ[- υ, -ὺ hp soe 
Example. 

; ' > eo? en» 9 ’ ame. ἣν , 
TEQLOOES [A OUTWS UT avdowy βαρβαρὼν χειρούμενον 
ὑπο κα ee ee ek ς τῶ 


ἤ 7 > c? ᾿ ε t , 7 ? 
ἄλλα μὰ dv ov ῥᾳδιὼώς ovrws αν auroug δίεφυγές 
εἰπερ ἔτυχον toy μελών των Φίλοκλεούς βεβοώκοτές 


5 1 : : ‘ ’ 
—_— Us V~ uo δος Ug. en ae | ae Us πο π-αῶς-- | Vv Us uv 
3 ᾿ ‘ 1 ' 1 ᾿ 


996 == APPENDIX. 


Anapestie tetrameter catalect. 
: ‘ ἢ ' ' ' ] 
vu-,vu—fluv—vuv— υὐυξξίυυ- Jvov—, — 


- Examples. | 
add ὀλολυξάτε φαινόμενῃσίν ταῖς ἀρχαιαίσιν “ϑήναις 
καὶ ϑαύυμασταὶς καὶ πολυυμνοίς iv’ o κλείνος δήμος ενοίκευ 


' ' : : : .8 ᾿ 


RS Stalag νι Cea i ὐΘΕΟΩ 


Cesura. 


23. Cesura is properly the division of a metrical or rhythmical 
connexion, by the ending of a word. There is accordingly, 1) a 
cesura of the foot, 2) acesura of the rhythm, 3) a cesura of 
the verse, which must be carefully distinguished, as the word Ca- 

_ sura, without qualification, is applied to all three. 

282 24. The caesura of the foot, in which a word terminates in 
the middle of a foot, is the least important, and without great in- 
fluence on the verse, as the division into feet is in a great degree 
arbitrary. 

25. The caesura of the ΠΕ is that, in which the arsis falls 
on the last syllable of a word, whereby the arsis is separated 
from the thesis. Such a final syllable receives by the ictus a pe- 
culiar emphasis; so that the poets often place’a short syllable in 
this situation, which becomes long thereby, and sustains alone the 
arsis. This lengthening by caesura, as it is called, is particularly 
familiar in epic poetry, e. g. 

Τηλέμαχε  παῖον σὲ ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος ὀδόντων ; 
Avrag ἔπειτ᾽ αὐτοῖσι βέλος | ἐχεπευκὲς Eqreis.* 


* As this usage is principally observed in the epic poets, and, as in 

- hexameters, the arsis is always on the beginning of the foot, the cesura 

of the rhythm and the caesura of the foot coincide ; this has led to the er- 

roneous doctine, that the caesura of the foot lengthened the syllable. 

_ ‘With this was formerly connected another error, that of defining a cae- 

sura to be the division of a word by the measure ; which would prevent ἃ a 
monosyllable from being in caesura, as it often is. 


VERSIFICATION. | 327 


26. The caesura of the verse exists, when the termination of 
' a word falls on a place in the verse where one rhythm agreeable 
to the ear closes and another begins. The estimation of this be- 
longs to the minuter acquaintance with versification. In a more 
limited sense, by the caesura of the verse is understood such a 
caesura in certain places in the verse, one of which is necessary 
to every good verse of the kind. Reference is had to this when 
it is said of a verse, that it has no caesura. Whereupon may be 
remarked : 

a) That some kinds of verse have their caesura on a fixed 
place. Of this kind among the foregoing verses are 1) the pen- 
tameter which requires a word to end in the place marked above. 
This caesura can never be omitted. (2) The iambic, anapaestic, 
and trochaic tetrameter catalectic, which all have their natural cae- 
sura at the end of the fourth foot. This caesura may be neglect- 
ed. er 
b) Other kinds of verse have more than one place for the cae- 


sura, the choice of which is left to the poet. One, however, gen- 


erally predominates over the rest. In hexameter this is common- 
ly in the middle of the third foot, and either directly after its ar- 
$18, as 
ἥηῆνιν ἄειδε, Gea, | Πηληϊάδεω ᾿4χειλῆος 
Οὐκ ἄρα μοῦνον ἔην | ἐρίδων γένος, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ γαῖαν 
or in the middle of the thesis of a Dactyle, 6. g. 
"Ἄνδρα μοι ἔννεπε, Movoa, | πολύτροπον, ὃς μάλα πολλά. 
The first species is called the masculine or male cesura, the 
second the female or trochaic cesura. It rarely happens that both 
are absent from this third foot. Should they be wanting however, 
they are usually supplied by a cesura in the second or one in the 
fourth foot, which are generally masculine, and the verse is the 
more harmonious, if both are used. a 


ἀλλὰ νέον | συνορινόμεναι | κίνυντο φάλαγγες. 


28 


284 


328 APPENDIX. 


THE DIGAMMA.* 


In addition to the smooth and aspirated breathings, the ancient 
language had another, which remained longest among the oli- 
ans. ‘This is most commonly called, from the appearance of the 
character F, used to denote it, Digamma, that is a double 7: It 
was a true consonant, and appears to hate had the force off or v. 
It was attached to several words, which, inthe more familiar dia- 
lect, had the smooth or the rough breathing. The whole doc- 
trine, however, of the Digamma, for want of literary monuments 
remaining from the period when it was most in use, is exceeding- 
ly obscure. With respect to the application of the Digamma to 
the criticism of the text of Homer, a subject of so much note in 
modern times, the whole rests-on the following remarkable obser- 
vation. A certain number of words beginning with a vowel, among 
which the most common are the following, ov, οἷ, & idm, oixa, 
εἰπεῖν, ἄναξ, /he0g, οἶνος, οἶκος, ἔργον, ἴσος, ἕκαστος, with their 
kindred words, have a hiatus so often before them, that if these 
words be excepted, the hiatus, at present so Common in Homer, 
becomes very rare, and in most remaining cases has some parti- 
cular justification. 'The same words, in comparison with others 
beginning with a vowel, are very rarely preceded by an apostro- 


phe, and the immediately preceding long vowels and diphthongs 


are far less frequently made short, than before other vowels. The 
observation of these facts authorizes the assumption of something 


in the beginning of those words, to prevent the apostrophe and the 


shortening of the long. vowels and to remove the hiatus. Since 
even short syllables ending in a consonant, as os, ov, are often 
made long before such words—-although not in cesura—just as if 
a position existed, the conjecture has been advanced in modern 
times, that all those words in the age of Homer were possessed of 
this initial breathing f or v, of a force equivalent to a consonant, 
but had lost it before the poems of Homer, at a later period, were 
committed to writing. Inasmuch as in this interval, as well as af- 
terwards, the poems of Homer were subject to no inconsiderable 
changes and-accidents, affecting the condition of the text, itis easy - 
to account for those instances in which even these indications of 
the Digamma have disappeared from the Homeric poems. To 
which may be added, that the transition or gradual disappearance 
of the digamma may already have begun in the time of Homer, 
and several words have been pronounced sometimes with and 
sometimes without it. | 


* The,following account of the Digamma is translated from the author’s 
larger Greek Grammar, page 19, (eighth edition,) and may be regarded 
as a supplement to what is stated above § 6 Rem. 2. 


- 


GREEK GRAMMATICAL TERMS. 


«Αἰτιατική, accusative. 
Alonades, transitive. 
Se sr tag immutables, called 
also “ Yyoa. 
ωὠνυμέα, pronoun. 
Adguoros, aorist. 
-Anagéugaros, infinitive. 
“πλοῦς, positive. 
᾿“ποϑετικόν, deponent. 
᾿Απολελυμένος, positive. 
_Anoiyros, do. 
"Ad oor, article. 
‘Aovbuss, number. 

σενέκον. masculine. 
«ὔξησις, augment. : 
Αὐτοπαϑές, intransitive. 
"Agave, mutes. 
Bagus, grave. " 
B ovov, having a grave on 

the last syllable. 
Tévos, gender. 
Τενική, genitive. 
Aasvs, aspirate. ' 
Ζιάϑεσις, voice. 
Aizoovor, doubtful. 
“οτική, dative. 


> 


| Avixos, dual. 


“Eyahuors, mode. 
"ExPhiwes, elision. 
Bvegyntinn, active. 
* Eveot ὡς, present. 
᾿Ἑνικός, singular. 


᾿Επίϑετον, adjective, epithet. 


᾿Επίῤῥημα, adverb. 
EvFeia, nominative. 
42 


Εὐκτική, optative. 

᾿Εφελκυστιεκόν, attracted, (e.g- fi- 
nal » before a vowel. ) 

“Huigpava, semi-vowels, i.e. the 
liquids, and o. 

Θέμα, theme. 

Gerinor, simple, positive: 

Θηλυκόν, feminine. 

Αλητική, yocative. 

Kiivewy, to decline. 

Αλίσις, declension, conjugation. _ 

Κρᾶσις, ¢ crasis. 

Κύριον ὄνομα, proper name. 

Méhicov, future. 

Μέλλων pet ὀλίγον, paulo-post- 
‘future. 

Méon στιγμή. colon. 

Méoos, middle. 

Meroyn, participle. 

"Ὄνομα, noun. | 

᾿Ονομαστική, nominative. 

‘kus, acute. 

᾿᾽Οξύτονον, oxyton. 

‘OoFn, nominative. 

᾿Οριστική, indicative. 

Ουδέτερον. neuter. 

TlaOnrixr, passive. 

ΤΠαρακείμενος, perfect. 

Tlagaratexos, imperfect. 

ΠΙαροξύτονον, having an acute 
on the penultima. 

Παρῳχέμένος, past. 

Περισπώμενον, having a circum- 
flex on the last. 

Tlhaysos, oblique. 


~ 


286 


_Tooneovonopevor, having a cir- 


330 


GREEK GRAMMATICAL TERMS. 


Πληϑυντικός, plural. 
ΤΙινεῦμα, a breathing. - 
Tlooorns, quantity. 
ΤΙρόϑεσις, preposition. 
ΤΙροπαροξύτονον, having an a- 
cute on the antepenultima. 


cumflex on the penult, _ 
Ἰπροςηγορικόν, substantive. 
Hoocraxcixn, imperative. 
TTooswoia, accent. 
Πρόςωπον, person. 
ΤΙτώσις, case, 
“Ῥῆμα, verb. 
Στοιχεῖα, letters. 
Σειγμή, stop. 
Dvyxoutixov, comparative. 


“Συλλαβή, syllable. 

vida finn, syllabic (augment). 

vupwve, consonants. 

“Συναλοιφή, contraction. 

Σύνδεσμος, conjunction. 

Συνίζησις, contraction in verse. 
Teheia στιγμή, a full stop. 
Tovos, accent. 
γᾶ; liquids. 

“Ὑπερϑετιυκόν, superlative. 
᾿Ὑπερσυντελιυκός, pluperfect. 
᾿Ὑποστιγμή, comma. 
᾿Ὑποτακτική, subjunctive. 

«Φωνήεντα, vowels. 

“Χασμῳδία, hiatus. 

Xoovixn, temporal (augment). 

Χρόνος, time, tense. 


“Συζυγίας conjugation. 


Pihov, soft. 


ΟΠ RXPLANATION OF GRAMMATICAL TERMS. 


Abundans a case of the same noun used in tivo different forms. 

Anacoluthon a construction in which the end does not grammatically 
correspond with the beginning, used for brevity or emphasis. 

Anastrophe moving the Accent back. 

Aphaeresis the cutting off of one be more letters at the beginning 
of a word, as εἴβω for λείβω, ἢ for φῆ or ἔφη. 

Apocope, cutting off one or more letters at the end, as πᾶρ for παρᾶ. 

Apodosis the last part of a sentence. . 

Apposition the adding of a noun to the preceding noun, in the 
same case, for the sake of explanation, as i βασιλεύς" 
ἐμοὶ σῷ πατρί. 

Asyndeton different parts of a sentence not joined together by a 
connective particle. 

Attraction see § 142 and 144. 

Causative verbs, § 114. 1. note. 

Characteristic the letter preceding the ὦ at the endofa verb. In 
mt, *t, uv, the former letter is the characteristic. δ 91. 

Connective vowel (called also mode-vowel,) see § 87 Rem. 1. 

Correlatives, § 78. 1. § 116. 

Crasis a contraction of two vowels into a long one, § 28. 

Diaeresis the division of a diphthong in two syllables as ἀὐπνος. 
§ 15. 3. §27 Rem. 3. 

Diastole and hypodiastole, see § 15. 2 “ stops and marks.” 

Elision the omission of the former of two successive vowels. 

Ellipsis the omission of one or more words, as ἔν ᾿“λκεβιάδου in 
the house of Alcibiades, δώμα being understood. 

Epenthesis the insertion of a letter in the middle of a word, as 
πτόλεμος for πόλεμος. . 

Heteroclite a noun of irregular declension. 

Hiatus the concurrence of an initial with a final vowel. 


987 


288. 


992 . GRAMMATICAL TERMS. 


= 


Hyperbaton a construction where words are placed out of their na- 
tural order, as ἐν ἄλλοτε ἄλλῳ for ἄλλοτε ἐν ἄλλῳ another tame 
in anather. 

Metaplasm the name given to a noun, that forms its cases from an 
obsolete nominative. ἡ . 

Metathesis transposition of letters, see § 19 Rem. 2. 

Paragoge adding a letter at the end, as évé for ἐν. 

Prosthesis addition of one or more letters at the beginning of a 
word, as σμύκρός for μικρός. 

Protasis, the first part of a sentence. 

Synaeresis the contraction of vowels. 

Syncope omission of one or more letters in the middle of a word. 

Synizesis or synecphonesis, contraction in verse. 

Tmesis separetne of the preposition of a compannd verb from its 
verb, as ἀπ᾿ ὧν ἔδοντο Ionic for ἀπέδοντο οὖν. ant 


- 
‘ees. eeaa 


INDEX. 


—_=—. - 
‘InTRODUCTION. 
; ; Page 
1. Of the Greek language and its Dialects in general ; 1 
PART I. ι 
: ACCIDENCE AND ETYMOLOGY. 
2, 3 Characters and Pronunciation , ᾿ ° 5—7 
4 Division of Letters, 5 : : ; 7 
5 Diphthongs.. . . Iota Subscript A : , 8 
6 Breathings . : : ᾿ς : 9 
7 Prosody . p ᾧ 3 ‘ d . 10 
8---11 Accents ξ a : ὃ . 14--0 
12 Place of the Accent ὃ : : . ° 17 
13 Change ofthe Accent. si ὁ ᾿ a 18 
14 Enclitics ἘΣ ‘ P : ᾿ x 19 - 
15 Stops and Marks | ee’ : : e ? 21 
16 Change of Letters.—Consonants ; ὃ ᾿ 21 
1. 18 Aspirates ‘ x é a 23 
19—25 Multiplication and consequent hilo of Cniiniaiias 24-27 
26 Change of Vowels é Ἶ . 5 28 
27 Pure vowels.—Contractions ὃ . : 29 
28 Hiatus and Crasis ‘ ‘ ὃ : . 31 
29 Apostrophe : . ° : . ¢ 32 
30 Of » ἐφελκυστικόν, and other final Consonants 33 
31 The parts of speech , ; , Σ P 34 
32 Nouns ; gender - ; P - 84 
33 declension ‘ ἃ ὰ " Ε 35 
384 —— 6 first declension τ ‘ . ; 37 
35 — _ second declension ° ὲ Ἴ . 4] 
s6 — contracts ὴ 5 42 
37 ---- Attic ‘ tet id 43 
38 —_ third declension, gender ; “ 44 
39—41 — inflection . j 45 
42 —— vowel before the ending : 49 
4. — examples ‘ 5 : 50 
4. -.ο.ο accusative singular . 52 


4 


994 INDEX. 


45 Nouns; third declension, vocative ὃ 
46. —— ——_—. dative plural 
4 .--.ὕ... δ syncope of nouns in no . 
48—55-—+ contracted (third) declension . Ἐ Η 
56 —— irregular declension.—Heteroclites, Metaplasm 
57 defectives and indeclinables ; 
58 Adjectives <a Pate ag - Σ 
859 in 0¢ ; ᾿ - 5 * 
60 — contracts in OVS d ὁ ὃ 5 
61 ---- in ὡς ‘ . é ὃ . 
62 — of various endings 2 ° P . 
63 --ὀ of one or two endings ὃ . . 
, — examples of declension ° . 
64 —— anomalous and defective . . - 
65 —— degrees of comparison oS ee . 
66 toa comparison of those in ug, ας, NG, etc ὄ 
67 — by twy, ἐστος. ; : 
68 —— irregular comparison ; ; ° 
69 — defective comparison ° Σ . 
70 — numerals.—Cardinal numbers ha ὁ 
58 --- - ordinals &c, . : d 
. 72—74 Pronouns ; substantive and possessive ὃ ‘ 
75 the article Ξ : a 
76 —— demonstrative , : 
77 ——  interrogative and indefinite ‘ 
78 —— correlative &c. 5 : ‘ 
79 —— other correlatives 3 ὦ . 
80 —— affixes . ; . ξ ἢ 
81 Verbs : i : ‘ , . 
82 — = syllabic augment ἢ : Η ᾿ 
85. — | temporal augment . ὃ : - 
84 .- Attic reduplication ξ : 
85 — augment as to modes and participles δ ἢ 
3 ---« in composition ᾿. 5 5 : 
87 — numbers and persons . ‘ é ° 


68 — modes and participles. 

89 — ΄ voices 

90 — _ tenses. Ρ ; Z - 3 

91 .-  characteristi¢ of the theme = = : 


101 


109 


ce ett i et ae a 


INDEX. | 335 


92 Verbs ; twofold theme P : ‘ . ‘ 109 


93,94 — formation of the tenses ΚΈΡΩΣ : . 112, 113 
95 — future active.—Attic and second future. 114—117 
96 — first and second aorist ‘ ‘ ξ ὃ . 117 
97 -- first and second perfect . ‘ : : 120 
98 -- perfect passive . ᾿Ξ: - ; Bae ΜΘ 
99 — third future (passive) . bee iS ᾿ 125 

100 --- first and second aorist passive ‘ P ᾿ 125 
100i = — ind, u,v, 9 ; 5 ᾿ Ξ . 127 
102 — verbalsin 70¢ and τέος. ἃ τ : 130 
103 — baryton . 5 , : - é 131 
— paradigm of τύπτω i Z ‘ 132—141 

aa of various verbs ; - 142—150 

ee of ἀγγέλλω ‘ : 3 151—153 

— remarks on the paradigms, dialects, &c.  . 154—157 

14 — use of different parts of the same verb &c. : 157 
— List of baryton verbs 5 ° big oe 166 

105 = — contracted verbs . : : : i 169 
— paradigm of verbs contract εν - 171—177 

— List of contract verbs > ‘ ‘ Ξ 178 

106 — inp ‘ ‘ : ὃ Ἢ . 184 
107° +— paradigm ofverbsinue . : . 187—192 
— remarks on ἵστημῦ : at Ve : 192 
19. — irregular verbs in mo, as inus χε. : 194—200 
109 -- φημί, κεῖμαι, οἶδα ᾿ ι ‘ 200 
110 --- anomaly.—Syncope and Metathesis μ . 202 
111 — anomaly from double themes δ - ες 205 
112 — otheranomalies. . . : > 206 
113. — anomaly in signification . . Ξ ὶ 208 
114. — List of anomalous verbs. ; : 210—229 
115 Particles ; : ‘ : ὦ ‘ 230 
116 — correlative ‘ ; : ᾽ ξ 232 
117 mutation of Ξ P ‘ . ὃ 935 
118 Formation of words = , ᾿ A : 236 
119 derivation by terminations.—Verbs . ᾿ 237 
— Substantives ae 239 

os —_—_ Adjectives : 245 

— Adverbs : 247 


120, 121 derivation by composition ὃ : 248—253 


990 INDEX. 


PART Il. 
SYNTAX. z 

122 General view ; ἢ fas π ΣΕ é 
- 123 The noun with adjuncts : ΤΣ ἘΠ ὰ 

124, 195 Prepositive article . : 2 . 

126 ----ὀ as demonstrative &c. ΄. . 

127 Pronouns and πᾶς Ἢ : . > 

128 Neuter adjective ὃ . ὃ Σ 

129 Noun in connexion; subject and predicate ᾽ 

130 ee oblique cases ; 

191 eee accusative . : ᾿ 

132 genitive . ‘ . 

139 ——— dative , : . 

134 Verbs; passive voice 5 : 

135 — middle voice μήν a ; ς 

136 — medial use of the aorist passive . ς 

197 — second perfect as intransitive ‘ 

138 — useofthe tenses , δ ; é 

139 — third future (passive) ; . : 

140 — modes.—Use of ei and av 

141 --- infinitive ; ἢ : 

142 τον — withasubject . . ‘ 

13 — with cases,—Altraction 


14 — construction with the relative.—Attraction 


145 -- with the participle 

146 — case absolute 5 : ὲ 

147 Particles ; adverbs ; Lee 

148 _— prepositions 

149 — negatives . Ἔα κου. : 


150 — various particles 
151 Various phrases . 


Appendix on Versification _ > : . 
— on the Digamma 


Greek grammatical terms 


Explanation of grammatical terms 


ι ‘END. 


a 


ot 
ee. 
Yk 


oe 5ὶ 
Looe | 
‘. 


7 


ας ie 


+ a 


ψ 


pe, 


THIS BOOK 15 DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
STAMPED BELOW 


AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS 


WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 


DAY AN sob Qanichi 22 ON THE SEVENTH DAY 


LD 21-100». 


Te Ὁ» 


RES te Sate eA eer pe pas aoe 
- 7 ΡΣ ΨΥ leh, ὦ χω δ I νὰ 


» 
y : ; 
. 
» 
-¥ 
-» 
a 
i‘ 
+ 2 τ 
7 » ty ἁ 
ἅ. 7 
᾿ hs 
J 
1, 
> > " 
- αι 
4 Ys 


THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 


᾿ 4 
ik 4 ἔξ Ἵ 


ached ΟΣ a Bs Some reeo pial b remnants. «Sy ag 


pA αν... 


ὧν δ. ὙΠ Ὁ ΧΩ ae 
Re J , ¥ + P24 ee OF ety ee « er eee eS ee Py rare _——, δος OE ee 
' ; σα σα eronee = eens Sse 5, τὶ πον HE δ 


ei 


ae De 


-Ὡὸ wat 
tale are ὦ τὰ 
Sees Oy με ρου," ἀν 


scar i korg Ne x. : ioe 
Boyt ere rar hig ge de 
tan ee roe a 


